GMDSS manual VOLUME 2.pdf

I n t e r n a t i o n a l T e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n U n i o n

Provisions of the TelecommunicationServices applicable or useful to stationsin the Maritime Mobile and MaritimeMobile-Satellite Services

Manualfor use by the Maritime Mobile andMaritime Mobile-Satellite Services

Volume 2

THE RADIOCOMMUNICATION SECTOR OF ITU

The role of the Radiocommunication Sector is to ensure the rational, equitable, efficientand economical use of the radio-frequency spectrum by all radiocommunicationservices, including satellite services, and carry out studies without limit of frequencyrange on the basis of which Recommendations are adopted.

The regulatory and policy functions of the Radiocommunication Sector are performedby World and Regional Radiocommunication Conferences and RadiocommunicationAssemblies supported by Study Groups.

Inquiries about radiocommunication mattersPlease contact:

ITURadiocommunication BureauPlace des NationsCH -1211 Geneva 20Switzerland

Telephone: +41 22 730 5800Fax: +41 22 730 5785E-mail: [email protected]: www.itu.int/itu-r

Placing orders for ITU publicationsPlease note that orders cannot be taken over the telephone. They should be sentby fax or e-mail.

ITUSales and Marketing DivisionPlace des NationsCH -1211 Geneva 20Switzerland

Fax: +41 22 730 5194E-mail: [email protected]

The Electronic Bookshop of ITU: www.itu.int/publications

ITU 2011

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means whatsoever,without the prior written permission of ITU.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.itu.int/itu-r


http://www.itu.int/publications

Table of Contents iii

TABLE OF CONTENTSManual for use by the maritime mobile and

maritime mobile-satellite services Page

FOREWORD ............................................................................................ 1

PART AExtracts from the Constitution and Convention of

the International Telecommunication Union

Constitution (CS) of the International Telecommunication Union

CHAPTER VI – General Provisions Relating to TelecommunicationsARTICLE 33 The Right of the Public to Use the International

Telecommunication Service ................................................. 5ARTICLE 34 Stoppage of Telecommunications ........................................ 5ARTICLE 35 Suspension of Services ......................................................... 6ARTICLE 36 Responsibility ....................................................................... 6ARTICLE 37 Secrecy of Telecommunications .......................................... 6ARTICLE 39 Notification of Infringements ............................................... 7ARTICLE 40 Priority of Telecommunications Concerning Safety of

Life ....................................................................................... 7ARTICLE 41 Priority of Government Telecommunications ...................... 7ARTICLE 42 Special Arrangements .......................................................... 8

CHAPTER VII – Special Provisions for RadioARTICLE 45 Harmful Interference ............................................................ 8ARTICLE 46 Distress Calls and Messages ................................................ 9ARTICLE 47 False or Deceptive Distress, Urgency, Safety or

Identification Signals............................................................ 9ANNEX Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Constitution, the

Convention and the Administrative Regulations of theInternational Telecommunication Union ..................................... 10

iv Maritime Manual

Page

Convention (CV) of the International Telecommunication Union

CHAPTER V – Various Provisions Related to the Operation ofTelecommunication Services

ARTICLE 36 Charges and Free Services ................................................... 12ARTICLE 38 Monetary Unit ...................................................................... 12ARTICLE 39 Intercommunication ............................................................. 13ARTICLE 40 Secret Language ................................................................... 13ANNEX Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Convention and

the Administrative Regulations of the InternationalTelecommunication Union ........................................................... 14

PART BExtracts from the Radio Regulations (RR)

(Edition of 2008)

SECTION I – Articles (Extracts)ARTICLE 1 Terms and definitions ........................................................... 23ARTICLE 2 Nomenclature ....................................................................... 44ARTICLE 3 Technical characteristics of stations ..................................... 46ARTICLE 4 Assignment and use of frequencies ...................................... 48ARTICLE 5 Frequency allocations ........................................................... 51ARTICLE 15 Interferences ......................................................................... 55ARTICLE 17 Secrecy ................................................................................ 61ARTICLE 18 Licences ................................................................................ 62ARTICLE 19 Identification of stations ....................................................... 64ARTICLE 20 Service publications and online information systems .......... 77ARTICLE 28 Radiodetermination services ................................................ 79ARTICLE 30 General provisions................................................................ 82ARTICLE 31 Frequencies for the global maritime distress and safety

system (GMDSS) ................................................................. 85

Table of Contents v

PageARTICLE 32 Operational procedures for distress communications in

the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) ... 87ARTICLE 33 Operational procedures for urgency and safety

communications in the global maritime distress andsafety system (GMDSS) ....................................................... 101

ARTICLE 34 Alerting signals in the global maritime distress and safetysystem (GMDSS) ................................................................. 111

ARTICLE 46 Authority of the master ........................................................ 112ARTICLE 47 Operator’s certificates .......................................................... 113ARTICLE 48 Personnel .............................................................................. 118ARTICLE 49 Inspection of stations ............................................................ 120ARTICLE 50 Working hours of stations .................................................... 121ARTICLE 51 Conditions to be observed in the maritime services ............. 122ARTICLE 52 Special rules relating to the use of frequencies .................... 128ARTICLE 53 Order of priority of communications.................................... 149ARTICLE 54 Selective calling ................................................................... 149ARTICLE 56 Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy ............................... 150ARTICLE 57 Radiotelephony .................................................................... 151ARTICLE 58 Charging and accounting for maritime radio-

communications ................................................................... 152

SECTION II – Appendices (Extracts)APPENDIX 1 (Rev.WRC-07) Classification of emissions and

necessary bandwidths ........................................................... 155APPENDIX 2 (Rev.WRC-03) Table of transmitter frequency tolerances 160APPENDIX 3 (Rev.WRC-03) Tables of maximum permitted power

levels for spurious or spurious domain emissions ................ 167APPENDIX 9 Report of an irregularity or infringement ............................. 179APPENDIX 10 (Rev.WRC-07) Report of harmful interference ................. 182APPENDIX 12 Special rules applicable to radiobeacons .............................. 184APPENDIX 14 (Rev.WRC-07) Phonetic alphabet and figure code ............ 186APPENDIX 15 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies for distress and safety

communications for the Global Maritime Distress andSafety System (GMDSS) ..................................................... 188

vi Maritime Manual

PageAPPENDIX 16 (Rev.WRC-07) Documents with which stations on

board ships and aircraft shall be provided ............................ 193APPENDIX 17 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies and channelling

arrangements in the high-frequency bands for themaritime mobile service ....................................................... 195

APPENDIX 18 (Rev.WRC-07) Table of transmitting frequencies inthe VHF maritime mobile band ............................................ 231

SECTION III – Resolutions (Extracts)RESOLUTION 18 (Rev.WRC-07) Relating to the procedure for

identifying and announcing the position of shipsand aircraft of States not parties to an armedconflict .................................................................... 237

RESOLUTION 205 (Rev.Mob-87) Protection of the band 406-406.1 MHz allocated to the mobile-satelliteservice ..................................................................... 239

RESOLUTION 207 (Rev.WRC-03) Measures to addressunauthorized use of and interference tofrequencies in the bands allocated to themaritime mobile service and to the aeronauticalmobile (R) service .................................................. 241

RESOLUTION 331 (Rev.WRC-07) Transition to the GlobalMaritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) ... 245

RESOLUTION 339 (Rev.WRC-07) Coordination of NAVTEXservices ................................................................... 249

RESOLUTION 342 (Rev.WRC-2000) New technologies to provideimproved efficiency in the use of the band 156-174 MHz by stations in the maritime mobileservice ..................................................................... 250

RESOLUTION 343 (WRC-97) Maritime certification for personnelof ship stations and ship earth stations for whicha radio installation is not compulsory ..................... 253

RESOLUTION 344 (Rev.WRC-03) Management of the maritimemobile service identity numbering resource ........... 256

Table of Contents vii

PageRESOLUTION 345 (WRC-97) Operation of Global Maritime

Distress and Safety System equipment on andassignment of maritime mobile service identitiesto non-compulsory fitted vessels ............................ 259

RESOLUTION 349 (WRC-97) Operational procedures forcancelling false distress alerts in the GlobalMaritime Distress and Safety System ..................... 261

RESOLUTION 352 (WRC-03) Use of the carrier frequencies12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz for safety-relatedcalling to and from rescue coordination centres ..... 264

RESOLUTION 354 (WRC-07) Distress and safety radiotelephonyprocedures for 2 182 kHz ....................................... 266

SECTION IV – ITU-R Recommendations incorporatedby reference (Extracts)

Rec. ITU-R M.489-2 Technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephoneequipment operating in the maritime mobileservice in channels spaced by 25 kHz .................... 275

Rec. ITU-R M.492-6 Operational procedures for the use of direct-printing telegraph equipment in the maritimemobile service ......................................................... 278

Rec. ITU-R M.541-9 Operational procedures for the use of digitalselective-calling equipment in the maritimemobile service ......................................................... 289

Rec. ITU-R M.1171 Radiotelephony procedures in the maritimemobile service ......................................................... 333

Rec. ITU-R M.1173 Technical characteristics of single-sidebandtransmitters used in the maritime mobile servicefor radiotelephony in the bands between1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz Region 2) and4 000 kHz and between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz .............................................................. 345

Rec. ITU-R M.1174-2 Technical characteristics of equipment used foron-board vessel communications in the bandsbetween 450 and 470 MHz ..................................... 347

viii Maritime Manual

Page

PART CExtracts from other ITU-R Recommendations

(M and SM Series)

Rec. ITU-R M.493-13 Digital selective-calling system for use in themaritime mobile service ......................................... 353

Rec. ITU-R M.585-5 Assignment and use of maritime mobile serviceidentities.................................................................. 399

Rec. ITU-R M.628-4 Technical characteristics for search and rescueradar transponders ................................................... 407

Rec. ITU-R M.689-2 International maritime VHF radiotelephonesystem with automatic facilities based on DSCsignalling format ..................................................... 421

Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2 Determination of necessary bandwidthsincluding examples for their calculation andassociated examples for the designation ofemissions ................................................................ 434

Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1 Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEX rangesand protection of the A2 global maritime distressand safety system distress watch channel ............... 444

Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1 Characteristics of VHF radio systems andequipment for the exchange of data andelectronic mail in the maritime mobile serviceRR Appendix 18 channels ...................................... 462

Table of Contents ix

Page

PART DExtracts from the International Telecommunication Regulations

(Melbourne, 1988)

ARTICLE 1 Purpose and Scope of the Regulations ................................. 475ARTICLE 2 Definitions ............................................................................ 476ARTICLE 3 International Network .......................................................... 476ARTICLE 4 International Telecommunication Services .......................... 477ARTICLE 5 Safety of Life and Priority of Telecommunications ............. 478ARTICLE 6 Charging and Accounting ..................................................... 478ARTICLE 7 Suspension of Services ......................................................... 479ARTICLE 9 Special Arrangements .......................................................... 479ARTICLE 10 Final Provisions .................................................................... 480APPENDIX 1 General Provisions Concerning Accounting ........................ 481APPENDIX 2 Additional Provisions Relating to Maritime Telecommu-

nications ............................................................................... 485

PART EExtracts from ITU-T Recommendations

ITU-T Rec. D.90 Charging, billing, international accounting andsettlement in the maritime mobile service .............. 491

ITU-T Rec. F.60 Operational provisions for the international telexservice ..................................................................... 509

ITU-T Rec. F.110 Operational provision for the maritime mobileservice ..................................................................... 516

ITU-T Rec. F.120 Ship station identification for VHF/UHF andmaritime mobile-satellite services .......................... 538

______________

Foreword 1

Foreword

1 The 2011 edition of the Volume 2 of the Manual for use by the MaritimeMobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services is published in accordance withArticle 20 (No. 20.14) of the Radio Regulations, and results from the revision of textscontained in Parts A, B, C, E and F of this Volume of the Manual extracted from otherITU publications. The contents of each Part are listed below and supplementaryinformation is given to help and inform its users.

2 This Volume, which contains provisions designed to be of use to operators inthe maritime mobile and maritime mobile-satellite services, is divided into thefollowing six main Parts:

Part A, contains extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the InternationalTelecommunication Union.

Part B, contains extracts from the Radio Regulations (RR) (Edition of 2008). This Partis divided into four Sections:

Section I – Articles (Extracts).Section II – Appendices (Extracts).Section III – Resolutions (Extracts).Section IV – ITU-R Recommendations incorporated by reference (Extracts).

Part C, contains extracts from other ITU-R Recommendations (M and SM Series):– Recommendation ITU-R M.493-13: Digital selective-calling system for use in

the maritime mobile service.– Recommendation ITU-R M.585-5: Assignment and use of maritime mobile

service identities.– Recommendation ITU-R M.628-4: Technical characteristics for search and

rescue radar transponders.– Recommendation ITU-R M.689-2: International maritime VHF radiotelephone

system with automatic facilities based on DSC signalling format.– Recommendation ITU-R SM.1138-2: Determination of necessary bandwidths

including examples for their calculation and associated examples for thedesignation of emissions.

– Recommendation ITU-R M.1467-1: Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEXranges and protection of the A2 global maritime distress and safety systemdistress watch channel.

– Recommendation ITU-R M.1842-1: Characteristics of VHF radio system andequipment for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobileservice RR Appendix 18 channels.

Part D, contains extracts from the International Telecommunications Regulations(Melbourne, 1988).

2 Maritime Manual

Part E, contains extracts from ITU-T Recommendations:

– ITU-T Recommendation D.90: Charging, billing, international accounting andsettlement in the maritime mobile service.

– ITU-T Recommendation F.60: Operational provisions for the international telexservice.

– ITU-T Recommendation F.110: Operational provisions for the maritime mobileservice.

– ITU-T Recommendation F.120: Ship station identification for VHF/UHF andmaritime mobile-satellite services

_______________

PART A

Extracts from theConstitution and Convention

of the InternationalTelecommunication Union

This Part A contains extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the InternationalTelecommunication Union adopted by the Additional Plenipotentiary Conference(Geneva, 1992) as amended by the Plenipotentiary Conferences (Kyoto, 1994,Minneapolis, 1998, Marrakesh, 2002 and Antalya, 2006), also including amendments,adopted by the Plenipotentiary Conference (Guadalajara, 2010) which will enter intoforce on 1 January 2012.

Part A – CS 5

CONSTITUTION (CS) OF THE INTERNATIONALTELECOMMUNICATION UNION

CHAPTER VI

General Provisions Relating to Telecommunications

ARTICLE 33 (CS)

The Right of the Public to Use the InternationalTelecommunication Service

179PP-98

Member States recognize the right of the public to correspond bymeans of the international service of public correspondence. The services,the charges and the safeguards shall be the same for all users in eachcategory of correspondence without any priority or preference.

ARTICLE 34 (CS)

Stoppage of Telecommunications

180PP-98

1 Member States reserve the right to stop, in accordance with theirnational law, the transmission of any private telegram which may appeardangerous to the security of the State or contrary to its laws, to public orderor to decency, provided that they immediately notify the office of origin ofthe stoppage of any such telegram or any part thereof, except when suchnotification may appear dangerous to the security of the State.

181PP-98

2 Member States also reserve the right to cut off, in accordance withtheir national law, any other private telecommunications which may appeardangerous to the security of the State or contrary to its laws, to public orderor to decency.

6 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 35 (CS)

Suspension of Services

182PP-98

Each Member State reserves the right to suspend the internationaltelecommunication service, either generally or only for certain relationsand/or for certain kinds of correspondence, outgoing, incoming or intransit, provided that it immediately notifies such action to each of theother Member States through the Secretary-General.

ARTICLE 36 (CS)

Responsibility

183PP-98

Member States accept no responsibility towards users of the inter-national telecommunication services, particularly as regards claims fordamages.

ARTICLE 37 (CS)

Secrecy of Telecommunications

184PP-98

1 Member States agree to take all possible measures, compatible withthe system of telecommunication used, with a view to ensuring the secrecyof international correspondence.

185 2 Nevertheless, they reserve the right to communicate such corre-spondence to the competent authorities in order to ensure the application oftheir national laws or the execution of international conventions to whichthey are parties.

Part A – CS 7

ARTICLE 39 (CS)

Notification of Infringements

190PP-98

In order to facilitate the application of the provisions of Article 6 ofthis Constitution, Member States undertake to inform and, as appropriate,assist one another with regard to infringements of the provisions of thisConstitution, of the Convention and of the Administrative Regulations.

ARTICLE 40 (CS)

Priority of Telecommunications ConcerningSafety of Life

191 International telecommunication services must give absolutepriority to all telecommunications concerning safety of life at sea, on land,in the air or in outer space, as well as to epidemiological telecom-munications of exceptional urgency of the World Health Organization.

ARTICLE 41 (CS)

Priority of Government Telecommunications

192 Subject to the provisions of Articles 40 and 46 of this Constitution,government telecommunications (see Annex to this Constitution,No. 1014) shall enjoy priority over other telecommunications to the extentpracticable upon specific request by the originator.

8 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 42 (CS)

Special Arrangements

193PP-98

Member States reserve for themselves, for the operating agenciesrecognized by them and for other agencies duly authorized to do so, theright to make special arrangements on telecommunication matters whichdo not concern Member States in general. Such arrangements, however,shall not be in conflict with the terms of this Constitution, of the Con-vention or of the Administrative Regulations, so far as concerns theharmful interference which their operation might cause to the radioservices of other Member States, and in general so far as concerns thetechnical harm which their operation might cause to the operation of othertelecommunication services of other Member States.

CHAPTER VII

Special Provisions for Radio

ARTICLE 45 (CS)

Harmful Interference

197PP-98

1 All stations, whatever their purpose, must be established andoperated in such a manner as not to cause harmful interference to the radioservices or communications of other Member States or of recognizedoperating agencies, or of other duly authorized operating agencies whichcarry on a radio service, and which operate in accordance with theprovisions of the Radio Regulations.

198PP-98

2 Each Member State undertakes to require the operating agencieswhich it recognizes and the other operating agencies duly authorized forthis purpose to observe the provisions of No. 197 above.

Part A – CS 9

199PP-98

3 Further, the Member States recognize the necessity of taking allpracticable steps to prevent the operation of electrical apparatus andinstallations of all kinds from causing harmful interference to the radioservices or communications mentioned in No. 197 above.

ARTICLE 46 (CS)

Distress Calls and Messages

200 Radio stations shall be obliged to accept, with absolute priority,distress calls and messages regardless of their origin, to reply in the samemanner to such messages, and immediately to take such action in regardthereto as may be required.

ARTICLE 47 (CS)

False or Deceptive Distress, Urgency, Safetyor Identification Signals

201PP-98

Member States agree to take the steps required to prevent thetransmission or circulation of false or deceptive distress, urgency, safety oridentification signals, and to collaborate in locating and identifying stationsunder their jurisdiction transmitting such signals.

10 Maritime Manual

ANNEX

Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Constitution,the Convention and the Administrative Regulations

of the International Telecommunication Union

1001 For the purpose of the above instruments of the Union, the follow-ing terms shall have the meanings defined below:

1001APP-98

Member State: A State which is considered to be a Member ofthe International Telecommunication Union in application of Article 2 ofthis Constitution.

1001BPP-98

Sector Member: An entity or organization authorized in accordancewith Article 19 of the Convention to participate in the activities of a Sector.

1003 Harmful Interference: Interference which endangers the function-ing of a radionavigation service or of other safety services or seriouslydegrades, obstructs or repeatedly interrupts a radiocommunication serviceoperating in accordance with the Radio Regulations.

1007 Operating Agency: Any individual, company, corporation orgovernmental agency which operates a telecommunication installationintended for an international telecommunication service or capable ofcausing harmful interference with such a service.

1008PP-98

Recognized Operating Agency: Any operating agency, as definedabove, which operates a public correspondence or broadcasting service andupon which the obligations provided for in Article 6 of this Constitutionare imposed by the Member State in whose territory the head office of theagency is situated, or by the Member State which has authorized thisoperating agency to establish and operate a telecommunication service onits territory.

1011 International Telecommunication Service: The offering of a tele-communication capability between telecommunication offices or stationsof any nature that are in or belong to different countries.

Part A – CS 11

1014 Government Telecommunications: Telecommunications originatingwith any:

– Head of State;

– Head of government or members of a government;

– Commanders-in-Chief of military forces, land, sea or air;

– diplomatic or consular agents;

– the Secretary-General of the United Nations; Heads of the principalorgans of the United Nations;

– the International Court of Justice,

or replies to government telecommunications mentioned above.

1015 Private Telegrams: Telegrams other than government or servicetelegrams.

12 Maritime Manual

CONVENTION (CV) OF THE INTERNATIONALTELECOMMUNICATION UNION

CHAPTER V

Various Provisions Related to the Operationof Telecommunication Services

ARTICLE 36 (CV)

Charges and Free Services

496 The provisions regarding charges for telecommunications and thevarious cases in which free services are accorded are set forth in theAdministrative Regulations.

ARTICLE 38 (CV)

Monetary Unit

500PP-98

In the absence of special arrangements concluded between MemberStates, the monetary unit to be used in the composition of accounting ratesfor international telecommunication services and in the establishment ofinternational accounts shall be:– either the monetary unit of the International Monetary Fund

– or the gold franc,

both as defined in the Administrative Regulations. The provisions forapplication are contained in Appendix 1 to the International Telecommu-nication Regulations.

Part A – CV 13

ARTICLE 39 (CV)

Intercommunication

501 1 Stations performing radiocommunication in the mobile serviceshall be bound, within the limits of their normal employment, to exchangeradiocommunications reciprocally without distinction as to the radiosystem adopted by them.

502 2 Nevertheless, in order not to impede scientific progress, the provi-sions of No. 501 above shall not prevent the use of a radio system inca-pable of communicating with other systems, provided that such incapacityis due to the specific nature of such system and is not the result of devicesadopted solely with the object of preventing intercommunication.

503 3 Notwithstanding the provisions of No. 501 above, a station may beassigned to a restricted international service of telecommunication,determined by the purpose of such service, or by other circumstancesindependent of the system used.

ARTICLE 40 (CV)

Secret Language

505PP-98

2 Private telegrams in secret language may be admitted between allMember States with the exception of those which have previously notified,through the Secretary-General, that they do not admit this language forthat category of correspondence.

506PP-98

3 Member States which do not admit private telegrams in secretlanguage originating in or destined for their own territory must let thempass in transit, except in the case of suspension of service provided for inArticle 35 of the Constitution.

14 Maritime Manual

ANNEX

Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Convention andthe Administrative Regulations of the International

Telecommunication Union

For the purpose of the above instruments of the Union, the follow-ing terms shall have the meanings defined below:

1006 Service Telecommunication: A telecommunication that relates topublic international telecommunications and that is exchanged among thefollowing:

– administrations,

– recognized operating agencies, and

– the Chairman of the Council, the Secretary-General, the DeputySecretary-General, the Directors of the Bureaux, the members ofthe Radio Regulations Board, and other representatives or au-thorized officials of the Union, including those working on officialmatters outside the seat of the Union.

_______________

PART B

Extracts from the Radio Regulations (RR)(Edition of 2008)

SECTION I – ARTICLES (Volume 1 of the RR)

SECTION II – APPENDICES (Volume 2 of the RR)

SECTION III – RESOLUTIONS (Volume 3 of the RR)

SECTION IV – ITU-R RECOMMENDATIONS INCORPORATED BYREFERENCE (Volume 4 of the RR)

Part B 17

Note by the Secretariat

This revision of the Radio Regulations, complementing the Constitution and theConvention of the International Telecommunication Union, incorporates the decisionsof the World Radiocommunication Conferences of 1995 (WRC-95), 1997 (WRC-97),2000 (WRC-2000), 2003 (WRC-03) and 2007 (WRC-07). The majority of theprovisions of these Regulations entered into force as from 1 January 2009; theremaining provisions shall apply as from the special dates of application indicated inArticle 59 of the revised Radio Regulations.

In preparing the Radio Regulations, Edition of 2008, the Secretariat corrected thetypographical errors that were drawn to the attention of WRC-07 and which wereapproved by WRC-07.

This edition uses the same numbering scheme as the 2001 edition of the RadioRegulations, notably:

With respect to Article numbers, this edition follows the standard sequentialnumbering. The Article numbers are not followed by any abbreviation (such as“(WRC-97)”, “(WRC-2000)”, “(WRC-03)” or “(WRC-07)”). Consequently, anyreference to an Article, in any of the provisions of these Radio Regulations (e.g. inNo. 13.1 of Article 13), in the texts of the Appendices as contained in Volume 2 of thisedition (e.g. in § 1 of Appendix 2), in the texts of the Resolutions included in Volume 3of this edition (e.g. in Resolution 1 (Rev.WRC-97)), and in the texts of theRecommendations included in Volume 3 of this edition (e.g. in Recommendation 8), isconsidered as a reference to the text of the concerned Article which appears in thisedition, unless otherwise specified.

With respect to provision numbers in Articles, this edition continues to use compositenumbers indicating the number of the Article and the provision number within thatArticle (e.g. No. 9.2B means provision No. 2B of Article 9). The abbreviation“(WRC-07)”, “(WRC-03)”, “(WRC-2000)” or “(WRC-97)” at the end of such aprovision means that the relevant provision was modified or added by WRC-07, byWRC-03, by WRC-2000 or by WRC-97, as applicable. The absence of an abbreviationat the end of the provision means that the provision is identical with the provision of thesimplified Radio Regulations as approved by WRC-95, and whose complete text wascontained in Document 2 of WRC-97.

18 Maritime Manual

With respect to Appendix numbers, this edition follows the standard sequentialnumbering, with the addition of the appropriate abbreviation after the Appendix number(such as “(WRC-97)”, “(WRC-2000)”, “(WRC-03)” or “(WRC-07)”), whereapplicable. As a rule, any reference to an Appendix, in any of the provisions of theseRadio Regulations, in the texts of the Appendices as contained in Volume 2 of thisedition, in the texts of the Resolutions and of the Recommendations included inVolume 3 of this edition, is presented in the standard manner (e.g. “Appendix 30(Rev.WRC-07)”) if not explicitly described in the text (e.g. Appendix 4 as modified byWRC-07). In the texts of Appendices that were partially modified by WRC-07, theprovisions that were modified by WRC-07 are indicated with the abbreviation“(WRC-07)” at the end of the concerned text. If an Appendix is referenced without anyabbreviation after the Appendix number, in the texts of this edition (e.g., in No. 13.1),or without other description, such reference is considered as a reference to the text ofthe concerned Appendix which appears in this edition.

Abbreviations have generally been used for the names of world administrative radioconferences and world radiocommunication conferences. These abbreviations areshown below.

Part B 19

_______________1 The date of this conference has not been finalized.

Abbreviation Conference

WARC Mar World Administrative Radio Conference to Deal with Matters Relatingto the Maritime Mobile Service (Geneva, 1967)

WARC-71 World Administrative Radio Conference for Space Telecommuni-cations (Geneva, 1971)

WMARC-74 World Maritime Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva, 1974)WARC SAT-77 World Broadcasting-Satellite Administrative Radio Conference

(Geneva, 1977)WARC-Aer2 World Administrative Radio Conference on the Aeronautical Mobile

(R) Service (Geneva, 1978)WARC-79 World Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva, 1979)WARC Mob-83 World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services

(Geneva, 1983)WARC HFBC-84 World Administrative Radio Conference for the Planning of the HF

Bands Allocated to the Broadcasting Service (Geneva, 1984)WARC Orb-85 World Administrative Radio Conference on the Use of the

Geostationary-Satellite Orbit and the Planning of Space ServicesUtilising It (First Session – Geneva, 1985)

WARC HFBC-87 World Administrative Radio Conference for the Planning of the HFBands Allocated to the Broadcasting Service (Geneva, 1987)

WARC Mob-87 World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services(Geneva, 1987)

WARC Orb-88 World Administrative Radio Conference on the Use of theGeostationary-Satellite Orbit and the Planning of Space ServicesUtilising It (Second Session – Geneva, 1988)

WARC-92 World Administrative Radio Conference for Dealing with FrequencyAllocations in Certain Parts of the Spectrum (Malaga-Torremolinos,1992)

WRC-95 World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1995)WRC-97 World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1997)WRC-2000 World Radiocommunication Conference (Istanbul, 2000)WRC-03 World Radiocommunication Conference, (Geneva, 2003)WRC-07 World Radiocommunication Conference, (Geneva, 2007)WRC-12 World Radiocommunication Conference, 2012WRC-15 World Radiocommunication Conference, 20151

SECTION I

Articles

(Extracts)

Part B – SECTION I – RR1 23

ARTICLE 1

Terms and definitions

Introduction

1.1 For the purposes of these Regulations, the following terms shall have themeanings defined below. These terms and definitions do not, however, necessarilyapply for other purposes. Definitions identical to those contained in the Annex to theConstitution or the Annex to the Convention of the International TelecommunicationUnion (Geneva, 1992) are marked “(CS)” or “(CV)” respectively.

NOTE – If, in the text of a definition below, a term is printed in italics, this means that the termitself is defined in this Article.

Section I – General terms

1.2 administration: Any governmental department or service responsible fordischarging the obligations undertaken in the Constitution of the International Telecom-munication Union, in the Convention of the International Telecommunication Unionand in the Administrative Regulations (CS 1002).

1.3 telecommunication: Any transmission, emission or reception of signs,signals, writings, images and sounds or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, opticalor other electromagnetic systems (CS).

1.4 radio: A general term applied to the use of radio waves.

1.5 radio waves or hertzian waves: Electromagnetic waves of frequenciesarbitrarily lower than 3000 GHz, propagated in space without artificial guide.

1.6 radiocommunication: Telecommunication by means of radio waves (CS)(CV).

1.7 terrestrial radiocommunication: Any radiocommunication other thanspace radiocommunication or radio astronomy.

1.8 space radiocommunication: Any radiocommunication involving the useof one or more space stations or the use of one or more reflecting satellites or otherobjects in space.

24 Maritime Manual

1.9 radiodetermination: The determination of the position, velocity and/orother characteristics of an object, or the obtaining of information relating to theseparameters, by means of the propagation properties of radio waves.

1.10 radionavigation: Radiodetermination used for the purposes of navigation,including obstruction warning.

1.11 radiolocation: Radiodetermination used for purposes other than those ofradionavigation.

1.12 radio direction-finding: Radiodetermination using the reception of radiowaves for the purpose of determining the direction of a station or object.

1.13 radio astronomy: Astronomy based on the reception of radio waves ofcosmic origin.

1.14 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): Time scale, based on the second(SI), as defined in Recommendation ITU-R TF.460-6. (WRC-03)

For most practical purposes associated with the Radio Regulations, UTCis equivalent to mean solar time at the prime meridian (0° longitude), formerlyexpressed in GMT.

1.15 industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) applications (of radio frequencyenergy): Operation of equipment or appliances designed to generate and use locallyradio frequency energy for industrial, scientific, medical, domestic or similar purposes,excluding applications in the field of telecommunications.

Section II – Specific terms related to frequency management

1.16 allocation (of a frequency band): Entry in the Table of FrequencyAllocations of a given frequency band for the purpose of its use by one or moreterrestrial or space radiocommunication services or the radio astronomy service underspecified conditions. This term shall also be applied to the frequency band concerned.

1.17 allotment (of a radio frequency or radio frequency channel): Entry of adesignated frequency channel in an agreed plan, adopted by a competent conference,for use by one or more administrations for a terrestrial or space radiocommunicationservice in one or more identified countries or geographical areas and under specifiedconditions.


1.18 assignment (of a radio frequency or radio frequencychannel): Authorization given by an administration for a radio station to use a radiofrequency or radio frequency channel under specified conditions.

Section III – Radio services

1.19 radiocommunication service: A service as defined in this Sectioninvolving the transmission, emission and/or reception of radio waves for specifictelecommunication purposes.

In these Regulations, unless otherwise stated, any radiocommunicationservice relates to terrestrial radiocommunication.

1.20 fixed service: A radiocommunication service between specified fixedpoints.

1.21 fixed-satellite service: A radiocommunication service between earthstations at given positions, when one or more satellites are used; the given position maybe a specified fixed point or any fixed point within specified areas; in some cases thisservice includes satellite-to-satellite links, which may also be operated in the inter-satellite service; the fixed-satellite service may also include feeder links for other spaceradiocommunication services.

1.22 inter-satellite service: A radiocommunication service providing linksbetween artificial satellites.

1.23 space operation service: A radiocommunication service concernedexclusively with the operation of spacecraft, in particular space tracking, spacetelemetry and space telecommand.

These functions will normally be provided within the service in which thespace station is operating.

1.24 mobile service: A radiocommunication service between mobile and landstations, or between mobile stations (CV).

1.25 mobile-satellite service: A radiocommunication service:

– between mobile earth stations and one or more space stations, or betweenspace stations used by this service; or

– between mobile earth stations by means of one or more space stations.

This service may also include feeder links necessary for its operation.

1.26 land mobile service: A mobile service between base stations and landmobile stations, or between land mobile stations.

26 Maritime Manual

1.27 land mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in which mobileearth stations are located on land.

1.28 maritime mobile service: A mobile service between coast stations andship stations, or between ship stations, or between associated on-board communicationstations; survival craft stations and emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stationsmay also participate in this service.

1.29 maritime mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in whichmobile earth stations are located on board ships; survival craft stations and emergencyposition-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service.

1.30 port operations service: A maritime mobile service in or near a port,between coast stations and ship stations, or between ship stations, in which messagesare restricted to those relating to the operational handling, the movement and the safetyof ships and, in emergency, to the safety of persons.

Messages which are of a public correspondence nature shall be excludedfrom this service.

1.31 ship movement service: A safety service in the maritime mobile serviceother than a port operations service, between coast stations and ship stations, orbetween ship stations, in which messages are restricted to those relating to themovement of ships.

Messages which are of a public correspondence nature shall be excludedfrom this service.

1.32 aeronautical mobile service: A mobile service between aeronauticalstations and aircraft stations, or between aircraft stations, in which survival craftstations may participate; emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may alsoparticipate in this service on designated distress and emergency frequencies.

1.33 aeronautical mobile (R)* service: An aeronautical mobile servicereserved for communications relating to safety and regularity of flight, primarily alongnational or international civil air routes.

1.34 aeronautical mobile (OR)** service: An aeronautical mobile serviceintended for communications, including those relating to flight coordination, primarilyoutside national or international civil air routes.

_______________* (R): route.** (OR): off-route.


1.35 aeronautical mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in whichmobile earth stations are located on board aircraft; survival craft stations andemergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service.

1.36 aeronautical mobile-satellite (R)* service: An aeronautical mobile-satellite service reserved for communications relating to safety and regularity of flights,primarily along national or international civil air routes.

1.37 aeronautical mobile-satellite (OR)** service: An aeronautical mobile-satellite service intended for communications, including those relating to flightcoordination, primarily outside national and international civil air routes.

1.38 broadcasting service: A radiocommunication service in which thetransmissions are intended for direct reception by the general public. This service mayinclude sound transmissions, television transmissions or other types of transmission(CS).

1.39 broadcasting-satellite service: A radiocommunication service in whichsignals transmitted or retransmitted by space stations are intended for direct receptionby the general public.

In the broadcasting-satellite service, the term “direct reception” shallencompass both individual reception and community reception.

1.40 radiodetermination service: A radiocommunication service for thepurpose of radiodetermination.

1.41 radiodetermination-satellite service: A radiocommunication service forthe purpose of radiodetermination involving the use of one or more space stations.

This service may also include feeder links necessary for its own operation.

1.42 radionavigation service: A radiodetermination service for the purpose ofradionavigation.

1.43 radionavigation-satellite service: A radiodetermination-satellite serviceused for the purpose of radionavigation.


1.44 maritime radionavigation service: A radionavigation service intended forthe benefit and for the safe operation of ships.

1.45 maritime radionavigation-satellite service: A radionavigation-satelliteservice in which earth stations are located on board ships.

28 Maritime Manual

1.46 aeronautical radionavigation service: A radionavigation serviceintended for the benefit and for the safe operation of aircraft.

1.47 aeronautical radionavigation-satellite service: A radionavigation-satellite service in which earth stations are located on board aircraft.

1.48 radiolocation service: A radiodetermination service for the purpose ofradiolocation.

1.49 radiolocation-satellite service: A radiodetermination-satellite serviceused for the purpose of radiolocation.

This service may also include the feeder links necessary for its operation.

1.50 meteorological aids service: A radiocommunication service used formeteorological, including hydrological, observations and exploration.

1.51 Earth exploration-satellite service: A radiocommunication servicebetween earth stations and one or more space stations, which may include linksbetween space stations, in which:

– information relating to the characteristics of the Earth and its naturalphenomena, including data relating to the state of the environment, is obtainedfrom active sensors or passive sensors on Earth satellites;

– similar information is collected from airborne or Earth-based platforms;

– such information may be distributed to earth stations within the systemconcerned;

– platform interrogation may be included.


1.52 meteorological-satellite service: An earth exploration-satellite servicefor meteorological purposes.

1.53 standard frequency and time signal service: A radiocommunicationservice for scientific, technical and other purposes, providing the transmission ofspecified frequencies, time signals, or both, of stated high precision, intended forgeneral reception.

1.54 standard frequency and time signal-satellite service: Aradiocommunication service using space stations on earth satellites for the samepurposes as those of the standard frequency and time signal service.



1.55 space research service: A radiocommunication service in whichspacecraft or other objects in space are used for scientific or technological researchpurposes.

1.56 amateur service: A radiocommunication service for the purpose of self-training, intercommunication and technical investigations carried out by amateurs, thatis, by duly authorized persons interested in radio technique solely with a personal aimand without pecuniary interest.

1.57 amateur-satellite service: A radiocommunication service using spacestations on earth satellites for the same purposes as those of the amateur service.

1.58 radio astronomy service: A service involving the use of radio astronomy.

1.59 safety service: Any radiocommunication service used permanently ortemporarily for the safeguarding of human life and property.

1.60 special service: A radiocommunication service, not otherwise defined inthis Section, carried on exclusively for specific needs of general utility, and not open topublic correspondence.

Section IV – Radio stations and systems

1.61 station: One or more transmitters or receivers or a combination oftransmitters and receivers, including the accessory equipment, necessary at one locationfor carrying on a radiocommunication service, or the radio astronomy service.

Each station shall be classified by the service in which it operatespermanently or temporarily.

1.62 terrestrial station: A station effecting terrestrial radiocommunication.

In these Regulations, unless otherwise stated, any station is a terrestrialstation.

1.63 earth station: A station located either on the Earth's surface or within themajor portion of the Earth's atmosphere and intended for communication:

– with one or more space stations; or

– with one or more stations of the same kind by means of one or morereflecting satellites or other objects in space.

1.64 space station: A station located on an object which is beyond, is intendedto go beyond, or has been beyond, the major portion of the Earth's atmosphere.

30 Maritime Manual

1.65 survival craft station: A mobile station in the maritime mobile service orthe aeronautical mobile service intended solely for survival purposes and located onany lifeboat, life-raft or other survival equipment.

1.66 fixed station: A station in the fixed service.

1.66A high altitude platform station: A station located on an object at analtitude of 20 to 50 km and at a specified, nominal, fixed point relative to the Earth.

1.67 mobile station: A station in the mobile service intended to be used whilein motion or during halts at unspecified points.

1.68 mobile earth station: An earth station in the mobile-satellite serviceintended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points.

1.69 land station: A station in the mobile service not intended to be used whilein motion.

1.70 land earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, insome cases, in the mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point or within aspecified area on land to provide a feeder link for the mobile-satellite service.

1.71 base station: A land station in the land mobile service.

1.72 base earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, insome cases, in the land mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point orwithin a specified area on land to provide a feeder link for the land mobile-satelliteservice.

1.73 land mobile station: A mobile station in the land mobile service capableof surface movement within the geographical limits of a country or continent.

1.74 land mobile earth station: A mobile earth station in the landmobile-satellite service capable of surface movement within the geographical limits of acountry or continent.

1.75 coast station: A land station in the maritime mobile service.

1.76 coast earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, insome cases, in the maritime mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed pointon land to provide a feeder link for the maritime mobile-satellite service.

1.77 ship station: A mobile station in the maritime mobile service located onboard a vessel which is not permanently moored, other than a survival craft station.


1.78 ship earth station: A mobile earth station in the maritime mobile-satelliteservice located on board ship.

1.79 on-board communication station: A low-powered mobile station in themaritime mobile service intended for use for internal communications on board a ship,or between a ship and its lifeboats and life-rafts during lifeboat drills or operations, orfor communication within a group of vessels being towed or pushed, as well as for linehandling and mooring instructions.

1.80 port station: A coast station in the port operations service.

1.81 aeronautical station: A land station in the aeronautical mobile service.

In certain instances, an aeronautical station may be located, for example,on board ship or on a platform at sea.

1.82 aeronautical earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service,or, in some cases, in the aeronautical mobile-satellite service, located at a specifiedfixed point on land to provide a feeder link for the aeronautical mobile-satellite service.

1.83 aircraft station: A mobile station in the aeronautical mobile service,other than a survival craft station, located on board an aircraft.

1.84 aircraft earth station: A mobile earth station in the aeronautical mobile-satellite service located on board an aircraft.

1.85 broadcasting station: A station in the broadcasting service.

1.86 radiodetermination Station: A station in the radiodetermination service.

1.87 radionavigation mobile station: A station in the radionavigation serviceintended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points.

1.88 radionavigation land station: A station in the radionavigation service notintended to be used while in motion.

1.89 radiolocation mobile station: A station in the radiolocation serviceintended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points.

1.90 radiolocation land station: A station in the radiolocation service notintended to be used while in motion.

1.91 radio direction-finding station: A radiodetermination station using radiodirection-finding.

1.92 radiobeacon station: A station in the radionavigation service theemissions of which are intended to enable a mobile station to determine its bearing ordirection in relation to the radiobeacon station.

32 Maritime Manual

1.93 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon station: A station in themobile service the emissions of which are intended to facilitate search and rescueoperations.

1.94 satellite emergency position-indicating radiobeacon: An earth station inthe mobile-satellite service the emissions of which are intended to facilitate search andrescue operations.

1.95 standard frequency and time signal station: A station in the standardfrequency and time signal service.

1.96 amateur station: A station in the amateur service.

1.97 radio astronomy station: A station in the radio astronomy service.

1.98 experimental station: A station utilizing radio waves in experiments witha view to the development of science or technique.

This definition does not include amateur stations.

1.99 ship's emergency transmitter: A ship's transmitter to be used exclusivelyon a distress frequency for distress, urgency or safety purposes.

1.100 radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparison ofreference signals with radio signals reflected, or retransmitted, from the position to bedetermined.

1.101 primary radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparison ofreference signals with radio signals reflected from the position to be determined.

1.102 secondary radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparisonof reference signals with radio signals retransmitted from the position to be determined.

1.103 radar beacon (racon): A transmitter-receiver associated with a fixednavigational mark which, when triggered by a radar, automatically returns a distinctivesignal which can appear on the display of the triggering radar, providing range, bearingand identification information.

1.104 instrument landing system (ILS): A radionavigation system whichprovides aircraft with horizontal and vertical guidance just before and during landingand, at certain fixed points, indicates the distance to the reference point of landing.

1.105 instrument landing system localizer: A system of horizontal guidanceembodied in the instrument landing system which indicates the horizontal deviation ofthe aircraft from its optimum path of descent along the axis of the runway.


1.106 instrument landing system glide path: A system of vertical guidanceembodied in the instrument landing system which indicates the vertical deviation of theaircraft from its optimum path of descent.

1.107 marker beacon: A transmitter in the aeronautical radionavigation servicewhich radiates vertically a distinctive pattern for providing position information toaircraft.

1.108 radio altimeter: Radionavigation equipment, on board an aircraft orspacecraft, used to determine the height of the aircraft or the spacecraft above theEarth's surface or another surface.

1.109 radiosonde: An automatic radio transmitter in the meteorological aidsservice usually carried on an aircraft, free balloon, kite or parachute, and whichtransmits meteorological data.

1.109A adaptive system: A radiocommunication system which varies its radiocharacteristics according to channel quality.

1.110 space system: Any group of cooperating earth stations and/or spacestations employing space radiocommunication for specific purposes.

1.111 satellite system: A space system using one or more artificial earthsatellites.

1.112 satellite network: A satellite system or a part of a satellite system,consisting of only one satellite and the cooperating earth stations.

1.113 satellite link: A radio link between a transmitting earth station and areceiving earth station through one satellite.

A satellite link comprises one up-link and one down-link.

1.114 multi-satellite link: A radio link between a transmitting earth station anda receiving earth station through two or more satellites, without any intermediate earthstation.

A multi-satellite link comprises one up-link, one or more satellite-to-satellite links and one down-link.

1.115 feeder link: A radio link from an earth station at a given location to aspace station, or vice versa, conveying information for a space radiocommunicationservice other than for the fixed-satellite service. The given location may be at aspecified fixed point, or at any fixed point within specified areas.

34 Maritime Manual

Section V – Operational terms

1.116 public correspondence: Any telecommunication which the offices andstations must, by reason of their being at the disposal of the public, accept fortransmission (CS).

1.117 telegraphy1: A form of telecommunication in which the transmittedinformation is intended to be recorded on arrival as a graphic document; the transmittedinformation may sometimes be presented in an alternative form or may be stored forsubsequent use (CS 1016).

1.118 telegram: Written matter intended to be transmitted by telegraphy fordelivery to the addressee. This term also includes radiotelegrams unless otherwisespecified (CS).

In this definition the term telegraphy has the same general meaning asdefined in the Convention.

1.119 radiotelegram: A telegram, originating in or intended for a mobile stationor a mobile earth station transmitted on all or part of its route over theradiocommunication channels of the mobile service or of the mobile-satellite service.

1.120 radiotelex call: A telex call, originating in or intended for a mobilestation or a mobile earth station, transmitted on all or part of its route over theradiocommunication channels of the mobile service or the mobile-satellite service.

1.121 frequency-shift telegraphy: Telegraphy by frequency modulation inwhich the telegraph signal shifts the frequency of the carrier between predeterminedvalues.

1.122 facsimile: A form of telegraphy for the transmission of fixed images,with or without half-tones, with a view to their reproduction in a permanent form.

1.123 telephony: A form of telecommunication primarily intended for theexchange of information in the form of speech (CS 1017).

_______________1 1.117.1 A graphic document records information in a permanent form and is capable ofbeing filed and consulted; it may take the form of written or printed matter or of a fixed image.


1.124 radiotelephone call: A telephone call, originating in or intended for amobile station or a mobile earth station, transmitted on all or part of its route over theradiocommunication channels of the mobile service or of the mobile-satellite service.

1.125 simplex operation: Operating method in which transmission is madepossible alternately in each direction of a telecommunication channel, for example, bymeans of manual control2.

1.126 duplex operation: Operating method in which transmission is possiblesimultaneously in both directions of a telecommunication channel2.

1.127 semi-duplex operation: A method which is simplex operation at one endof the circuit and duplex operation at the other.2

1.128 television: A form of telecommunication for the transmission of transientimages of fixed or moving objects.

1.129 individual reception (in the broadcasting-satellite service): The receptionof emissions from a space station in the broadcasting-satellite service by simpledomestic installations and in particular those possessing small antennas.

1.130 community reception (in the broadcasting-satellite service): The receptionof emissions from a space station in the broadcasting-satellite service by receivingequipment, which in some cases may be complex and have antennas larger than thoseused for individual reception, and intended for use:

– by a group of the general public at one location; or

– through a distribution system covering a limited area.

1.131 telemetry: The use of telecommunication for automatically indicating orrecording measurements at a distance from the measuring instrument.

1.132 radiotelemetry: Telemetry by means of radio waves.

1.133 space telemetry: The use of telemetry for the transmission from a spacestation of results of measurements made in a spacecraft, including those relating to thefunctioning of the spacecraft.

1.134 telecommand: The use of telecommunication for the transmission ofsignals to initiate, modify or terminate functions of equipment at a distance.

_______________2 1.125.1, 1.126.1 and 1.127.1 In general, duplex operation and semi-duplex operationrequire two frequencies in radiocommunication; simplex operation may use either one or two.

36 Maritime Manual

1.135 space telecommand: The use of radiocommunication for the transmissionof signals to a space station to initiate, modify or terminate functions of equipment onan associated space object, including the space station.

1.136 space tracking: Determination of the orbit, velocity or instantaneousposition of an object in space by means of radiodetermination, excluding primaryradar, for the purpose of following the movement of the object.

Section VI – Characteristics of emissions and radio equipment

1.137 radiation: The outward flow of energy from any source in the form ofradio waves.

1.138 emission: Radiation produced, or the production of radiation, by a radiotransmitting station.

For example, the energy radiated by the local oscillator of a radio receiverwould not be an emission but a radiation.

1.139 class of emission: The set of characteristics of an emission, designated bystandard symbols, e.g. type of modulation of the main carrier, modulating signal, typeof information to be transmitted, and also, if appropriate, any additional signalcharacteristics.

1.140 single-sideband emission: An amplitude modulated emission with onesideband only.

1.141 full carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emissionwithout reduction of the carrier.

1.142 reduced carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emission inwhich the degree of carrier suppression enables the carrier to be reconstituted and to beused for demodulation.

1.143 suppressed carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emissionin which the carrier is virtually suppressed and not intended to be used fordemodulation.


1.144 out-of-band emission*: Emission on a frequency or frequenciesimmediately outside the necessary bandwidth which results from the modulationprocess, but excluding spurious emissions.

1.145 spurious emission*: Emission on a frequency or frequencies which areoutside the necessary bandwidth and the level of which may be reduced withoutaffecting the corresponding transmission of information. Spurious emissions includeharmonic emissions, parasitic emissions, intermodulation products and frequencyconversion products, but exclude out-of-band emissions.

1.146 unwanted emissions*: Consist of spurious emissions and out-of-bandemissions.

1.146A out-of-band domain (of an emission): The frequency range, immediatelyoutside the necessary bandwidth but excluding the spurious domain, in which out-of-band emissions generally predominate. Out-of-band emissions, defined based on theirsource, occur in the out-of-band domain and, to a lesser extent, in the spurious domain.Spurious emissions likewise may occur in the out-of-band domain as well as in thespurious domain. (WRC-03)

1.146B spurious domain (of an emission): The frequency range beyond the out-of-band domain in which spurious emissions generally predominate. (WRC-03)

1.147 assigned frequency band: The frequency band within which the emissionof a station is authorized; the width of the band equals the necessary bandwidth plustwice the absolute value of the frequency tolerance. Where space stations areconcerned, the assigned frequency band includes twice the maximum Doppler shift thatmay occur in relation to any point of the Earth’s surface.

_______________* The terms associated with the definitions given by Nos. 1.144, 1.145 and 1.146 shall beexpressed in the working languages as follows:

Numbers In French In English In Spanish

1.144 Emission hors bande Out-of-band emission Emisión fuera de banda

1.145 Rayonnement non essentiel Spurious emission Emisión no esencial

1.146 Rayonnements non désirés Unwanted emissions Emisiones no deseadas

38 Maritime Manual

1.148 assigned frequency: The centre of the frequency band assigned to astation.

1.149 characteristic frequency: A frequency which can be easily identified andmeasured in a given emission.

A carrier frequency may, for example, be designated as the characteristicfrequency.

1.150 reference frequency: A frequency having a fixed and specified positionwith respect to the assigned frequency. The displacement of this frequency with respectto the assigned frequency has the same absolute value and sign that the displacement ofthe characteristic frequency has with respect to the centre of the frequency bandoccupied by the emission.

1.151 frequency tolerance: The maximum permissible departure by the centrefrequency of the frequency band occupied by an emission from the assigned frequencyor, by the characteristic frequency of an emission from the reference frequency.

The frequency tolerance is expressed in parts in 106 or in hertz.

1.152 necessary bandwidth: For a given class of emission, the width of thefrequency band which is just sufficient to ensure the transmission of information at therate and with the quality required under specified conditions.

1.153 occupied bandwidth: The width of a frequency band such that, below thelower and above the upper frequency limits, the mean powers emitted are each equal toa specified percentage /2 of the total mean power of a given emission.

Unless otherwise specified in an ITU-R Recommendation for theappropriate class of emission, the value of /2 should be taken as 0.5%.

1.154 right-hand (clockwise) polarized wave: An elliptically- or circularly-polarized wave, in which the electric field vector, observed in any fixed plane, normalto the direction of propagation, whilst looking in the direction of propagation, rotateswith time in a right-hand or clockwise direction.

1.155 left-hand (anticlockwise) polarized wave: An elliptically- or circularly-polarized wave, in which the electric field vector, observed in any fixed plane, normalto the direction of propagation, whilst looking in the direction of propagation, rotateswith time in a left-hand or anticlockwise direction.


1.156 power: Whenever the power of a radio transmitter, etc. is referred to itshall be expressed in one of the following forms, according to the class of emission,using the arbitrary symbols indicated:

– peak envelope power (PX or pX);

– mean power (PY or pY);

– carrier power (PZ or pZ).

For different classes of emission, the relationships between peak envelopepower, mean power and carrier power, under the conditions of normal operation and ofno modulation, are contained in ITU-R Recommendations which may be used as aguide.

For use in formulae, the symbol p denotes power expressed in watts andthe symbol P denotes power expressed in decibels relative to a reference level.

1.157 peak envelope power (of a radio transmitter): The average powersupplied to the antenna transmission line by a transmitter during one radio frequencycycle at the crest of the modulation envelope taken under normal operating conditions.

1.158 mean power (of a radio transmitter): The average power supplied to theantenna transmission line by a transmitter during an interval of time sufficiently longcompared with the lowest frequency encountered in the modulation taken under normaloperating conditions.

1.159 carrier power (of a radio transmitter): The average power supplied to theantenna transmission line by a transmitter during one radio frequency cycle taken underthe condition of no modulation.

1.160 gain of an antenna: The ratio, usually expressed in decibels, of the powerrequired at the input of a loss-free reference antenna to the power supplied to the inputof the given antenna to produce, in a given direction, the same field strength or thesame power flux-density at the same distance. When not specified otherwise, the gainrefers to the direction of maximum radiation. The gain may be considered for aspecified polarization.

Depending on the choice of the reference antenna a distinction is madebetween:

a) absolute or isotropic gain (Gi), when the reference antenna is an isotropicantenna isolated in space;

b) gain relative to a half-wave dipole (Gd), when the reference antenna is ahalf-wave dipole isolated in space whose equatorial plane contains the givendirection;

40 Maritime Manual

c) gain relative to a short vertical antenna (Gv), when the reference antennais a linear conductor, much shorter than one quarter of the wavelength, normalto the surface of a perfectly conducting plane which contains the givendirection.

1.161 equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.): The product of thepower supplied to the antenna and the antenna gain in a given direction relative to anisotropic antenna (absolute or isotropic gain).

1.162 effective radiated power (e.r.p.) (in a given direction): The product of thepower supplied to the antenna and its gain relative to a half-wave dipole in a givendirection.

1.163 effective monopole radiated power (e.m.r.p.) (in a given direction): Theproduct of the power supplied to the antenna and its gain relative to a short verticalantenna in a given direction.

1.164 tropospheric scatter: The propagation of radio waves by scattering as aresult of irregularities or discontinuities in the physical properties of the troposphere.

1.165 ionospheric scatter: The propagation of radio waves by scattering as aresult of irregularities or discontinuities in the ionization of the ionosphere.

Section VII – Frequency sharing

1.166 interference: The effect of unwanted energy due to one or a combinationof emissions, radiations, or inductions upon reception in a radiocommunication system,manifested by any performance degradation, misinterpretation, or loss of informationwhich could be extracted in the absence of such unwanted energy.

1.167 permissible interference3: Observed or predicted interference whichcomplies with quantitative interference and sharing criteria contained in theseRegulations or in ITU-R Recommendations or in special agreements as provided for inthese Regulations.

1.168 accepted interference3: Interference at a higher level than that defined aspermissible interference and which has been agreed upon between two or moreadministrations without prejudice to other administrations.

_______________3 1.167.1 and 1.168.1 The terms “permissible interference” and “accepted interference” areused in the coordination of frequency assignments between administrations.


1.169 harmful interference: Interference which endangers the functioning of aradionavigation service or of other safety services or seriously degrades, obstructs, orrepeatedly interrupts a radiocommunication service operating in accordance with RadioRegulations (CS).

1.170 protection ratio (R.F.): The minimum value of the wanted-to-unwantedsignal ratio, usually expressed in decibels, at the receiver input, determined underspecified conditions such that a specified reception quality of the wanted signal isachieved at the receiver output.

1.171 coordination area: When determining the need for coordination, the areasurrounding an earth station sharing the same frequency band with terrestrial stations,or surrounding a transmitting earth station sharing the same bidirectionally allocatedfrequency band with receiving earth stations, beyond which the level of permissibleinterference will not be exceeded and coordination is therefore notrequired. (WRC-2000)

1.172 coordination contour: The line enclosing the coordination area.

1.173 coordination distance: When determining the need for coordination, thedistance on a given azimuth from an earth station sharing the same frequency bandwith terrestrial stations, or from a transmitting earth station sharing the samebidirectionally allocated frequency band with receiving earth stations, beyond whichthe level of permissible interference will not be exceeded and coordination is thereforenot required. (WRC-2000)

1.174 equivalent satellite link noise temperature: The noise temperaturereferred to the output of the receiving antenna of the earth station corresponding to theradio frequency noise power which produces the total observed noise at the output ofthe satellite link excluding noise due to interference coming from satellite links usingother satellites and from terrestrial systems.

1.175 effective boresight area (of a steerable satellite beam): An area on thesurface of the Earth within which the boresight of a steerable satellite beam is intendedto be pointed.

There may be more than one unconnected effective boresight area towhich a single steerable satellite beam is intended to be pointed.

1.176 effective antenna gain contour (of a steerable satellite beam): Anenvelope of antenna gain contours resulting from moving the boresight of a steerablesatellite beam along the limits of the effective boresight area.

42 Maritime Manual

Section VIII – Technical terms relating to space

1.177 deep space: Space at distances from the Earth equal to, or greater than,2 × 106 km.

1.178 spacecraft: A man-made vehicle which is intended to go beyond themajor portion of the Earth's atmosphere.

1.179 satellite: A body which revolves around another body of preponderantmass and which has a motion primarily and permanently determined by the force ofattraction of that other body.

1.180 active satellite: A satellite carrying a station intended to transmit orretransmit radiocommunication signals.

1.181 reflecting satellite: A satellite intended to reflect radiocommunicationsignals.

1.182 active sensor: A measuring instrument in the earth exploration-satelliteservice or in the space research service by means of which information is obtained bytransmission and reception of radio waves.

1.183 passive sensor: A measuring instrument in the earth exploration-satelliteservice or in the space research service by means of which information is obtained byreception of radio waves of natural origin.

1.184 orbit: The path, relative to a specified frame of reference, described bythe centre of mass of a satellite or other object in space subjected primarily to naturalforces, mainly the force of gravity.

1.185 inclination of an orbit (of an earth satellite): The angle determined by theplane containing the orbit and the plane of the Earth’s equator measured in degreesbetween 0º and 180º and in counter-clockwise direction from the Earth’s equatorialplane at the ascending node of the orbit. (WRC-2000)

1.186 period (of a satellite): The time elapsing between two consecutivepassages of a satellite through a characteristic point on its orbit.

1.187 altitude of the apogee or of the perigee: The altitude of the apogee orperigee above a specified reference surface serving to represent the surface of the Earth.

1.188 geosynchronous satellite: An earth satellite whose period of revolution isequal to the period of rotation of the Earth about its axis.


1.189 geostationary satellite: A geosynchronous satellite whose circular anddirect orbit lies in the plane of the Earth’s equator and which thus remains fixed relativeto the Earth; by extension, a geosynchronous satellite which remains approximatelyfixed relative to the Earth. (WRC-03)

1.190 geostationary-satellite orbit: The orbit of a geosynchronous satellitewhose circular and direct orbit lies in the plane of the Earth's equator.

1.191 steerable satellite beam: A satellite antenna beam that can be re-pointed.

44 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 2

Nomenclature

Section I – Frequency and wavelength bands

2.1 The radio spectrum shall be subdivided into nine frequency bands, whichshall be designated by progressive whole numbers in accordance with the followingtable. As the unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz), frequencies shall be expressed:

– in kilohertz (kHz), up to and including 3 000 kHz;

– in megahertz (MHz), above 3 MHz, up to and including 3 000 MHz;

– in gigahertz (GHz), above 3 GHz, up to and including 3000 GHz.

However, where adherence to these provisions would introduce seriousdifficulties, for example in connection with the notification and registration offrequencies, the lists of frequencies and related matters, reasonable departures may bemade1. (WRC-07)

_______________1 2.1.1 In the application of the Radio Regulations, the Radiocommunication Bureau uses thefollowing units:

kHz for frequencies up to 28 000 kHz inclusiveMHz for frequencies above 28 000 kHz up to 10 500 MHz inclusiveGHz for frequencies above 10 500 MHz.


2.2 In communications between administrations and the ITU, no names,symbols or abbreviations should be used for the various frequency bands other thanthose specified in No. 2.1.

Section II – Dates and times

2.3 Any date used in relation to radiocommunication shall be according to theGregorian Calendar.

2.4 If in a date the month is not indicated either in full or in an abbreviatedform, it shall be expressed in an all-numeric form with the fixed sequence of figures,two of each representing the day, month and year.

2.5 Whenever a date is used in connection with Coordinated Universal Time(UTC), this date shall be that of the prime meridian at the appropriate time, the primemeridian corresponding to zero degrees geographical longitude.

2.6 Whenever a specified time is used in international radiocommunicationactivities, UTC shall be applied, unless otherwise indicated, and it shall be presented asa four-digit group (0000-2359). The abbreviation UTC shall be used in all languages.

Section III – Designation of emissions

2.7 Emissions shall be designated according to their necessary bandwidth andtheir classification in accordance with the method described in Appendix 1.

Bandnumber Symbols

Frequency range(lower limit exclusive,upper limit inclusive)

Correspondingmetric subdivision

Metricabbreviationsfor the bands

4 VLF 3 to 30 kHz Myriametric waves B.Mam5 LF 30 to 300 kHz Kilometric waves B.km6 MF 300 to 3 000 kHz Hectometric waves B.hm7 HF 3 to 30 MHz Decametric waves B.dam8 VHF 30 to 300 MHz Metric waves B.m9 UHF 300 to 3 000 MHz Decimetric waves B.dm

10 SHF 3 to 30 GHz Centimetric waves B.cm11 EHF 30 to 300 GHz Millimetric waves B.mm12 300 to 3 000 GHz Decimillimetric waves

NOTE 1: “Band N” (N = band number) extends from 0.3 × 10N Hz to 3 × 10N Hz.NOTE 2: Prefix: k = kilo (103), M = mega (106), G = giga (109).

46 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 3

Technical characteristics of stations

3.1 The choice and performance of equipment to be used in a station and anyemissions therefrom shall satisfy the provisions of these Regulations.

3.2 Also, as far as is compatible with practical considerations, the choice oftransmitting, receiving and measuring equipment shall be based on the most recentadvances in the technique as indicated, inter alia, in ITU-R Recommendations.

3.3 Transmitting and receiving equipment intended to be used in a given partof the frequency spectrum should be designed to take into account the technicalcharacteristics of transmitting and receiving equipment likely to be employed inneighbouring and other parts of the spectrum, provided that all technically andeconomically justifiable measures have been taken to reduce the level of unwantedemissions from the latter transmitting equipment and to reduce the susceptibility tointerference of the latter receiving equipment.

3.4 To the maximum extent possible, equipment to be used in a station shouldapply signal processing methods which enable the most efficient use of the frequencyspectrum in accordance with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. These methodsinclude, inter alia, certain bandwidth expansion techniques, and in particular, inamplitude-modulation systems, the use of the single-sideband technique.

3.5 Transmitting stations shall conform to the frequency tolerances specifiedin Appendix 2.

3.6 Transmitting stations shall conform to the maximum permitted powerlevels for spurious emissions or for unwanted emissions in the spurious domainspecified in Appendix 3. (WRC-03)

3.7 Transmitting stations shall conform to the maximum permitted powerlevels for out-of-band emissions, or unwanted emissions in the out-of-band domain,specified for certain services and classes of emission in the present Regulations. In theabsence of such specified maximum permitted power levels transmitting stationsshould, to the maximum extent possible, satisfy the requirements relating to thelimitation of the out-of-band emissions, or unwanted emissions in the out-of-banddomain, specified in the most recent ITU-R Recommendations (see Resolution 27(Rev.WRC-03)*). (WRC-03)

_______________* Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution was revised by WRC-07.


3.8 Moreover, every effort should be made to keep frequency tolerances andlevels of unwanted emissions at the lowest values which the state of the technique andthe nature of the service permit.

3.9 The bandwidths of emissions also shall be such as to ensure the mostefficient utilization of the spectrum; in general this requires that bandwidths be kept atthe lowest values which the state of the technique and the nature of the service permit.Appendix 1 is provided as a guide for the determination of the necessary bandwidth.

3.10 Where bandwidth-expansion techniques are used, the minimum spectralpower density consistent with efficient spectrum utilization shall be employed.

3.11 Wherever necessary for efficient spectrum use, the receivers used by anyservice should comply as far as possible with the frequency tolerances of thetransmitters of that service, due regard being paid to the Doppler effect whereappropriate.

3.12 Receiving stations should use equipment with technical characteristicsappropriate for the class of emission concerned; in particular, selectivity should beappropriate having regard to No. 3.9 on the bandwidths of emissions.

3.13 The performance characteristics of receivers should be adequate to ensurethat they do not suffer from interference due to transmitters situated at a reasonabledistance and which operate in accordance with these Regulations.

3.14 To ensure compliance with these Regulations, administrations shallarrange for frequent checks to be made of the emissions of stations under theirjurisdiction. For this purpose, they shall use the means indicated in Article 16, ifrequired. The technique of measurements and the intervals of measurements to beemployed shall be, as far as is practicable, in accordance with the most recent ITU-RRecommendations.

3.15 The use of damped wave emissions is forbidden in all stations.

48 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 4

Assignment and use of frequencies

Section I – General rules

4.1 Member States shall endeavour to limit the number of frequencies and thespectrum used to the minimum essential to provide in a satisfactory manner thenecessary services. To that end they shall endeavour to apply the latest technicaladvances as soon as possible (CS 195).

4.2 Member States undertake that in assigning frequencies to stations whichare capable of causing harmful interference to the services rendered by the stations ofanother country, such assignments are to be made in accordance with the Table ofFrequency Allocations and other provisions of these Regulations.

4.3 Any new assignment or any change of frequency or other basiccharacteristic of an existing assignment (see Appendix 4) shall be made in such a wayas to avoid causing harmful interference to services rendered by stations usingfrequencies assigned in accordance with the Table of Frequency Allocations in thisChapter and the other provisions of these Regulations, the characteristics of whichassignments are recorded in the Master International Frequency Register.

4.4 Administrations of the Member States shall not assign to a station anyfrequency in derogation of either the Table of Frequency Allocations in this Chapter orthe other provisions of these Regulations, except on the express condition that such astation, when using such a frequency assignment, shall not cause harmful interferenceto, and shall not claim protection from harmful interference caused by, a stationoperating in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the Convention andthese Regulations.

4.5 The frequency assigned to a station of a given service shall be separatedfrom the limits of the band allocated to this service in such a way that, taking account ofthe frequency band assigned to a station, no harmful interference is caused to servicesto which frequency bands immediately adjoining are allocated.

4.6 For the purpose of resolving cases of harmful interference, the radioastronomy service shall be treated as a radiocommunication service. However,protection from services in other bands shall be afforded the radio astronomy serviceonly to the extent that such services are afforded protection from each other.


4.7 For the purpose of resolving cases of harmful interference, the spaceresearch (passive) service and the earth exploration-satellite (passive) service shall beafforded protection from different services in other bands only to the extent that thesedifferent services are protected from each other.

4.8 Where, in adjacent Regions or sub-Regions, a band of frequencies isallocated to different services of the same category (see Sections I and II of Article 5),the basic principle is the equality of right to operate. Accordingly, the stations of eachservice in one Region or sub-Region must operate so as not to cause harmfulinterference to any service of the same or higher category in the other Regions orsub-Regions. (WRC-03)

4.9 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by a station in distress,or by a station providing assistance to it, of any means of radiocommunication at itsdisposal to attract attention, make known the condition and location of the station indistress, and obtain or provide assistance.

4.10 Member States recognize that the safety aspects of radionavigation andother safety services require special measures to ensure their freedom from harmfulinterference; it is necessary therefore to take this factor into account in the assignmentand use of frequencies.

4.11 Member States recognize that among frequencies which havelong-distance propagation characteristics, those in the bands between 5 MHz and30 MHz are particularly useful for long-distance communications; they agree to makeevery possible effort to reserve these bands for such communications. Wheneverfrequencies in these bands are used for short- or medium-distance communications, theminimum power necessary shall be employed.

4.12 To reduce requirements for frequencies in the bands between 5 MHz and30 MHz and thus to prevent harmful interference to long-distanceradiocommunications, administrations are encouraged to use, whenever practicable, anyother possible means of communication.

4.13 When special circumstances make it indispensable to do so, anadministration may, as an exception to the normal methods of working authorized bythese Regulations, have recourse to the special methods of working enumerated below,on the sole condition that the characteristics of the stations still conform to thoseinserted in the Master International Frequency Register:

4.14 a) a station in the fixed service or an earth station in the fixed-satelliteservice may, under the conditions defined in Nos. 5.28 to 5.31, transmit tomobile stations on its normal frequencies;

50 Maritime Manual

4.15 b) a land station may communicate, under the conditions defined inNos. 5.28 to 5.31, with fixed stations in the fixed service or earth stations inthe fixed-satellite service or other land stations of the same category.

4.15A Transmissions to or from high altitude platform stations shall be limited tobands specifically identified in Article 5.

4.16 However, in circumstances involving the safety of life, or the safety of aship or aircraft, a land station may communicate with fixed stations or land stations ofanother category.

4.17 Any administration may assign a frequency in a band allocated to thefixed service or allocated to the fixed-satellite service to a station authorized totransmit, unilaterally, from one specified fixed point to one or more specified fixedpoints provided that such transmissions are not intended to be received directly by thegeneral public.

4.18 Any mobile station using an emission which satisfies the frequencytolerance applicable to the coast station with which it is communicating may transmiton the same frequency as the coast station on condition that the latter requests suchtransmission and that no harmful interference is caused to other stations.

4.19 In certain cases provided for in Articles 31 and 51, aircraft stations areauthorized to use frequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service forthe purpose of communicating with stations of that service (see No. 51.73). (WRC-07)

4.20 Aircraft earth stations are authorized to use frequencies in the bandsallocated to the maritime mobile-satellite service for the purpose of communicating, viathe stations of that service, with the public telegraph and telephone networks.

4.21 In exceptional cases, land mobile earth stations in the land mobile-satelliteservice may communicate with stations in the maritime mobile-satellite andaeronautical mobile-satellite services. Such operations shall comply with the relevantprovisions of the Radio Regulations relating to those services and shall be subject toagreement among administrations concerned, taking due account of No. 4.10.

4.22 Any emission capable of causing harmful interference to distress, alarm,urgency or safety communications on the international distress and emergencyfrequencies established for these purposes by these Regulations is prohibited.Supplementary distress frequencies available on less than a worldwide basis should beafforded adequate protection.


ARTICLE 5

Frequency allocations

Introduction

5.1 In all documents of the Union where the terms allocation, allotment andassignment are to be used, they shall have the meaning given them in Nos. 1.16 to 1.18,the terms used in the three working languages being as follows:

Frequencydistribution to French English Spanish

Services Attribution(attribuer)

Allocation(to allocate)

Atribución(atribuir)

Areas or countries Allotissement(allotir)

Allotment(to allot)

Adjudicación(adjudicar)

Stations Assignation(assigner)

Assignment(to assign)

Asignación(asignar)

52 Maritime Manual

Section I – Regions and areas

5.2 For the allocation of frequencies the world has been divided into threeRegions1 as shown on the following map and described in Nos. 5.3 to 5.9:

The shaded part represents the Tropical Zones as defined in Nos. 5.16 to 5.20 and 5.21.

5.3 Region 1: Region 1 includes the area limited on the east by line A(lines A, B and C are defined below) and on the west by line B, excluding any of theterritory of the Islamic Republic of Iran which lies between these limits. It also includesthe whole of the territory of Armenia, Azerbaijan, the Russian Federation, Georgia,Kazakhstan, Mongolia, Uzbekistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Turkey andUkraine and the area to the north of Russian Federation which lies between lines Aand C.

5.4 Region 2: Region 2 includes the area limited on the east by line B and onthe west by line C.

5.5 Region 3: Region 3 includes the area limited on the east by line C and onthe west by line A, except any of the territory of Armenia, Azerbaijan, the RussianFederation, Georgia, Kazakhstan, Mongolia, Uzbekistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan,Turkmenistan, Turkey and Ukraine and the area to the north of Russian Federation. It

_______________1 5.2.1 It should be noted that where the words “regions” or “regional” are without a capital“R” in these Regulations, they do not relate to the three Regions here defined for purposes offrequency allocation.


also includes that part of the territory of the Islamic Republic of Iran lying outside ofthose limits.

5.6 The lines A, B and C are defined as follows:

5.7 Line A: Line A extends from the North Pole along meridian 40° East ofGreenwich to parallel 40° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection ofmeridian 60° East and the Tropic of Cancer; thence along the meridian 60° East to theSouth Pole.

5.8 Line B: Line B extends from the North Pole along meridian 10° West ofGreenwich to its intersection with parallel 72° North; thence by great circle arc to theintersection of meridian 50° West and parallel 40° North; thence by great circle arc tothe intersection of meridian 20° West and parallel 10° South; thence along meridian 20°West to the South Pole.

5.9 Line C: Line C extends from the North Pole by great circle arc to theintersection of parallel 65° 30 North with the international boundary in Bering Strait;thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 165° East of Greenwich andparallel 50° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 170° Westand parallel 10° North; thence along parallel 10° North to its intersection with meridian120° West; thence along meridian 120° West to the South Pole.

5.10 For the purposes of these Regulations, the term “African BroadcastingArea” means:

5.11 a) African countries, parts of countries, territories and groups of territoriessituated between the parallels 40° South and 30° North;

5.12 b) islands in the Indian Ocean west of meridian 60° East of Greenwich,situated between the parallel 40° South and the great circle arc joining thepoints 45° East, 11° 30 North and 60° East, 15° North;

5.13 c) islands in the Atlantic Ocean east of line B defined in No. 5.8 of theseRegulations, situated between the parallels 40° South and 30° North.

5.14 The “European Broadcasting Area” is bounded on the west by the westernboundary of Region 1, on the east by the meridian 40° East of Greenwich and on thesouth by the parallel 30° North so as to include the northern part of Saudi Arabia andthat part of those countries bordering the Mediterranean within these limits. In addition,Armenia, Azerbaijan, Georgia and those parts of the territories of Iraq, Jordan, SyrianArab Republic, Turkey and Ukraine lying outside the above limits are included in theEuropean Broadcasting Area. (WRC-07)

54 Maritime Manual

5.15 The “European Maritime Area” is bounded to the north by a lineextending along parallel 72° North from its intersection with meridian 55° East ofGreenwich to its intersection with meridian 5° West, then along meridian 5° West to itsintersection with parallel 67° North, thence along parallel 67° North to its intersectionwith meridian 32° West; to the west by a line extending along meridian 32° West to itsintersection with parallel 30° North; to the south by a line extending along parallel 30°North to its intersection with meridian 43° East; to the east by a line extending alongmeridian 43° East to its intersection with parallel 60° North, thence along parallel 60°North to its intersection with meridian 55° East and thence along meridian 55° East toits intersection with parallel 72° North.

5.16 1) The “Tropical Zone” (see map in No. 5.2) is defined as:

5.17 a) the whole of that area in Region 2 between the Tropics of Cancer andCapricorn;

5.18 b) the whole of that area in Regions 1 and 3 contained between the parallels30° North and 35° South with the addition of:

5.19 i) The area contained between the meridians 40° East and 80° East ofGreenwich and the parallels 30° North and 40° North;

5.20 ii) that part of Libyan Arab Jamahiriya north of parallel 30° North.

5.21 2) In Region 2, the Tropical Zone may be extended to parallel 33°North, subject to special agreements between the countries concerned in that Region(see Article 6).

5.22 A sub-Region is an area consisting of two or more countries in the sameRegion.


ARTICLE 15

Interferences

Section I – Interference from Radio Stations

15.1 § 1 All stations are forbidden to carry out unnecessary transmissions, orthe transmission of superfluous signals, or the transmission of false or misleadingsignals, or the transmission of signals without identification (except as provided for inArticle 19).

15.2 § 2 Transmitting stations shall radiate only as much power as is necessaryto ensure a satisfactory service.

15.3 § 3 In order to avoid interference (see also Article 3 and No. 22.1):

15.4 a) locations of transmitting stations and, where the nature of the servicepermits, locations of receiving stations shall be selected with particular care;

15.5 b) radiation in and reception from unnecessary directions shall beminimized by taking the maximum practical advantage of the properties ofdirectional antennas whenever the nature of the service permits;

15.6 c) the choice and use of transmitters and receivers shall be in accordancewith the provisions of Article 3;

15.7 d) the conditions specified under No. 22.1 shall be fulfilled.

15.8 § 4 Special consideration shall be given to avoiding interference ondistress and safety frequencies, those related to distress and safety identified inArticle 31 and those related to safety and regularity of flight identified inAppendix 27. (WRC-07)

15.9 § 5 The class of emission to be employed by a station should be such asto achieve minimum interference and to assure efficient spectrum utilization. In generalthis requires that in selecting the class of emission to meet these objectives every effortshall be made to minimize the bandwidth occupied, taking into account the operationaland technical considerations of the service to be performed.

15.10 § 6 The out-of-band emissions of transmitting stations should not causeharmful interference to services which operate in adjacent bands in accordance withthese Regulations and which use receivers in conformity with Nos. 3.3, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13and relevant ITU-R Recommendations.

56 Maritime Manual

15.11 § 7 If, while complying with the provisions of Article 3, a station causesharmful interference through its spurious emissions, special measures shall be taken toeliminate such interference.

Section II – Interference from electrical apparatus and installations of anykind except equipment used for industrial, scientific and medical applications

15.12 § 8 Administrations shall take all practicable and necessary steps toensure that the operation of electrical apparatus or installations of any kind, includingpower and telecommunication distribution networks, but excluding equipment used forindustrial, scientific and medical applications, does not cause harmful interference to aradiocommunication service and, in particular, to a radionavigation or any other safetyservice operating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations1.

Section III – Interference from equipment used for industrial, scientificand medical applications

15.13 § 9 Administrations shall take all practicable and necessary steps toensure that radiation from equipment used for industrial, scientific and medicalapplications is minimal and that, outside the bands designated for use by thisequipment, radiation from such equipment is at a level that does not cause harmfulinterference to a radiocommunication service and, in particular, to a radionavigation orany other safety service operating in accordance with the provisions of theseRegulations1.

Section IV – Tests

15.14 § 10 1) Before authorizing tests and experiments in any station, eachadministration, in order to avoid harmful interference, shall prescribe the taking of allpossible precautions such as the choice of frequency and of time and the reduction or,in all cases where this is possible, the suppression of radiation. Any harmfulinterference resulting from tests and experiments shall be eliminated with the leastpossible delay.

15.15 2) For the identification of transmissions made during tests,adjustments or experiments, see Article 19.

_______________1 15.12.1 and 15.13.1 In this matter, administrations should be guided by the latest relevantITU-R Recommendations.


15.16 3) In the aeronautical radionavigation service, it is undesirable, forsafety reasons, to transmit the normal identification during emissions conducted tocheck or adjust equipment already in service. Unidentified emissions should howeverbe restricted to a minimum.

15.17 4) Signals for testing and adjustment shall be chosen in such amanner that no confusion will arise with a signal, abbreviation, etc., having a specialmeaning defined by these Regulations or by the International Code of Signals.

15.18 5) For testing stations in the mobile service see No. 57.9.

Section V – Reports of Infringements

15.19 § 11 Infringements of the Constitution, Convention or Radio Regulationsshall be reported to their respective administrations by the control organization, stationsor inspectors detecting them. For this purpose they shall use forms similar to thespecimen given in Appendix 9.

15.20 § 12 Representations relating to any serious infringement committed by astation shall be made to the administration of the country having jurisdiction over thestation, by the administrations which detect it.

15.21 § 13 If an administration has information of an infringement of theConvention or Radio Regulations, committed by a station over which it may exerciseauthority, it shall ascertain the facts, fix the responsibility and take the necessary action.

Section VI – Procedure in a case of harmful interference

15.22 § 14 It is essential that Member States exercise the utmost goodwill andmutual assistance in the application of the provisions of Article 45 of the Constitutionand of this Section to the settlement of problems of harmful interference.

15.23 § 15 In the settlement of these problems, due consideration shall be givento all factors involved, including the relevant technical and operating factors, such as:adjustment of frequencies, characteristics of transmitting and receiving antennas, timesharing, change of channels within multichannel transmissions.

15.24 § 16 For the purpose of this Section, the term “administration” mayinclude the centralizing office designated by the administration, in accordance withNo. 16.3.

58 Maritime Manual

15.25 § 17 Administrations shall cooperate in the detection and elimination ofharmful interference, employing where appropriate the facilities described in Article 16and the procedures detailed in this Section.

15.26 § 18 Where practicable, and subject to agreement by administrationsconcerned, the case of harmful interference may be dealt with directly by their speciallydesignated monitoring stations or by direct coordination between their operatingorganizations.

15.27 § 19 Full particulars relating to harmful interference shall, wheneverpossible, be given in the form indicated in Appendix 10.

15.28 § 20 Recognizing that transmissions on distress and safety frequencies andfrequencies used for the safety and regularity of flight (see Article 31 and Appendix 27)require absolute international protection and that the elimination of harmful interferenceto such transmissions is imperative, administrations undertake to act immediately whentheir attention is drawn to any such harmful interference. (WRC-07)

15.29 § 21 In cases of harmful interference where rapid action is required,communications between administrations shall be transmitted by the quickest meansavailable and, subject to prior authorization by the administrations concerned in suchcases, information may be exchanged directly between specially designated stations ofthe international monitoring system.

15.30 § 22 When a case of such harmful interference is reported by a receivingstation, it shall give to the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with allpossible information which will assist in determining the source and characteristics ofthe interference.

15.31 § 23 If a case of harmful interference so justifies, the administrationhaving jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing the interference shall informthe administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service isbeing interfered with, giving all possible information.

15.32 § 24 If further observations and measurements are necessary to determinethe source and characteristics of and to establish the responsibility for the harmfulinterference, the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whoseservice is being interfered with may seek the cooperation of other administrations,particularly of the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving stationexperiencing the interference, or of other organizations.


15.33 § 25 When cases of harmful interference occur as a result of emissionsfrom space stations, the administrations having jurisdiction over these interferingstations shall, upon request from the administration having jurisdiction over the stationexperiencing the interference, furnish current ephemeral data necessary to allowdetermination of the positions of the space stations when not otherwise known.

15.34 § 26 Having determined the source and characteristics of the harmfulinterference, the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whoseservice is being interfered with shall inform the administration having jurisdiction overthe interfering station, giving all useful information in order that this administrationmay take such steps as may be necessary to eliminate the interference.

15.35 § 27 On being informed that a station over which it has jurisdiction isbelieved to have been the cause of harmful interference, an administration shall, as soonas possible, acknowledge receipt of that information by the quickest means available.Such acknowledgement shall not constitute an acceptance of responsibility. (WRC-2000)

15.36 § 28 When a safety service suffers harmful interference the administrationhaving jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing the interference may alsoapproach directly the administration having jurisdiction over the interfering station. Thesame procedure may also be followed in other cases with the prior approval of theadministration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is beinginterfered with.

15.37 § 29 An administration receiving a communication to the effect that one ofits stations is causing harmful interference to a safety service shall promptly investigatethe matter and take any necessary remedial action and respond in a timelymanner. (WRC-2000)

15.38 § 30 When the service rendered by an earth station suffers harmfulinterference, the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving stationexperiencing such interference may also approach directly the administration havingjurisdiction over the interfering station.

15.39 § 31 If the harmful interference persists in spite of the action taken inaccordance with the procedures outlined above, the administration having jurisdictionover the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with may address to theadministration having jurisdiction over the interfering station a report of irregularity orinfraction in accordance with the provisions of Section V.

15.40 § 32 If there is a specialized international organization for a particularservice, reports of irregularities and of infractions relating to harmful interferencecaused or suffered by stations in this service may be addressed to such organization atthe same time as to the administration concerned.

60 Maritime Manual

15.41 § 33 1) If it is considered necessary, and particularly if the steps taken inaccordance with the procedures described above have not produced satisfactory results,the administration concerned shall forward details of the case to the Bureau for itsinformation.

15.42 2) In such a case, the administration concerned may also request theBureau to act in accordance with the provisions of Section I of Article 13; but it shallthen supply the Bureau with the full facts of the case, including all the technical andoperational details and copies of the correspondence.

15.43 § 34 1) In the case where an administration has difficulty in identifying asource of harmful interference in the HF bands and urgently wishes to seek theassistance of the Bureau, it shall promptly inform the Bureau.

15.44 2) On receipt of this information, the Bureau shall immediatelyrequest the cooperation of appropriate administrations or specially designated stationsof the international monitoring system that may be able to help in identifying the sourceof harmful interference.

15.45 3) The Bureau shall consolidate all reports received in response torequests under No. 15.44 and, using such other information as it has available, shallpromptly attempt to identify the source of harmful interference.

15.46 4) The Bureau shall thereafter forward its conclusions andrecommendations to the administration reporting the case of harmful interference.These shall also be forwarded to the administration believed to be responsible for thesource of harmful interference, together with a request for prompt action.


ARTICLE 17

Secrecy

17.1 In the application of the appropriate provisions of the Constitutionand the Convention, administrations bind themselves to take the necessary measures toprohibit and prevent:

17.2 a) the unauthorized interception of radiocommunications not intendedfor the general use of the public;

17.3 b) the divulgence of the contents, simple disclosure of the existence,publication or any use whatever, without authorization of information of anynature whatever obtained by the interception of the radiocommunicationsmentioned in No. 17.2.

62 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 18

Licences

18.1 § 1 1) No transmitting station may be established or operated by aprivate person or by any enterprise without a licence issued in an appropriate form andin conformity with the provisions of these Regulations by or on behalf of thegovernment of the country to which the station in question is subject (however, seeNos. 18.2, 18.8 and 18.11).

18.2 2) However, the government of a country may conclude with thegovernment of one or more neighbouring countries a special agreement concerning oneor several stations of its broadcasting service or of its land mobile services, operating onfrequencies above 41 MHz, situated in the territory of a neighbouring country andintended to improve national coverage. This agreement, which shall be compatible withthe provisions of the present Regulations as well as of those regional agreements towhich the countries concerned are signatories, may allow exceptions to the provisionsof No. 18.1 and shall be communicated to the Secretary-General in order that it may bebrought to the notice of administrations for their information.

18.3 3) Mobile stations which are registered in a territory or group ofterritories which does not have full responsibility for its international relations may beconsidered, in so far as the issue of licences is concerned, as subject to the authority ofthat territory or group of territories.

18.4 § 2 The holder of a licence is required to preserve the secrecy oftelecommunications, as provided in the relevant provisions of the Constitution and theConvention. Moreover, the licence shall mention, specifically or by reference, that ifthe station includes a receiver, the interception of radiocommunication correspondence,other than that which the station is authorized to receive, is forbidden, and that in caseswhere such correspondence is involuntarily received, it shall not be reproduced, norcommunicated to third parties, nor used for any purpose, and even its existence shallnot be disclosed.

18.5 § 3 To facilitate the verification of licences issued to mobile stationsand mobile earth stations, a translation of the text in one of the working languages ofthe Union shall be added, when necessary, to the text written in the national language.

18.6 § 4 1) The government which issues a licence to a mobile station or amobile earth station shall indicate therein in clear form the particulars of the station,including its name, call sign and, where appropriate, the public correspondencecategory, as well as the general characteristics of the installation.


18.7 2) For land mobile stations, including stations consisting only ofone or more receivers, a clause shall be included in the licence, specifically or byreference, under which the operation of these stations shall be forbidden in countriesother than the country in which the licence is issued, except as may be provided byspecial agreement between the governments of the countries concerned.

18.8 § 5 1) In the case of a new registration of a ship or aircraft incircumstances where delay is likely to occur in the issue of a licence by the country inwhich it is to be registered, the administration of the country from which the mobilestation or mobile earth station wishes to make its voyage or flight may, at the request ofthe operating company, issue a certificate to the effect that the station complies withthese Regulations. This certificate, drawn up in a form determined by the issuingadministration, shall give the particulars mentioned in No. 18.6 and shall be valid onlyfor the duration of the voyage or flight to the country in which the registration of theship or aircraft will be effected, or for a period of three months, whichever is less.

18.9 2) The administration issuing the certificate shall inform theadministration responsible for issuing the licence of the action taken.

18.10 3) The holder of the certificate shall comply with the provisions ofthese Regulations applicable to licence holders.

18.11 § 6 In the case of hire, lease or interchange of aircraft, theadministration having authority over the aircraft operator receiving an aircraft undersuch an arrangement may, by agreement with the administration of the country in whichthe aircraft is registered, issue a licence in conformity with that specified in No. 18.6 asa temporary substitute for the original licence.

64 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 19

Identification of stations

Section I – General provisions

19.1 § 1 All transmissions shall be capable of being identified either byidentification signals or by other means1.

19.2 § 2 1) All transmissions with false or misleading identification areprohibited.

19.3 2) Where practicable and in appropriate services, identificationsignals should be automatically transmitted in accordance with relevant ITU-RRecommendations.

19.4 3) All transmissions in the following services should, except asprovided in Nos. 19.13 to 19.15, carry identification signals:

19.5 a) amateur service;

19.6 b) broadcasting service;

19.7 c) fixed service in the bands below 28000 kHz;

19.8 d) mobile service;

19.9 e) standard frequency and time signal service.

19.10 4) All operational transmissions by radiobeacons shall carryidentification signals. However, it is recognized that, for radiobeacons and for certainother radionavigation services that normally carry identification signals, during periodsof malfunction or other non-operational service the deliberate removal of identificationsignals is an agreed means of warning users that the transmissions cannot safely be usedfor navigational purposes.

_______________1 19.1.1 In the present state of the technique, it is recognized nevertheless that thetransmission of identifying signals for certain radio systems (e.g. radiodetermination, radio relaysystems and space systems) is not always possible.


19.11 5) All transmissions by satellite emergency position-indicatingradiobeacons (EPIRBs) operating in the band 406-406.1 MHz or the band 1 645.5-1 646.5 MHz, or by EPIRBs using digital selective calling techniques, shall carryidentification signals.

19.12 6) When identification signals are transmitted they shall complywith the provisions of this Article.

19.13 7) However, the requirements for certain transmissions to carryidentification signals need not apply to:

19.14 a) survival craft stations when transmitting distress signalsautomatically;

19.15 b) emergency position-indicating radiobeacons (except for those inNo. 19.11).

19.16 § 3 In transmissions carrying identification signals a station shall beidentified by a call sign, by a maritime mobile service identity or by other recognizedmeans of identification which may be one or more of the following: name of station,location of station, operating agency, official registration mark, flight identificationnumber, selective call number or signal, selective call identification number or signal,characteristic signal, characteristic of emission or other clearly distinguishing featuresreadily recognized internationally.

19.17 § 4 For transmissions carrying identification signals, in order that stationsmay be readily identified, each station shall transmit its identification as frequently aspracticable during the course of transmissions, including those made for tests,adjustments or experiments. During such transmissions, however, identification signalsshall be transmitted at least hourly, preferably within the period from five minutesbefore to five minutes after the hour (UTC) unless to do so would cause unreasonableinterruption of traffic, in which case identification shall be given at the beginning andend of transmissions.

19.18 § 5 Identification signals shall wherever practicable be in one of thefollowing forms:

19.19 a) speech, using simple amplitude or frequency modulation;

19.20 b) international Morse code transmitted at manual speed;

19.21 c) a telegraph code compatible with conventional printing equipment;

19.22 d) any other form recommended by the Radiocommunication Sector.

19.23 § 6 To the extent possible the identification signal should be transmittedin accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations.

66 Maritime Manual

19.24 § 7 Administrations should ensure that wherever practicablesuperimposed identification methods be employed in accordance with ITU-RRecommendations.

19.25 § 8 When a number of stations work simultaneously in a common circuit,either as relay stations, or in parallel on different frequencies, each station shall, as faras practicable, transmit its own identification or those of all the stations concerned.

19.26 § 9 Administrations shall ensure, except in the cases mentioned inNos. 19.13 to 19.15, that all transmissions not carrying identification signals can beidentified by other means when they are capable of causing harmful interference to theservices of another administration operating in accordance with these Regulations.

19.27 § 10 Administrations shall, having regard to the provisions of theseRegulations relating to the notification of assignments for recording in the MasterRegister, adopt their own measures to ensure compliance with the provisions ofNo. 19.26.

19.28 § 11 Each Member State reserves the right to establish its own measuresfor identifying its stations used for national defence. However, it shall use, as far aspossible, call signs recognizable as such, and containing the distinctive characters of itsnationality.

Section II – Allocation of international series and assignment of call signs

19.28A § 11A 1) For the purpose of the supply of identification signals, a territoryor geographical area shall be understood to mean the territory within the limits ofwhich the station is located. For mobile stations, it shall be understood to mean theterritory within the limits of which the responsible administration is located. A territorywhich does not have full responsibility for its international relations shall also beconsidered as a geographical area for this purpose.

19.28B 2) In all documents of the Union where the terms allocation of callsign series and assignment of call signs are to be used, they shall be used with thefollowing meaning:

Identification means Terms used in these Regulations

International series of call signs (includingmaritime identification digits (MIDs) andselective call numbers)

Allocation to the administration of a MemberState (see definition in No. 1002 of theConstitution)

Call signs (including maritimeidentification digits (MIDs) and selectivecall numbers)

Assignment by any administration to stationsoperating in a territory or geographical area(see No. 19.28A)


19.29 § 12 1) All stations open to international public correspondence, allamateur stations, and other stations which are capable of causing harmful interferencebeyond the boundaries of the territory or geographical area in which they are located,shall have call signs from the international series allocated to its administration as givenin the Table of Allocation of International Call Sign Series in Appendix 42.

19.30 2) As the need arises, ship stations and ship earth stations to whichthe provisions of Chapter IX apply, and coast stations, coast earth stations, or othernon-shipborne stations capable of communicating with such ship stations, shall haveassigned to them maritime mobile service identities in accordance with Section VI ofthis Article. (WRC-07)

19.31 3) It is not compulsory to assign call signs from the internationalseries to stations identified by maritime mobile service identities or which are easilyidentified by other means (see No. 19.16) and whose signals of identification orcharacteristics of emission are published in international documents.

19.31A 4) Means shall be provided for uniquely identifying mobile stationsoperating in automated terrestrial or satellite communication systems for the purposesof answering distress calls, for avoiding interference and for billing. Identification ofthe mobile station by accessing a registration database is satisfactory, provided that thesystem can associate the mobile station calling number with the particular mobilestation user. (WRC-03)

19.32 § 13 Should the available call sign series in Appendix 42 be exhausted,new call sign series may be allocated according to the principles set out in Resolu-tion 13 (Rev.WRC-97) relating to the formation of call signs and the allocation of newinternational series.

19.33 § 14 Between radiocommunication conferences, the Secretary-General isauthorized to deal with questions relating to changes in the allocation of series of callsigns, on a provisional basis, and subject to confirmation by the following conference(see also No. 19.32).

19.34 § 15 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for allocating maritimeidentification digits (MIDs) to administrations and shall regularly publish informationregarding allocated MIDs.

68 Maritime Manual

19.35 § 16 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for allocating additionalmaritime identification digits (MIDs) to administrations within the limits specified,provided that it is ascertained that the possibilities offered by the MIDs allocated to anadministration will soon be exhausted despite judicious ship station identity assignmentas outlined in Section VI. (WRC-03)

19.36 § 17 Each administration has been allocated one or more maritimeidentification digit (MID) for its use. A second or subsequent MID should not berequested2 unless the previously allocated MID is more than 80% exhausted in the basiccategory of three trailing zeros and the rate of assignments is such that 90% exhaustionis foreseen. (WRC-03)

19.37 § 18 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for supplying series ofselective call numbers or signals (see Nos. 19.92 to 19.95) at the request of theadministrations concerned.

19.38 § 19 1) Each administration shall choose the call signs from theinternational series allocated or supplied to it; and shall notify this information to theSecretary-General together with the information which is to appear in Lists I, IV and V.These notifications do not include call signs assigned to amateur and experimentalstations. (WRC-07)

19.39 2) Each administration shall choose the maritime mobile serviceidentities of its stations from the maritime identification digits allocated to it and notifythis information to the Secretary-General for inclusion in the relevant lists, as providedfor in Article 20.

19.40 3) The Secretary-General shall ensure that the same call sign, thesame maritime mobile service identity, the same selective call number or the sameidentification number is not assigned more than once and that call signs which might beconfused with distress signals, or with other signals of the same nature, are notassigned.

_______________2 19.36.1 In no circumstances may an administration claim more MIDs than the totalnumber of its ship stations notified to ITU divided by 1 000, plus one. Administrations shallmake every attempt to reuse the Maritime Mobile Service Identities (MMSI) assigned fromearlier MID resources, which become redundant after ships leave their national ship registry.Such numbers should be considered for reassignment after being absent from at least twosuccessive editions of List V of the ITU service publications. Administrations seeking additionalMID resources must meet the criteria of having notified all previous assignments, in accordancewith No. 20.16. This criteria applies only to MMSIs in the basic category and to all MIDsassigned to the administration. (WRC-07)


19.41 § 20 1) When a fixed station uses more than one frequency in theinternational service, each frequency may be identified by a separate call sign usedsolely for this frequency.

19.42 2) When a broadcasting station uses more than one frequency in theinternational service, each frequency may be identified by a separate call sign usedsolely for this frequency or by some other appropriate means, such as announcing thename of the place and frequency used.

19.43 3) When a land station uses more than one frequency, eachfrequency may, if desired, be identified by a separate call sign.

19.44 4) Where practicable, coast stations should use a common call signfor each frequency series3.

Section III – Formation of call signs

19.45 § 21 1) The twenty-six letters of the alphabet, as well as digits in thecases specified below, may be used to form call signs. Accented letters are excluded.

19.46 2) However, the following combinations shall not be used as callsigns:

19.47 a) combinations which might be confused with distress signals or withother signals of a similar nature;

19.48 b) combinations in Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 that are reservedfor the abbreviations to be used in the radiocommunication services. (WRC-03)

19.50 § 22 Call signs in the international series are formed as indicated inNos. 19.51 to 19.71. The first two characters shall be two letters or a letter followed bya digit or a digit followed by a letter. The first two characters or in certain cases the firstcharacter of a call sign constitute the nationality identification4.

_______________3 19.44.1 By “frequency series” is meant a group of frequencies each of which belongs toone of the different bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz that are allocated exclusively tothe maritime mobile service.4 19.50.1 For call sign series beginning with B, F, G, I, K, M, N, R, W and 2, only the firstcharacter is required for nationality identification. In the cases of half series (i.e. when the firsttwo characters are allocated to more than one Member State), the first three characters arerequired for nationality identification. (WRC-03)

70 Maritime Manual

19.51 Land and fixed stations

19.52 § 23 1)

– two characters and one letter, or

– two characters and one letter followed by not more than three digits(other than the digits 0 and 1 in cases where they immediately followa letter).

19.53 2) However, it is recommended that, as far as possible, the callsigns of fixed stations consist of:

– two characters and one letter followed by two digits (other than thedigits 0 and 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).

19.54 Ship stations

19.55 § 24

– two characters and two letters, or

– two characters, two letters and one digit (other than the digits 0 or 1),or

– two characters (provided that the second is a letter) followed by fourdigits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediatelyfollow a letter), or

– two characters and one letter followed by four digits (other than thedigits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow aletter). (WRC-07)

19.57 Aircraft stations

19.58 § 25

– two characters and three letters.

19.59 Ship’s survival craft stations

19.60 § 26

– the call sign of the parent ship followed by two digits (other than thedigits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).

19.61 Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations

19.62 § 27

– the Morse letter B and/or the call sign of the parent ship to which theradiobeacon belongs.


19.63 Aircraft survival craft stations

19.64 § 28

– the complete call sign of the parent aircraft (see No. 19.58), followedby a single digit other than 0 or 1.

19.65 Land mobile stations

19.66 § 29

– two characters (provided that the second is a letter) followed by fourdigits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediatelyfollow a letter), or

– two characters and one or two letters followed by four digits (otherthan the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).

19.67 Amateur and experimental stations

19.68 § 30 1)

– one character (provided that it is the letter B, F, G, I, K, M, N, R orW) and a single digit (other than 0 or 1), followed by a group of notmore than four characters, the last of which shall be a letter, or

– two characters and a single digit (other than 0 or 1), followed by agroup of not more than four characters, the last of which shall be aletter.5 (WRC-03)

19.68A 1A) On special occasions, for temporary use, administrationsmay authorize use of call signs with more than the four characters referred to inNo. 19.68. (WRC-03)

19.69 2) However, the prohibition of the use of the digits 0 and 1 does notapply to amateur stations.

19.70 Stations in the space service

19.71 § 31 When call signs for stations in the space service are employed, it isrecommended that they consist of:

– two characters followed by two or three digits (other than the digits 0and 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).

_______________5 19.68.1 In the case of half series (i.e. when the first two characters are allocated to morethan one Member State), the first three characters are required for nationality identification. Insuch cases, the call sign shall consist of three characters followed by a single digit and a groupof not more than three characters, the last of which shall be a letter. (WRC-07)

72 Maritime Manual

Section IV – Identification of stations using radiotelephony

19.72 § 32 Stations using radiotelephony shall be identified as indicated inNos. 19.73 to 19.82A. (WRC-03)

19.73 § 33 1) Coast stations

– a call sign (see No. 19.52); or

– the geographical name of the place as it appears in the List of CoastStations and Special Service Stations, followed preferably by theword RADIO or by any other appropriate indication. (WRC-07)

19.74 2) Ship stations

– a call sign (see Nos. 19.55 and 19.56); or

– the official name of the ship preceded, if necessary, by the name ofthe owner on condition that there is no possible confusion withdistress, urgency and safety signals; or

– its selective call number or signal.

19.75 3) Ship’s survival craft stations


– a signal of identification consisting of the name of the parent shipfollowed by two digits.

19.76 4) Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations

When speech transmission is used:

– the name and/or the call sign of the parent ship to which theradiobeacon belongs. (WRC-07)

19.77 § 34 1) Aeronautical stations

– the name of the airport or geographical name of the place followed, ifnecessary, by a suitable word indicating the function of the station.

19.78 2) Aircraft stations

– a call sign (see No. 19.58), which may be preceded by a worddesignating the owner or the type of aircraft; or

– a combination of characters corresponding to the official registrationmark assigned to the aircraft; or

– a word designating the airline, followed by the flight identificationnumber.


19.79 3) In the exclusive aeronautical mobile frequency bands, aircraftstations using radiotelephony may use other methods of identification, after specialagreement between governments, and on condition that they are internationally known.

19.80 4) Aircraft survival craft stations

– a call sign (see No. 19.64).

19.81 § 35 1) Base stations


– the geographical name of the place followed, if necessary, by anyother appropriate indication.

19.82 2) Land mobile stations


– the identity of the vehicle or any other appropriate indication.

19.82A § 35A Amateur stations and experimental stations

– a call sign (see No. 19.68). (WRC-03)

Section V – Selective call numbers in the maritime mobile service

19.83 § 36 When stations of the maritime mobile service use selective callingdevices in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476-5 and ITU-R M.625-3,their call numbers shall be assigned by the responsible administrations in accordancewith the provisions below. (WRC-07)

19.84 Formation of ship station selective call numbers and coast station identi-fication numbers

19.85 § 37 1) The ten digits from 0 to 9 inclusive shall be used to formselective call numbers.

19.86 2) However, combinations of numbers commencing with the digits00 (zero, zero) shall not be used when forming the identification numbers for coaststations.

19.87 3) Ship station selective call numbers and coast stationidentification numbers in the series are formed as indicated in Nos. 19.88, 19.89 and19.90.

19.88 4) Coast station identification numbers – four digits (see No. 19.86).

74 Maritime Manual

19.89 5) Ship station selective call numbers

– five digits.

19.90 6) Predetermined groups of ship stations

– five digits consisting of:

– the same digit repeated five times; or

– two different digits repeated alternately.

19.91 Assignment of ship station selective call numbers and coast stationidentification numbers

19.92 § 38 1) In cases where selective call numbers for ship stations andidentification numbers for coast stations are required for use in the maritime mobileservice, the selective call numbers and identification numbers shall be supplied by theSecretary-General on request. Upon notification by an administration of theintroduction of selective calling for use in the maritime mobile service: (WRC-07)

19.93 a) selective call numbers for ships will be supplied as required in blocksof 100 (one hundred);

19.94 b) coast station identification numbers will be supplied in blocks of 10(ten) to meet actual requirements;

19.95 c) selective call numbers for selective calling of predetermined groupsof ship stations in accordance with No. 19.90 will be supplied as required assingle numbers.

19.96 2) Each administration shall choose the selective call numbers to beassigned to its ship stations from the blocks of the series supplied to it. Administrationsshall notify the Bureau immediately in accordance with No. 20.16 when assigningselective call numbers to ship stations.

19.96A 3) Five-digit ship station selective call numbers shall be assignedfor narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) equipment (as described in RecommendationITU-R M.476-5). (WRC-07)

19.97 4) Each administration shall choose the coast station identificationnumbers to be assigned to its coast stations from the blocks of the series supplied to it.


Section VI – Maritime mobile service identities (WRC-07)

19.98 A – General

19.99 § 39 When a station6 operating in the maritime mobile service or themaritime mobile-satellite service is required to use maritime mobile service identities,the responsible administration shall assign the identity to the station in accordance withthe provisions described in Annexes 1 to 5 of Recommendation ITU-R M.585-4. Inaccordance with No. 20.16, administrations shall notify the RadiocommunicationBureau immediately when assigning maritime mobile service identities. (WRC-07)

19.100 § 40 1) Maritime mobile service identities are formed of a series of ninedigits which are transmitted over the radio path in order to uniquely identify shipstations, ship earth stations, coast stations, coast earth stations, and other non-shipbornestations operating in the maritime mobile service or the maritime mobile-satelliteservice, and group calls. (WRC-07)

19.101 2) These identities are formed in such a way that the identity or partthereof can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the publictelecommunications network principally to call ships automatically in the shore-to-shipdirection. Access to public networks may also be achieved by means of free-formnumbering plans, so long as the ship can be uniquely identified using the system’sregistration database (see No. 19.31A) to obtain the ship station identity, call sign orship name and nationality. (WRC-03)

19.102 3) The types of maritime mobile service identities shall be asdescribed in Annexes 1 to 5 of Recommendation ITU-R M.585-4. (WRC-07)

19.108 B – Maritime identification digits (MIDs)

19.108A § 41 The maritime identification digits M1I2D3 are an integral part of themaritime mobile service identity and denote the geographical area of the administrationresponsible for the station so identified. (WRC-07)

19.110 C – Maritime mobile service identities (WRC-07)

19.111 § 43 1) Administrations shall follow Annexes 1 to 5 of RecommendationITU-R M.585-4 concerning the assignment and use of maritime mobile serviceidentities. (WRC-07)

_______________6 19.99.1 In this Section a reference to a ship station or a coast station may include therespective earth stations.

76 Maritime Manual

19.112 2) Administrations should: (WRC-07)

19.113 a) make optimum use of the possibilities of forming identities from thesingle MID allocated to them; (WRC-07)

19.114 b) take particular care in assigning ship station identities with sixsignificant digits (i.e. having three-trailing-zero identities), which should beassigned only to ship stations which can reasonably be expected to requiresuch an identity for automatic access on a worldwide basis to public switchednetworks, in particular for mobile-satellite systems accepted for use in theGMDSS on or before 1 February 2002, as long as those systems maintain theMMSI as part of their numbering scheme. (WRC-07)

Section VII – Special provisions

19.127 § 47 1) In the aeronautical mobile service, after communication has beenestablished by means of the complete call sign, the aircraft station may use, if confusionis unlikely to arise, an abbreviated call sign or identification consisting of:

19.128 a) in radiotelegraphy, the first character and last two letters of thecomplete call sign (see No. 19.58);

19.129 b) in radiotelephony:

– the first character of the complete call sign; or

– the abbreviation of the name of the owner of the aircraft(company or individual); or

– the type of aircraft;

followed by the last two letters of the complete call sign (see No. 19.58) or bythe last two characters of the registration mark.

19.130 2) The provisions of Nos. 19.127, 19.128 and 19.129 may beamplified or modified by agreement between administrations concerned.

19.131 § 48 The distinguishing signals allotted to ships for visual and auralsignalling shall, in general, agree with the call signs of ship stations.


ARTICLE 20

Service publications and online information systems (WRC-07)

Section I – Titles and contents of service publications (WRC-07)

20.1 § 1 The following publications shall be issued by the Secretary-General.As circumstances warrant and in response to individual requests by administrations, thepublished information shall also be available in various formats and by appropriatemeans. (WRC-07)

20.2 § 2 List I – The International Frequency List.

20.3 This List shall contain:

20.4 a) particulars of frequency assignments recorded in the MasterInternational Frequency Register;

20.5 b) the frequencies prescribed by these Regulations for common use bycertain services; (WRC-07)

20.6 c) the allotments in the Allotment Plans included in Appendices 25, 26and 27.

20.7 § 3 List IV – List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations.(WRC-07)

20.8 § 4 List V – List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service IdentityAssignments. (WRC-07)

20.12 § 8 List VIII – List of International Monitoring Stations.

20.13 § 9 List VIII A – List of Stations in the Space RadiocommunicationServices and in the Radio Astronomy Service.

20.14 § 10 Manual for Use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services.

Section II – Online information systems (WRC-07)

20.14A § 10A The following online information system(s) are made available by theRadiocommunication Bureau:

the ITU Maritime mobile Access and Retrieval System (MARS). (WRC-07)

78 Maritime Manual

Section III – Preparation and amendment of service publicationsand online information systems (WRC-07)

20.15 § 11 The form, the content and the periodicity of each publication shall bedecided by the Radiocommunication Bureau in consultation with administrations andthe international organizations concerned. Similar consultation shall be made withregard to the maritime online information systems. (WRC-07)

20.16 § 12 1) Administrations shall take all appropriate measures to notify theRadiocommunication Bureau immediately of any changes in the operationalinformation contained in Lists IV and V, in view of the importance of this information,particularly with regard to safety. In the case of the data published in List V, which isalso made available online through MARS, administrations shall communicate thosechanges at least once a month. In the case of other publications, administrations shallcommunicate the changes in the information contained in them as soon aspossible. (WRC-07)

20.16A 2) The names of the administrations which have failed to notify theRadiocommunication Bureau of the changes in the operational information contained inLists IV and V shall be published in these Lists.

20.16B 3) The Radiocommunication Bureau will periodically requestadministrations to reconfirm the information published in Lists IV and V. If noinformation has been received by the Radiocommunication Bureau for two consecutiveeditions of Lists IV and V, unvalidated information shall be deleted. TheRadiocommunication Bureau shall however inform the administration concerned beforetaking such action. (WRC-07)

20.17 § 13 For the purpose of the service publications, a “country” shall beunderstood to mean the territory within the limits of which the station is located; aterritory which does not have full responsibility for its international relations shall alsobe considered as a country for this purpose. (WRC-03)


ARTICLE 28

Radiodetermination services


28.1 § 1 Administrations which have established a radiodetermination serviceshall take the necessary steps to ensure the effectiveness and regularity of that service;however they accept no responsibility for the consequences that might arise from theuse of inaccurate information furnished, defective working, or failure of their stations.

28.2 § 2 In the case of doubtful or unreliable observations, the station takingthe bearing or fixing the position shall, whenever possible, notify the station to whichthis information is given of any such doubt or unreliability.

28.3 § 3 Administrations shall notify to the Bureau the characteristics of eachradiodetermination station providing an international service of value to the maritimemobile service and, if considered necessary, for each station or group of stations, thesectors in which the information furnished is normally reliable. This information ispublished in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV), and theBureau shall be notified of any change of a permanent nature. (WRC-07)

28.4 § 4 The method of identification of radiodetermination stations shall beso chosen as to avoid any doubt as to their identity.

28.5 § 5 Signals sent by radiodetermination stations shall be such as to permitaccurate and precise measurements.

28.6 § 6 Any information concerning modification or irregularity of workingof a radiodetermination station shall be notified without delay in the following manner:

28.7 a) land stations of countries operating a radiodetermination service shallsend out daily, if necessary, notices of modifications or irregularities inworking until such time as normal working is restored or, if a permanentalteration has been made, until such time as it can reasonably be taken that allnavigators interested have been warned;

28.8 b) permanent alterations or irregularities of long duration shall bepublished as soon as possible in the relevant notices to navigators.

80 Maritime Manual

Section II – Provisions for the radiodetermination-satellite service

28.9 § 7 1) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding No. 28.2, shall beapplied to the maritime radionavigation-satellite service.

28.10 2) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding Nos. 28.2 and28.3, shall be applied to the aeronautical radionavigation-satellite service.

28.11 3) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding Nos. 28.2 and28.3, shall be applied to the radiodetermination-satellite service.

Section III – Radio direction-finding stations

28.12 § 8 1) In the maritime radionavigation service, the radiotelegraphfrequency normally used for radio direction-finding is 410 kHz. All direction-findingstations of the maritime radionavigation service using radiotelegraphy shall be able touse this frequency. They shall, in addition, be able to take bearings on 500 kHz,especially for locating stations sending signals of distress, alarm and urgency.

28.13 2) Where a radio direction-finding service is provided in theauthorized bands between 1606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz, the radio direction-findingstations should be able to take bearings on the radiotelephone distress and callingfrequency 2182 kHz. (WRC-03)

28.14 3) Where a radio direction-finding station as defined in No. 1.12,operates in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, it should be able to takebearings on the VHF distress and calling frequency 156.8 MHz and on the VHF digitalselective calling frequency 156.525 MHz.

28.16 § 9 In the absence of prior arrangements, an aircraft station which calls aradio direction-finding station for a bearing shall use for this purpose a frequency onwhich the station called normally keeps watch.

28.17 § 10 In the aeronautical radionavigation service, the procedurecontemplated for radio direction-finding in this Section is applicable, except wherespecial procedures are in force as a result of arrangements concluded between theadministrations concerned.


Section IV – Radiobeacon stations

28.18 § 11 When an administration thinks it desirable in the interests ofnavigation to organize a service of radiobeacon stations, it may use for this purpose:

28.19 a) radiobeacons properly so-called, established on land or on shipspermanently moored or, exceptionally, on ships navigating in a restricted area,the limits of which are known and published. The emissions of theseradiobeacons may have either directional or non-directional patterns;

28.20 b) fixed stations, coast stations or aeronautical stations designated tofunction as radiobeacons, at the request of mobile stations.

28.21 § 12 1) Radiobeacons properly so-called shall use the frequency bandswhich are available to them under Chapter II.

28.22 2) Other stations notified as radiobeacons shall use for this purposetheir normal working frequency and their normal class of emission.

28.23 3) The power radiated by each radiobeacon properly so-called shallbe adjusted to the value necessary to produce the stipulated field strength at the limit ofthe range required (see Appendix 12).

28.24 § 13 Special rules applicable to aeronautical radio beacons operating in thebands between 160 kHz and 535 kHz and to the maritime radio beacons operating in thebands between 283.5 kHz and 335 kHz are given in Appendix 12.

82 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 30

General provisions

Section I – Introduction

30.1 § 1 This Chapter contains the provisions for the operational use of theglobal maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS), whose functional requirements,system elements and equipment carriage requirements are set forth in the InternationalConvention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended. This Chapteralso contains provisions for initiating distress, urgency and safety communications bymeans of radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16). (WRC-07)

30.2 § 2 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by a mobilestation or a mobile earth station in distress of any means at its disposal to attractattention, make known its position, and obtain help (see also No. 4.9).

30.3 § 3 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by stations onboard aircraft, ships engaged in search and rescue operations, land stations, or coastearth stations, in exceptional circumstances, of any means at their disposal to assist amobile station or a mobile earth station in distress (see also Nos. 4.9 and 4.16).

Section II – Maritime provisions

30.4 § 4 The provisions specified in this Chapter are obligatory in themaritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service for all stations usingthe frequencies and techniques prescribed for the functions set out herein (see alsoNo. 30.5). (WRC-07)

30.5 § 5 The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS),1974 as amended, prescribes which ships and which of their survival craft shall beprovided with radio equipment, and which ships shall carry portable radio equipmentfor use in survival craft. It also prescribes the requirements which shall be met by suchequipment.


30.6 § 6 Ship earth stations located at rescue coordination centres1 may beauthorized by an administration to communicate for distress and safety purposes withany other station using bands allocated to the maritime mobile-satellite service, whenspecial circumstances make it essential, notwithstanding the methods of workingprovided for in these Regulations.

30.7 § 7 Mobile stations2 of the maritime mobile service may communicate,for safety purposes, with stations of the aeronautical mobile service. Suchcommunications shall normally be made on the frequencies authorized, and under theconditions specified in Section I of Article 31 (see also No. 4.9).

Section III – Aeronautical provisions

30.8 § 8 The procedure specified in this Chapter is obligatory forcommunications between stations on board aircraft and stations of the maritime mobile-satellite service, wherever this service or stations of this service are specificallymentioned.

30.9 § 9 Certain provisions of this Chapter are applicable to the aeronauticalmobile service, except in the case of special arrangements between the governmentsconcerned.

30.10 § 10 Mobile stations of the aeronautical mobile service may communicate,for distress and safety purposes, with stations of the maritime mobile service inconformity with the provisions of this Chapter.

30.11 § 11 Any station on board an aircraft required by national or internationalregulations to communicate for distress, urgency or safety purposes with stations of themaritime mobile service that comply with the provisions of this Chapter, shall becapable of transmitting and receiving class J3E emissions when using the carrierfrequency 2182 kHz, or class J3E emissions when using the carrier frequency4 125 kHz, or class G3E emissions when using the frequency 156.8 MHz and,optionally, the frequency 156.3 MHz.

_______________1 30.6.1 The term “rescue coordination centre”, as defined in the International Conventionon Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) refers to a unit responsible for promoting the efficientorganization of search and rescue services and for coordinating the conduct of search and rescueoperations within a search and rescue region.2 30.7.1 Mobile stations communicating with the stations of the aeronautical mobile (R)service in bands allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service shall conform to the provisionsof the Regulations which relate to that service and, as appropriate, to any special arrangementsbetween the governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile (R) service is regulated.

84 Maritime Manual

30.11A § 11A Aircraft, when conducting search and rescue operations, are alsopermitted to operate digital selective calling (DSC) equipment on the VHF DSCfrequency 156.525 MHz, and automatic identification system (AIS) equipment on theAIS frequencies 161.975 MHz and 162.025 MHz. (WRC-07)

Section IV – Land mobile provisions

30.12 § 12 Stations of the land mobile service in uninhabited, sparsely populatedor remote areas may, for distress and safety purposes, use the frequencies provided forin this Chapter.

30.13 § 13 The procedure specified in this Chapter is obligatory for stations ofthe land mobile service when using frequencies provided in these Regulations fordistress and safety communications.


ARTICLE 31

Frequencies for the global maritime distress and safety system(GMDSS)

Section I – General

31.1 § 1 The frequencies to be used for the transmission of distress and safetyinformation under the GMDSS are contained in Appendix 15. In addition to thefrequencies listed in Appendix 15, ship stations and coast stations should use otherappropriate frequencies for the transmission of safety messages and generalradiocommunications to and from shore-based radio systems or networks. (WRC-07)

31.2 § 2 Any emission causing harmful interference to distress and safetycommunications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in Appendix 15 isprohibited. (WRC-07)

31.3 § 3 The number and duration of test transmissions shall be kept to aminimum on the frequencies identified in Appendix 15; they should be coordinatedwith a competent authority, as necessary, and, wherever practicable, be carried out onartificial antennas or with reduced power. However, testing on the distress and safetycalling frequencies should be avoided, but where this is unavoidable, it should beindicated that these are test transmissions.

31.4 § 4 Before transmitting for other than distress purposes on any of thefrequencies identified in Appendix 15 for distress and safety, a station shall, wherepracticable, listen on the frequency concerned to make sure that no distress transmissionis being sent.

Section II – Survival craft stations

31.6 § 5 1) Equipment for radiotelephony use in survival craft stations shall,if capable of operating on any frequency in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz,be able to transmit and receive on 156.8 MHz and at least one other frequency in thesebands.

31.7 2) Equipment for transmitting locating signals from survival craftstations shall be capable of operating in the 9 200-9500 MHz band.

86 Maritime Manual

31.8 3) Equipment with digital selective calling facilities for use insurvival craft shall, if capable of operating:31.9 a) in the bands between 1606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz, be able to transmit

on 2 187.5 kHz; (WRC-03)

31.10 b) in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz, be able to transmiton 8 414.5 kHz;

31.11 c) in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, be able to transmit on156.525 MHz.

Section III – Watchkeeping

31.12 A – Coast stations

31.13 § 6 Those coast stations assuming a watch-keeping responsibility in theGMDSS shall maintain an automatic digital selective calling watch on frequencies andfor periods of time as indicated in the information published in the List of CoastStations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

31.14 B – Coast earth stations

31.15 § 7 Those coast earth stations assuming a watch-keeping responsibility inthe GMDSS shall maintain a continuous automatic watch for appropriate distress alertsrelayed by space stations.

31.16 C – Ship stations

31.17 § 8 1) Ship stations, where so equipped, shall, while at sea, maintain anautomatic digital selective calling watch on the appropriate distress and safety callingfrequencies in the frequency bands in which they are operating. Ship stations, where soequipped, shall also maintain watch on the appropriate frequencies for the automaticreception of transmissions of meteorological and navigational warnings and otherurgent information to ships. (WRC-07)

31.18 2) Ship stations complying with the provisions of this Chaptershould, where practicable, maintain a watch on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHFchannel 16). (WRC-07)

31.19 D – Ship earth stations

31.20 § 9 Ship earth stations complying with the provisions of this Chaptershall, while at sea, maintain watch except when communicating on a working channel.


ARTICLE 32

Operational procedures for distress communications in theglobal maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)* (WRC-07)


32.1 § 1 Distress communications rely on the use of terrestrial MF, HF andVHF radiocommunications and communications using satellite techniques. Distresscommunications shall have absolute priority over all other transmissions. The followingterms apply: a) The distress alert is a digital selective call (DSC) using a distress call

format, in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication, or adistress message format, in which case it is relayed through spacestations.

b) The distress call is the initial voice or text procedure. c) The distress message is the subsequent voice or text procedure. d) The distress alert relay is a DSC transmission on behalf of another

station. e) The distress call relay is the initial voice or text procedure for a

station not itself in distress. (WRC-07)

32.2 § 2 1) The distress alert shall be sent through a satellite either withabsolute priority in general communication channels, on exclusive distress and safetyfrequencies reserved for satellite EPIRBs in the Earth-to-space direction or on thedistress and safety frequencies designated in the MF, HF and VHF bands for digitalselective calling (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07)

32.2A 1A) The distress call shall be sent on the distress and safetyfrequencies designated in the MF, HF and VHF bands for radiotelephony. (WRC-07)

32.3 2) The distress alert or call and subsequent messages shall be sentonly on the authority of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehiclecarrying the mobile station or the mobile earth station. (WRC-07)

32.4 § 3 All stations which receive a distress alert or call transmitted on thedistress and safety frequencies in the MF, HF and VHF bands shall immediately ceaseany transmission capable of interfering with distress traffic and prepare for subsequentdistress traffic. (WRC-07)

_______________* Note by the Secretariat: The title has been aligned in accordance with WRC-07 decisions.

88 Maritime Manual

32.5 § 4 Distress alerts or distress alert relays using DSC should use thetechnical structures and content set forth in the most recent version ofRecommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. (WRC-07)

32.5A § 4A Each administration shall ensure that suitable arrangements are madefor assigning and registering identities used by ships participating in the GMDSS, andshall make registration information available to rescue coordination centres on a24-hour day, 7-day week basis. Where appropriate, administrations shall notifyresponsible organizations immediately of additions, deletions and other changes inthese assignments (see Nos. 19.39, 19.96 and 19.99). Registration informationsubmitted shall be in accordance with Resolution 340 (WRC-97)*. (WRC-07)

32.5B § 4B Any GMDSS shipboard equipment which is capable of transmittingposition coordinates as part of a distress alert and which does not have an integralelectronic position-fixing system receiver shall be interconnected to a separatenavigation receiver, if one is installed, to provide that informationautomatically. (WRC-07)

32.6 § 5 Transmissions by radiotelephony shall be made slowly and distinctly,each word being clearly pronounced to facilitate transcription.

32.7 § 6 The phonetic alphabet and figure code in Appendix 14 and theabbreviations and signals in accordance with the most recent version ofRecommendation ITU-R M.1172 should be used where applicable1. (WRC-03)

Section II – Distress alerting and distress calling (WRC-07)

32.8 A – General

32.9 § 7 1) The transmission of a distress alert or a distress call indicates thata mobile unit2 or person3 is threatened by grave and imminent danger and requiresimmediate assistance. (WRC-07)

_______________* Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution has been suppressed by WRC-07. The subjectmatter is now covered by Resolution 355 (WRC-07).1 32.7.1 The use of the Standard Marine Communication Phrases and, where languagedifficulties exists, the International Code of Signals, both published by the InternationalMaritime Organization (IMO), is also recommended.2 32.9.1 Mobile unit: a ship, aircraft or other vehicle.3 32.9.2 In this Article, where the case is of a person in distress, the application of theprocedures may require adaptation to meet the needs of the particular circumstances.


32.10 2) The distress alert shall provide4 the identification of the station indistress and its position.

32.10A § 7A 1) A distress alert is false if it was transmitted without anyindication that a mobile unit or person was in distress and required immediateassistance (see No. 32.9). Administrations receiving a false distress alert shall reportthis infringement in accordance with Section V of Article 15, if that alert:

a) was transmitted intentionally;

b) was not cancelled in accordance with No. 32.53A and Resolution 349(WRC-97);

c) could not be verified as a result of either the ship’s failure to keepwatch on appropriate frequencies in accordance with Nos. 31.16 to31.20, or its failure to respond to calls from an authorized rescueauthority;

d) was repeated; or

e) was transmitted using a false identity.

Administrations receiving such a report shall take appropriate steps to ensure that theinfringement does not recur. No action should normally be taken against any ship ormariner for reporting and cancelling a false distress alert. (WRC-07)

32.10B 2) Administrations shall take practicable and necessary steps toensure the avoidance of false distress alerts, including those transmittedinadvertently. (WRC-07)

32.11 B – Transmission of a distress alert or a distress call (WRC-07)

B1 – Transmission of a distress alert or a distress call by a ship stationor a ship earth station (WRC-07)

32.12 § 8 Ship-to-shore distress alerts or calls are used to alert rescuecoordination centres via coast stations or coast earth stations that a ship is in distress.These alerts are based on the use of transmissions via satellites (from a ship earthstation or a satellite EPIRB) and terrestrial services (from ship stations andEPIRBs). (WRC-07)

_______________4 32.10.1 The distress alert may also contain information regarding the nature of thedistress, the type of assistance required, the course and speed of the mobile unit, the time thatthis information was recorded and any other information which might facilitate rescue.

90 Maritime Manual

32.13 § 9 1) Ship-to-ship distress alerts are used to alert other ships in thevicinity of the ship in distress and are based on the use of digital selective calling in theVHF and MF bands. Additionally, the HF band may be used. (WRC-07)

32.13A 2) Ship stations equipped for digital selective calling proceduresmay transmit a distress call and distress message immediately following the distressalert in order to attract attention from as many ship stations as possible. (WRC-07)

32.13B 3) Ship stations not equipped for digital selective calling proceduresshall, where practical, initiate the distress communications by transmitting a radiotelephony distress call and message on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHFchannel 16). (WRC-07)

32.13BA § 9A The radiotelephone distress signal consists of the word MAYDAYpronounced as the French expression “m'aider”. (WRC-07)

32.13C § 9B 1) The distress call sent on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHFchannel 16) shall be given in the following form:

– the distress signal MAYDAY, spoken three times;

– the words THIS IS;

– the name of the vessel in distress, spoken three times;

– the call sign or other identification;

– the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC). (WRC-07)

32.13D 2) The distress message which follows the distress call should begiven in the following form:

– the distress signal MAYDAY;

– the name of the vessel in distress;

– the call sign or other identification;

– the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC);

– the position, given as the latitude and longitude, or if the latitude andlongitude are not known or if time is insufficient, in relation to aknown geographical location;

– the nature of the distress;

– the kind of assistance required;

– any other useful information. (WRC-07)


32.13E § 9C DSC procedures use a combination of automated functions andmanual intervention to generate the appropriate distress call format in the most recentversion of Recommendation ITU-R M.541. A distress alert sent by DSC consists of oneor more distress alert attempts in which a message format is transmitted identifying thestation in distress, giving its last recorded position and, if entered, the nature of thedistress. In MF and HF bands, distress alert attempts may be sent as a single-frequencyattempt or a multi-frequency attempt on up to six frequencies within one minute. InVHF bands, only single-frequency call attempts are used. The distress alert will repeatautomatically at random intervals, a few minutes apart, until an acknowledgement sentby DSC is received. (WRC-07)

B2 – Transmission of a shore-to-ship distress alert relay or a distresscall relay (WRC-07)

32.14 § 10 1) A station or a rescue coordination centre which receives adistress alert or call and a distress message shall initiate the transmission of a shore-to-ship distress alert relay addressed, as appropriate, to all ships, to a selected group ofships, or to a specific ship, by satellite and/or terrestrial means. (WRC-07)

32.15 2) The distress alert relay and the distress call relay shall contain theidentification of the mobile unit in distress, its position and all other information whichmight facilitate rescue. (WRC-07)

B3 – Transmission of a distress alert relay or a distress call relay by a stationnot itself in distress (WRC-07)

32.16 § 11 A station in the mobile or mobile-satellite service which learns that amobile unit is in distress (for example, by a radio call or by observation) shall initiateand transmit a distress alert relay or a distress call relay on behalf of the mobile unit indistress once it has ascertained that any of the following circumstances apply: (WRC-07)

32.17 a) on receiving a distress alert or call which is not acknowledged by acoast station or another vessel within five minutes (see also Nos. 32.29A and32.31); (WRC-07)

32.18 b) on learning that the mobile unit in distress is otherwise unable orincapable of participating in distress communications, if the master or otherperson responsible for the mobile unit not in distress considers that furtherhelp is necessary. (WRC-07)

32.19 § 12 1) The distress relay on behalf of a mobile unit in distress shall besent in a form appropriate to the circumstances (see Nos. 32.19A to 32.19D) usingeither a distress call relay by radiotelephony (see Nos. 32.19D and 32.19E), anindividually addressed distress alert relay by DSC (see No. 32.19B), or a distresspriority message through a ship earth station. (WRC-07)

92 Maritime Manual

32.19A 2) A station transmitting a distress alert relay or a distress call relayin accordance with Nos. 32.16 to 32.18 shall indicate that it is not itself indistress. (WRC-07)

32.19B 3) A distress alert relay sent by DSC should use the call format, asfound in the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541,and should preferably be addressed to an individual coast station or rescue coordinationcentre5. (WRC-07)

32.19C 4) However, a ship shall not transmit a distress alert relay to allships by digital selective calling on the VHF or MF distress frequencies followingreceipt of a distress alert sent by digital selective calling by the ship indistress. (WRC-07)

32.19D 5) When an aural watch is being maintained on shore and reliableship-to-shore communications can be established by radiotelephony, a distress call relayis sent by radiotelephony and addressed to the relevant coast station or rescuecoordination centre6 on the appropriate frequency. (WRC-07)

32.19E 6) The distress call relay sent by radiotelephony should be given inthe following form: – the distress signal MAYDAY RELAY, spoken three times; – ALL STATIONS or coast station name, as appropriate, spoken three

times; – the words THIS IS; – the name of the relaying station, spoken three times; – the call sign or other identification of the relaying station; – the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC) of the relaying

station (the vessel not in distress). (WRC-07)

32.19F 7) This call shall be followed by a distress message which shall, asfar as possible, repeat the information7 contained in the original distress alert or distressmessage. (WRC-07)

_______________5 32.19B.1 Vessels making a distress alert relay or a distress call relay should ensure that asuitable coast station or rescue coordination centre is informed of any distress communicationspreviously exchanged. (WRC-07)6 32.19D.1 Vessels making a distress call relay should ensure that a suitable coast station orrescue coordination centre is informed of any distress communications previouslyexchanged. (WRC-07)7 32.19F.1 If the station in distress cannot be identified, then it will be necessary to originatethe distress message as well, using, for example, terms such as “Unidentified trawler” refer tothe mobile unit in distress. (WRC-07)


32.19G 8) When no aural watch is being maintained on shore, or there areother difficulties in establishing reliable ship-to-shore communications byradiotelephony, an appropriate coast station or rescue coordination centre may becontacted by sending an individual distress alert relay by DSC, addressed solely to thatstation and using the appropriate call formats. (WRC-07)

32.19H 9) In the event of continued failure to contact a coast station orrescue coordination centre directly, it may be appropriate to send a distress call relay byradiotelephony addressed to all ships, or to all ships in a certain geographical area. Seealso No. 32.19C. (WRC-07)

32.20 C – Receipt and acknowledgement of distress alerts and distress calls (WRC-07)

C1 – Procedure for acknowledgement of receipt of distress alerts ora distress call (WRC-07)

32.21 § 13 1) Acknowledgement of receipt of a distress alert, including adistress alert relay, shall be made in the manner appropriate to the method oftransmission of the alert and within the time-scale appropriate to the role of the stationin receipt of the alert. Acknowledgement by satellite shall be sentimmediately. (WRC-07)

32.21A 2) When acknowledging receipt of a distress alert sent by DSC8, theacknowledgement in the terrestrial services shall be made by DSC, radiotelephony ornarrow-band direct-printing telegraphy as appropriate to the circumstances, on theassociated distress and safety frequency in the same band in which the distress alert wasreceived, taking due account of the directions given in the most recent versions ofRecommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. (WRC-07)

32.21B Acknowledgement by DSC of a distress alert sent by DSC addressedto stations in the maritime mobile service shall be addressed to all stations8. (WRC-07)

32.23 § 15 1) When acknowledging by radiotelephony the receipt of a distressalert or a distress call from a ship station or a ship earth station, the acknowledgementshould be given in the following form:


_______________8 32.21A.1 In order to ensure that no unnecessary delay occurs before the shore-basedauthorities become aware of a distress incident, the acknowledgement by DSC to a distress alertsent by DSC shall normally only be made by a coast station or a rescue coordination centre. Anacknowledgement by DSC will cancel any further automated repetition of the distress alert usingDSC. (WRC-07)

94 Maritime Manual

– the name followed by the call sign, or the MMSI or otheridentification of the station sending the distress message;


– the name and call sign or other identification of the stationacknowledging receipt;

– the word RECEIVED;

– the distress signal MAYDAY. (WRC-07)

32.24 2) When acknowledging by narrow-band direct-printing telegraphythe receipt of a distress alert from a ship station, the acknowledgement should be givenin the following form:


– the call sign or other identification of the station sending the distressalert;

– the word DE;

– the call sign or other identification of the station acknowledgingreceipt of the distress alert;

– the signal RRR;

– the distress signal MAYDAY. (WRC-07)

C2 – Receipt and acknowledgement by a coast station, a coast earth stationor a rescue coordination centre (WRC-07)

32.26 § 17 Coast stations and the appropriate coast earth stations in receipt ofdistress alerts or distress calls shall ensure that they are routed as soon as possible to arescue coordination centre. In addition, receipt of a distress alert or a distress call is tobe acknowledged as soon as possible by a coast station, or by a rescue coordinationcentre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earth station. A shore-to-ship distressalert relay or a distress call relay (see Nos. 32.14 and 32.15) shall also be made whenthe method of receipt warrants a broadcast alert to shipping or when the circumstancesof the distress incident indicate that further help is necessary. (WRC-07)

32.27 § 18 A coast station using DSC to acknowledge a distress alert shalltransmit the acknowledgement on the distress calling frequency on which the distressalert was received and should address it to all ships. The acknowledgementshall include the identification of the ship whose distress alert is beingacknowledged. (WRC-07)


C3 – Receipt and acknowledgement by a ship station or ship earth station (WRC-07)

32.28 § 19 1) Ship or ship earth stations in receipt of a distress alert or adistress call shall, as soon as possible, inform the master or person responsible for theship of the contents of the distress alert. (WRC-07)

32.29 2) In areas where reliable communications with one or more coaststations are practicable, ship stations in receipt of a distress alert or a distress call fromanother vessel should defer acknowledgement for a short interval so that a coast stationmay acknowledge receipt in the first instance. (WRC-07)

32.29A 3) Ship stations in receipt of a distress call sent by radiotelephonyon the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16) shall, if the call is not acknowledged bya coast station or another vessel within five minutes, acknowledge receipt to the vesselin distress and use any means available to relay the distress call to an appropriate coaststation or coast earth station (see also Nos. 32.16 to 32.19F). (WRC-07)

32.30 § 20 1) Ship stations operating in areas where reliable communicationswith a coast station are not practicable which receive a distress alert or call from a shipstation which is, beyond doubt, in their vicinity, shall, as soon as possible and ifappropriately equipped, acknowledge receipt to the vessel in distress and inform arescue coordination centre through a coast station or coast earth station (see alsoNos. 32.16 to 32.19H). (WRC-07)

32.31 2) However in order to avoid making unnecessary or confusingtransmissions in response, a ship station, which may be at a considerable distance fromthe incident, receiving an HF distress alert, shall not acknowledge it but shall observethe provisions of Nos. 32.36 to 32.38, and shall, if the distress alert is not acknowledgedby a coast station within five minutes, relay the distress alert, but only to an appropriatecoast station or coast earth station (see also Nos. 32.16 to 32.19H). (WRC-07)

32.32 § 21 A ship station acknowledging receipt of a distress alert sent by DSCshould, in accordance with No. 32.29 or No. 32.30: (WRC-07)

32.33 a) in the first instance, acknowledge receipt of the distress alert by usingradiotelephony on the distress and safety traffic frequency in the band used forthe alert, taking into account any instructions which may be issued by aresponding coast station; (WRC-07)

32.34 b) if acknowledgement by radiotelephony of the distress alert receivedon the MF or VHF distress alerting frequency is unsuccessful, acknowledgereceipt of the distress alert by responding with a digital selective call on theappropriate frequency.

96 Maritime Manual

32.34A § 21A However, unless instructed to do so by a coast station or a rescuecoordination centre, a ship station may only send an acknowledgement by DSC in theevent that:

a) no acknowledgement by DSC from a coast station has been observed;and

b) no other communication by radiotelephony or narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy to or from the vessel in distress has beenobserved; and

c) at least five minutes have elapsed and the distress alert by DSC hasbeen repeated (see No. 32.21A.1). (WRC-07)

32.35 § 22 A ship station in receipt of a shore-to-ship distress alert relay ordistress call relay (see No. 32.14) should establish communication as directed andrender such assistance as required and appropriate. (WRC-07)

32.36 D – Preparations for handling of distress traffic

32.37 § 23 On receipt of a distress alert or a distress call, ship stations and coaststations shall set watch on the radiotelephone distress and safety traffic frequencyassociated with the distress and safety calling frequency on which the distress alert wasreceived. (WRC-07)

32.38 § 24 Coast stations and ship stations with narrow-band direct-printingequipment shall set watch on the narrow-band direct-printing frequency associated withthe distress alert if it indicates that narrow-band direct-printing is to be used forsubsequent distress communications. If practicable, they should additionally set watchon the radiotelephone frequency associated with the distress alert frequency. (WRC-07)

Section III – Distress traffic

32.39 A – General and search and rescue coordinating communications

32.40 § 25 Distress traffic consists of all messages relating to the immediateassistance required by the ship in distress, including search and rescue communicationsand on-scene communications. The distress traffic shall as far as possible be on thefrequencies contained in Article 31.

32.42 § 26 For distress traffic by radiotelephony, when establishing communi-cations, calls shall be prefixed by the distress signal MAYDAY.


32.43 § 27 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-RRecommendations shall be used for distress traffic by direct-printing telegraphy. Allmessages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a lettershift signal and the distress signal MAYDAY.

32.44 2) Distress communications by direct-printing telegraphy shouldnormally be established by the ship in distress and should be in the broadcast (forwarderror correction) mode. The ARQ mode may subsequently be used when it isadvantageous to do so.

32.45 § 28 1) The rescue coordination centre responsible for controlling asearch and rescue operation shall also coordinate the distress traffic relating to theincident or may appoint another station to do so. (WRC-07)

32.46 2) The rescue coordination centre coordinating distress traffic, theunit coordinating search and rescue operations9 or the coast station involved mayimpose silence on stations which interfere with that traffic. This instruction shall beaddressed to all stations or to one station only, according to circumstances. In eithercase, the following shall be used:

32.47 a) in radiotelephony, the signal SEELONCE MAYDAY, pronounced asthe French expression “silence, m'aider”;

32.48 b) in narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy normally using forward-error correcting mode, the signal SILENCE MAYDAY. However, the ARQmode may be used when it is advantageous to do so.

32.49 § 29 Until they receive the message indicating that normal working maybe resumed (see No. 32.51), all stations which are aware of the distress traffic, andwhich are not taking part in it, and which are not in distress, are forbidden to transmiton the frequencies in which the distress traffic is taking place.

32.50 § 30 A station of the mobile service which, while following distress traffic,is able to continue its normal service, may do so when the distress traffic is wellestablished and on condition that it observes the provisions of No. 32.49 and that it doesnot interfere with distress traffic.

32.51 § 31 When distress traffic has ceased on frequencies which have been usedfor distress traffic, the station controlling the search and rescue operation shall initiate amessage for transmission on these frequencies indicating that distress traffic hasfinished. (WRC-07)

_______________9 32.46.1 In accordance with the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue(1979) this is the on-scene commander (OSC) or the coordinator surface search (CSS).

98 Maritime Manual

32.52 § 32 1) In radiotelephony, the message referred to in No. 32.51 shouldconsist of:


– the call “ALL STATIONS”, spoken three times;


– the name of the station sending that message, spoken three times;

– the call sign or other identification of the station sending the message;

– the time of handing in of the message;

– the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC), the name and thecall sign of the mobile station which was in distress;

– the words SEELONCE FEENEE pronounced as the French words“silence fini”. (WRC-07)

32.53 2) In direct-printing telegraphy, the message referred to inNo. 32.51 consists of:


– the call CQ;

– the word DE;

– the call sign or other identification of the station sending the message;

– the time of handing in of the message;

– the name and call sign of the mobile station which was in distress;and

– the words SILENCE FINI.

32.53A Cancellation of an inadvertent distress alert (WRC-07)

32.53B § 32A 1) A station transmitting an inadvertent distress alert or call shallcancel the transmission. (WRC-07)

32.53C 2) An inadvertent DSC alert shall be cancelled by DSC, if the DSCequipment is so capable. The cancellation should be in accordance with the most recentversion of Recommendation ITU-R M.493. In all cases, cancellations shall also betransmitted by radiotelephone in accordance with 32.53E. (WRC-07)

32.53D 3) An inadvertent distress call shall be cancelled by radiotelephonein accordance with the procedure in 32.53E. (WRC-07)


32.53E 4) Inadvertent distress transmissions shall be cancelled orally on theassociated distress and safety frequency in the same band on which the distresstransmission was sent, using the following procedure: – the call “ALL STATIONS”, spoken three times; – the words THIS IS; – the name of the vessel, spoken three times; – the call sign or other identification; – the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC); – PLEASE CANCEL MY DISTRESS ALERT OF time in UTC.

Monitor the same band on which the inadvertent distress transmission was sentand respond to any communications concerning that distress transmission asappropriate. (WRC-07)

32.54 B – On-scene communications

32.55 § 33 1) On-scene communications are those between the mobile unit indistress and assisting mobile units, and between the mobile units and the unitcoordinating search and rescue operations9.

32.56 2) Control of on-scene communications is the responsibility of theunit coordinating search and rescue operations9. Simplex communications shall be usedso that all on-scene mobile stations may share relevant information concerning thedistress incident. If direct-printing telegraphy is used, it shall be in the forward error-correcting mode.

32.57 § 34 1) The preferred frequencies in radiotelephony for on-scenecommunications are 156.8 MHz and 2182 kHz. The frequency 2 174.5 kHz may also beused for ship-to-ship on-scene communications using narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy in the forward error correcting mode.

32.58 2) In addition to 156.8 MHz and 2182 kHz, the frequencies3 023 kHz, 4 125 kHz, 5 680 kHz, 123.1 MHz and 156.3 MHz may be used for ship-to-aircraft on-scene communications.

32.59 § 35 The selection or designation of on-scene frequencies is theresponsibility of the unit coordinating search and rescue operations9. Normally, once anon-scene frequency is established, a continuous aural or teleprinter watch is maintainedby all participating on-scene mobile units on the selected frequency.

_______________9 32.55.1, 32.56.1 and 32.59.1 In accordance with the International Convention onMaritime Search and Rescue (1979) this is the on-scene commander (OSC) or the coordinatorsurface search (CSS).

100 Maritime Manual

32.60 C – Locating and homing signals

32.61 § 36 1) Locating signals are radio transmissions intended to facilitate thefinding of a mobile unit in distress or the location of survivors. These signals includethose transmitted by searching units, and those transmitted by the mobile unit indistress, by survival craft, by float-free EPIRBs, by satellite EPIRBs and by search andrescue radar transponders to assist the searching units.

32.62 2) Homing signals are those locating signals which are transmittedby mobile units in distress, or by survival craft, for the purpose of providing searchingunits with a signal that can be used to determine the bearing to the transmitting stations.

32.63 3) Locating signals may be transmitted in the following frequencybands:

117.975-137 MHz;

156-174 MHz;

406-406.1 MHz; and

9200-9500 MHz. (WRC-07)


ARTICLE 33

Operational procedures for urgency and safety communications inthe global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)


33.1 § 1 1) Urgency and safety communications include: (WRC-07)

33.2 a) navigational and meteorological warnings and urgent information;33.3 b) ship-to-ship safety of navigation communications;33.4 c) ship reporting communications;33.5 d) support communications for search and rescue operations;33.6 e) other urgency and safety messages; and33.7 f ) communications relating to the navigation, movements and needs of

ships and weather observation messages destined for an official meteorologicalservice.

33.7A 2) Urgency communications shall have priority over all othercommunications, except distress. (WRC-07)

33.7B 3) Safety communications shall have priority over all othercommunications, except distress and urgency. (WRC-07)

Section II – Urgency communications

33.7C § 1A The following terms apply: a) The urgency announcement is a digital selective call using an urgency

call format1, in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication, or anurgency message format, in which case it is relayed through space stations.

b) The urgency call is the initial voice or text procedure. c) The urgency message is the subsequent voice or text

procedure. (WRC-07)

_______________1 33.7C.1 The format of urgency calls and urgency messages should be in accordance withthe relevant ITU-R Recommendations. (WRC-07)

102 Maritime Manual

33.8 § 2 1) In a terrestrial system, urgency communications consist of anannouncement, transmitted using digital selective calling, followed by the urgency calland message transmitted using radiotelephony, narrow-band direct-printing, or data.The announcement of the urgency message shall be made on one or more of the distressand safety calling frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 using either digitalselective calling and the urgency call format, or if not available, radio telephonyprocedures and the urgency signal. Announcements using digital selective callingshould use the technical structure and content set forth in the most recent version ofRecommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. A separate announcement need notbe made if the urgency message is to be transmitted through the maritime mobile-satellite service. (WRC-07)

33.8A 2) Ship stations not equipped for digital selective calling proceduresmay announce an urgency call and message by transmitting the urgency signal byradiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (channel 16), while taking into accountthat other stations outside VHF range may not receive the announcement. (WRC-07)

33.8B 3) In the maritime mobile service, urgency communications may beaddressed either to all stations or to a particular station. When using digital selectivecalling techniques, the urgency announcement shall indicate which frequency is to beused to send the subsequent message and, in the case of a message to all stations, shalluse the “All Ships” format setting. (WRC-07)

33.8C 4) Urgency announcements from a coast station may also bedirected to a group of vessels or to vessels in a defined geographical area. (WRC-07)

33.9 § 3 1) The urgency call and message shall be transmitted on one ormore of the distress and safety traffic frequencies specified in Section I ofArticle 31. (WRC-07)

33.9A 2) However, in the maritime mobile service, the urgency messageshall be transmitted on a working frequency:

a) in the case of a long message or a medical call; or

b) in areas of heavy traffic when the message is being repeated.

An indication to this effect shall be included in the urgency announcement orcall. (WRC-07)

33.9B 3) In the maritime mobile-satellite service, a separate urgencyannouncement or call does not need to be made before sending the urgency message.However, if available, the appropriate network priority access settings should be usedfor sending the message. (WRC-07)


33.10 § 4 The urgency signal consists of the words PAN PAN. Inradiotelephony each word of the group shall be pronounced as the French word“panne”.

33.11 § 5 1) The urgency call format and the urgency signal indicate that thecalling station has a very urgent message to transmit concerning the safety of a mobileunit or a person. (WRC-07)

33.11A 2) Communications concerning medical advice may be preceded bythe urgency signal. Mobile stations requiring medical advice may obtain it through anyof the land stations shown in the List of Coast Stations and Special ServiceStations. (WRC-07)

33.11B 3) Urgency communications to support search and rescueoperations need not be preceded by the urgency signal. (WRC-07)

33.12 § 6 1) The urgency call should consist of:

– the urgency signal PAN PAN, spoken three times;

– the name of the called station or “all stations”, spoken three times;


– the name of the station transmitting the urgency message, spokenthree times;

– the call sign or any other identification;

– the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC),

followed by the urgency message or followed by the details of the channel to be usedfor the message in the case where a working channel is to be used.

In radiotelephony, on the selected working frequency, the urgency call and messageconsists of:






– the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC);

– the text of the urgency message. (WRC-07)

104 Maritime Manual

33.13 2) In narrow-band direct-printing, the urgency message shall bepreceded by the urgency signal (see No. 33.10) and the identification of the transmittingstation.

33.14 § 7 1) The urgency call format or urgency signal shall be sent only onthe authority of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehicle carrying themobile station or mobile earth station. (WRC-07)

33.15 2) The urgency call format or the urgency signal may be transmittedby a land station or a coast earth station with the approval of the responsible authority.

33.15A § 7A 1) Ship stations in receipt of an urgency announcement or calladdressed to all stations shall not acknowledge. (WRC-07)

33.15B 2) Ship stations in receipt of an urgency announcement or call of anurgency message shall monitor the frequency or channel indicated for the message forat least five minutes. If, at the end of the five-minute monitoring period, no urgencymessage has been received, a coast station should, if possible, be notified of the missingmessage. Thereafter, normal working may be resumed. (WRC-07)

33.15C 3) Coast and ship stations which are in communication onfrequencies other than those used for the transmission of the urgency signal or thesubsequent message may continue their normal work without interruption, provided thatthe urgency message is not addressed to them nor broadcast to all stations. (WRC-07)

33.16 § 8 When an urgency announcement or call and message was transmittedto more than one station and action is no longer required, an urgency cancellationshould be sent by the station responsible for its transmission.

The urgency cancellation should consist of:


– “all stations”, spoken three times;




– the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC);

– PLEASE CANCEL URGENCY MESSAGE OF time in UTC.(WRC-07)


33.17 § 9 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-RRecommendations shall be used for urgency messages by direct-printing telegraphy. Allmessages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a lettershift signal and the urgency signal PAN PAN.

33.18 2) Urgency communications by direct-printing telegraphy shouldnormally be established in the broadcast (forward error correction) mode. The ARQmode may subsequently be used when it is advantageous to do so.

Section III – Medical transports

33.19 § 10 The term “medical transports”, as defined in the 1949 GenevaConventions and Additional Protocols, refers to any means of transportation by land,water or air, whether military or civilian, permanent or temporary, assigned exclusivelyto medical transportation and under the control of a competent authority of a party to aconflict or of neutral States and of other States not parties to an armed conflict, whenthese ships, craft and aircraft assist the wounded, the sick and the shipwrecked.

33.20 § 11 1) For the purpose of announcing and identifying medical transportswhich are protected under the above-mentioned Conventions, the procedure ofSection II of this Article is used. The urgency call shall be followed by theaddition of the single word MEDICAL in narrow-band direct-printing and by theaddition of the single word MAY-DEE-CAL pronounced as in French “médical”, inradiotelephony. (WRC-07)

33.20A 2) When using digital selective calling techniques, the urgencyannouncement on the appropriate Digital Selective Calling distress and safetyfrequencies shall always be addressed to all stations on VHF and to a specifiedgeographical area on MF and HF and shall indicate “Medical transport” in accordancewith the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 andITU-R M.541. (WRC-07)

33.20B 3) Medical transports may use one or more of the distress and safetytraffic frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 for the purpose of self-identification and to establish communications. As soon as practicable, communicationsshall be transferred to an appropriate working frequency. (WRC-07)

33.21 § 12 The use of the signals described in Nos. 33.20 and 33.20A indicatesthat the message which follows concerns a protected medical transport. The messageshall convey the following data: (WRC-07)

33.22 a) call sign or other recognized means of identification of the medicaltransport;

33.23 b) position of the medical transport;

106 Maritime Manual

33.24 c) number and type of vehicles in the medical transport;

33.25 d) intended route;

33.26 e) estimated time en route and of departure and arrival, as appropriate;

33.27 f ) any other information, such as flight altitude, radio frequenciesguarded, languages used and secondary surveillance radar modes and codes.

33.30 § 14 The use of radiocommunications for announcing and identifyingmedical transports is optional; however, if they are used, the provisions of theseRegulations and particularly of this Section and of Articles 30 and 31 shall apply.

Section IV – Safety communications

33.30A § 14A The following terms apply:

a) the safety announcement is a digital selective call using a safety callformat in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication or a safetymessage format, in which case it is relayed through space stations;

b) the safety call is the initial voice or text procedure;

c) the safety message is the subsequent voice or textprocedure. (WRC-07)

33.31 § 15 1) In a terrestrial system, safety communications consist of a safetyannouncement, transmitted using digital selective calling, followed by the safety calland message transmitted using radiotelephony, narrow-band direct-printing or data. Theannouncement of the safety message shall be made on one or more of the distress andsafety calling frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 using either digitalselective calling techniques and the safety call format, or radiotelephony proceduresand the safety signal. (WRC-07)

33.31A 2) However, in order to avoid unnecessary loading of the distressand safety calling frequencies specified for use with digital selective calling techniques:

a) safety messages transmitted by coast stations in accordance with apredefined timetable should not be announced by digital selective callingtechniques;

b) safety messages which only concern vessels sailing in the vicinityshould be announced using radiotelephony procedures. (WRC-07)


33.31B 3) In addition, ship stations not equipped for digital selective callingprocedures may announce a safety message by transmitting the safety call byradiotelephony. In such cases the announcement shall be made using the frequency156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16), while taking into account that other stations outsideVHF range may not receive the announcement. (WRC-07)

33.31C 4) In the maritime mobile service, safety messages shall generallybe addressed to all stations. In some cases, however, they may be addressed to aparticular station. When using digital selective calling techniques, the safetyannouncement shall indicate which frequency is to be used to send the subsequentmessage and, in the case of a message to all stations, shall use the “All Ships” formatsetting. (WRC-07)

33.32 § 16 1) In the maritime mobile service, the safety message shall, wherepracticable, be transmitted on a working frequency in the same band(s) as those usedfor the safety announcement or call. A suitable indication to this effect shall be made atthe end of the safety call. In the case that no other option is practicable, the safetymessage may be sent by radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHFchannel 16). (WRC-07)

33.32A 2) In the maritime mobile-satellite service, a separate safetyannouncement or call does not need to be made before sending the safety message.However, if available, the appropriate network priority access settings should be usedfor sending the message. (WRC-07)

33.33 § 17 The safety signal consists of the word SECURITE. In radiotelephony,it shall be pronounced as in French.

33.34 § 18 1) The safety call format or the safety signal indicates that thecalling station has an important navigational or meteorological warning totransmit. (WRC-07)

33.34A 2) Messages from ship stations containing information concerningthe presence of cyclones shall be transmitted, with the least possible delay, to othermobile stations in the vicinity and to the appropriate authorities through a coast station,or through a rescue coordination centre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earthstation. These transmissions shall be preceded by the safety announcement orcall. (WRC-07)

33.34B 3) Messages from ship stations, containing information on thepresence of dangerous ice, dangerous wrecks, or any other imminent danger to marinenavigation, shall be transmitted as soon as possible to other ships in the vicinity, and tothe appropriate authorities through a coast station, or through a rescue coordinationcentre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earth station. These transmissions shallbe preceded by the safety announcement or call. (WRC-07)

108 Maritime Manual

33.35 § 19 1) The complete safety call should consist of:

– the safety signal SECURITE, spoken three times;



– the name of the station transmitting the safety message, spoken threetimes;


– the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC),

followed by the safety message or followed by the details of the channel to be used forthe message in the case where a working channel is to be used.

In radiotelephony, on the selected working frequency, the safety call and messageshould consist of:

– the safety signal SECURITE, spoken three times;



– the name of the station transmitting the safety message, spoken threetimes;


– the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC);

– the text of the safety message. (WRC-07)

33.36 2) In narrow-band direct-printing, the safety message shall bepreceded by the safety signal (see No. 33.33), and the identification of the transmittingstation.

33.37 § 20 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-RRecommendations shall be used for safety messages by direct-printing telegraphy. Allmessages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a lettershift signal and the safety signal SECURITE.

33.38 2) Safety communications by direct-printing telegraphy shouldnormally be established in the broadcast (forward error correction) mode. The ARQmode may subsequently be used when it is advantageous to do so.

33.38A § 20A 1) Ship stations in receipt of a safety announcement using digitalselective calling techniques and the “All Ships” format setting, or otherwise addressedto all stations, shall not acknowledge. (WRC-07)


33.38B 2) Ship stations in receipt of a safety announcement or safety calland message shall monitor the frequency or channel indicated for the message and shalllisten until they are satisfied that the message is of no concern to them. They shall notmake any transmission likely to interfere with the message. (WRC-07)

Section V – Transmission of maritime safety information2

33.39 A – General

33.41 § 22 The mode and format of the transmissions mentioned in Nos. 33.43,33.45, 33.46 and 33.48 shall be in accordance with the relevant ITU-RRecommendations.

33.42 B – International NAVTEX system

33.43 § 23 Maritime safety information shall be transmitted by means ofnarrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forward error correction using thefrequency 518 kHz in accordance with the international NAVTEX system (seeAppendix 15).

33.44 C – 490 kHz and 4209.5 kHz

33.45 § 24 1) The frequency 490 kHz may be used for the transmission ofmaritime safety information by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy withforward error correction (see Appendix 15). (WRC-03)

33.46 2) The frequency 4209.5 kHz is used exclusively for NAVTEX-type transmission by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forwarderror correction.

33.47 D – High seas maritime safety information

33.48 § 25 Maritime safety information is transmitted by means of narrow-banddirect-printing telegraphy with forward error correction using the frequencies4 210 kHz, 6 314 kHz, 8 416.5 kHz, 12 579 kHz, 16 806.5 kHz, 19 680.5 kHz,22 376 kHz and 26100.5 kHz.

_______________2 33.V.1 Maritime safety information includes navigation and meteorological warnings,meteorological forecasts and other urgent messages pertaining to safety transmitted from coaststations or coast earth stations. (WRC-07)

110 Maritime Manual

33.49 E – Maritime safety information via satellite

33.50 § 26 Maritime safety information may be transmitted via satellite in themaritime mobile-satellite service using the band 1530-1 545 MHz (see Appendix 15).

Section VI – Intership navigation safety communications

33.51 § 27 1) Intership navigation safety communications are those VHF radio-telephone communications conducted between ships for the purpose of contributing tothe safe movement of ships.

33.52 2) The frequency 156.650 MHz is used for intership navigationsafety communications (see also Appendix 15 and note k) in Appendix 18).

Section VII – Use of other frequencies for safety (WRC-07)

33.53 § 28 Radiocommunications for safety purposes concerning ship reportingcommunications, communications relating to the navigation, movements and needs ofships and weather observation messages may be conducted on any appropriatecommunications frequency, including those used for public correspondence. Interrestrial systems, the bands 415-535 kHz (see Article 52), 1 606.5-4 000 kHz (seeArticle 52), 4000-27 500 kHz (see Appendix 17), and 156-174 MHz (see Appendix 18)are used for this function. In the maritime mobile-satellite service, frequencies in thebands 1530-1 544 MHz and 1 626.5-1 645.5 MHz are used for this function as well asfor distress alerting purposes (see No. 32.2). (WRC-07)


ARTICLE 34

Alerting signals in the global maritime distress and safety system(GMDSS)

Section I – Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) andsatellite EPIRB signals

34.1 § 1 The emergency position-indicating radiobeacon signal in the band406-406.1 MHz shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-RM.633-3. (WRC-07)

Section II – Digital selective calling

34.2 § 2 The characteristics of the “distress call” (see No. 32.9) in the digitalselective calling system shall be in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations(see Resolution 27 (Rev.WRC-03)*).


112 Maritime Manual – SECTION I – RR46

ARTICLE 46

Authority of the master

46.1 § 1 The service of a ship station is placed under the supreme authority ofthe master or of the person responsible for the ship or other vessel carrying the station.

46.2 § 2 The person holding this authority shall require that each operatorcomply with these Regulations and that the ship station for which the operator isresponsible is used, at all times, in accordance with these Regulations.

46.3 § 3 The master or the person responsible, as well as all persons who mayhave knowledge of the text or even of the existence of a radiotelegram, or of anyinformation whatever obtained by means of the radiocommunication service, are placedunder the obligation of observing and ensuring the secrecy of correspondence.

46.4 § 4 The provisions of Nos. 46.1, 46.2 and 46.3 shall also apply topersonnel of ship earth stations.


ARTICLE 47

Operator’s certificates


47.2 § 1 1) The service of every ship radiotelephone station, ship earthstation and ship station using the frequencies and techniques for GMDSS, as prescribedin Chapter VII, shall be controlled by an operator holding a certificate issued orrecognized by the government to which the station is subject. Provided the station is socontrolled, other persons besides the holder of the certificate may use theequipment. (WRC-07)

47.4 2) Nevertheless, in the service of radiotelephone stations operatingsolely on frequencies above 30 MHz, each government shall decide for itself whether acertificate is necessary and, if so, shall define the conditions for obtaining it.

47.5 3) The provisions of No. 47.4 shall not, however, apply to any shipstation working on frequencies assigned for international use.

47.9 § 3 1) Each administration shall take the necessary steps to prevent, tothe maximum extent possible, the fraudulent use of certificates. For this purpose, suchcertificates shall bear the holder’s signature and shall be authenticated by the issuingadministration. Administrations may employ, if they wish, other means of identificationsuch as photographs, fingerprints, etc.

47.10 2) In the maritime mobile service the certificates issued after1 January 1978 shall bear the photograph of the holder and the holder’s date of birth.

47.11 3) To facilitate verification of certificates, these may carry, ifnecessary, in addition to the text in the national language, a translation of this text in aworking language of the Union.

47.12 4) In the maritime mobile service all certificates not in one of theworking languages of the Union and issued after 1 January 1978 shall carry at least thefollowing information in one of these working languages:

47.13 a) the name and date of birth of the holder;

47.14 b) the title of the certificate and its date of issue;

114 Maritime Manual

47.15 c) if applicable, the number and period of validity of the certificate;

47.16 d) the issuing administration.

47.17 § 4 Each administration shall take the necessary steps to place operatorsunder the obligation to preserve the secrecy of correspondence as provided for inNo. 18.4.

47.18 § 5 1) Each administration may determine the conditions under whichpersonnel holding certificates specified in Section II may be granted certificatesspecified in Nos. 47.20 to 47.23B. (WRC-07)

47.18A 2) Each administration may determine the conditions under whichpersonnel holding certificates for equipment that operate with non-GMDSS frequenciesand techniques may be granted certificates specified in Nos. 47.26 and 47.27. (WRC-07)

Section II – Categories of operator’s certificates

A GMDSS certificates (WRC-07)

47.19 § 6 1) There are six categories of certificates, shown in descendingorder of requirements, for personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations using thefrequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII. An operator meeting therequirements of a certificate automatically meets all of the requirements of lower ordercertificates. (WRC-07)

47.20 a) First-class radio electronic certificate.

47.21 b) Second-class radio electronic certificate.

47.22 c) General operator’s certificate.

47.23 d) Restricted operator’s certificate.

47.23A e) Long range certificate (for non-SOLAS vessels). (WRC-07)

47.23B f) Short range certificate (for non-SOLAS vessels). (WRC-07)


47.24 2) The holder of one of the certificates specified in Nos. 47.20 to47.23 may carry out the service of ship stations or ship earth stations using thefrequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII.

B Non-GMDSS certificates (WRC-07)

47.25 § 7 1) There are six categories of certificates. Existing certificates of thecategories listed in No. 47.26 may continue to be used for the purposes they were issuedfor. (WRC-07)

47.26 § 8 The following maritime radio operator’s certificates are still valid:

1 Radiocommunication operator’s general certificate.

2 First-class radio telegraph operator’s certificate.

3 Second-class radio telegraph operator’s certificate.

4 Radiotelegraph operator’s special certificate.

5 Radiotelephone operator’s general certificate.

6 Restricted radiotelephone operator’s certificate. (WRC-07)

47.27 § 9 The requirements for the certificates of this section, for whichcandidates must show proof of technical and professional knowledge and qualification,are shown in Table 47-1. (WRC-07)

116 Maritime Manual

TABLE 47-1

Requirements for radio electronic and operator’s certificates

The relevant certificate is issued to a candidate whohas given proof of the technical and professional

knowledge and qualifications enumerated below, asindicated by an asterisk in the appropriate box

1st-classradio

electroniccertificate

2nd-classradio


Generaloperator’scertificate

Restrictedoperator’scertificate

Knowledge of the principles of electricity and thetheory of radio and of electronics sufficient to meetthe requirements specified below:

* *

Theoretical knowledge of GMDSS radiocommu-nication equipment, including narrow-band direct-printing telegraph and radiotelephone transmitters andreceivers, digital selective calling equipment, shipearth stations, emergency position-indicatingradiobeacons, marine antenna systems, radioequipment for survival craft together with all auxiliaryitems, including power supplies, as well as generalknowledge of the principles of other equipmentgenerally used for radionavigation, with particularreference to maintaining equipment in service.

*

General theoretical knowledge of GMDSS radio-communication equipment, including narrow-banddirect-printing telegraph and radiotelephonetransmitters and receivers, digital selective callingequipment, ship earth stations, emergency position-indicating radiobeacons, marine antenna systems,radio equipment for survival craft together with allauxiliary items, including power supplies, as well asgeneral knowledge of the principles of otherequipment generally used for radionavigation, withparticular reference to maintaining equipment inservice.

*

Practical knowledge of the operation and knowledgeof the preventive maintenance of the equipmentindicated above.

* *

Practical knowledge necessary for the location andrepair (using appropriate testing equipment and tools)of faults in the equipment mentioned above whichmay occur during a voyage.

*

Practical knowledge necessary for effecting repairs inthe case of faults in the equipment indicated above,using the means available on board and, if necessary,replacing modular units.

*


TABLE 47-1 (end)

NOTE 1 – A restricted operator’s certificate covers only the operation of GMDSS equipment requiredfor GMDSS sea areas A1, and does not cover the operation of GMDSS A2/A3/A4 equipment fitted on aship over and above the basic A1 requirements, even if the ship is in a sea area A1. GMDSS seaareas A1, A2, A3 and A4 are identified in the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,(SOLAS), 1974, as amended.

NOTE 2 – The conditions for the issuing of the long-range and short-range Certificates are contained inResolution 343 (WRC-97). (WRC-07)

The relevant certificate is issued to a candidate whohas given proof of the technical and professional

knowledge and qualifications enumerated below, asindicated by an asterisk in the appropriate box

1st-classradio


2nd-classradio


Generaloperator’scertificate

Restrictedoperator’scertificate

Detailed practical knowledge of the operation of all theGMDSS sub-systems and equipment.

* * *

Practical knowledge of the operation of all the GMDSSsub-systems and equipment which is required while theship is within the range of VHF coast stations (seeNOTE 1).

*

Ability to send and to receive correctly by radiote-lephone and direct-printing telegraphy.

* * *

Ability to send and to receive correctly by radio-telephone.

*

Detailed knowledge of the regulations applying toradiocommunications, knowledge of the documentsrelating to charges for radiocommunications andknowledge of those provisions of the InternationalConvention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS),1974, as amended which relate to radio.

* * *

Knowledge of the regulations applying to radio-telephone communications and specifically of that partof those regulations relating to the safety of life.

*

Sufficient knowledge of one of the working languagesof the Union. Candidates should be able to expressthemselves satisfactorily in that language, both orallyand in writing.

* * *

An elementary knowledge of one of the workinglanguages of the Union. Candidates should be able toexpress themselves satisfactorily in that language, bothorally and in writing. Administrations may waive theabove language requirements for holders of a restrictedoperator’s certificate when the ship station is confinedto a limited area specified by the administrationconcerned. In such cases the certificate shall be suitablyendorsed.

*

118 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 48

Personnel

Section I – Personnel of coast stations and coast earth stations

48.1 § 1 Administrations shall ensure that the staff on duty in coast stationsand in coast earth stations are adequately qualified to operate the stations efficiently.

Section II – Class and minimum number of personnel for ship stationsand ship earth stations

48.2 § 2 Administrations shall ensure that the personnel of ship stations andship earth stations are adequately qualified to enable efficient operation of the station,and shall take steps to ensure the operational availability and maintenance of equipmentfor distress and safety communications in accordance with the relevant internationalagreements.

48.3 § 3 An adequately qualified person shall be available to act as a dedicatedcommunications operator in cases of distress.

48.4 § 4 The personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which aradio installation is compulsory under international agreements and which use thefrequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII shall, with respect to theprovisions of Article 47, include:

48.5 a) for stations on board ships which sail beyond the range of VHF coaststations, taking into account the provisions of the International Convention forthe Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended: a holder of a first- orsecond-class radio electronic certificate or a general operator’s certificate;

48.6 b) for stations on board ships which sail solely within the range of VHFcoast stations, taking into account the provisions of the InternationalConvention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended: a holderof a first- or second-class radio electronic certificate or a general operator’scertificate or a restricted operator’s certificate.


48.7 § 5 The personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which aradio installation is not compulsory either under international agreements or nationalregulations and which use the frequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VIIshall be adequately qualified and certificated in accordance with the administration’srequirements. Guidance concerning appropriate qualifications and certification isprovided in Resolution 343 (WRC-97). That Resolution describes two appropriatecertificates for use by personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which aradio installation is not compulsory.


ARTICLE 49

Inspection of stations

49.1 § 1 1) The governments or appropriate administrations of countrieswhich a ship station or ship earth station visits may require the production of the licencefor examination. The operator of the station, or the person responsible for the station,shall facilitate this examination. The licence shall be kept in such a way that it can beproduced upon request. As far as possible, the licence, or a copy certified by theauthority which has issued it, should be permanently exhibited in the station.

49.2 2) The inspectors shall have in their possession an identity card orbadge, issued by the competent authority, which they shall show on request of themaster or person responsible for the ship or other vessel carrying the ship station or theship earth station.

49.3 3) When the licence cannot be produced or when manifestirregularities are observed, governments or administrations may inspect the radioinstallations in order to satisfy themselves that these conform to the conditions imposedby these Regulations.

49.4 4) In addition, inspectors have the right to require the production ofthe operators’ certificates, but proof of professional knowledge may not be demanded.

49.5 § 2 1) When a government or an administration has found it necessaryto adopt the course indicated in No. 49.3, or when the operators’ certificates cannot beproduced, the government or administration to which the ship station or ship earthstation is subject shall be so informed without delay. In addition, the procedurespecified in Article 15 is followed when necessary.

49.6 2) Before leaving, the inspector shall report the result of hisinspection to the master, or the person responsible for the ship or other vessel carryingthe ship station or ship earth station. If any breach of the conditions imposed by theseRegulations is observed, the inspector shall make this report in writing.

49.7 § 3 Member States undertake not to impose upon foreign ship stations orupon foreign ship earth stations, which are temporarily within their territorial waters orwhich make a temporary stay in their territory, technical and operating conditions moresevere than those contemplated in these Regulations. This undertaking in no way affectsarrangements which are made under international agreements relating to maritimenavigation, and which are therefore not covered by these Regulations.

49.8 § 4 The frequencies of emissions of ship stations shall be checked by theinspection service to which these stations are subject.


ARTICLE 50

Working hours of stations

50.1 § 1 In order to permit the application of the following rules on the subjectof hours of watch, every station of the maritime mobile service and the maritimemobile-satellite service shall have an accurate clock correctly regulated to CoordinatedUniversal Time (UTC).

50.2 § 2 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), reckoned from 0000 to 2359 hbeginning at midnight, shall be used for all entries in the radiocommunication servicelog and in all similar documents of ships compulsorily equipped withradiocommunication apparatus in compliance with an international agreement; thissame provision will apply, as far as possible, to other ships.

50.3 § 3 1) The services of coast stations and coast earth stations are, as faras possible, continuous (day and night). Certain coast stations, however, may have aservice of limited duration. Each administration or recognized private operating agencyduly authorized to that effect fixes the hours of service for coast stations under itsjurisdiction.

50.4 2) These hours of service shall be notified to theRadiocommunication Bureau, who shall publish them in the List of Coast Stations andSpecial Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

50.5 § 4 Coast stations whose service is not continuous shall not close beforefinishing all operations resulting from a distress call or from an urgency or safetysignal. (WRC-07)

122 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 51

Conditions to be observed in the maritime services

Section I – Maritime mobile service

51.1 A – General

51.2 § 1 The energy radiated by receiving apparatus shall be reduced to thelowest practical value and shall not cause harmful interference to other stations.

51.3 § 2 Administrations shall take all practicable steps necessary to ensurethat the operation of any electrical or electronic apparatus installed in ship stations doesnot cause harmful interference to the essential radio services of stations which areoperating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations.

51.4 § 3 1) Changes of frequency in the sending and receiving apparatus ofany ship station shall be capable of being made as rapidly as possible.

51.5 2) Installations of any ship station shall be capable, oncecommunication is established, of changing from transmission to reception and viceversa in as short a time as possible.

51.5A 3) The operation of a broadcasting service (see No. 1.38) by a shipstation at sea is prohibited (see also No. 23.2).

51.6 § 4 Ship stations and ship earth stations other than survival craft stationsshall be provided with the documents enumerated in the appropriate section ofAppendix 16.

51.7 § 5 When any ship station transmitter itself cannot be controlled in such away that its frequency satisfies the tolerance specified in Appendix 2, the ship stationshall be provided with a device, having a precision equal to at least one-half of thistolerance, for measuring the frequency of the emission.


51.24 C – Ship stations using digital selective calling

51.25 § 12 The characteristics of the digital selective calling equipment shall bein accordance with ITU-R Recommendations (see Resolution 27 (Rev.WRC-03)*).

51.26 C1 – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz

51.27 § 13 All ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective callingto work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall be able to send andreceive class F1B or J2B emissions on at least two digital selective calling channelsnecessary for their service.

51.28 C2 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4000 kHz (WRC-03)

51.29 § 14 All ship stations equipped with digital selective calling apparatus towork in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be ableto: (WRC-03)

51.30 a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the frequency2 187.5 kHz;

51.31 b) in addition, send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on otherdigital selective calling frequencies in this band necessary to carry out theirservice.

51.32 C3 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz

51.33 § 15 All ship stations equipped with digital selective calling apparatus towork in the authorized bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be able to:

51.34 a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the frequenciesdesignated for digital selective distress calling in each of the maritimeHF bands in which they are operating (see also No. 32.9);

51.35 b) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on an internationalcalling channel (specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9) in each of theHF maritime mobile bands necessary for their service; (WRC-07)

51.36 c) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on other digital selectivecalling channels in each of the HF maritime mobile bands necessary for theirservice.


124 Maritime Manual

51.37 C4 – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

51.38 § 16 All ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective callingto work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz shall be able to sendand receive class G2B emissions on the frequency 156.525 MHz.

51.39 CA – Ship stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy

51.40 § 17 1) All ship stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphyequipment shall be able to send and receive on the frequency designated for distresstraffic by narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy in the frequency bands in which theyare operating.

51.41 2) The characteristics of the narrow-band direct-printing equipmentshall be in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476-5, ITU-R M.625-3 andITU-R M.627-1.

51.42 CA1 – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz

51.43 § 18 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHzshall be able to:

51.44 a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the workingfrequencies necessary to carry out their service;

51.45 b) receive class F1B emissions on 518 kHz, if complying with theprovisions of Chapter VII.

51.46 CA2 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz (WRC-03)

51.47 § 19 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1606.5 kHz and4 000 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on workingfrequencies necessary to carry out their service. (WRC-03)

51.48 CA3 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz

51.49 § 20 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 4000 kHz and27 500 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on workingfrequencies in each of the HF maritime mobile bands necessary to carry out theirservice.


51.50 D – Ship stations using radiotelephony

51.51 D1 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz (WRC-03)

51.52 § 21 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony apparatus to work inthe authorized bands between 1606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall be able to:

51.53 a) send class J3E emissions on a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz andreceive class J3E emissions on a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz, except forsuch apparatus as is referred to in No. 51.56; (WRC-07)

51.54 b) send, in addition, J3E emissions on at least two working frequencies1;

51.55 c) receive, in addition, J3E emissions on all other frequencies necessaryfor their service.

51.56 § 22 The provisions of Nos. 51.54 and 51.55 do not apply to apparatusprovided solely for distress, urgency and safety purposes.

51.57 D2 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz

51.58 § 23 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony to work in theauthorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz and which do not comply with theprovisions of Chapter VII should be able to send and receive on the carrier frequencies4 125 kHz and 6215 kHz. However, all ship stations which comply with the provisionsof Chapter VII shall be able to send and receive on the carrier frequencies designated inArticle 31 for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony for the frequency bands inwhich they are operating. (WRC-07)

51.59 D3 – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

51.60 § 24 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony to work in theauthorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz (see No. 5.226 and Appendix 18)shall be able to send and receive class G3E emissions on:

51.61 a) the distress, safety and calling frequency 156.8 MHz;

51.62 b) the primary intership frequency 156.3 MHz;

51.63 c) the intership navigation safety frequency 156.65 MHz;

51.64 d) all the frequencies necessary for their service.

_______________1 51.54.1 In certain areas, administrations may reduce this requirement to one workingfrequency.

126 Maritime Manual

Section II – Maritime mobile-satellite service

51.65 § 25 The energy radiated by receiving apparatus shall be reduced to thelowest practical value and shall not cause harmful interference to other stations.

51.66 § 26 Administrations shall take all practicable steps necessary to ensurethat the operation of any electrical or electronic apparatus installed in ship earth stationsdoes not cause harmful interference to the essential radio services of stations which areoperating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations.

Section III – Stations on board aircraft communicating with stations ofthe maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service

51.67 A – General provisions

51.68 § 27 1) Stations on board aircraft may communicate with stations of themaritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services. They shall conform to thoseprovisions of these Regulations which relate to these services.

51.69 2) For this purpose stations on board aircraft should use thefrequencies allocated to the maritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services.

51.70 3) Stations on board aircraft, when handling public correspondencewith stations of the maritime mobile service or of the maritime mobile-satellite service,shall comply with all the provisions applicable to the handling of public correspondencein the maritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services (see particularlyArticles 53, 54, 55, 57 and 58).

51.71 § 28 In the case of communication between stations on board aircraft andstations of the maritime mobile service, radiotelephone calling may be renewed asspecified in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1171 andradiotelegraph calling may be renewed after an interval of five minutes,notwithstanding the procedure contained in the most recent version of RecommendationITU-R M.1170. (WRC-07)


51.72 B – Provisions relating to the use of frequencies between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

51.73 § 29 1) Having regard to interference which may be caused by aircraftstations at high altitudes, frequencies in the maritime mobile bands above 30 MHz shallnot be used by aircraft stations, with the exception of those frequencies between156 MHz and 174 MHz specified in Appendix 18 which may be used provided that thefollowing conditions are observed:

51.74 a) the altitude of aircraft stations shall not exceed 300 m (1000 feet),except for reconnaissance aircraft participating in ice-breaking operations,where an altitude of 450 m (1 500 feet) is allowed;

51.75 b) the mean power of aircraft station transmitters shall not exceed 5 W;however, a power of 1 W or less shall be used to the maximum extentpossible;

51.76 c) aircraft stations shall use the channels designated for this purpose inAppendix 18;

51.77 d) except as provided in No. 51.75, aircraft station transmitters shallcomply with the technical characteristics given in Recommendation ITU-RM.489-2;

51.78 e) the communications of an aircraft station shall be brief and limited tooperations in which stations of the maritime mobile service are primarilyinvolved and where direct communication between the aircraft and the ship orcoast station is required.

51.79 2) The frequency 156.3 MHz may be used by stations on boardaircraft for safety purposes. It may also be used for communication between shipstations and stations on board aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescueoperations (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07)

51.80 3) The frequency 156.8 MHz may be used by stations on boardaircraft for safety purposes only (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07)

128 Maritime Manual

ARTICLE 52

Special rules relating to the use of frequencies


52.1 A – Single-sideband radiotelegraph transmissions

52.2 § 1 1) Where these provisions specify A1A emission, class A1B or J2Aemissions shall be considered equivalent.

52.3 2) Where these provisions specify class F1B emission, class J2Band J2D emissions shall be considered equivalent. However, class J2D emission shallnot be used with the HF distress and safety frequencies listed in Appendix 15.

52.4 B – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz

52.5 § 2 Ship stations authorized to work in the bands between 415 kHz and535 kHz shall transmit on the frequencies indicated in this Article (see No. 52.39).

52.6 § 3 1) In the maritime mobile service, no assignments shall be made onthe frequency 518 kHz other than for transmission by coast stations of meteorologicaland navigational warnings and urgent information to ships by means of automaticnarrow-band direct-printing telegraphy (International NAVTEX System).

52.7 2) In the maritime mobile service, the frequency 490 kHz is usedexclusively for the transmission by coast stations of meteorological and navigationalwarnings and urgent information to ships by means of narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy. (WRC-03)

52.8 C – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4000 kHz (WRC-03)

52.9 § 4 1) In Region 1, frequencies assigned to stations operating in thebands between 1 850 kHz and 3 800 kHz (see Article 5) should, whenever possible, bein accordance with the following subdivision:

– 1 850-1950 kHz: Coast stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 1 950-2045 kHz: Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 2 194-2262.5 kHz: Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.


– 2 262.5-2 498 kHz: Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 2 502-2578 kHz: Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy.

– 2 578-2850 kHz: Coast stations, narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy and single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 3 155-3200 kHz: Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy.

– 3 200-3340 kHz: Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 3 340-3400 kHz: Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 3 500-3600 kHz: Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.


52.10 2) In Region 1, frequencies assigned to stations operating in thebands listed below shall be in accordance with the following subdivision:

– 1 606.5-1 625 kHz: Coast stations, narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy, digital selective calling.


– 2 045-2141.5 kHz: Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.

– 2 141.5-2 160 kHz: Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy, digital selective calling.

52.11 § 5 In Regions 2 and 3, the carrier frequencies 2 635 kHz (assignedfrequency 2 636.4 kHz) and 2638 kHz (assigned frequency 2 639.4 kHz) are used assingle-sideband intership radiotelephony working frequencies in addition to thefrequencies prescribed for common use in certain services. The carrier frequencies2 635 kHz and 2638 kHz should be used with class J3E emissions only. In Region 3these frequencies are protected by a guardband between 2634 kHz and 2 642 kHz.

52.12 D – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz

52.13 § 6 Bands exclusively allocated to the maritime mobile service between4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz (see Article 5) are subdivided into categories and sub-bandsas indicated in Appendix 17.

52.14 E – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

52.15 § 7 The ship movement service should be operated only on frequenciesallocated to the maritime mobile service in the band 156-174 MHz.

130 Maritime Manual

Section III – Use of frequencies for narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy

52.94 A – General

52.95 § 44 Frequencies assigned to coast stations for narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations(List IV). This List shall also indicate any other useful information concerning theservice performed by each coast station. (WRC-07)

52.96 B – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz

52.97 § 45 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing apparatusto work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall be able to send andreceive class F1B emissions as specified in No. 51.44. Additionally, ship stationscomplying with the provisions of Chapter VII shall be able to receive class F1Bemissions on 518 kHz (see No. 51.45).


52.100 § 46 1) All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printingtelegraph apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and4 000 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on at least twoworking frequencies. (WRC-03)

52.101 2) Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy is forbidden in the band2 170-2194 kHz, except as provided for in Appendix 15 and Resolution 354(WRC-07). (WRC-07)


52.103 § 47 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraphapparatus to work in the authorized bands between 4000 kHz and 27500 kHz shall beable to send and receive class F1B emissions as specified in No. 51.49. The assignablefrequencies are indicated in Appendix 17.


52.104 § 48 Coast stations employing class F1B emissions and operating in thebands exclusively allocated to the maritime mobile service between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz shall at no time use mean powers in excess of the following:

52.105 1) In all bands, the working frequencies for ship stations usingnarrow-band direct-printing telegraphy at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and200 Bd for PSK, including those paired with the working frequencies assignable tocoast stations (see Appendix 17), are spaced 0.5 kHz apart. The frequencies assignableto ship stations which are paired with those used by coast stations are shown inAppendix 17. The frequencies assignable to ship stations which are not paired withthose used by coast stations are shown in Appendix 17.

52.107 2) Each administration shall, if necessary, assign to each shipstation under its jurisdiction and employing non-paired narrow-band direct-printingtelegraphy one or more frequencies reserved for this purpose and shown inAppendix 17.


52.109 § 49 All ship stations equipped with direct-printing telegraph apparatusmay work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz and shall conformto the provisions of Appendix 18.

Section IV – Use of frequencies for digital selective-calling

52.110 A – General

52.111 § 50 The provisions described in this Section are applicable to calling andacknowledgement, when digital selective-calling techniques are used, except in cases ofdistress, urgency and safety, to which the provisions of Chapter VII apply.

Band Maximummean power

4 MHz 5 kW 6 MHz 5 kW 8 MHz 10 kW12 MHz 15 kW16 MHz 15 kW18/19 MHz 15 kW22 MHz 15 kW25/26 MHz 15 kW

132 Maritime Manual

52.112 § 51 The characteristics of the digital selective-calling equipment shall bein accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and should be in accordance withthe most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.493. (WRC-07)

52.113 § 52 The frequencies on which coast stations provide services using digitalselective-calling techniques shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and SpecialService Stations (List IV), which shall also supply any other useful informationconcerning such services. (WRC-07)

52.114 B – Bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz

B1 – Mode of operation

52.115 § 53 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling andacknowledgement in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz shall beF1B.

52.116 2) When transmitting digital selective calls and acknowledgementsin the bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz, coast stations should use the minimumpower necessary to cover their service area.

52.117 § 54 Transmissions of digital selective calls and acknowledgements byship stations shall be limited to a mean power of 400 W.

B2 – Call and acknowledgement

52.118 § 55 For call and acknowledgement by digital selective-calling techniques,an appropriate channel shall be used.

52.119 § 56 The international digital selective-calling frequency 455.5 kHz maybe assigned to any coast station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, itmay be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or incases where it is not known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within thesebands the ship station is maintaining watch.

52.120 § 57 The international digital selective-calling frequency 458.5 kHz maybe used by any ship station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, it shallonly be used when calling cannot be made on national frequencies assigned to the coaststation.

52.121 § 58 The frequency to be used for transmission of an acknowledgementshall normally be the frequency paired with the calling frequency used.


B3 – Watch

52.122 § 59 1) A coast station providing international public correspondenceservice using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 415 kHz and526.5 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selective-calling watch on appropriate national or international calling frequencies. The hoursand frequencies shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special ServiceStations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.123 2) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-callingto work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz should, when withinthe coverage area of coast stations providing services using digital selective-callingtechniques in these bands, maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watch on oneor more appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands, taking intoaccount the digital selective-calling frequencies operated by the coast stations.


C1 – Mode of operation

52.125 § 60 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling andacknowledgement in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall beF1B. (WRC-03)

52.126 2) Coast stations should, when transmitting digital selective callsand acknowledgements in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz, use theminimum power necessary to cover their service area. (WRC-03)

52.127 3) In Region 1, transmissions of digital selective calls andacknowledgements by ship stations shall be limited to a mean power of 400 W.

C2 – Call and acknowledgement

52.128 § 61 1) When calling a coast station by digital selective-callingtechniques, ship stations should use for the call, in order of preference:

52.129 a) a national digital selective-calling channel on which the coast stationis maintaining watch;

52.130 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.131, the international digitalselective-calling frequency 2 189.5 kHz.

52.131 2) The international digital selective-calling frequency 2 189.5 kHzmay be assigned to any ship station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, itmay be used as a general rule by ship stations to call coast stations of anothernationality.

134 Maritime Manual

52.132 3) A ship station calling another ship station by digital selective-calling techniques should use the frequency 2 177 kHz for the call. Acknowledgementsof such calls should also be made on this frequency.

52.133 § 62 1) When calling ship stations by digital selective-calling techniques,coast stations should use for the call, in the order of preference:


52.135 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.136, the international digitalselective-calling frequency 2 177 kHz.

52.136 2) The international digital selective-calling frequency 2177 kHzmay be assigned to any coast station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency,it may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, orin cases where it is not known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within thebands between 1606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz the ship station is maintainingwatch. (WRC-03)

52.137 § 63 The frequency to be used for transmission of an acknowledgementshall normally be the frequency paired with the frequency used for the call received, asindicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) (see alsoNo. 52.113). (WRC-07)

C3 – Watch

52.138 § 64 1) The provisions detailed in this Sub-section are applicable towatch-keeping by digital selective-calling, except for distress, urgency and safetypurposes, to which the provisions of Section III of Article 31 apply.

52.139 2) A coast station providing international public correspondenceservice using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 1606.5 kHzand 4000 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selective-calling watch on appropriate national or international calling frequencies. The hoursand frequencies shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special ServiceStations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.140 3) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-callingto work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz should, whenwithin the coverage area of coast stations providing services using digital selective-calling techniques in these bands, maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watchon one or more appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands,taking into account the digital selective-calling frequencies operated by the coaststations. (WRC-03)



D1 – Mode of operation

52.142 § 65 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling andacknowledgement in the authorized bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall beF1B.

52.143 2) When transmitting digital selective calls and acknowledgementsin the bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz, coast stations shall at no time use amean power in excess of the following values:

52.144 3) Transmissions of digital selective calls and acknowledgementsby ship stations in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be limited to amean power of 1.5 kW.

D2 – Call and acknowledgement

52.145 § 66 A station calling another station by digital selective-callingtechniques within the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shouldchoose an appropriate digital selective-calling frequency, taking into accountpropagation characteristics.

52.146 § 67 1) When calling a coast station by digital selective-callingtechniques on frequencies within the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz, ship stations should use for the call, in order of preference:


Band Maximummean power

4 MHz 5 kW 6 MHz 5 kW 8 MHz 10 kW12 MHz 15 kW16 MHz 15 kW18/19 MHz 15 kW22 MHz 15 kW25/26 MHz 15 kW

136 Maritime Manual

52.148 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.149, one of the internationaldigital selective-calling frequencies. (WRC-07)

52.149 2) The international digital selective-calling frequencies shall be asindicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and may be used by any ship station. Inorder to reduce interference on these frequencies, they shall only be used when callingcannot be made on nationally assigned frequencies. (WRC-07)

52.150 § 68 1) When calling ship stations by digital selective-calling techniqueson frequencies within the bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz coast stationsshould use for the call, in order of preference:


52.152 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.153, one of the internationaldigital selective-calling frequencies. (WRC-07)

52.153 2) The international digital selective-calling frequencies shall be asindicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and may be assigned to any coaststation. In order to reduce interference on these frequencies, they may be used as ageneral rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or in cases where it isnot known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within the bands concernedthe ship station is maintaining watch. (WRC-07)

D3 – Watch

52.154 § 69 1) The provisions detailed in this Sub-section are applicable towatch-keeping by digital selective-calling, except for distress, urgency and safetypurposes, to which the provisions of Section III of Article 31 apply.

52.155 2) A coast station providing international public correspondenceservice using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 4000 kHzand 27500 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selective-calling watch on the appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies as indicated in theList of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.156 3) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-callingto work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz should maintainautomatic digital selective-calling watch on appropriate digital selective-callingfrequencies within these bands, taking into account propagation characteristics and thecalling frequencies for coast stations providing service using digital selective-callingtechniques.



E1 – Mode of operation

52.158 § 70 The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling andacknowledgement in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz shall beG2B.

E2 – Call and acknowledgement

52.159 § 71 1) The frequency 156.525 MHz is an international frequency in themaritime mobile service used for distress, urgency, safety and calling by digitalselective-calling techniques (see Nos. 33.8 and 33.31 and Appendix 15). (WRC-07)

52.160 2) Calling by digital selective-calling techniques within theauthorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, from ship to coast station, fromcoast station to ship and from ship to ship should, as a general rule, be made on thedigital selective-calling frequency 156.525 MHz.

E3 – Watch

52.161 § 72 Information concerning watch-keeping by automatic digital selective-calling on the frequency 156.525 MHz by coast stations shall be given in the List ofCoast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) (see also No. 31.13). (WRC-07)

52.162 § 73 Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-calling towork in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz should, while at sea,maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watch on the frequency 156.525 MHz(see also No. 31.17).

Section V – Use of frequencies for wide-band telegraphy, facsimile, specialtransmission systems and oceanographic data transmissions

52.163 A – Wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems

52.164 A1 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz (WRC-03)

52.165 § 74 In Region 2, the frequencies in the band 2068.5-2 078.5 kHz areassigned to ship stations using wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmissionsystems. The provisions of No. 52.171 apply.

138 Maritime Manual

52.166 A2 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz

52.167 § 75 In all bands, the working frequencies for ship stations equipped to usewide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems are spaced 4 kHzapart. The assignable frequencies are shown in Appendix 17.

52.168 § 76 1) Each administration shall assign to each ship station under itsjurisdiction and employing wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmissionsystems one or more series of the working frequencies reserved for this purpose shownin Appendix 17. The total number of series assigned to each ship station shall bedetermined by traffic requirements.

52.169 2) When ship stations employing wide-band telegraphy, facsimileand special transmission systems are assigned less than the total number of workingfrequencies in a band, the administration concerned shall assign working frequencies tosuch ships in accordance with an orderly system of rotation that will ensureapproximately the same number of assignments on any one working frequency.

52.170 3) However, within the limits of the bands given in Appendix 17,administrations may, to meet the needs of specific systems, assign frequencies in adifferent manner from that shown in Appendix 17. Nevertheless administrations shalltake into account, as far as possible, the provisions of Appendix 17, concerningchannelling and the 4 kHz spacing.

52.171 § 77 Ship stations equipped for wide-band telegraphy, facsimile andspecial transmission systems may, in the frequency bands reserved for such use, employany class of emission provided that such emissions can be contained within the wide-band channels indicated in Appendix 17. However, the use of A1A Morse telegraphyand telephony is excluded except for circuit alignment purposes.

52.172 § 78 Coast radiotelegraph stations employing multichannel telegraphemissions and operating in the bands allocated exclusively to the maritime mobileservice between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz shall at no time use a mean power in excessof 2.5 kW per 500 Hz bandwidth.

52.173 B – Oceanographic data transmission systems

52.174 § 79 In all bands, the assignable frequencies for oceanographic datatransmissions are spaced 0.3 kHz apart. The assignable frequencies are shown inAppendix 17.

52.175 § 80 The frequency bands for oceanographic data transmission systems(see Appendix 17) may also be used by buoy stations for oceanographic datatransmission and by stations interrogating these buoys.


Section VI – Use of frequencies for radiotelephony

52.176 A – General

52.177 § 81 Except with regard to the provisions of Article 11 concerningnotification and recording of frequencies, when designating frequencies for single-sideband radiotelephony the carrier frequency is always to be designated. The assignedfrequency shall be 1400 Hz higher than the carrier frequency.

52.178 § 82 Coast stations shall not occupy idle radiotelephone channels byemitting identification signals, such as those generated by call slips or tapes.Exceptionally, a coast station, when requested by a ship station for the purpose ofestablishing a radiotelephone call, may emit a receiver tuning signal of not more than10 s duration.

52.179 § 83 However, coast stations in automatic service in the UHF band mayemit marking signals. The emission power of the signals shall however be limited to theminimum value necessary for effective operation of the signalling. Such emissions shallnot cause harmful interference to the maritime mobile service in other countries.

52.180 § 84 The frequencies of transmission (and reception when thesefrequencies are in pairs as in the case of duplex radiotelephony) assigned to each coaststation shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations(List IV). This List shall also indicate any other useful information concerning theservice performed by each coast station. (WRC-07)

52.181 § 85 Single-sideband apparatus in radiotelephone stations of the maritimemobile service operating in the bands allocated to this service between 1606.5 kHz and4 000 kHz and in the bands allocated exclusively to this service between 4000 kHz and27 500 kHz shall satisfy the technical and operational conditions specified inRecommendation ITU-R M.1173. (WRC-03)

52.182 B – Bands between 1606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz (WRC-03)

B1 – Mode of operation of stations

52.183 § 86 1) Unless otherwise specified in the Radio Regulations (seeNos. 51.53, 52.188, 52.189 and 52.199), the class of emission to be used in the bandsbetween 1 606.5 kHz and 4000 kHz shall be J3E. (WRC-07)

52.184 2) The peak envelope power of coast radiotelephone stationsoperating in the authorized bands allocated between 1606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shallnot exceed: (WRC-03)

52.185 – 5 kW for coast stations located north of latitude 32° N;

140 Maritime Manual

52.186 – 10 kW for coast stations located south of latitude 32° N.

52.187 3) The normal mode of operation for each coast station shall beindicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.188 4) Transmissions in the bands 2 170-2173.5 kHz and 2 190.5-2 194 kHz with the carrier frequency 2 170.5 kHz and the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz,respectively, are limited to class J3E emissions and are limited to a peak envelopepower of 400 W. (WRC-07)

B2 – Call and reply

52.189 § 87 1) The frequency 2 182 kHz1 is an international distress frequencyfor radiotelephony (see Appendix 15 and Resolution 354 (WRC-07)). (WRC-07)

52.190 2) The frequency 2 182 kHz may also be used:

52.191 a) for call and reply in accordance with the provisions of Article 57;

52.192 b) by coast stations to announce the transmission, on another frequency,of traffic lists as specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1171. (WRC-03)

52.193 3) In addition, an administration may assign to its stations otherfrequencies for call and reply.

52.194 § 88 To facilitate use of the frequency 2 182 kHz for distress purposes, alltransmissions on 2182 kHz shall be kept to a minimum.

52.195 § 89 1) Before transmitting on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, a stationshall, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on this frequency fora reasonable period to make sure that no distress traffic is being sent. (WRC-03)

52.196 2) The provisions of No. 52.195 do not apply to stations in distress.

B3 – Traffic

52.197 § 90 1) Coast stations which use 2 182 kHz for calling shall be able touse at least one other frequency in the authorized bands between 1606.5 kHz and2 850 kHz. (WRC-03)

_______________1 52.189.1 Where administrations provide at their coast stations a watch on 2182 kHz forreceiving class J3E emissions as well as class A3E and H3E emissions, ship stations may callthose coast stations for safety purposes using class H3E or J3E emissions.


52.198 2) Coast stations authorized to use radiotelephony on one or morefrequencies other than 2 182 kHz in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and2 850 kHz shall use class J3E emissions on those frequencies (see alsoNo. 52.188). (WRC-03)

52.199 3) Coast stations open to the public correspondence service on oneor more frequencies between 1606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall also be capable oftransmitting class H3E and J3E emissions with a carrier frequency of 2182 kHz, and ofreceiving class A3E, H3E and J3E emissions with a carrier frequency of2 182 kHz. (WRC-03)

52.200 4) One of the frequencies which coast stations are required to beable to use (see No. 52.197) is printed in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations andSpecial Service Stations (List IV) to indicate that it is the normal working frequency ofthe stations. Supplementary frequencies, if assigned, are shown in ordinarytype. (WRC-07)

52.201 5) Working frequencies of coast stations shall be chosen in such amanner as to avoid interference with other stations.

B4 – Additional provisions applying to Region 1

52.202 § 91 The peak envelope power of ship radiotelephone stations operating inthe authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall not exceed400 W. (WRC-03)

52.203 § 92 1) All stations on ships making international voyages should be ableto use:

52.204 a) the following ship-to-shore working frequency, if required by theirservice:

52.205 – carrier frequency 2 045 kHz (assigned frequency 2046.4 kHz) forclass J3E emissions;

52.206 b) the following intership frequency, if required by their service:

52.207 – carrier frequency 2 048 kHz (assigned frequency 2049.4 kHz) forclass J3E emissions;

52.208 This frequency may be used as an additional ship-to-shore frequency.

52.210 § 93 1) Ships frequently exchanging correspondence with a coast stationof a nationality other than their own may use the same frequencies as ships of thenationality of the coast station:

52.211 – where mutually agreed by the administrations concerned; or

142 Maritime Manual

52.212 – where the facility is open to ships of all nationalities by virtue of anote against each of the frequencies concerned in the List of CoastStations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.213 2) In exceptional circumstances, if frequency usage according toNos. 52.203 to 52.208 or No. 52.210 is not possible, a ship station may use one of itsown assigned national ship-to-shore frequencies for communication with a coast stationof another nationality, under the express condition that the coast station as well as theship station shall take precautions, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-RM.1171, to ensure that the use of such a frequency will not cause harmful interferenceto the service for which the frequency in question is authorized. (WRC-03)

52.214 § 94 The following ship-to-shore frequencies:

– carrier frequency 2 051 kHz (assigned frequency 2 052.4 kHz),

– carrier frequency 2 054 kHz (assigned frequency 2 055.4 kHz), and

– carrier frequency 2 057 kHz (assigned frequency 2 058.4 kHz),

may be assigned to coast stations as receiving frequencies.

B5 – Additional provisions applying to Regions 2 and 3

52.215 § 95 All stations on ships making international voyages should, if requiredby their service, be able to use the intership carrier frequencies:

2635 kHz (assigned frequency 2 636.4 kHz)

2638 kHz (assigned frequency 2 639.4 kHz).

The conditions of use of these frequencies are specified in No. 52.11.

52.216 C – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz

C1 – Mode of operation of stations

52.217 § 96 1) The class of emission to be used for analogue radiotelephony inthe bands between 4000 kHz and 26 175 kHz shall be J3E; for digitaltelecommunications in those bands, the class of emission shall be J2D. (WRC-03)

52.218 2) The normal mode of operation of each coast station is indicatedin the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.219 3) Coast stations employing class J3E or J2D emissions inaccordance with No. 52.217 in the bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall usethe minimum power necessary to cover their service area and shall at no time use apeak envelope power in excess of 10 kW per channel.


52.220 4) Ship stations employing class J3E or J2D emissions inaccordance with No. 52.217 in the bands between 4000 kHz and 27500 kHz shall at notime use a peak envelope power in excess of 1.5 kW per channel.

C2 – Call and reply

52.220A 5) Administrations should encourage the coast stations and shipstations under their jurisdiction to use digital selective calling techniques for call andreply. (WRC-2000)

52.220B § 96 A When calling by radiotelephony is necessary, it should be done (inorder of preference): (WRC-2000)

52.220C 1) on the working frequencies assigned to the coast stations;or (WRC-2000)

52.220D 2) when this is not possible, on the calling frequencies listed underNo. 52.221 or 52.221A below. (WRC-2000)

52.221 § 97 1) Ship stations may use the following carrier frequencies forcalling in radiotelephony:

4 125 kHz2, 3, 4

6 215 kHz3, 4

8 255 kHz 12 290 kHz4 (see also No. 52.221A)

16 420 kHz4 (see also No. 52.221A) 18 795 kHz 22 060 kHz 25 097 kHz (WRC-2000)

_______________2 52.221.1 In the United States, the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz is also authorized forcommon use by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis,provided the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW (see alsoNo. 52.222.2).3 52.221.2 The carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz and 6 215 kHz are also authorized for commonuse by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis for call andreply purposes, provided that the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW.The use of these frequencies for working purposes is not permitted (see alsoNo. 52.221.1). (WRC-07)4 52.221.3 The carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz, 8291 kHz, 12 290 kHz and16420 kHz are also authorized for common use by coast and ship stations for single-sidebandradiotelephony on a simplex basis for distress and safety traffic.

144 Maritime Manual

52.221A 2) Calling on the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHzshall be permitted only to and from rescue coordination centres (see No. 30.6.1), subjectto the safeguards of Resolution 352 (WRC-03). The alternative carrier frequencies12 359 kHz and 16537 kHz may be used by ship stations and coast stations for callingon a simplex basis, provided that the peak envelope power does not exceed1 kW. (WRC-03)

52.222 3) Coast stations may use the following carrier frequencies forcalling in radiotelephony:

4 417 kHz5

6 516 kHz5

8 779 kHz

13 137 kHz (see No. 52.222A) 17 302 kHz (see No. 52.222A)

19 770 kHz 22 756 kHz

26 172 kHz (WRC-2000)

52.222A 4) The carrier frequencies 13 137 kHz and 17 302 kHz shall not beused as calling frequencies after 31 December 2003. The alternative carrier frequencies12 359 kHz and 16537 kHz may be used by ship stations and coast stations for callingon a simplex basis, provided that the peak envelope power does not exceed1 kW. (WRC-2000)

52.223 § 98 The hours of service of coast stations open to public correspondenceand the frequency or frequencies on which watch is maintained shall be indicated in theList of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

52.224 § 99 1) Before transmitting on the carrier frequencies 4125 kHz,6 215 kHz, 8 291 kHz, 12290 kHz or 16 420 kHz a station shall, in accordance withRecommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on the frequency for a reasonable period tomake sure that no distress traffic is being sent (see No. 52.221A). (WRC-03)


_______________5 52.222.2 The carrier frequencies 4 417 kHz and 6 516 kHz are also authorized for commonuse by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis, providedthat the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW. The use of 6 516 kHz forthis purpose should be limited to daytime operation (see also No. 52.221.1).


C3 – Traffic

52.226 § 100 1) For the conduct of duplex telephony, the transmitting frequenciesof the coast stations and of the corresponding ship stations shall be associated in pairs,as indicated in Appendix 17, except temporarily in cases where working conditionsprohibit the use of paired frequencies in order to meet operational needs.

52.227 2) The frequencies to be used for the conduct of simplexradiotelephony are shown in Appendix 17, Section B. In these cases, the peak envelopepower of the coast station transmitter shall not exceed 1 kW.

52.228 3) The frequencies indicated in Appendix 17 for ship stationtransmissions may be used by ships of any category according to traffic requirements.

52.229 4) Transmitters used for radiotelephony in the bands between4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz shall comply with technical characteristics specified inRecommendation ITU-R M.1173. (WRC-03)

52.230 D – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

D1 – Call and reply

52.231 § 101 1) The frequency 156.8 MHz is the international frequency fordistress traffic and for calling by radiotelephony when using frequencies in theauthorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz. The class of emission to be used forradiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz shall be G3E (as specified inRecommendation ITU-R M.489-2). (WRC-07)

52.232 2) The frequency 156.8 MHz may also be used:

52.233 a) by coast and ship stations for call and reply in accordance with theprovisions of Articles 54 and 57;

52.234 b) by coast stations to announce the transmission on another frequencyof traffic lists, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, andimportant maritime information. (WRC-03)

52.236 3) Any one of the channels designated in Appendix 18 for publiccorrespondence may be used as a calling channel if an administration so desires. Suchuse shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations(List IV). (WRC-07)

146 Maritime Manual

52.237 5) Ship and coast stations in the public correspondence service mayuse a working frequency, for calling purposes, as provided in Articles 54 and 57.

52.238 6) All emissions in the band 156.7625-156.8375 MHz capable ofcausing harmful interference to the authorized transmissions of stations of the maritimemobile service on 156.8 MHz are forbidden.

52.239 7) To facilitate the reception of distress calls and distress traffic, alltransmissions on 156.8 MHz shall be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed oneminute.

52.240 8) Before transmitting on the frequency 156.8 MHz, a station shall,in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on this frequency for areasonable period to make sure that no distress traffic is being sent. (WRC-03)


52.241A 10) The frequency 156.525 MHz is the international distress, safetyand calling frequency for the maritime mobile VHF radiotelephone service using digitalselective calling (DSC) when using frequencies in the authorized bands between156 MHz and 174 MHz. (WRC-07)

52.241B 11) All emissions in the band 156.4875-156.5625 MHz capable ofcausing harmful interference to the authorized transmissions of stations of the maritimemobile service on 156.525 MHz are forbidden. (WRC-07)

52.241C 12) To facilitate the reception of distress calls and distress traffic, alltransmissions on 156.525 MHz shall be kept to a minimum. (WRC-07)

D2 – Watch

52.242 § 102 1) A coast station open to the international public correspondenceservice should, during its hours of service, maintain watch on its receiving frequency orfrequencies indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special ServiceStations. (WRC-07)

52.243 2) The method of watch on a working frequency shall be no lessefficient than watch by an operator.

52.244 3) Ship stations should, where practicable, maintain watch on156.8 MHz when within the service area of a coast station providing internationalmaritime mobile radiotelephone service in the band 156-174 MHz. Ship stations fittedonly with VHF radiotelephone equipment operating in the authorized bands between156 MHz and 174 MHz should maintain watch on 156.8 MHz when at sea.


52.245 4) Ship stations, when in communication with a port station, may,on an exceptional basis and subject to the agreement of the administration concerned,continue to maintain watch on the appropriate port operations frequency only, providedthat watch on 156.8 MHz is being maintained by the port station.

52.246 5) Ship stations, when in communication with a coast station in theship movement service and subject to the agreement of the administration concerned,may continue to maintain watch on the appropriate ship movement service frequencyonly, provided that watch on 156.8 MHz is being maintained by that coast station.

52.247 § 103 A coast station in the port operations service in an area where156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency or safety shall, during its working hours,keep an additional watch on 156.6 MHz or another port operations frequency indicatedin heavy type in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations(List IV). (WRC-07)

52.248 § 104 A coast station in the ship movement service in an area where156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency and safety shall, during its workinghours, keep an additional watch on the ship movement frequencies indicated in heavytype in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)

D3 – Traffic

52.249 § 105 1) Where practicable, coast stations open to the international publiccorrespondence service shall be capable of working with ship stations equipped forduplex or semi-duplex operation.

52.250 2) The method of working (single-frequency or two-frequency)specified in Appendix 18 for each channel should be used in the international services.

52.251 § 106 Communications in the port operations service shall be restricted tothose relating to operational handling, the movement and the safety of ships and, inemergency, to the safety of persons. Messages of a public correspondence nature shallbe excluded from this service.

52.252 § 107 Communications in the ship movement service shall be restricted tothose relating to the movement of ships. Messages of a public correspondence natureshall be excluded from this service.

52.253 § 108 1) Coast stations which use 156.8 MHz for calling shall be able touse at least one other authorized channel in the international maritime mobileradiotelephone service in the band 156-174 MHz.

148 Maritime Manual

52.254 2) In the band 156-174 MHz administrations shall, wherepracticable, assign frequencies to coast and ship stations in accordance with the Tableof transmitting frequencies given in Appendix 18 for such international services asadministrations consider necessary.

52.256 3) In assigning frequencies to their coast stations, administrationsshould collaborate in cases where harmful interference might occur.

52.257 4) Channels are designated by numbers in the Table of transmittingfrequencies given in Appendix 18.

52.258 § 109 1) In assigning frequencies to stations of authorized services, otherthan maritime mobile, administrations shall avoid the possibility of interference tointernational maritime services in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz.

52.259 2) The use of channels for maritime mobile purposes other thanthose indicated in the Table of transmitting frequencies given in Appendix 18 shall notcause harmful interference to services which operate in accordance with that table andshall not prejudice the future development of such services.

52.260 § 110 The carrier power of ship station transmitters shall not exceed 25 W.

Part B – SECTION I – RR53, RR54 149

ARTICLE 53

Order of priority of communications

53.1 § 1 All stations in the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service shall be capable of offering four levels of priority in the followingorder:

1) Distress calls, distress messages, and distress traffic.

2) Urgency communications.

3) Safety communications.

4) Other communications.

53.2 § 2 In a fully automated system, where it is impracticable to offer all fourlevels of priority, category 1 shall receive priority until such time as intergovernmentalagreements1 remove exemptions granted for such systems from offering the completeorder of priority.

ARTICLE 54

Selective calling

54.1 § 1 1) Selective calling is designed for automatic station calling anddistress alerting or the transmission of information for the organization of traffic.

54.2 2) Selective calling is carried out using a digital selective callingsystem which shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9, and maybe in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-RM.493. (WRC-07)

_______________1 53.2.1 Requirements and performance standards for radio systems and equipment formaritime distress and safety radiocommunications are developed and adopted by theInternational Maritime Organization (IMO).


ARTICLE 56

Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy

56.1 § 1 Stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy shall complywith the provisions of Articles 51 and 52.

56.2 § 2 The procedures specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.492-6 shallbe employed except in cases of distress, urgency, or safety, in which case alternate ornon-standard procedures may be used. (WRC-07)

56.3 § 3 Before transmitting, a station shall take precautions to ensure that itsemissions will not interfere with transmissions already in progress; if such interferenceis likely, the station shall await an appropriate break in the communications in progress.This obligation does not apply to stations where unattended operation is possiblethrough automatic means (see No. 47.3).

56.4 § 4 1) For communication between two stations the ARQ mode shouldbe used when available.

56.5 2) For transmissions from one coast or ship station to two or moreother stations the forward-error-correcting mode should be used when available.

56.6 § 5 The services provided by each station open to public correspondenceshall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV)and in the List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service Identity Assignments(List V), together with information on charging. (WRC-07)

56.7 § 6 Where transmission over the telecommunication channels open topublic correspondence (excluding the telecommunication channels of the mobileservice and of the mobile-satellite service and its feeder links) is involved, theprovisions of the International Telecommunication Regulations and the relevant ITU-TRecommendations should be taken into account.


ARTICLE 57

Radiotelephony

57.1 § 1 The procedure detailed in Recommendation ITU-R M.1171 shall beapplicable to radiotelephone stations, except in cases of distress, urgency orsafety. (WRC-07)

57.2 § 2 The radiotelephone public correspondence service provided on shipsshould, if possible, be operated on a duplex basis.

57.3 § 3 1) Devices providing for the emission of a signal to indicate that acall is in progress on a channel may be used in this service on a non-interference basisto the service provided by coast stations.

57.4 2) The use of devices for continuous or repetitive calling oridentification in a manually operated radiotelephony service is not permitted.

57.5 3) A station may not transmit identical information simultaneouslyon two or more frequencies when communicating with only one other station.

57.6 4) A station shall not emit any carrier wave between calls.However, stations in an automatically operated radiotelephone system may emitmarking signals under the conditions provided for in No. 52.179.

57.7 5) When it is necessary to spell out certain expressions, difficultwords, service abbreviations, figures, etc., the phonetic spelling tables in Appendix 14shall be used.

57.8 § 4 Calling, and signals preparatory to traffic, shall not exceed oneminute when made on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz or on 156.8 MHz, except incases of distress, urgency or safety. (WRC-07)

57.9 § 5 When it is necessary for a ship station to send signals for testing oradjustments which are liable to interfere with the working of neighbouring coaststations, the consent of these stations shall be obtained before such signals are sent.

57.10 § 6 When it is necessary for a station to make test signals, either for theadjustment of a transmitter before making a call or for the adjustment of a receiver,such signals shall be kept to a minimum but in any event, shall not exceed ten seconds,and shall include the call sign or other identification of the station emitting the testsignals. This call sign or other identification shall be spoken slowly and distinctly.


ARTICLE 58

Charging and accounting for maritime radiocommunications

58.1 The provisions of the International Telecommunications Regulations,taking into account ITU-T Recommendations, shall apply.

_______________

SECTION II

Appendices

(Extracts)

Part B – SECTION II – AP1 155

APPENDIX 1 (Rev.WRC-07)

Classification of emissions and necessary bandwidths

(See Article 2)

§ 1 1) Emissions shall be designated according to their necessary bandwidth andtheir classification as explained in this Appendix.

2) Formulae and examples of emissions designated in accordance with thisAppendix are given in Recommendation ITU-R SM.1138-1. Further examples may beprovided in other ITU-R Recommendations. These examples may also be published inthe Preface to the International Frequency List. (WRC-07)

Section I – Necessary bandwidth

§ 2 1) The necessary bandwidth, as defined in No. 1.152 and determined inaccordance with the formulae and examples, shall be expressed by three numerals andone letter. The letter occupies the position of the decimal point and represents the unitof bandwidth. The first character shall be neither zero nor K, M or G.

2) Necessary bandwidths1:

between 0.001 and 999 Hz shall be expressed in Hz (letter H);

between 1.00 and 999 kHz shall be expressed in kHz (letter K);

between 1.00 and 999 MHz shall be expressed in MHz (letter M);

between 1.00 and 999 GHz shall be expressed in GHz (letter G).

_______________1 Examples: 0.002 Hz = H002 6 kHz = 6K00 1.25 MHz = 1M25 0.1 Hz = H100 12.5 kHz = 12K5 2 MHz = 2M00 25.3 Hz = 25H3 180.4 kHz = 180K 10 MHz = 10M0400 Hz = 400H 180.5 kHz = 181K 202 MHz = 202M 2.4 kHz = 2K40 180.7 kHz = 181K 5.65 GHz = 5G65

156 Maritime Manual

3) For the full designation of an emission, the necessary bandwidth,indicated in four characters, shall be added just before the classification symbols. Whenused, the necessary bandwidth shall be determined by one of the following methods:

3.1) use of the formulae and examples of necessary bandwidths and designationof corresponding emissions given in Recommendation ITU-RSM.1138-1; (WRC-07)

3.2) computation, in accordance with other ITU-R Recommendations;

3.3) measurement, in cases not covered by § 3.1) or 3.2) above.

Section II – Classification

§ 3 The class of emission is a set of characteristics conforming to § 4 below.

§ 4 Emissions shall be classified and symbolized according to their basiccharacteristics as given in Sub-Section IIA and any optional additional characteristics asprovided for in Sub-Section IIB.

§ 5 The basic characteristics (see Sub-Section IIA) are:

1) first symbol – type of modulation of the main carrier;

2) second symbol – nature of signal(s) modulating the main carrier;

3) third symbol – type of information to be transmitted.

Modulation used only for short periods and for incidental purposes (such as, in manycases, for identification or calling) may be ignored provided that the necessarybandwidth as indicated is not thereby increased.

Sub-Section IIA – Basic characteristics

§ 6 1) First symbol – Type of modulation of the main carrier

1.1) Emission of an unmodulated carrier N

1.2) Emission in which the main carrier is amplitude-modulated (includingcases where sub-carriers are angle-modulated)

1.2.1) Double-sideband A

1.2.2) Single-sideband, full carrier H

1.2.3) Single-sideband, reduced or variable level carrier R

1.2.4) Single-sideband, suppressed carrier J


1.2.5) Independent sidebands B

1.2.6) Vestigial sideband C

1.3) Emission in which the main carrier is angle-modulated

1.3.1) Frequency modulation F

1.3.2) Phase modulation G

1.4) Emission in which the main carrier is amplitude- and angle-modulatedeither simultaneously or in a pre-established sequence D

1.5) Emission of pulses2

1.5.1) Sequence of unmodulated pulses P

1.5.2) A sequence of pulses

1.5.2.1) modulated in amplitude K

1.5.2.2) modulated in width/duration L

1.5.2.3) modulated in position/phase M

1.5.2.4) in which the carrier is angle-modulated duringthe angle-period of the pulse Q

1.5.2.5) which is a combination of the foregoing or isproduced by other means V

1.6) Cases not covered above, in which an emission consists of the maincarrier modulated, either simultaneously or in a pre-establishedsequence, in a combination of two or more of the followingmodes: amplitude, angle, pulse W

1.7) Cases not otherwise covered

2) Second symbol – Nature of signal(s) modulating the main carrier

2.1) No modulating signal 0

2.2) A single channel containing quantized or digital information withoutthe use of a modulating sub-carrier3 1

2.3) A single channel containing quantized or digital information with theuse of a modulating sub-carrier3 2

2.4) A single channel containing analogue information 3

_______________2 Emissions where the main carrier is directly modulated by a signal which has been codedinto quantized form (e.g. pulse code modulation) should be designated under § 1.2) or 1.3).3 This excludes time-division multiplex.

158 Maritime Manual

2.5) Two or more channels containing quantized or digital information 72.6) Two or more channels containing analogue information 82.7) Composite system with one or more channels containing quantized or

digital information, together with one or more channels containinganalogue information 9

2.8) Cases not otherwise covered X

3) Third symbol – Type of information to be transmitted4

3.1) No information transmitted N3.2) Telegraphy – for aural reception A3.3) Telegraphy – for automatic reception B3.4) Facsimile C3.5) Data transmission, telemetry, telecommand D3.6) Telephony (including sound broadcasting) E3.7) Television (video) F3.8) Combination of the above W3.9) Cases not otherwise covered X

Sub-Section IIB – Optional characteristics for the classification of emissions

§ 7 Two optional characteristics should be added for a more complete descriptionof an emission. These are:

Fourth symbol – Details of signal(s)

Fifth symbol – Nature of multiplexing

Where the fourth or fifth symbol is used it shall be as indicated below.

Where the fourth or the fifth symbol is not used this should be indicated by a dashwhere each symbol would otherwise appear.

1) Fourth symbol – Details of signal(s)1.1) Two-condition code with elements of differing numbers and/or

durations A

_______________4 In this context the word “information” does not include information of a constant, unvaryingnature such as is provided by standard frequency emissions, continuous wave and pulse radars,etc.


1.2) Two-condition code with elements of the same number and durationwithout error-correction B

1.3) Two-condition code with elements of the same number and durationwith error-correction C

1.4) Four-condition code in which each condition represents a signalelement (or one or more bits) D

1.5) Multi-condition code in which each condition represents a signalelement (of one or more bits) E

1.6) Multi-condition code in which each condition or combination ofconditions represents a character F

1.7) Sound of broadcasting quality (monophonic) G1.8) Sound of broadcasting quality (stereophonic or quadraphonic) H1.9) Sound of commercial quality (excluding categories given in § 1.10)

and 1.11)) J

1.10) Sound of commercial quality with the use of frequency inversion orband-splitting K

1.11) Sound of commercial quality with separate frequency-modulatedsignals to control the level of demodulated signal L

1.12) Monochrome M

1.13) Colour N1.14) Combination of the above W1.15) Cases not otherwise covered X

2) Fifth symbol – Nature of multiplexing2.1) None N2.2) Code-division multiplex5 C2.3) Frequency-division multiplex F2.4) Time-division multiplex T2.5) Combination of frequency-division multiplex and time-division

multiplex W2.6) Other types of multiplexing X

_______________5 This includes bandwidth expansion techniques.

160 Maritime Manual


Table of transmitter frequency tolerances

(See Article 3)

1 Frequency tolerance is defined in Article 1 and is expressed in parts in 106,unless otherwise indicated.

2 The power shown for the various categories of stations is the peak envelopepower for single-sideband transmitters and the mean power for all other transmitters,unless otherwise indicated. The term “power of a radio transmitter” is defined inArticle 1.

3 For technical and operational reasons, certain categories of stations may needmore stringent tolerances than those shown in the table.

Frequency bands(lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive)

and categories of stations

Tolerances applicableto transmitters

Band: 9 kHz to 535 kHz1 Fixed stations: – 9 kHz to 50 kHz– 50 kHz to 535 kHz

100 50

2 Land stations:a) Coast stationsb) Aeronautical stations

100 1, 2

1003 Mobile stations:

a) Ship stationsb) Ship’s emergency transmittersc) Survival craft stationsd) Aircraft stations

200 3, 4

500 5

500 100

4 Radiodetermination stations 100

5 Broadcasting stations 10 Hz

Band: 535 kHz to 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz in Region 2)Broadcasting stations 10 Hz (WRC-03)





Band: 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz in Region 2) to 4 000 kHz1 Fixed stations: – power 200 W or less– power above 200 W

100 7, 8

50 7, 8

2 Land stations: – power 200 W or less– power above 200 W

100 1, 2, 7, 9, 10

50 1, 2, 7, 9, 10

3 Mobile stations:a) Ship stationsb) Survival craft stationsc) Emergency position-indicating radiobeaconsd) Aircraft stationse) Land mobile stations

40 Hz 3, 4, 12

100 100 100 10

50 13

4 Radiodetermination stations: – power 200 W or less– power above 200 W

20 14

10 14

5 Broadcasting stations 10 Hz 15

Band: 4 MHz to 29.7 MHz1 Fixed stations:

a) Single-sideband and independent-sideband emissions: – power 500 W or less

– power above 500 Wb) Class F1B emissionsc) Other classes of emission:

– power 500 W or less– power above 500 W

50 Hz 20 Hz 10 Hz

20 10

2 Land stations:a) Coast stations 20 Hz 1, 2, 16

b) Aeronautical stations: – power 500 W or less

– power above 500 Wc) Base stations

100 10

50 10

20 7

3 Mobile stations:a) Ship stations:

1) Class A1A emissions2) Emissions other than Class A1A

b) Survival craft stationsc) Aircraft stationsd) Land mobile stations

10 50 Hz 3, 4, 19

50 100 10

40 20

4 Broadcasting stations 10 Hz 15, 21

5 Space stations 206 Earth stations 20

162 Maritime Manual




Band: 29.7 MHz to 100 MHz1 Fixed stations: – power 50 W or less– power above 50 W

30 20

2 Land stations 20

3 Mobile stations 20 22

4 Radiodetermination stations 50

5 Broadcasting stations (other than television) 2 000 Hz 23

6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision) 500 Hz 24, 25

7 Space stations 20

8 Earth stations 20

Band: 100 MHz to 470 MHz1 Fixed stations: – power 50 W or less– power above 50 W

20 26

102 Land stations:

a) Coast stations b) Aeronautical stations c) Base stations: – in the band 100-235 MHz

– in the band 235-401 MHz– in the band 401-470 MHz

10 20 28

15 29

7 29

5 29

3 Mobile stations:a) Ship stations and survival craft stations:

– in the band 156-174 MHz– outside the band 156-174 MHz

10 50 31

b) Aircraft stationsc) Land mobile stations:

– in the band 100-235 MHz– in the band 235-401 MHz– in the band 401-470 MHz

30 28

15 29

7 29, 32

5 29, 32

4 Radiodetermination stations 50 33

5 Broadcasting stations (other than television) 2 000 Hz 23

6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision) 500 Hz 24, 25

7 Space stations 20

8 Earth stations 20





Band: 470 MHz to 2 450 MHz

1 Fixed stations: – power 100 W or less– power above 100 W

100 50

2 Land stations 20 36

3 Mobile stations 20 36

4 Radiodetermination stations 500 33

5 Broadcasting stations (other than television) 100

6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision) in the band 470 MHz to 960 MHz 500 Hz 24, 25

7 Space stations 20

8 Earth stations 20

Band: 2 450 MHz to 10 500 MHz

1 Fixed stations: – power 100 W or less– power above 100 W

200 50

2 Land stations 1003 Mobile stations 1004 Radiodetermination stations 1 250 33

5 Space stations 506 Earth stations 50

Band: 10.5 GHz to 40 GHz

1 Fixed station 3002 Radiodetermination stations 5 000 33

3 Broadcasting stations 1004 Space stations 1005 Earth stations 100

164 Maritime Manual

Notes in the table of transmitter frequency tolerances1 For coast station transmitters used for direct-printing telegraphy or for data transmission, the

tolerance is: – 5 Hz for narrow-band phase-shift keying; – 15 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters in use or installed before 2 January 1992; – 10 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters installed after 1 January 1992.2 For coast station transmitters used for digital selective calling, the tolerance is

10 Hz. (WRC-03)3 For ship station transmitters used for direct-printing telegraphy or for data transmission, the

tolerance is: – 5 Hz for narrow-band phase-shift keying; – 40 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters in use or installed before 2 January 1992; – 10 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters installed after 1 January 1992.4 For ship station transmitters used for digital selective calling, the tolerance is

10 Hz. (WRC-03)5 If the emergency transmitter is used as the reserve transmitter for the main transmitter, the

tolerance for ship station transmitters applies.7 For single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters except at coast stations, the tolerance is: – 50 Hz in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz, for peak

envelope powers of 200 W or less and 500 W or less, respectively; – 20 Hz in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz, for peak

envelope powers above 200 W and 500 W, respectively.8 For radiotelegraphy transmitters with frequency-shift keying the tolerance is 10 Hz.9 For coast station single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters the tolerance is 20 Hz.10 For single-sideband transmitters operating in the frequency bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-

4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz which are allocated exclusively to the aeronautical mobile (R)service, the tolerance on the carrier (reference) frequency is:a) for all aeronautical stations, 10 Hz;b) for all aircraft stations operating on international services, 20 Hz;c) for aircraft stations operating exclusively on national services, 50 Hz*.

12 For A1A emissions the tolerance is 50 × 10–6.13 For transmitters used for single-sideband radiotelephony or for frequency-shift keying

radiotelegraphy the tolerance is 40 Hz.14 For radiobeacon transmitters in the band 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-1 800 kHz the tolerance is

50 × 10–6.

_______________* NOTE – In order to achieve maximum intelligibility, it is suggested that administrationsencourage the reduction of this tolerance to 20 Hz.


15 For A3E emissions with carrier power of 10 kW or less the tolerance is 20 × 10–6, 15 × 10–6and 10 × 10–6 in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz, 4-5.95 MHz and 5.95-29.7 MHz respectively.

16 For A1A emissions the tolerance is 10 × 10–6.19 For ship station transmitters in the band 26 175-27 500 kHz, on board small craft, with a

carrier power not exceeding 5 W in or near coastal waters and utilizing F3E and G3Eemissions, the frequency tolerance is 40 × 10–6. (WRC-03)

20 The tolerance is 50 Hz for single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters, except for thosetransmitters operating in the band 26 175-27 500 kHz, and not exceeding a peak envelopepower of 15 W, for which the basic tolerance of 40 × 10–6 applies.

21 It is suggested that administrations avoid carrier frequency differences of a few hertz, whichcause degradations similar to periodic fading. This could be avoided if the frequency tolerancewere 0.1 Hz, a tolerance which would be suitable for single-sideband emissions*.

22 For non-vehicular mounted portable equipment with a transmitter mean power not exceeding5 W, the tolerance is 40 × 10–6.

23 For transmitters of a mean power of 50 W or less operating at frequencies below 108 MHz atolerance of 3 000 Hz applies.

24 In the case of television stations of:

– 50 W (vision peak envelope power) or less in the band 29.7-100 MHz;

– 100 W (vision peak envelope power) or less in the band 100-960 MHz;

and which receive their input from other television stations or which serve small isolatedcommunities, it may not, for operational reasons, be possible to maintain this tolerance. Forsuch stations, the tolerance is 2 000 Hz.

For stations of 1 W (vision peak envelope power) or less, this tolerance may be relaxedfurther to:

– 5 kHz in the band 100-470 MHz;

– 10 kHz in the band 470-960 MHz.25 For transmitters for system M (NTSC) the tolerance is 1 000 Hz. However, for low power

transmitters using this system Note 24 applies.26 For multi-hop radio-relay systems employing direct frequency conversion the tolerance is

30 × 10–6.28 For a channel spacing of 50 kHz the tolerance is 50 × 10–6.29 These tolerances apply to channel spacings equal to or greater than 20 kHz.

_______________* NOTE – The single-sideband system adopted for the bands exclusively allocated to HFbroadcasting does not require a frequency tolerance less than 10 Hz. The above-mentioneddegradation occurs when the ratio of wanted-to-interfering signal is well below the requiredprotection ratio. This remark is equally valid for both double- and single-sideband emissions.

166 Maritime Manual

31 For transmitters used by on-board communication stations a tolerance of 5 × 10–6 shall apply.

32 For non-vehicular mounted portable equipment with a transmitter mean power not exceeding5 W the tolerance is 15 × 10–6.

33 Where specific frequencies are not assigned to radar stations, the bandwidth occupied by theemissions of such stations shall be maintained wholly within the band allocated to the serviceand the indicated tolerance does not apply.

36 In applying this tolerance administrations should be guided by the latest relevant ITU-RRecommendations.



Tables of maximum permitted power levels for spurious or spurious domain emissions1

(See Article 3)

1 The following sections indicate the maximum permitted levels of certainunwanted emissions, in terms of power as indicated in the tables, of componentssupplied by a transmitter to the antenna transmission line. Section I, which providesspurious emission limits, is applicable until 1 January 2012 to transmitters installed onor before 1 January 2003; Section II, which limits emissions in the spurious domain, isapplicable to transmitters installed after 1 January 2003 and to all transmitters after1 January 2012. The provisions of No. 4.5 apply to unwanted emissions not covered inSections I and II.

2 Spurious and spurious domain emissions (covered by Sections I and II) fromany part of the installation, other than the antenna and its transmission line, shall nothave an effect greater than would occur if this antenna system were supplied with themaximum permitted power at the frequency of that emission.

3 These levels shall not, however, apply to emergency position-indicatingradiobeacon (EPIRB) stations, emergency locator transmitters, ships’ emergencytransmitters, lifeboat transmitters, survival craft stations or maritime transmitters whenused in emergency situations.

4 For technical or operational reasons, more stringent levels than those specifiedmay be applied to protect specific services in certain frequency bands. The levelsapplied to protect these services, such as safety and passive services, shall be thoseagreed upon by the appropriate world radiocommunication conference. More stringentlevels may also be fixed by specific agreement between the administrations concerned.Additionally, special consideration of transmitter spurious or spurious domainemissions may be required for the protection of safety services, radio astronomy andspace services using passive sensors. Information on the levels of interferencedetrimental to radio astronomy, Earth exploration satellites and meteorological passivesensing is given in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.329.

5 Spurious and spurious domain emission limits (covered by Sections I and II)for combined radiocommunication and information technology equipment are those forthe radiocommunication transmitters. (WRC-03)

_______________1 Spurious domain emissions are unwanted emissions at frequencies within the spuriousdomain.

168 Maritime Manual

Section I – Spurious emission limits for transmitters installed onor before 1 January 2003 (valid until 1 January 2012)

6 Radar systems are exempt from spurious emission limits under this Section.The lowest practicable power of spurious emission should be achieved. (WRC-2000)

TABLE I

Attenuation values and absolute mean power levels used to calculate maximumpermitted spurious emission power levels for use with radio equipment

Frequency band containing theassignment

(lower limit exclusive,upper limit inclusive)

For any spurious component, the attenuation (meanpower within the necessary bandwidth relative to themean power of the spurious component concerned)

shall be at least that specified below and the absolutemean power levels given shall not be exceeded1

9 kHz to 30 MHz 40 dB50 mW 2, 3, 4

30 MHz to 235 MHz– mean power above 25 W 60 dB

1 mW 5

– mean power 25 W or less 40 dB25 W

235 MHz to 960 MHz– mean power above 25 W 60 dB

20 mW 6, 7

– mean power 25 W or less 40 dB25 W 6, 7

960 MHz to 17.7 GHz– mean power above 10 W 50 dB

100 mW 6, 7, 8, 9

– mean power 10 W or less 100 W 6, 7, 8, 9

Above 17.7 GHz The lowest possible values achievable shall be employed(see Recommendation 66 (Rev.WRC-2000)*).

1 When checking compliance with the provisions of the Table, it shall be verified that thebandwidth of the measuring equipment is sufficiently wide to accept all significantcomponents of the spurious emission concerned.


TABLE I (end)

2 For mobile transmitters which operate below 30 MHz, any spurious component shall havean attenuation of at least 40 dB without exceeding the value of 200 mW, but every effortshould be made to comply with the level of 50 mW wherever practicable.

3 For transmitters of a mean power exceeding 50 kW which can operate on two or morefrequencies covering a frequency range approaching an octave or more, while a reductionbelow 50 mW is not mandatory, a minimum attenuation of 60 dB shall be provided.

4 For hand-portable equipment of mean power less than 5 W, the attenuation shall be 30 dB,but every practicable effort should be made to attain 40 dB attenuation.

5 Administrations may adopt a level of 10 mW provided that harmful interference is notcaused.

6 Where several transmitters feed a common antenna or closely spaced antennas on neigh-bouring frequencies, every practicable effort should be made to comply with the levelsspecified.

7 Since these levels may not provide adequate protection for receiving stations in the radioastronomy and space services, more stringent levels might be considered in eachindividual case in the light of the geographical position of the stations concerned.

8 These levels are not applicable to systems using digital modulation techniques, butmay be used as a guide. Values for these systems may be provided by the relevantITU-R Recommendations, when available (see Recommendation 66 (Rev.WRC-2000)*).

9 These levels are not applicable to stations in the space services, but the levels of theirspurious emissions should be reduced to the lowest possible values compatible with thetechnical and economic constraints to which the equipment is subject. Values for thesesystems may be provided by the relevant ITU-R Recommendations, when available(see Recommendation 66 Rev.WRC-2000)*).

* Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-03.

Section II – Spurious domain emission limits for transmitters installed after1 January 2003 and for all transmitters after 1 January 2012 (WRC-03)

Application of these limits

7 The frequency range of the measurement of spurious domain emissions is from9 kHz to 110 GHz or the second harmonic if higher. (WRC-03)

8 Except as provided in § 9 and 10 of this Appendix, the spurious domainemission levels are specified in the following reference bandwidths:

– 1 kHz between 9 kHz and 150 kHz– 10 kHz between 150 kHz and 30 MHz

170 Maritime Manual

– 100 kHz between 30 MHz and 1 GHz

– 1 MHz above 1 GHz. (WRC-03)

9 The reference bandwidth of all space service spurious domain emissionsshould be 4 kHz. (WRC-03)

10 For radar systems, the reference bandwidths for specifying spurious domainemission levels should be calculated for each particular system. Thus, for the fourgeneral types of radar pulse modulation utilized for radionavigation, radiolocation,acquisition, tracking and other radiodetermination functions, the reference bandwidthvalues are determined using the following:

– for a fixed-frequency, non-pulse-coded radar, the reciprocal of the radar pulselength, in seconds (e.g. if the radar pulse length is 1 s, then the referencebandwidth is 1/(1 s) 1 MHz);

– for a fixed-frequency, phase-coded pulsed radar, the reciprocal of the phasechip length, in seconds (e.g. if the phase-coded chip is 2 s long, then thereference bandwidth is 1/(2 s) 500 kHz);

– for a frequency modulated (FM) or chirped radar, the square root of thequantity obtained by dividing the chirp bandwidth in MHz by the pulse length,in s (e.g. if the FM is from 1 250 MHz to 1280 MHz, i.e. 30 MHz, during thepulse length of 10 s, then the reference bandwidth is (30 MHz/10 s)1/2

1.73 MHz);

– for radars operating with multiple waveforms, the reference bandwidth forspecifying spurious domain emission levels is determined empirically fromobservations of the radar emission and is obtained following the guidancegiven in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1177.

In the case of radars, for which the bandwidth, as determined using the method above,is greater than 1 MHz, a reference bandwidth of 1 MHz should be used. (WRC-03)

10bis Guidance regarding the methods of measuring spurious domain emissions isgiven in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.329. The e.i.r.p.method specified in this Recommendation should be used when it is not possible toaccurately measure the power supplied to the antenna transmission line, or for specificapplications where the antenna is designed to provide significant attenuation in thespurious domain. Additionally, the e.i.r.p. method may need some modification forspecial cases. Specific guidance regarding the methods of measuring spurious domainemissions from radar systems is given in the most recent version of RecommendationITU-R M.1177.


To improve measurement accuracy, sensitivity and efficiency, the resolution bandwidthin which spurious domain emissions are measured can be different from the referencebandwidth used for specifying spurious domain emission levels. (WRC-03)

11 The emission limits of this Section apply to all emissions, including harmonicemissions, intermodulation products, frequency conversion products and parasiticemissions, at frequencies in the spurious domain (see Fig. 1). The upper and lower partsof the spurious domain extend outward from a boundary determined usingAnnex 1. (WRC-03)

AP3-01

FIGURE 1 (WRC-03)

Out-of-band and spurious domains

Unwanted emissions Unwanted emissions

Spurious domainSpurious domain Out-of-banddomain

Out-of-banddomain

Necessarybandwidth

Frequency of the emission

Boundary of the spurious domainLimits of the necessary bandwidth

11ter For the case of a single satellite operating with more than one transponder inthe same service area, and when considering the limits for spurious domain emissionsas indicated in § 11 of this Appendix, spurious domain emissions from one transpondermay fall on a frequency at which a second, companion transponder is transmitting. Inthese situations, the level of spurious domain emissions from the first transponder iswell exceeded by the fundamental or out-of-band domain emissions of the secondtransponder. Therefore, the limits of this Appendix should not apply to those emissionsof a satellite that fall within either the necessary bandwidth or the out-of-band domainof another transponder on the same satellite, in the same service area (seeFig. 2). (WRC-03)

172 Maritime Manual

AP3-02

FIGURE 2Example of the applicability of spurious domain emission limits

to a satellite transponder

Transponder A Transponder B Transponder C Transponder D

Out-of-band

Out-of-band

Transponders A, B, C and D are operating on the same satellite in the same servicearea. Transponder A is not required to meet spurious domain emission limits infrequency ranges and , but is required to meet them in frequency rangesand . (WRC-03)

12 Examples of applying 43 10 log (P) to calculate attenuationrequirements

Where specified in relation to mean power, spurious domain emissions are to be at leastx dB below the total mean power P, i.e. –x dBc. The power P (W) is to be measured ina bandwidth wide enough to include the total mean power. The spurious domainemissions are to be measured in the reference bandwidths given in the relevant ITU-RRecommendations. The measurement of the spurious domain emission power isindependent of the value of necessary bandwidth. Because the absolute emission powerlimit, derived from 43 10 log (P), can become too stringent for high-powertransmitters, alternative relative powers are also provided in Table II.

Example 1

A land mobile transmitter, with any value of necessary bandwidth, must meet aspurious domain emission attenuation of 43 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is lessstringent. The reference bandwidths used for specifying spurious domain emissionlevels are provided in § 8 to 10 of this Appendix. Applying this in the frequency rangebetween 30 MHz and 1 GHz gives a reference bandwidth of 100 kHz.


With a measured total mean power of 10 W:

– Attenuation relative to total mean power 43 10 log (10) 53 dBc.

– The 53 dBc value is less stringent than the 70 dBc, so the 53 dBc value is used.

– Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 53 dBc in a 100 kHzbandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed10 dBW – 53 dBc –43 dBW in a 100 kHz reference bandwidth.



– The 73 dBc value is more stringent than the 70 dBc limit, so the 70 dBc valueis used.

– Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 70 dBc in a 100 kHzbandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed30 dBW – 70 dBc _40 dBW in a 100 kHz reference bandwidth. (WRC-03)

Example 2

A space service transmitter with any value of necessary bandwidth must meet aspurious domain emission attenuation of 43 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is lessstringent. To measure spurious domain emissions at any frequency, Note 10 to Table IIindicates using a reference bandwidth of 4 kHz.



– The 56 dBc value is less stringent than the 60 dBc limit, so the 56 dBc value isused.

– Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 56 dBc in a 4 kHzreference bandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed13 dBW – 56 dBc _43 dBW in a 4 kHz reference bandwidth. (WRC-03)

174 Maritime Manual

TABLE II (WRC-03)

Attenuation values used to calculate maximum permittedspurious domain emission power levels for

use with radio equipment

Service category in accordance withArticle 1, or equipment type15

Attenuation (dB) below the powersupplied to the antenna transmission line

All services except those services quotedbelow:

43 + 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is lessstringent

Space services (earth stations)10, 16 43 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is lessstringent

Space services (space stations)10, 17 43 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is lessstringent

Radiodetermination14 43 + 10 log (PEP), or 60 dB, whichever is lessstringent

Broadcast television11 46 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is lessstringent, without exceeding the absolutemean power level of 1 mW for VHF stationsor 12 mW for UHF stations. However, greaterattenuation may be necessary on a case bycase basis

Broadcast FM 46 + 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is lessstringent; the absolute mean power level of1 mW should not be exceeded

Broadcasting at MF/HF 50 dBc; the absolute mean power level of50 mW should not be exceeded

SSB from mobile stations12 43 dB below PEP

Amateur services operating below 30 MHz(including those using SSB)16

43 + 10 log (PEP), or 50 dB, whichever is lessstringent

Services operating below 30 MHz, exceptspace, radiodetermination, broadcast, thoseusing SSB from mobile stations, andamateur12

43 + 10 log (X), or 60 dBc, whichever is lessstringent, where X = PEP for SSB modulation,and X = P for other modulation

Low-power device radio equipment13 56 + 10 log (P), or 40 dBc, whichever is lessstringent

Emergency transmitters18 No limit


TABLE II (end) (WRC-03)

P: mean power in watts supplied to the antenna transmission line, in accordance withNo. 1.158. When burst transmission is used, the mean power P and the mean power ofany spurious domain emissions are measured using power averaging over the burstduration.

PEP: peak envelope power in watts supplied to the antenna transmission line, in accordancewith No. 1.157.

dBc: decibels relative to the unmodulated carrier power of the emission. In the cases which donot have a carrier, for example in some digital modulation schemes where the carrier isnot accessible for measurement, the reference level equivalent to dBc is decibels relativeto the mean power P.

10 Spurious domain emission limits for all space services are stated in a 4 kHz referencebandwidth.

11 For analogue television transmissions, the mean power level is defined with a specifiedvideo signal modulation. This video signal has to be chosen in such a way that themaximum mean power level (e.g. at the video signal blanking level for negativelymodulated television systems) is supplied to the antenna transmission line.

12 All classes of emission using SSB are included in the category “SSB”.13 Low-power radio devices having a maximum output power of less than 100 mW and

intended for short-range communication or control purposes; such equipment is ingeneral exempt from individual licensing.

14 For radiodetermination systems (radar as defined by No. 1.100), spurious domainemission attenuation (dB) shall be determined for radiated emission levels, and not at theantenna transmission line. The measurement methods for determining the radiatedspurious domain emission levels from radar systems should be guided by the most recentversion of Recommendation ITU-R M.1177. (WRC-03)

15 In some cases of digital modulation (including digital broadcasting), broadband systems,pulsed modulation and narrow-band high-power transmitters for all categories ofservices, there may be difficulties in meeting limits close to 250% of the necessarybandwidth.

16 Earth stations in the amateur-satellite service operating below 30 MHz are in the servicecategory “Amateur services operating below 30 MHz (including those usingSSB)”. (WRC-2000)

17 Space stations in the space research service intended for operation in deep space asdefined by No. 1.177 are exempt from spurious domain emission limits. (WRC-03)

18 Emergency position-indicating radio beacon, emergency locator transmitters, personallocation beacons, search and rescue transponders, ship emergency, lifeboat and survivalcraft transmitters and emergency land, aeronautical or maritime transmitters. (WRC-2000)

176 Maritime Manual

ANNEX 1 (WRC-03)

Determination of the boundary between theout-of-band and spurious domains

1 Except as provided below, the boundary between the out-of-band and spuriousdomains occurs at frequencies that are separated from the centre frequency of theemission by the values shown in Table 1. In general, the boundary, on either side of thecentre frequency, occurs at a separation of 250% of the necessary bandwidth, or at2.5 BN, as shown in Table 1. For most systems, the centre frequency of the emission isthe centre of the necessary bandwidth. For multichannel or multicarriertransmitters/transponders, where several carriers may be transmitted simultaneouslyfrom a final output amplifier or an active antenna, the centre frequency of the emissionis taken to be the centre of the –3 dB bandwidth of the transmitter or transponder, andthe transmitter or transponder bandwidth is used in place of the necessary bandwidth fordetermining the boundary. For multicarrier satellite systems, guidance on the boundarybetween the out-of-band and spurious domains is provided in the most recent version ofRecommendation ITU-R SM.1541. Some systems specify unwanted emissions relativeto channel bandwidth, or channel spacing. These may be used as a substitute for thenecessary bandwidth in Table 1, provided they are found in ITU-R Recommendations.

TABLE 1

Values for frequency separation between the centre frequencyand the boundary of the spurious domain

Frequencyrange

Narrow-band case Normalseparation

Wideband case

for BN < Separation for BN > Separation

9 kHz < fc 150 kHz 250 Hz 625 Hz 2.5 BN 10 kHz 1.5 BN + 10 kHz

150 kHz < fc 30 MHz 4 kHz 10 kHz 2.5 BN 100 kHz 1.5 BN + 100 kHz

30 MHz < fc 1 GHz 25 kHz 62.5 kHz 2.5 BN 10 MHz 1.5 BN + 10 MHz

1 GHz < fc 3 GHz 100 kHz 250 kHz 2.5 BN 50 MHz 1.5 BN + 50 MHz



15 GHz < fc 26 GHz 500 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 BN 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

fc > 26 GHz 1 MHz 2.5 MHz 2.5 BN 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

NOTE – In Table 1, fc is the centre frequency of the emission and BN is the necessary bandwidth.If the assigned frequency band of the emissions extends across two frequency ranges, then thevalues corresponding to the higher frequency range shall be used for determining the boundary.


Example 1: The necessary bandwidth of an emission at 26 MHz is 1.8 kHz. Since BN isless than 4 kHz, the minimum separation of 10 kHz applies. The spurious domainbegins 10 kHz each side of the centre of the necessary bandwidth.

Example 2: The necessary bandwidth of an emission at 8 GHz is 200 MHz. Since thewideband case applies for BN > 100 MHz at that frequency, the spurious domain begins1.5 200 MHz + 100 MHz = 400 MHz each side of the centre of the necessarybandwidth. Using the general separation formula, the out-of-band domain would haveextended to 2.5 200 MHz = 500 MHz either side of the centre frequency.

2 Tables 2 and 3 show exceptions to Table 1 for narrow-band and widebandcases, respectively, applicable to particular systems or services and frequency bands.

TABLE 2

Narrow-band variations for particular systems or services and frequency bands

System or service Frequency rangeNarrow-band case

for BN <(kHz)

Separation(kHz)

Fixed service

14 kHz-1.5 MHz 20 50(1)

1.5-30 MHzPT 50 W 30 75(2)

PT > 50 W 80 200(2)

(1) The separation value is based on an assumption that the maximum value of the necessarybandwidth is about 3 kHz for the frequency range 14 kHz-1.5 MHz. The separation value of50 kHz is extremely large as compared with the necessary bandwidth. This is becauseunwanted emissions of high power transmitters under modulated conditions have to bebelow the spurious limit (70 dBc) at the boundary between the out-of-band and spuriousdomains.

(2) PT is the transmitter power. The separation values are based on an assumption that themaximum value of the necessary bandwidth is about 12 kHz for the frequency range 1.5-30 MHz. The separation value of 200 kHz for PT > 50 W is extremely large as comparedwith the necessary bandwidth. This is because unwanted emissions of high powertransmitters under modulated conditions have to be below the spurious limit, 70 dBc, at theboundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains. Also, if future systems in the fixedservice operating in this frequency range require a necessary bandwidth larger than 12 kHz,it may become necessary to review the 200 kHz separation.

178 Maritime Manual

TABLE 3

Wideband variations for particular systems or services and frequency bands

3 For primary radar, the boundary between the out-of-band and spuriousdomains is the frequency at which the out-of-band domain limits specified in theapplicable ITU-R Recommendations are equal to the spurious domain limit defined inTable II of this Appendix. Further guidance on the boundary between the out-of-bandand spurious domains for primary radar is provided in the most recent version ofRecommendation ITU-R SM.1541.

System or service Frequency rangeWideband case

For BN > Separation

Fixed service 14-150 kHz 20 kHz 1.5 BN + 20 kHz

Fixed-satelliteservice (FSS)

3.4-4.2 GHz 250 MHz 1.5 BN + 250 MHz

FSS 5.725-6.725 GHz 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

FSS 7.25-7.75 GHz and 7.9-8.4 GHz 250 MHz 1.5 BN + 250 MHz

FSS 10.7-12.75 GHz 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

Broadcasting-satellite service

11.7-12.75 GHz 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

FSS 12.75-13.25 GHz 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz

FSS 13.75-14.8 GHz 500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz


APPENDIX 9

Report of an irregularity or infringement

(See Article 15, Section V)

Particulars concerning the station infringing the Radio Regulations:

1 Name1 if known (in BLOCK letters) ..........................................

2 Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters) ..........................................

3 Nationality, if known ..........................................

4 Frequency used (kHz, MHz, GHz or THz) ..........................................

5 Class of emission2 ..........................................

6 Class of station and nature of service, if known ..........................................

7 Location3, 4, 5

Particulars concerning the station, the centralizing office or inspection servicereporting the irregularity or infringement:

8 Name (in BLOCK letters) ..........................................


10 Nationality ..........................................

11 Location3, 4 ..........................................

Particulars of the irregularity or infringement:

12 Name6 of the station (in BLOCK letters) incommunication with the station committing theirregularity or infringement ..........................................

13 Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters)of the station in communication with the stationcommitting the irregularity or infringement ..........................................

180 Maritime Manual

14 Date and time7 ..........................................

15 Nature of the irregularity or infringement8 ..........................................

16 Extracts from ship log or other informationsupporting the report ..........................................

Particulars concerning the transmitting station interfered with9:

17 Name of the station (in BLOCK letters) ..........................................


19 Frequency assigned (kHz, MHz, GHz or THz) ..........................................

20 Frequency measured at the time of the interference ..........................................

21 Class of emission2 and bandwidth (indicate whethermeasured or estimated, or indicate the necessarybandwidth notified to the RadiocommunicationBureau) ..........................................

22 Receiving location3, 4 (in BLOCK letters) where theinterference was experienced ..........................................

23 Certificate:

I certify that the foregoing report represents, to thebest of my knowledge, a complete and accurateaccount of what took place. ..........................................

Signatures10 ............................................. Date: ..........................................

............................................. ..........................................


Instructions for filling in this form1 Each report shall refer to only one station (see Note 6). If it is forwarded as a letter, it

shall be in duplicate, and whenever practicable should be typewritten. It may also be forwardedas a telegram.

2 The class of emission shall contain the basic characteristics listed in Appendix 1. Ifany characteristic cannot be determined, indicate the unknown symbol with a dash. However, ifa station is not able to identify unambiguously whether the modulation is frequency or phasemodulation, indicate frequency modulation (F).

3 In the case of land, fixed, or earth stations, the position shall be expressed in latitudeand longitude (Greenwich). If the position cannot be furnished, the area of operation should beindicated.

4 In the case of ship or aircraft stations, the position shall be expressed either in latitudeand longitude (Greenwich) or by a true bearing in degrees and distance in nautical miles, or inkilometres, from some well known place. If the position cannot be furnished, the area ofoperation should be indicated.

5 Where space stations are concerned, information shall be furnished on the orbit.6 If both communicating stations infringe the Regulations, a separate report shall be

made for each of these stations.7 The time must be expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) by a group of four

figures (0000 to 2359). If the infringement is prolonged or repeated, the dates and times shall beshown.

8 A separate report is required for each irregularity or infringement, unless they arerepeated within a short time.

9 This information is to be given only in case of a complaint about interference.10 This report shall be signed by the operator who has reported the infringement and

countersigned by the Master of the ship or person responsible for the aircraft, or the officer incharge of the station in the case of an infringement reported by a station of the mobile service.When the report originates from a centralizing office or from an inspection service, it shall besigned by the head of that office or service and countersigned by an official of the administrationsending it.

For the use of the administration only

1 Company controlling the installation of the station againstwhich complaint is made .........................................................................................

2 Name of the operator of the station held responsible for theirregularity or infringement of the Regulations .......................................................

3 Action taken ........................................................................................................

182 Maritime Manual


Report of harmful interference

(See Article 15, Section VI)

Particulars concerning the station causing the interference:

a Name, call sign or other means of identification ..........................................

b Frequency measured ..........................................

Date: ..........................................

Time (UTC): ..........................................

c Class of emission 1 ..........................................

d Bandwidth (indicate whether measured or estimated) ..........................................

e Measured field strength or power flux-density2 ..........................................

Date: ..........................................

Time (UTC): ..........................................

f Observed polarization ..........................................

g Class of station and nature of service ..........................................

h Location/position/area/bearing (QTE3) (WRC-07) ..........................................

i Location of the facility which made the abovemeasurements ..........................................

Particulars concerning the transmitting station interfered with:

j Name, call sign or other means of identification ..........................................

k Frequency assigned ..........................................

_______________1 The class of emission shall contain the basic characteristics listed in Appendix 1. If anycharacteristic cannot be determined, indicate the unknown symbol with a dash. However, if astation is not able to identify unambiguously whether the modulation is frequency or phasemodulation, indicate frequency modulation (F).2 When measurements are not available, signal strengths according to the QSA scale should beprovided.3 See the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1172. (WRC-07)


l Frequency measured ..........................................

Date: ..........................................

Time (UTC): ..........................................

m Class of emission4 ..........................................

n Bandwidth (indicate whether measured or estimated,or indicate the necessary bandwidth notified to theRadiocommunication Bureau) ..........................................

o Location/position/area ..........................................

p Location of the facility which made the abovemeasurements ..........................................

Particulars furnished by the receiving station experiencing the interference:

q Name of station ..........................................

r Location/position/area ..........................................

s Dates and times (UTC) of occurrence of harmfulinterference ..........................................

t Bearings (QTE5) or other particulars (WRC-07) ..........................................

u Nature of interference ..........................................

v Field strength or power flux-density of the wantedemission at the receiving station experiencing theinterference6 ..........................................

Date: ..........................................

Time (UTC): ..........................................

w Polarization of the receiving antenna or observedpolarization ..........................................

x Action requested ..........................................NOTE – For convenience and brevity, telegraphic reports shall be in the format above, using theletters in the order listed in lieu of the explanatory titles, but only those letters for whichinformation is provided should be used. However, sufficient information shall be provided to theadministration receiving the report, so that an appropriate investigation can be conducted.

_______________4 See footnote 1.5 See footnote 3.6 See footnote 2.

184 Maritime Manual

APPENDIX 12

Special rules applicable to radiobeacons

(See Article 28)

Section II – Maritime Radiobeacons

1) The protection ratio required for assignment of frequencies tomaritime radiobeacons operating in the bands between 283.5 kHz and 335 kHz shall bebased on the effective radiated power being kept to the minimum value necessary togive the desired field strength at the service range and the need to provide adequategeographical separation between radiobeacons operating on the same frequency and atthe same time, to avoid harmful interference.

2) The daylight service range of the radiobeacons referred to in § 1)above shall be based on the following field strengths:

3) Region 1

– 50 V/m for radiobeacons north of 43° N;

– 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 43° N and 30° N;

– 100 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° N and 30° S;

– 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° S and 43° S;

– 50 V/m for radiobeacons south of 43° S.

4) Region 2


– 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 40° N and 31° N;


– 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° S and 43° S;



5) Region 3




6) The carrier frequencies of maritime radiobeacons and the separationbetween channels shall be based on the use of integer multiples of 100 Hz. Theseparation between adjacent carrier frequencies should be based on relevant ITU-RRecommendations.

186 Maritime Manual


Phonetic alphabet and figure code

(See Articles 32 and 57) (WRC-07)

1 When it is necessary to spell out call signs, service abbreviations and words,the following letter spelling table shall be used:

Letter to betransmitted

Code word to be used Spoken as1

A Alfa AL FAHB Bravo BRAH VOHC Charlie CHAR LEE or SHAR LEED Delta DELL TAHE Echo ECK OHF Foxtrot FOKS TROTG Golf GOLFH Hotel HOH TELLI India IN DEE AHJ Juliett JEW LEE ETTK Kilo KEY LOHL Lima LEE MAHM Mike MIKEN November NO VEM BERO Oscar OSS CAHP Papa PAH PAHQ Quebec KEH BECKR Romeo ROW ME OHS Sierra SEE AIR RAHT Tango TANG GOU Uniform YOU NEE FORM or

OO NEE FORMV Victor VIK TAHW Whiskey WISS KEYX X-ray ECKS RAYY Yankee YANG KEYZ Zulu ZOO LOO

_______________1 The syllables to be emphasized are underlined.


2 When it is necessary to spell out figures or marks, the following table shall beused:

Figure or mark tobe transmitted

Code word to be used Spoken as2

0 Nadazero NAH-DAH-ZAY-ROH1 Unaone OO-NAH-WUN2 Bissotwo BEES-SOH-TOO3 Terrathree TAY-RAH-TREE4 Kartefour KAR-TAY-FOWER5 Pantafive PAN-TAH-FIVE6 Soxisix SOK-SEE-SIX7 Setteseven SAY-TAY-SEVEN8 Oktoeight OK-TOH-AIT9 Novenine NO-VAY-NINER

Decimal point Decimal DAY-SEE-MALFull stop Stop STOP

3 However, stations of the same country, when communicating betweenthemselves, may use any other table recognized by their administration.

_______________2 Each syllable should be equally emphasized.

188 Maritime Manual


Frequencies for distress and safety communications for the GlobalMaritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS)

(See Article 31)

The frequencies for distress and safety communications for the GMDSS are given inTables 15-1 and 15-2 for frequencies below and above 30 MHz, respectively.

TABLE 15-1 (WRC-07)

Frequencies below 30 MHz

Frequency(kHz)

Descriptionof usage Notes

490 MSI The frequency 490 kHz is used exclusively for maritime safetyinformation (MSI). (WRC-03)

518 MSI The frequency 518 kHz is used exclusively by the internationalNAVTEX system.

*2 174.5 NBDP-COM

*2 182 RTP-COM The frequency 2 182 kHz uses class of emission J3E. See alsoNo. 52.190.

*2 187.5 DSC

3 023 AERO-SAR The aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies 3 023 kHz and5 680 kHz may be used for intercommunication between mobilestations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations, andfor communication between these stations and participating landstations, in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 27 (seeNos. 5.111 and 5.115).

*4 125 RTP-COM See also No. 52.221. The carrier frequency 4 125 kHz may beused by aircraft stations to communicate with stations of themaritime mobile service for distress and safety purposes,including search and rescue (see No. 30.11).

*4 177.5 NBDP-COM

*4 207.5 DSC

4 209.5 MSI The frequency 4 209.5 kHz is exclusively used for NAVTEX-type transmissions (see Resolution 339 (Rev.WRC-07)).


TABLE 15-1 (end ) (WRC-07)

Legend:

AERO-SAR These aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies may be used for distress andsafety purposes by mobile stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations.

DSC These frequencies are used exclusively for distress and safety calls using digitalselective calling in accordance with No. 32.5 (see Nos. 33.8 and 33.32). (WRC-07)

MSI In the maritime mobile service, these frequencies are used exclusively for thetransmission of maritime safety information (MSI) (including meteorological and navigational

Frequency(kHz)


4 210 MSI-HF

5 680 AERO-SAR See note under 3 023 kHz above.

*6 215 RTP-COM See also No. 52.221.

*6 268 NBDP-COM

*6 312 DSC

6 314 MSI-HF

*8 291 RTP-COM

*8 376.5 NBDP-COM

*8 414.5 DSC

8 416.5 MSI-HF

*12 290 RTP-COM

*12 520 NBDP-COM

*12 577 DSC

12 579 MSI-HF

*16 420 RTP-COM

*16 695 NBDP-COM

*16 804.5 DSC

16 806.5 MSI-HF

19 680.5 MSI-HF

22 376 MSI-HF

26 100.5 MSI-HF

190 Maritime Manual

warnings and urgent information) by coast stations to ships, by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.

MSI-HF In the maritime mobile service, these frequencies are used exclusively for thetransmission of high seas MSI by coast stations to ships, by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.

NBDP-COM These frequencies are used exclusively for distress and safety communications(traffic) using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.

RTP-COM These carrier frequencies are used for distress and safety communications(traffic) by radiotelephony.

* Except as provided in these Regulations, any emission capable of causing harmfulinterference to distress, alarm, urgency or safety communications on the frequencies denoted byan asterisk (*) is prohibited. Any emission causing harmful interference to distress and safetycommunications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in this Appendix isprohibited. (WRC-07)

TABLE 15-2 (WRC-07)

Frequencies above 30 MHz (VHF/UHF)

Frequency(MHz)


*121.5 AERO-SAR The aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz is used forthe purposes of distress and urgency for radiotelephony bystations of the aeronautical mobile service using frequencies inthe band between 117.975 MHz and 137 MHz. This frequencymay also be used for these purposes by survival craft stations.Emergency position-indicating radio beacons use the frequency121.5 MHz as indicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.690-1.

Mobile stations of the maritime mobile service maycommunicate with stations of the aeronautical mobile service onthe aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz for thepurposes of distress and urgency only, and on the aeronauticalauxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz for coordinated search andrescue operations, using class A3E emissions forboth frequencies (see also Nos. 5.111 and 5.200). They shallthen comply with any special arrangement betweengovernments concerned by which the aeronautical mobileservice is regulated.


TABLE 15-2 (continued ) (WRC-07)

Frequency(MHz)


123.1 AERO-SAR The aeronautical auxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz, which isauxiliary to the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz,is for use by stations of the aeronautical mobile service and byother mobile and land stations engaged in coordinated searchand rescue operations (see also No. 5.200).Mobile stations of the maritime mobile service maycommunicate with stations of the aeronautical mobile service onthe aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz for thepurposes of distress and urgency only, and on the aeronauticalauxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz for coordinated search andrescue operations, using class A3E emissions for bothfrequencies (see also Nos. 5.111 and 5.200). They shall thencomply with any special arrangement between governmentsconcerned by which the aeronautical mobile service is regulated.

156.3 VHF-CH06 The frequency 156.3 MHz may be used for communicationbetween ship stations and aircraft stations engaged incoordinated search and rescue operations. It may also be used byaircraft stations to communicate with ship stations for othersafety purposes (see also Note f ) in Appendix 18).

*156.525 VHF-CH70 The frequency 156.525 MHz is used in the maritime mobileservice for distress and safety calls using digital selective calling(see also Nos. 4.9, 5.227, 30.2 and 30.3).

156.650 VHF-CH13 The frequency 156.650 MHz is used for ship-to-ship commu-nications relating to the safety of navigation in accordance withNote k) in Appendix 18.

*156.8 VHF-CH16 The frequency 156.8 MHz is used for distress and safetycommunications by radiotelephony. Additionally, the frequency156.8 MHz may be used by aircraft stations for safety purposesonly.

*161.975 AIS-SARTVHF CH AIS 1

AIS 1 is used for AIS search and rescue transmitters (AIS-SART) for use in search and rescue operations.

*162.025 AIS-SARTVHF CH AIS 2

AIS 2 is used for AIS search and rescue transmitters (AIS-SART) for use in search and rescue operations.

*406-406.1 406-EPIRB This frequency band is used exclusively by satellite emergencyposition-indicating radio beacons in the Earth-to-space direction(see No. 5.266).

1 530-1 544 SAT-COM In addition to its availability for routine non-safety purposes, theband 1 530-1 544 MHz is used for distress and safety purposesin the space-to-Earth direction in the maritime mobile-satelliteservice. GMDSS distress, urgency and safety communicationshave priority in this band (see No. 5.353A).

192 Maritime Manual

TABLE 15-2 (end ) (WRC-07)

Legend:

AERO-SAR These aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies may be used for distress andsafety purposes by mobile stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations.

D&S-OPS The use of these bands is limited to distress and safety operations of satelliteemergency position-indicating radio beacons (EPIRBs).

SAT-COM These frequency bands are available for distress and safety purposes in themaritime mobile-satellite service (see Notes).

VHF-CH# These VHF frequencies are used for distress and safety purposes. The channelnumber (CH#) refers to the VHF channel as listed in Appendix 18, which should also beconsulted.

AIS These frequencies are used by automatic identification systems (AIS), whichshould operate in accordance with the most recent version of RecommendationITU-R M.1371. (WRC-07)

* Except as provided in these Regulations, any emission capable of causing harmfulinterference to distress, alarm, urgency or safety communications on the frequencies denotedby an asterisk (*) is prohibited. Any emission causing harmful interference to distress andsafety communications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in this Appendix isprohibited. (WRC-07)

Frequency(MHz)


*1 544-1 545 D&S-OPS Use of the band 1 544-1 545 MHz (space-to-Earth) is limited todistress and safety operations (see No. 5.356), including feederlinks of satellites needed to relay the emissions of satelliteemergency position-indicating radio beacons to earth stationsand narrow-band (space-to-Earth) links from space stations tomobile stations.

1 626.5-1 645.5 SAT-COM In addition to its availability for routine non-safety purposes, theband 1 626.5-1 645.5 MHz is used for distress and safetypurposes in the Earth-to-space direction in the maritime mobile-satellite service. GMDSS distress, urgency and safetycommunications have priority in this band (see No. 5.353A).

*1 645.5-1 646.5 D&S-OPS Use of the band 1 645.5-1 646.5 MHz (Earth-to-space) is limitedto distress and safety operations (see No. 5.375).

9 200-9 500 SARTS This frequency band is used by radar transponders to facilitatesearch and rescue.



Documents with which stations on board shipsand aircraft shall be provided

(See Articles 42 and 51)

Section I – Ship stations for which a Global Maritime Distress andSafety System installation is required by international agreement

These stations shall be provided with:

1 the licence prescribed by Article 18;

2 certificates of the operator or operators;

3 a log in which the following are recorded as they occur, together with thetime of the occurrence, unless administrations have adopted other arrangements forrecording all information which the log should contain:a) a summary of communications relating to distress, urgency and safety traffic;b) a reference to important service incidents;

4 the List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service IdentityAssignments (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format;

5 the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (see Article 20) ineither printed or electronic format;

6 the Manual for Use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format.NOTE – An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned initems 5 and 6 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalentinformation for the ship’s specified trading area).

Section II – Other ship stations for which a radio installation is requiredby regional or international agreement


1 the licence prescribed by Article 18;

2 certificates of the operator or operators;

194 Maritime Manual

3 a log or other arrangements which the administration may have adoptedfor that purpose, in which a summary of communications related to distress, urgencyand safety traffic shall be recorded together with the time of their occurrence;

4 the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (see Article 20) ineither printed or electronic format;

5 the relevant rules and procedures of radiocommunications, e.g. Manual forUse by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services (paper orelectronic format) (see Article 20).NOTE – An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned initems 4 and 5 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalentinformation for the ship’s specified trading area).

Section III – Other ship stations


1 the documents mentioned in items 1 and 2 of Section II;

2 the documents mentioned in items 4 and 5 of Section II, in accordancewith the requirements of the administrations concerned.NOTE – An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned initem 2 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalentinformation for the ship’s specified trading area). Administrations may also, by mutualagreement, exempt ships travelling only between their national jurisdictions from the licensingprescribed by Article 18 and the carriage of the documents mentioned in item 1 above, providedthose vessels are otherwise licensed or authorized by regulation.

Section IV – Stations on board aircraft


1 the documents mentioned in items 1 and 2 of Section I;

2 a log, unless administrations have adopted other arrangements forrecording all information which the log should contain;

3 those published documents, in either printed or electronic formats,containing official information relating to stations which the aircraft station may use forthe execution of its service.



Frequencies and channelling arrangements in thehigh-frequency bands for the maritime mobile service

(See Article 52)

PART A – Table of subdivided bands (WRC-07)

In the Table, where appropriate1, the assignable frequencies in a given band for eachusage are:– indicated by the lowest and highest frequency, in heavy type, assigned in that

band;– regularly spaced, the number of assignable frequencies ( f.) and the spacing in kHz

being indicated in italics.

Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service

_______________1 Within the non-shaded boxes.

Band (MHz) 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26

Limits (kHz) 4 063 6 200 8 195 12 230 16 360 18 780 22 000 25 070

Frequencies assignableto ship stations foroceanographic datatransmission c)

4 063.3to

4 064.8

6 f.0.3 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 065 6 200 8 195 12 230 16 360 18 780 22 000 25 070

Frequencies assignableto ship stations fortelephony, duplexoperation a) i)

4 066.4to

4 144.4

27 f.3 kHz

6 201.4to

6 222.4

8 f.3 kHz

8 196.4to

8 292.4

33 f.3 kHz

12 231.4to

12 351.4

41 f.3 kHz

16 361.4to

16 526.4

56 f.3 kHz

18 781.4to

18 823.4

15 f.3 kHz

22 001.4to

22 157.4

53 f.3 kHz

25 071.4to

25 098.4

10 f.3 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 146 6 224 8 294 12 353 16 528 18 825 22 159 25 100

Frequencies assignableto ship stations andcoast stations fortelephony, simplexoperation

a)

4 147.4to

4 150.4

2 f.3 kHz

6 225.4to

6 231.4

3 f.3 kHz

8 295.4to

8 298.4

2 f.3 kHz

12 354.4to

12 366.4

5 f.3 kHz

16 529.4to

16 547.4

7 f.3 kHz

18 826.4to

18 844.4

7 f.3 kHz

22 160.4to

22 178.4

7 f.3 kHz

25 101.4to

25 119.4

7 f.3 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 152 6 233 8 300 12 368 16 549 18 846 22 180 25 121

196 Maritime Manual

Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (continued )

Band (MHz) 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26

Limits (kHz) 4 152 6 233 8 300 12 368 16 549 18 846 22 180 25 121

Frequencies assignableto ship stations forwide-band telegraphy,facsimile and specialtransmission systems

4 154to

4 170

5 f.4 kHz

6 235to

6 259

7 f.4 kHz

8 302to

8 338

10 f.4 kHz

12 370to

12 418

13 f.4 kHz

16 551to

16 615

17 f.4 kHz

18 848to

18 868

6 f.4 kHz

22 182to

22 238

15 f.4 kHz

25 123to

25 159

10 f.4 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 172 6 261 8 340 12 420 16 617 18 870 22 240 25 161.25

Frequencies assignableto ship stations foroceanographic datatransmission c)

6 261.3to

6 262.5

5 f.0.3 kHz

8 340.3to

8 341.5

5 f.0.3 kHz

12 420.3to

12 421.5

5 f.0.3 kHz

16 617.3to

16 618.5

5 f.0.3 kHz

22 240.3to

22 241.5

5 f.0.3 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 172 6 262.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75 18 870 22 241.75 25 161.25

Frequencies (paired)assignable to shipstations for narrow-band direct-printing(NBDP) telegraphy anddata transmissionsystems at speeds notexceeding 100 Bd forFSK and 200 Bd forPSK

d) j) m) p)

4 172.5to

4 181.5

18 f.0.5 kHz

6 263to

6 275.5

25 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 181.75 6 275.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75 18 870 22 241.75 25 161.25

Calling frequenciesassignable to shipstations for A1A orA1B Morse telegraphy

g) p)

Limits (kHz) 4 186.75 6 280.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75 18 870 22 241.75 25 161.25

Frequencies (paired)assignable to shipstations for NBDPtelegraphy and datatransmission systems atspeeds not exceeding100 Bd for FSK and200 Bd for PSK

d) m) p)

6 281to

6 284.5

8 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 186.75 6 284.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75 18 870 22 241.75 25 161.25



Band (MHz) 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26

Limits (kHz) 4 186.75 6 284.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75 18 870 22 241.75 25 161.25

Working frequenciesassignable to shipstations for A1A orA1B Morse telegraphy

e) f) p)

4 187to

4 202

31 f.0.5 kHz

6 285to

6 300

31 f.0.5 kHz

8 342to

8 365.5

48 f.0.5 kHz

12 422to

12 476.5

110 f.0.5 kHz

16 619to

16 683

129 f.0.5 kHz

22 242to

22 279

75 f.0.5 kHz

25 161.5to

25 171

20 f.0.5 kHz

(WRC-07)

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 365.75 12 476.75 16 683.25 18 870 22 279.25 25 171.25


g) p)

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 370.75 12 476.75 16 683.25 18 870 22 284.25 25 172.75

Working frequenciesassignable to shipstations for A1A orA1B Morse telegraphy

e) f) p)

8 371to

8 376

11 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 376.25 12 476.75 16 683.25 18 870 22 284.25 25 172.75

Frequencies (paired)assignable to shipstations for NBDPtelegraphy and datatransmission systems atspeeds not exceeding100 bauds for FSK and200 bauds for PSK

d) j) m) p)

8 376.5to

8 396

40 f.0.5 kHz

12 477to

12 549.5

146 f.0.5 kHz

16 683.5to

16 733.5

101 f.0.5 kHz

18 870.5to

18 892.5

45 f.0.5 kHz

22 284.5to

22 351.5

135 f.0.5 kHz

25 173to

25 192.5

40 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 549.75 16 733.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75


g) p)

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 554.75 16 738.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75

198 Maritime Manual


Band (MHz) 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 554.75 16 738.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75

Frequencies (paired)assignable to shipstations for NBDPtelegraphy and datatransmission systems atspeeds not exceeding100 bauds for FSK and200 bauds for PSK

d) m) p)

12 555to

12 559.5

10 f.0.5 kHz

16 739to

16 784.5

92 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 559.75 16 784.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75

Frequencies (nonpaired) assignable toship stations for NBDPtelegraphy and datatransmission systems atspeeds not exceeding100 Bd for FSK and200 Bd for PSK and forA1A or A1B Morsetelegraphy (working)

b) p)

4 202.5to

4 207

10 f.0.5 kHz

6 300.5to

6 311.5

23 f.0.5 kHz

8 396.5to

8 414

36 f.0.5 kHz

12 560to

12 576.5

34 f.0.5 kHz

16 785to

16 804

39 f.0.5 kHz

18 893to

18 898

11 f.0.5 kHz

22 352to

22 374

45 f.0.5 kHz

25 193to

25 208

31 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 207.25 6 311.75 8 414.25 12 576.75 16 804.25 18 898.25 22 374.25 25 208.25

Frequencies assignableto ship stations fordigital selective calling

k) l)

4 207.5to

4 209

4 f.0.5 kHz

6 312to

6 313.5

4 f.0.5 kHz

8 414.5to

8 416

4 f.0.5 kHz

12 577to

12 578.5

4 f.0.5 kHz

16 804.5to

16 806

4 f.0.5 kHz

18 898.5to

18 899.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

22 374.5to

22 375.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

25 208.5to

25 209.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 209.25 6 313.75 8 416.25 12 578.75 16 806.25 18 899.75 22 375.75 25 210

Limits (kHz) 4 209.25 6 313.75 8 416.25 12 578.75 16 806.25 19 680.25 22 375.75 26 100.25

Frequencies (paired)assignable to coaststations for NBDP anddata transmissionsystems, at speeds notexceeding 100 Bd forFSK and 200 Bdfor PSK

d) n) o) p)

4 209.5to

4 219

20 f.0.5 kHz

6 314to

6 330.5

34 f.0.5 kHz

8 416.5to

8 436

40 f.0.5 kHz

12 579to

12 656.5

156 f.0.5 kHz

16 806.5to

16 902.5

193 f.0.5 kHz

19 680.5to

19 703

46 f.0.5 kHz

22 376to

22 443.5

136 f.0.5 kHz

26 100.5to

26 120.5

41 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 219.25 6 330.75 8 436.25 12 656.75 16 902.75 19 703.25 22 443.75 26 120.75


Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (end )

a) See Part B, Section I.

b) See Part B, Section III.

c) The frequency bands may also be used by buoy stations for oceanographic datatransmission and by stations interrogating these buoys.

d) See Part B, Section II.

e) In the frequency bands to be used by ship stations for A1A Morse telegraphy working atspeeds not exceeding 40 Bd, administrations may assign additional frequencies interleavedbetween the assignable frequencies. Any frequencies so assigned shall be multiples of100 Hz. Administrations shall ensure a uniform distribution of such assignments withinthe bands.

f) See Part B, Section V.

g) See Part B, Section IV.

Band (MHz) 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26

Limits (kHz) 4 219.25 6 330.75 8 436.25 12 656.75 16 902.75 19 703.25 22 443.75 26 120.75

Frequencies assignableto coast stations fordigital selective calling

l)

4 219.5to

4 220.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

6 331to

6 332

3 f.0.5 kHz

8 436.5to

8 437.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

12 657to

12 658

3 f.0.5 kHz

16 903to

16 904

3 f.0.5 kHz

19 703.5to

19 704.5

3 f.0.5 kHz

22 444to

22 445

3 f.0.5 kHz

26 121to

26 122

3 f.0.5 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 221 6 332.5 8 438 12 658.5 16 904.5 19 705 22 445.5 26 122.5

Frequencies assignableto coast stations forwide-band and A1A orA1B Morse telegraphy,facsimile, special anddata transmissionsystems and direct-printing telegraphysystems

Limits (kHz) 4 351 6 501 8 707 13 077 17 242 19 755 22 696 26 145

Frequenciesassignable to coaststations fortelephony, duplexoperation a)

4 352.4to

4 436.4

29 f.3 kHz

6 502.4to

6 523.4

8 f.3 kHz

8 708.4to

8 813.4

36 f.3 kHz

13 078.4to

13 198.4

41 f.3 kHz

17 243.4to

17 408.4

56 f.3 kHz

19 756.4to

19 798.4

15 f.3 kHz

22 697.4to

22 853.4

53 f.3 kHz

26 146.4to

26 173.4

10 f.3 kHz

Limits (kHz) 4 438 6 525 8 815 13 200 17 410 19 800 22 855 26 175

200 Maritime Manual

i) For the use of the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz, 8 291 kHz, 12 290 kHz and16 420 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safety purposes,by single-sideband radiotelephony, see Article 31. (WRC-07)

j) For the use of the frequencies 4 177.5 kHz, 6 268 kHz, 8 376.5 kHz, 12520 kHz and16 695 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safety purposes,by NBDP telegraphy, see Article 31.

k) For the use of the frequencies 4 207.5 kHz, 6 312 kHz, 8 414.5 kHz, 12577 kHz and16 804.5 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safetypurposes, by digital selective calling, see Article 31.

l) The following paired frequencies (for ship/coast stations) 4208/4 219.5 kHz,6 312.5/6 331 kHz, 8 415/8 436.5 kHz, 12 577.5/12 657 kHz, 16 805/16 903 kHz,18 898.5/19703.5 kHz, 22 374.5/22 444 kHz and 25208.5/26 121 kHz are the first choiceinternational frequencies for digital selective calling (see Article 54).

m) Frequencies from these frequency bands may also be used for A1A or A1B Morsetelegraphy (working) (see Part B, Section II).

n) The frequencies 4 210 kHz, 6 314 kHz, 8 416.5 kHz, 12 579 kHz, 16 806.5 kHz,19 680.5 kHz, 22 376 kHz and 26 100.5 kHz are the exclusive international frequencies forthe transmission of maritime safety information (MSI) (see Articles 31 and 33).

o) The frequency 4 209.5 kHz is an exclusive international frequency for the transmission ofNAVTEX type information (see Articles 31 and 33).

p) These sub-bands, except the frequencies referred to in Notes j), n) and o), may be used forthe initial testing and the possible future introduction within the maritime mobile serviceof new digital technologies. Stations using these sub-bands for this purpose shall not causeharmful interference to, and shall not claim protection from, other stations operating inaccordance with Article 5.

PART B – Channelling arrangements (WRC-07)

Section I – Radiotelephony

1 Radiotelephone channelling arrangements for the frequencies to be usedby coast and ship stations in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service areindicated in the following Sub-Sections:

Sub-Section A – Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) forduplex (two-frequency) operation;

Sub-Section B – Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) forsimplex (single-frequency) operation and for intership cross-band(two-frequency) operation;


Sub-Section C-1 – Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies(kHz) for ship stations in the band 4000-4063 kHz shared withthe fixed service;

Sub-Section C-2 – Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies(kHz) for ship and coast stations in the band 8100-8195 kHzshared with the fixed service.

2 The technical characteristics for single-sideband transmitters are specifiedin Recommendation ITU-R M.1173.

3 One or more series of frequencies from Sub-Section A (with the exceptionof those frequencies mentioned in § 5 below) may be assigned to each coast station,which uses these frequencies associated in pairs (see No. 52.226); each pair consists ofa transmitting and a receiving frequency. The series shall be selected with due regard tothe areas served and so as to avoid, as far as possible, harmful interference between theservices of different coast stations.

4 The frequencies in Sub-Section B are provided for worldwide commonuse by ships of all categories, according to traffic requirements, for ship transmissionsto coast stations and for intership communication. They are also authorized forworldwide common use for transmissions by coast stations (simplex operation)provided the peak envelope power does not exceed 1 kW.

5 The following frequencies in Sub-Section A are allocated for callingpurposes:

– Channel No. 421 in the 4 MHz band;







– Channel No. 2510 in the 25 MHz band.

Calling on the carrier frequencies 12290 kHz and 16 420 kHz shall be permitted only toand from rescue coordination centres (see No. 30.6.1), subject to the safeguards ofResolution 352 (WRC-03) (see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A).

The remaining frequencies in Sub-Sections A, B, C-1 and C-2 are workingfrequencies. (WRC-03)

202 Maritime Manual

5A For the use of the carrier frequencies:

4 125 kHz (Channel No. 421); 6 215 kHz (Channel No. 606); 8 291 kHz (Channel No. 833);12 290 kHz (Channel No. 1221);16 420 kHz (Channel No. 1621);

in Sub-Section A, by coast and ship stations for distress and safety purposes, seeArticle 31. (WRC-07)

6 a) Maritime radiotelephone stations using single-sideband emissions inthe bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz exclusively allocated to the maritimemobile service shall operate only on the carrier frequencies shown in the Sub-SectionsA and B and, in the case of analogue radiotelephony, shall be in conformity with thetechnical characteristics specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173.

b) Ship stations, when using frequencies for single-sideband emissionsin the bands 4000-4063 kHz and ship and coast stations, when using frequencies forsingle-sideband emissions in the band 8 100-8195 kHz should operate on the carrierfrequencies indicated in Sub-Sections C-1 and C-2 respectively. In the case of analogueradiotelephony technical characteristics of the equipment shall be those specified inRecommendation ITU-R M.1173.

c) Stations, when employing the single-sideband mode for analogueradiotelephony, shall use only class J3E emissions. For digital communications, classJ2D emissions shall be used. (WRC-03)

7 The channelling plan established in Sub-Section C-2 does not prejudicethe rights of administrations to establish, and to notify assignments to stations in themaritime mobile service other than those using radiotelephony in the band 8 100-8 195 kHz, in conformity with the relevant provisions of these Regulations.


Sub-Section A

Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for duplex(two-frequency) operation

4 MHz bandChannel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

401 4 357 4 358.4 4 065 4 066.4402 4 360 4 361.4 4 068 4 069.4403 4 363 4 364.4 4 071 4 072.4404 4 366 4 367.4 4 074 4 075.4405 4 369 4 370.4 4 077 4 078.4406 4 372 4 373.4 4 080 4 081.4407 4 375 4 376.4 4 083 4 084.4408 4 378 4 379.4 4 086 4 087.4409 4 381 4 382.4 4 089 4 090.4410 4 384 4 385.4 4 092 4 093.4411 4 387 4 388.4 4 095 4 096.4412 4 390 4 391.4 4 098 4 099.4413 4 393 4 394.4 4 101 4 102.4414 4 396 4 397.4 4 104 4 105.4415 4 399 4 400.4 4 107 4 108.4416 4 402 4 403.4 4 110 4 111.4417 4 405 4 406.4 4 113 4 114.4418 4 408 4 409.4 4 116 4 117.4419 4 411 4 412.4 4 119 4 120.4420 4 414 4 415.4 4 122 4 123.4421 4 417 * 4 418.4 * 4 125 * 4 4 126.4 *

422 4 420 4 421.4 4 128 4 129.4423 4 423 4 424.4 4 131 4 132.4424 4 426 4 427.4 4 134 4 135.4425 4 429 4 430.4 4 137 4 138.4426 4 432 4 433.4 4 140 4 141.4427 4 435 4 436.4 4 143 4 144.4428 1, 3 4 351 4 352.4 – –429 1, 3 4 354 4 355.4 – –

204 Maritime Manual

(continued)


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

601 6 501 6 502.4 6 200 6 201.4602 6 504 6 505.4 6 203 6 204.4603 6 507 6 508.4 6 206 6 207.4604 6 510 6 511.4 6 209 6 210.4605 6 513 6 514.4 6 212 6 213.4606 6 516 * 6 517.4 * 6 215 * 5 6 216.4 *

607 6 519 6 520.4 6 218 6 219.4608 6 522 6 523.4 6 221 6 222.4


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

801 8 719 8 720.4 8 195 8 196.4802 8 722 8 723.4 8 198 8 199.4803 8 725 8 726.4 8 201 8 202.4804 8 728 8 729.4 8 204 8 205.4805 8 731 8 732.4 8 207 8 208.4806 8 734 8 735.4 8 210 8 211.4807 8 737 8 738.4 8 213 8 214.4808 8 740 8 741.4 8 216 8 217.4809 8 743 8 744.4 8 219 8 220.4810 8 746 8 747.4 8 222 8 223.4811 8 749 8 750.4 8 225 8 226.4812 8 752 8 753.4 8 228 8 229.4813 8 755 8 756.4 8 231 8 232.4814 8 758 8 759.4 8 234 8 235.4815 8 761 8 762.4 8 237 8 238.4816 8 764 8 765.4 8 240 8 241.4817 8 767 8 768.4 8 243 8 244.4818 8 770 8 771.4 8 246 8 247.4819 8 773 8 774.4 8 249 8 250.4820 8 776 8 777.4 8 252 8 253.4821 8 779 * 8 780.4 * 8 255 * 8 256.4 *

822 8 782 8 783.4 8 258 8 259.4823 8 785 8 786.4 8 261 8 262.4824 8 788 8 789.4 8 264 8 265.4825 8 791 8 792.4 8 267 8 268.4


(continued)

8 MHz band (end)Channel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

826 8 794 8 795.4 8 270 8 271.4827 8 797 8 798.4 8 273 8 274.4828 8 800 8 801.4 8 276 8 277.4829 8 803 8 804.4 8 279 8 280.4830 8 806 8 807.4 8 282 8 283.4831 8 809 8 810.4 8 285 8 286.4832 8 812 8 813.4 8 288 8 289.4833 8 291 7 8 292.4 8 291 7 8 292.4834 3, 6 8 707 8 708.4 – –835 3, 6 8 710 8 711.4 – –836 3, 6 8 713 8 714.4 – –837 3, 6 8 716 8 717.4 – –


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1201 13 077 13 078.4 12 230 12 231.41202 13 080 13 081.4 12 233 12 234.41203 13 083 13 084.4 12 236 12 237.41204 13 086 13 087.4 12 239 12 240.41205 13 089 13 090.4 12 242 12 243.41206 13 092 13 093.4 12 245 12 246.41207 13 095 13 096.4 12 248 12 249.41208 13 098 13 099.4 12 251 12 252.41209 13 101 13 102.4 12 254 12 255.41210 13 104 13 105.4 12 257 12 258.41211 13 107 13 108.4 12 260 12 261.41212 13 110 13 111.4 12 263 12 264.41213 13 113 13 114.4 12 266 12 267.41214 13 116 13 117.4 12 269 12 270.41215 13 119 13 120.4 12 272 12 273.41216 13 122 13 123.4 12 275 12 276.41217 13 125 13 126.4 12 278 12 279.41218 13 128 13 129.4 12 281 12 282.41219 13 131 13 132.4 12 284 12 285.41220 13 134 13 135.4 12 287 12 288.4

206 Maritime Manual

(continued)


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1221 13 137 * 13 138.4 * 12 290 * 8 12 291.4 *

1222 13 140 13 141.4 12 293 12 294.41223 13 143 13 144.4 12 296 12 297.41224 13 146 13 147.4 12 299 12 300.41225 13 149 13 150.4 12 302 12 303.41226 13 152 13 153.4 12 305 12 306.41227 13 155 13 156.4 12 308 12 309.41228 13 158 13 159.4 12 311 12 312.41229 13 161 13 162.4 12 314 12 315.41230 13 164 13 165.4 12 317 12 318.41231 13 167 13 168.4 12 320 12 321.41232 13 170 13 171.4 12 323 12 324.41233 13 173 13 174.4 12 326 12 327.41234 13 176 13 177.4 12 329 12 330.41235 13 179 13 180.4 12 332 12 333.4

1236 13 182 13 183.4 12 335 12 336.41237 13 185 13 186.4 12 338 12 339.41238 13 188 13 189.4 12 341 12 342.41239 13 191 13 192.4 12 344 12 345.41240 13 194 13 195.4 12 347 12 348.41241 13 197 13 198.4 12 350 12 351.4


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1601 17 242 17 243.4 16 360 16 361.41602 17 245 17 246.4 16 363 16 364.41603 17 248 17 249.4 16 366 16 367.41604 17 251 17 252.4 16 369 16 370.41605 17 254 17 255.4 16 372 16 373.41606 17 257 17 258.4 16 375 16 376.41607 17 260 17 261.4 16 378 16 379.41608 17 263 17 264.4 16 381 16 382.41609 17 266 17 267.4 16 384 16 385.41610 17 269 17 270.4 16 387 16 388.4


(continued)

16 MHz band (continued )Channel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1611 17 272 17 273.4 16 390 16 391.41612 17 275 17 276.4 16 393 16 394.41613 17 278 17 279.4 16 396 16 397.41614 17 281 17 282.4 16 399 16 400.41615 17 284 17 285.4 16 402 16 403.41616 17 287 17 288.4 16 405 16 406.41617 17 290 17 291.4 16 408 16 409.41618 17 293 17 294.4 16 411 16 412.41619 17 296 17 297.4 16 414 16 415.41620 17 299 17 300.4 16 417 16 418.41621 17 302 * 17 303.4* 16 420 * 9 16 421.4 *

1622 17 305 17 306.4 16 423 16 424.41623 17 308 17 309.4 16 426 16 427.41624 17 311 17 312.4 16 429 16 430.41625 17 314 17 315.4 16 432 16 433.41626 17 317 17 318.4 16 435 16 436.41627 17 320 17 321.4 16 438 16 439.41628 17 323 17 324.4 16 441 16 442.41629 17 326 17 327.4 16 444 16 445.41630 17 329 17 330.4 16 447 16 448.41631 17 332 17 333.4 16 450 16 451.41632 17 335 17 336.4 16 453 16 454.41633 17 338 17 339.4 16 456 16 457.41634 17 341 17 342.4 16 459 16 460.41635 17 344 17 345.4 16 462 16 463.41636 17 347 17 348.4 16 465 16 466.41637 17 350 17 351.4 16 468 16 469.41638 17 353 17 354.4 16 471 16 472.41639 17 356 17 357.4 16 474 16 475.41640 17 359 17 360.4 16 477 16 478.4

1641 17 362 17 363.4 16 480 16 481.41642 17 365 17 366.4 16 483 16 484.41643 17 368 17 369.4 16 486 16 487.41644 17 371 17 372.4 16 489 16 490.41645 17 374 17 375.4 16 492 16 493.4

1646 17 377 17 378.4 16 495 16 496.41647 17 380 17 381.4 16 498 16 499.41648 17 383 17 384.4 16 501 16 502.41649 17 386 17 387.4 16 504 16 505.41650 17 389 17 390.4 16 507 16 508.4

208 Maritime Manual

(continued)


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1651 17 392 17 393.4 16 510 16 511.41652 17 395 17 396.4 16 513 16 514.41653 17 398 17 399.4 16 516 16 517.41654 17 401 17 402.4 16 519 16 520.41655 17 404 17 405.4 16 522 16 523.41656 17 407 17 408.4 16 525 16 526.4

18/19 MHz bandChannel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1801 19 755 19 756.4 18 780 18 781.41802 19 758 19 759.4 18 783 18 784.41803 19 761 19 762.4 18 786 18 787.41804 19 764 19 765.4 18 789 18 790.41805 19 767 19 768.4 18 792 18 793.41806 19 770 * 19 771.4 * 18 795 * 18 796.4 *

1807 19 773 19 774.4 18 798 18 799.41808 19 776 19 777.4 18 801 18 802.41809 19 779 19 780.4 18 804 18 805.41810 19 782 19 783.4 18 807 18 808.41811 19 785 19 786.4 18 810 18 811.41812 19 788 19 789.4 18 813 18 814.41813 19 791 19 792.4 18 816 18 817.41814 19 794 19 795.4 18 819 18 820.41815 19 797 19 798.4 18 822 18 823.4


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

2201 22 696 22 697.4 22 000 22 001.42202 22 699 22 700.4 22 003 22 004.42203 22 702 22 703.4 22 006 22 007.42204 22 705 22 706.4 22 009 22 010.42205 22 708 22 709.4 22 012 22 013.4


(continued)

22 MHz band (continued)Channel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

2206 22 711 22 712.4 22 015 22 016.42207 22 714 22 715.4 22 018 22 019.42208 22 717 22 718.4 22 021 22 022.42209 22 720 22 721.4 22 024 22 025.42210 22 723 22 724.4 22 027 22 028.42211 22 726 22 727.4 22 030 22 031.42212 22 729 22 730.4 22 033 22 034.42213 22 732 22 733.4 22 036 22 037.42214 22 735 22 736.4 22 039 22 040.42215 22 738 22 739.4 22 042 22 043.42216 22 741 22 742.4 22 045 22 046.42217 22 744 22 745.4 22 048 22 049.42218 22 747 22 748.4 22 051 22 052.42219 22 750 22 751.4 22 054 22 055.42220 22 753 22 754.4 22 057 22 058.42221 22 756 * 22 757.4 * 22 060 * 22 061.4 *

2222 22 759 22 760.4 22 063 22 064.42223 22 762 22 763.4 22 066 22 067.42224 22 765 22 766.4 22 069 22 070.42225 22 768 22 769.4 22 072 22 073.42226 22 771 22 772.4 22 075 22 076.42227 22 774 22 775.4 22 078 22 079.42228 22 777 22 778.4 22 081 22 082.42229 22 780 22 781.4 22 084 22 085.42230 22 783 22 784.4 22 087 22 088.42231 22 786 22 787.4 22 090 22 091.42232 22 789 22 790.4 22 093 22 094.42233 22 792 22 793.4 22 096 22 097.42234 22 795 22 796.4 22 099 22 100.42235 22 798 22 799.4 22 102 22 103.42236 22 801 22 802.4 22 105 22 106.42237 22 804 22 805.4 22 108 22 109.42238 22 807 22 808.4 22 111 22 112.42239 22 810 22 811.4 22 114 22 115.42240 22 813 22 814.4 22 117 22 118.42241 22 816 22 817.4 22 120 22 121.42242 22 819 22 820.4 22 123 22 124.42243 22 822 22 823.4 22 126 22 127.42244 22 825 22 826.4 22 129 22 130.42245 22 828 22 829.4 22 132 22 133.4

210 Maritime Manual

1 These coast station frequencies may be paired with a ship station frequency from the Table ofsimplex frequencies for ship and coast stations (see Sub-Section B) or with a frequency fromthe band 4 000-4063 kHz (see Sub-Section C-1) to be selected by the administrationconcerned.

3 These channels may also be used for simplex (single frequency) operation.

4 For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz, see Nos. 52.224 and 52.225, andAppendix 15.

5 For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 6 215 kHz, see Appendix 15. (WRC-07)


Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

2246 22 831 22 832.4 22 135 22 136.42247 22 834 22 835.4 22 138 22 139.42248 22 837 22 838.4 22 141 22 142.42249 22 840 22 841.4 22 144 22 145.42250 22 843 22 844.4 22 147 22 148.42251 22 846 22 847.4 22 150 22 151.42252 22 849 22 850.4 22 153 22 154.42253 22 852 22 853.4 22 156 22 157.4

25/26 MHz bandChannel No. Coast stations Ship stations

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

2501 26 145 26 146.4 25 070 25 071.42502 26 148 26 149.4 25 073 25 074.42503 26 151 26 152.4 25 076 25 077.42504 26 154 26 155.4 25 079 25 080.42505 26 157 26 158.4 25 082 25 083.42506 26 160 26 161.4 25 085 25 086.42507 26 163 26 164.4 25 088 25 089.42508 26 166 26 167.4 25 091 25 092.42509 26 169 26 170.4 25 094 25 095.42510 26 172 * 26 173.4 * 25 097 * 25 098.4 *


6 These coast station frequencies may be paired with a ship station frequency from the Table ofsimplex frequencies for ship and coast stations (see Sub-Section B) or with a frequency fromthe band 8 100-8 195 kHz (see Sub-Section C-2) to be selected by the administrationconcerned.

7 For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 8 291 kHz, see Appendix 15.8 For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 12 290 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A

and Appendix 15. (WRC-2000)9 For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 16 420 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A

and Appendix 15. (WRC-2000)* The frequencies followed by an asterisk are calling frequencies (see Nos. 52.221 and 52.222).

Sub-Section B

Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for simplex(single-frequency) operation and for intership cross-band

(two-frequency) operation

(See § 4 of Section I of this Appendix)

4 MHz band1 6 MHz band 8 MHz band2 12 MHz band3

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

4 1464 149

4 147.44 150.4

6 2246 2276 230

6 225.46 228.46 231.4

8 2948 297

8 295.48 298.4

12 35312 35612 36212 365

12 354.412 357.412 363.412 366.4

1 These frequencies may be used for duplex operation with coast stations operating on ChannelNos. 428 and 429 (see Sub-Section A).

2 These frequencies may be used for duplex operation with coast stations operating on ChannelNos. 834 up to and including 837 (see Sub-Section A).

3 For use of frequencies 12 359 kHz and 16537 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and52.222A. (WRC-2000)

212 Maritime Manual

3 For use of frequencies 12359 kHz and 16 537 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and52.222A. (WRC-2000)

Sub-Section C-1

Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) forship stations in the band 4 000-4 063 kHz shared with the fixed service

The frequencies in this Sub-Section may be used:

– for supplementing ship-to-shore channels for duplex operation in Sub-Section A;

– for intership simplex (single-frequency) and cross-band operation;

– for cross-band working with coast stations on channels in Sub-Section C-2;

– for duplex operation with coast stations working in the band 4 438-4 650 kHz;

– for duplex operation with Channel Nos. 428 and 429.

16 MHz band3 18/19 MHz band 22 MHz band 25/26 MHz band

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

165281653116534

165401654316546

16 529.416 532.416 535.4

16 541.416 544.416 547.4

18 82518 82818 83118 83418 83718 84018 843

18 826.418 829.418 832.418 835.418 838.418 841.418 844.4

22159221622216522168221712217422177

22 160.422 163.422 166.422 169.422 172.422 175.422 178.4

25 10025 10325 10625 10925 11225 11525 118

25101.425104.425107.425110.425113.425116.425119.4


Sub-Section C-2

Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for shipand coast stations in the band 8100-8 195 kHz shared with the fixed service

(See § 7 of Section I of this Appendix)

The frequencies in this Sub-Section may be used:

– for supplementing ship-to-shore and shore-to-ship channels for duplex operation inSub-Section A;

– for intership simplex (single frequency) and cross-band operation;

– for cross-band working with ship stations on channels in Sub-Section C-1;

– for ship-to-shore or shore-to-ship simplex operation;

– for duplex operation with Channel Nos. 834, 835, 836 and 837.

ChannelNo.

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

ChannelNo.

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1 4 000* 4001.4* 12 4 033 4 034.4 2 4 003* 4004.4* 13 4 036 4 037.4 3 4 006 4 007.4 14 4 039 4 040.4 4 4 009 4 010.4 15 4 042 4 043.4 5 4 012 4 013.4 16 4 045 4 046.4 6 4 015 4 016.4 17 4 048 4 049.4 7 4 018 4 019.4 18 4 051 4 052.4 8 4 021 4 022.4 19 4 054 4 055.4 9 4 024 4 025.4 20 4 057 4 058.410 4 027 4 028.4 21 4 060 4 061.411 4 030 4 031.4

* Administrations are requested to urge ship stations under their jurisdiction to refrainfrom using the band 4000-4 005 kHz when navigating in Region 3 (see alsoNo. 5.126).

214 Maritime Manual

Section II – Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy (paired frequencies)

1 Each coast station which uses paired frequencies is assigned one or morefrequency pairs from the following series; each pair consists of a transmitting and areceiving frequency.

2 The speed of the narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy and data systems shallnot exceed 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK.

Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz)

ChannelNo.

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

ChannelNo.

Carrierfrequency

Assignedfrequency

1 8 101 8 102.4 17 8 149 8 150.4 2 8 104 8 105.4 18 8 152 8 153.4 3 8 107 8 108.4 19 8 155 8 156.4 4 8 110 8 111.4 20 8 158 8 159.4 5 8 113 8 114.4 21 8 161 8 162.4 6 8 116 8 117.4 22 8 164 8 165.4 7 8 119 8 120.4 23 8 167 8 168.4 8 8 122 8 123.4 24 8 170 8 171.4 9 8 125 8 126.4 25 8 173 8 174.410 8 128 8 129.4 26 8 176 8 177.411 8 131 8 132.4 27 8 179 8 180.412 8 134 8 135.4 28 8 182 8 183.413 8 137 8 138.4 29 8 185 8 186.414 8 140 8 141.4 30 8 188 8 189.415 8 143 8 144.4 31 8 191 8 192.416 8 146 8 147.4

Channel 4 MHz band 1 6 MHz band 3 8 MHz band 4

No. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

1 2 3 4 5

4 210.54 2114 211.54 2124 212.5

4 172.54 1734 173.54 1744 174.5

6 314.56 3156 315.56 3166 316.5

6 2636 263.56 2646 264.56 265

8 376.5 2

8 4178 417.58 4188 418.5

8 376.5 2

8 3778 377.58 3788 378.5

6 7 8 910

4 2134 213.54 2144 214.54 215

4 1754 175.54 1764 176.54 177

6 3176 317.56 3186 318.56 319

6 265.56 2666 266.56 2676 267.5

8 4198 419.58 4208 420.58 421

8 3798 379.58 3808 380.58 381



Channel 4 MHz band 1 (end) 6 MHz band 3 (end) 8 MHz band 4 (end)No. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

1112131415

4 177.52

4 215.54 2164 216.54 217

4 177.52

4 1784 178.54 1794 179.5

6 2682

6 319.56 3206 320.56 321

6 2682

6 268.56 2696 269.56 270

8 421.58 4228 422.58 4238 423.5

8 381.58 3828 382.58 3838 383.5

1617181920

4 217.54 2184 218.54 219

4 1804 180.54 1814 181.5

6 321.56 3226 322.56 3236 323.5

6 270.56 2716 271.56 2726 272.5

8 4248 424.58 4258 425.58 426

8 3848 384.58 3858 385.58 386

2122232425

6 3246 324.56 3256 325.56 326

6 2736 273.56 2746 274.56 275

8 426.58 4278 427.58 4288 428.5

8 386.58 3878 387.58 3888 388.5

2627282930

6 326.56 3276 327.56 3286 328.5

6 275.56 2816 281.56 2826 282.5

8 4298 429.58 4308 430.58 431

8 3898 389.58 3908 390.58 391

3132333435

6 3296 329.56 3306 330.5

6 2836 283.56 2846 284.5

8 431.58 4328 432.58 4338 433.5

8 391.58 3928 392.58 3938 393.5

3637383940

8 4348 434.58 4358 435.58 436

8 3948 394.58 3958 395.58 396

1 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies for transmitting A1A or A1BMorse telegraphy (working), with the exception of channel No. 11 (see Appendix 15).

2 For the conditions of use of this frequency, see Article 31.3 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 25 up to and

including 34 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).4 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 29 up to and

including 40 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).

216 Maritime Manual


Channel 12 MHz band 5 16 MHz band 6 18/19 MHz bandNo. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

1 2 3 4 5

12 579.512 58012 580.512 58112 581.5

12 47712 477.512 47812 478.512 479

16 80716 807.516 80816 808.516 809

16 683.516 68416 684.516 68516 685.5

19 68119 681.519 68219 682.519 683

18 870.518 87118 871.518 87218 872.5

6 7 8 910

12 58212 582.512 58312 583.512 584

12 479.512 48012 480.512 48112 481.5

16 809.516 81016 810.516 81116 811.5

16 68616 686.516 68716 687.516 688

19 683.519 68419 684.519 68519 685.5

18 87318 873.518 87418 874.518 875

1112131415

12 584.512 58512 585.512 58612 586.5

12 48212 482.512 48312 483.512 484

16 81216 812.516 81316 813.516 814

16 688.516 68916 689.516 69016 690.5

19 68619 686.519 68719 687.519 688

18 875.518 87618 876.518 87718 877.5

1617181920

12 58712 587.512 58812 588.512 589

12 484.512 48512 485.512 48612 486.5

16 814.516 81516 815.516 81616 816.5

16 69116 691.516 69216 692.516 693

19 688.519 68919 689.519 69019 690.5

18 87818 878.518 87918 879.518 880

2122232425

12 589.512 59012 590.512 59112 591.5

12 48712 487.512 48812 488.512 489

16 81716 817.516 81816 695 216 818.5

16 693.516 69416 694.516 695 216 695.5

19 69119 691.519 69219 692.519 693

18 880.518 88118 881.518 88218 882.5

2627282930

12 59212 592.512 59312 593.512 594

12 489.512 49012 490.512 49112 491.5

16 81916 819.516 82016 820.516 821

16 69616 696.516 69716 697.516 698

19 693.519 69419 694.519 69519 695.5

18 88318 883.518 88418 884.518 885

3132333435

12 594.512 59512 595.512 59612 596.5

12 49212 492.512 49312 493.512 494

16 821.516 82216 822.516 82316 823.5

16 698.516 69916 699.516 70016 700.5

19 69619 696.519 69719 697.519 698

18 885.518 88618 886.518 88718 887.5

3637383940

12 59712 597.512 59812 598.512 599

12 494.512 49512 495.512 49612 496.5

16 82416 824.516 82516 825.516 826

16 70116 701.516 70216 702.516 703

19 698.519 69919 699.519 70019 700.5

18 88818 888.518 88918 889.518 890




Channel 12 MHz band 5 (cont.) 16 MHz band 6 (cont.) 18/19 MHz band (end)No. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

4142434445

12 599.512 60012 600.512 60112 601.5

12 49712 497.512 49812 498.512 499

16 826.516 82716 827.516 82816 828.5

16 703.516 70416 704.516 70516 705.5

19 70119 701.519 70219 702.519 703

18 890.518 89118 891.518 89218 892.5

5 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 58 up to andincluding 156 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working), with the exception ofchannel No. 87 (see Appendix 15).

6 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 71 up to andincluding 193 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).

Channel 12 MHz band 5 (cont.) 16 MHz band 6 (cont.)No. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

4647484950

12 60212 602.512 60312 603.512 604

12 499.512 50012 500.512 50112 501.5

16 82916 829.516 83016 830.516 831

16 70616 706.516 70716 707.516 708

5152535455

12 604.512 60512 605.512 60612 606.5

12 50212 502.512 50312 503.512 504

16 831.516 83216 832.516 83316 833.5

16 708.516 70916 709.516 71016 710.5

5657585960

12 60712 607.512 60812 608.512 609

12 504.512 50512 505.512 50612 506.5

16 83416 834.516 83516 835.516 836

16 71116 711.516 71216 712.516 713

6162636465

12 609.512 61012 610.512 61112 611.5

12 50712 507.512 50812 508.512 509

16 836.516 83716 837.516 83816 838.5

16 713.516 71416 714.516 71516 715.5

6667686970

12 61212 612.512 61312 613.512 614

12 509.512 51012 510.512 51112 511.5

16 83916 839.516 84016 840.516 841

16 71616 716.516 71716 717.516 718

218 Maritime Manual



7172737475

12 614.512 61512 615.512 61612 616.5

12 51212 512.512 51312 513.512 514

16 841.516 84216 842.516 84316 843.5

16 718.516 71916 719.516 72016 720.5

7677787980

12 61712 617.512 61812 618.512 619

12 514.512 51512 515.512 51612 516.5

16 84416 844.516 84516 845.516 846

16 72116 721.516 72216 722.516 723

8182838485

12 619.512 62012 620.512 62112 621.5

12 51712 517.512 51812 518.512 519

16 846.516 84716 847.516 84816 848.5

16 723.516 72416 724.516 72516 725.5

86 87 88 89 90

12 62212 520 212 622.512 62312 623.5

12 519.512 520 212 520.512 52112 521.5

16 84916 849.516 85016 850.516 851

16 72616 726.516 72716 727.516 728

91 92 93 94 95

12 62412 624.512 62512 625.512 626

12 52212 522.512 52312 523.512 524

16 851.516 85216 852.516 85316 853.5

16 728.516 72916 729.516 73016 730.5

96 97 98 99100

12 626.512 62712 627.512 62812 628.5

12 524.512 52512 525.512 52612 526.5

16 85416 854.516 85516 855.516 856

16 73116 731.516 73216 732.516 733

101102103104105

12 62912 629.512 63012 630.512 631

12 52712 527.512 52812 528.512 529

16 856.516 85716 857.516 85816 858.5

16 733.516 73916 739.516 74016 740.5

106107108109110

12 631.512 63212 632.512 63312 633.5

12 529.512 53012 530.512 53112 531.5

16 85916 859.516 86016 860.516 861

16 74116 741.516 74216 742.516 743




111112113114115

12 63412 634.512 63512 635.512 636

12 53212 532.512 53312 533.512 534

16 861.516 86216 862.516 86316 863.5

16 743.516 74416 744.516 74516 745.5

116117118119120

12 636.512 63712 637.512 63812 638.5

12 534.512 53512 535.512 53612 536.5

16 86416 864.516 86516 865.516 866

16 74616 746.516 74716 747.516 748

121122123124125

12 63912 639.512 64012 640.512 641

12 53712 537.512 53812 538.512 539

16 866.516 86716 867.516 86816 868.5

16 748.516 74916 749.516 75016 750.5

126127128129130

12 641.512 64212 642.512 64312 643.5

12 539.512 54012 540.512 54112 541.5

16 86916 869.516 87016 870.516 871

16 75116 751.516 75216 752.516 753

131132133134135

12 64412 644.512 64512 645.512 646

12 54212 542.512 54312 543.512 544

16 871.516 87216 872.516 87316 873.5

16 753.516 75416 754.516 75516 755.5

136137138139140

12 646.512 64712 647.512 64812 648.5

12 544.512 54512 545.512 54612 546.5

16 87416 874.516 87516 875.516 876

16 75616 756.516 75716 757.516 758

141142143144145

12 64912 649.512 65012 650.512 651

12 54712 547.512 54812 548.512 549

16 876.516 87716 877.516 87816 878.5

16 758.516 75916 759.516 76016 760.5

146147148149150

12 651.512 65212 652.512 65312 653.5

12 549.512 55512 555.512 55612 556.5

16 87916 879.516 88016 880.516 881

16 76116 761.516 76216 762.516 763

220 Maritime Manual


Channel 12 MHz band 5 (end) 16 MHz band 6 (end)No. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive

151152153154155

12 65412 654.512 65512 655.512 656

12 55712 557.512 55812 558.512 559

16 881.516 88216 882.516 88316 883.5

16 763.516 76416 764.516 76516 765.5

156157158159160

12 656.5 12 559.5 16 88416 884.516 88516 885.516 886

16 76616 766.516 76716 767.516 768

161162163164165

16 886.516 88716 887.516 88816 888.5

16 768.516 76916 769.516 77016 770.5

166167168169170

16 88916 889.516 89016 890.516 891

16 77116 771.516 77216 772.516 773

171172173174175

16 891.516 89216 892.516 89316 893.5

16 773.516 77416 774.516 77516 775.5

176177178179180

16 89416 894.516 89516 895.516 896

16 77616 776.516 77716 777.516 778

181182183184185

16 896.516 89716 897.516 89816 898.5

16 778.516 77916 779.516 78016 780.5

186187188189190

16 89916 899.516 90016 900.516 901

16 78116 781.516 78216 782.516 783

191192193

16 901.516 90216 902.5

16 783.516 78416 784.5



Channel 22 MHz band 7 25/26 MHz bandNo. Transmit Receive Transmit Receive 1 2 3 4 5

22 376.522 37722 377.522 37822 378.5

22 284.522 28522 285.522 28622 286.5

26 10126 101.526 10226 102.526 103

25 17325 173.525 17425 174.525 175

6 7 8 910

22 37922 379.522 38022 380.522 381

22 28722 287.522 28822 288.522 289

26 103.526 10426 104.526 10526 105.5

25 175.525 17625 176.525 17725 177.5

1112131415

22 381.522 38222 382.522 38322 383.5

22 289.522 29022 290.522 29122 291.5

26 10626 106.526 10726 107.526 108

25 17825 178.525 17925 179.525 180

1617181920

22 38422 384.522 38522 385.522 386

22 29222 292.522 29322 293.522 294

26 108.526 10926 109.526 11026 110.5

25 180.525 18125 181.525 18225 182.5

2122232425

22 386.522 38722 387.522 38822 388.5

22 294.522 29522 295.522 29622 296.5

26 11126 111.526 11226 112.526 113

25 18325 183.525 18425 184.525 185

2627282930

22 38922 389.522 39022 390.522 391

22 29722 297.522 29822 298.522 299

26 113.526 11426 114.526 11526 115.5

25 185.525 18625 186.525 18725 187.5

3132333435

22 391.522 39222 392.522 39322 393.5

22 299.522 30022 300.522 30122 301.5

26 11626 116.526 11726 117.526 118

25 18825 188.525 18925 189.525 190

3637383940

22 39422 394.522 39522 395.522 396

22 30222 302.522 30322 303.522 304

26 118.526 11926 119.526 12026 120.5

25 190.525 19125 191.525 19225 192.5

4142434445

22 396.522 39722 397.522 39822 398.5

22 304.522 30522 305.522 30622 306.5

4647484950

22 39922 399.522 40022 400.522 401

22 30722 307.522 30822 308.522 309

7 Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channels No. 68 up to andincluding 135 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).

222 Maritime Manual

Table of frequencies for two-frequencyoperation by coast stations (kHz)

Channel 22 MHz band 7 (cont.)No. Transmit Receive 51 52 53 54 55

22 401.522 40222 402.522 40322 403.5

22 309.522 31022 310.522 31122 311.5

56 57 58 59 60

22 40422 404.522 40522 405.522 406

22 31222 312.522 31322 313.522 314

61 62 63 64 65

22 406.522 40722 407.522 40822 408.5

22 314.522 31522 315.522 31622 316.5

66 67 68 69 70

22 40922 409.522 41022 410.522 411

22 31722 317.522 31822 318.522 319

71 72 73 74 75

22 411.522 41222 412.522 41322 413.5

22 319.522 32022 320.522 32122 321.5

76 77 78 79 80

22 41422 414.522 41522 415.522 416

22 32222 322.522 32322 323.522 324

81 82 83 84 85

22 416.522 41722 417.522 41822 418.5

22 324.522 32522 325.522 32622 326.5

86 87 88 89 90

22 41922 419.522 42022 420.522 421

22 32722 327.522 32822 328.522 329


Table of frequencies for two-frequencyoperation by coast stations (kHz)

Channel 22 MHz band 7 (end)No. Transmit Receive 91 92 93 94 95

22 421.522 42222 422.522 42322 423.5

22 329.522 33022 330.522 33122 331.5

96 97 98 99100

22 42422 424.522 42522 425.522 426

22 33222 332.522 33322 333.522 334

101102103104105

22 426.522 42722 427.522 42822 428.5

22 334.522 33522 335.522 33622 336.5

106107108109110

22 42922 429.522 43022 430.522 431

22 33722 337.522 33822 338.522 339

111112113114115

22 431.522 43222 432.522 43322 433.5

22 339.522 34022 340.522 34122 341.5

116117118119120

22 43422 434.522 43522 435.522 436

22 34222 342.522 34322 343.522 344

121122123124125

22 436.522 43722 437.522 43822 438.5

22 344.522 34522 345.522 34622 346.5

126127128129130

22 43922 439.522 44022 440.522 441

22 34722 347.522 34822 348.522 349

131132133134135

22 441.522 44222 442.522 44322 443.5

22 349.522 35022 350.522 35122 351.5

224 Maritime Manual

Section III – Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy(non-paired frequencies)

1 One or more frequencies are assigned to each ship station as transmittingfrequencies.

2 All frequencies in this Appendix may also be used by ship stations fortransmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).

3 All frequencies appearing in this Appendix may be used for NBDP duplexoperation.

The corresponding coast station frequencies should be selected by the administrationconcerned from the sub-bands for coast station wideband telegraphy, A1A or A1BMorse telegraphy, facsimile, special and data transmission systems and direct-printingtelegraphy systems.

4 The speed of the narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy and data systems shallnot exceed 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK.


Table of ship station transmitting frequencies (kHz)

Frequency bands

ChannelNo.

4 MHz 6 MHz 8 MHz 12 MHz 16 MHz 18/19MHz

22 MHz 25/26MHz

1 2 3 4 5

4 202.54 2034 203.54 2044 204.5

6 300.56 3016 301.56 3026 302.5

8 396.58 3978 397.58 3988 398.5

12 56012 560.512 56112 561.512 562

16 78516 785.516 78616 786.516 787

18 89318 893.518 89418 894.518 895

22 35222 352.522 35322 353.522 354

25 19325 193.525 19425 194.525 195

6 7 8 910

4 2054 205.54 2064 206.54 207

6 3036 303.56 3046 304.56 305

8 3998 399.58 4008 400.58 401

12 562.512 56312 563.512 56412 564.5

16 787.516 78816 788.516 78916 789.5

18 895.518 89618 896.518 89718 897.5

22 354.522 35522 355.522 35622 356.5

25 195.525 19625 196.525 19725 197.5

1112131415

6 305.56 3066 306.56 3076 307.5

8 401.58 4028 402.58 4038 403.5

12 56512 565.512 56612 566.512 567

16 79016 790.516 79116 791.516 792

18 898 22 35722 357.522 35822 358.522 359

25 19825 198.525 19925 199.525 200

1617181920

6 3086 308.56 3096 309.56 310

8 4048 404.58 4058 405.58 406

12 567.512 56812 568.512 56912 569.5

16 792.516 79316 793.516 79416 794.5

22 359.522 36022 360.522 36122 361.5

25 200.525 20125 201.525 20225 202.5

2122232425

6 310.56 3116 311.5

8 406.58 4078 407.58 4088 408.5

12 57012 570.512 57112 571.512 572

16 79516 795.516 79616 796.516 797

22 36222 362.522 36322 363.522 364

25 20325 203.525 20425 204.525 205

2627282930

8 4098 409.58 4108 410.58 411

12 572.512 57312 573.512 57412 574.5

16 797.516 79816 798.516 79916 799.5

22 364.522 36522 365.522 36622 366.5

25 205.525 20625 206.525 20725 207.5

3132333435

8 411.58 4128 412.58 4138 413.5

12 57512 575.512 57612 576.5

16 80016 800.516 80116 801.516 802

22 36722 367.522 36822 368.522 369

25 208

3637383940

8 414 16 802.516 80316 803.516 804

22 369.522 37022 370.522 37122 371.5

226 Maritime Manual

Table of ship station transmitting frequencies (kHz)

Section IV – Morse telegraphy (calling)

Table of calling frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1BMorse telegraphy at speeds not exceeding 40 Bd* (kHz)

Frequency bands (end)

ChannelNo.

4 MHz 6 MHz 8 MHz 12 MHz 16 MHz 18/19MHz

22 MHz 25/26MHz

4142434445

22 37222 372.522 37322 373.522 374

Group Channelseries

4 MHzband

6 MHzband

8 MHzband

12 MHzband

16 MHzband

22 MHzband

25/26 MHzband

I 12

4 1824 182.5

6 2776 277.5

8 3668 366.5

12 55012 550.5

16 73416 734.5

22 279.522 280

Channel A25 171.5Groups I

and II

Commonchannel

Commonchannel

3

4

4 184

4 184.5

6 276

6 276.5

8 368

8 369

12 552

12 553.5

16 736

16 738

22 280.5

22 281

Commonchannel C

25 172

II 56

4 1834 183.5

6 2786 278.5

8 3678 367.5

12 55112 551.5

16 73516 735.5

22 281.522 282

Channel A25 171.5Groups I

and II

III 78

4 1854 185.5

6 2796 279.5

8 368.58 369.5

12 552.512 553

16 736.516 737

22 282.522 283

Channel B25 172.5

IV 910

4 1864 186.5

6 2806 280.5

8 3708 370.5

12 55412 554.5

16 737.516 738.5

22 283.522 284

Groups IIIand IV

* Channel width in every band: 0.5 kHz.NOTES1 Only the common channels in the 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 MHz for A1A Morse telegraphy are harmonically related.2 Administrations should assign the frequencies as they appear in this Appendix only to ship stations equipped with

cristal controlled oscillators.3 However, administrations may subdivide each appropriate group channel and common channel into specific calling

frequencies on every full 100 Hz in the channel and assign these discrete frequencies to ships with synthetizedtransmitters.


Examples of subdivision of channels (centre frequencies are underlined)

4 181.84 181.94 1824 182.14 182.2

6 276.86 276.96 2776 277.16 277.2

8 365.88 365.98 3668 366.18 366.2

12 549.812 549.912 55012 550.112 550.2

16 733.816 733.916 73416 734.116 734.2

22 279.322 279.422 279.522 279.622 279.7

25 171.325 171.425 171.525 171.625 171.7

4 Administrations should avoid as far as possible, assigning the two frequencies at 100 Hz from the harmonicallyrelated common channel.

5 In the 22 MHz bands and 25/26 MHz bands the channels are not harmonically related to those in the 4 to 16 MHzbands. However, the principle of subdivision of channels into specific calling frequencies on 100 Hz applies.

Section V – Morse telegraphy (working)

Table of working frequencies (kHz) assignable to ship stationsfor A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy at speeds

not exceeding 40 Bd

(See also Part A, Note e))

Frequency bandsChannel

No. 4 MHz 6 MHz 8 MHz 12 MHz 16 MHz 22 MHz 25/26 MHz

1 2 3 4 5

4 1874 187.54 1884 188.54 189

6 2856 285.56 2866 286.56 287

8 3428 342.58 3438 343.58 344

12 42212 422.512 42312 423.512 424

16 61916 619.516 62016 620.516 621

22 24222 242.522 24322 243.522 244

25 161.525 16225 162.525 16325 163.5

6 7 8 910

4 189.54 1904 190.54 1914 191.5

6 287.56 2886 288.56 2896 289.5

8 344.58 3458 345.58 3468 346.5

12 424.512 42512 425.512 42612 426.5

16 621.516 62216 622.516 62316 623.5

22 244.522 24522 245.522 24622 246.5

25 16425 164.525 16525 165.525 166

1112131415

4 1924 192.54 1934 193.54 194

6 2906 290.56 2916 291.56 292

8 3478 347.58 3488 348.58 349

12 42712 427.512 42812 428.512 429

16 62416 624.516 62516 625.516 626

22 24722 247.522 24822 248.522 249

25 166.525 16725 167.525 16825 168.5

1617181920

4 194.54 1954 195.54 1964 196.5

6 292.56 2936 293.56 2946 294.5

8 349.58 3508 350.58 3518 351.5

12 429.512 43012 430.512 43112 431.5

16 626.516 62716 627.516 62816 628.5

22 249.522 25022 250.522 25122 251.5

25 16925 169.525 17025 170.525 171

228 Maritime Manual

Frequency bands (cont.)Channel


2122232425

4 1974 197.54 1984 198.54 199

6 2956 295.56 2966 296.56 297

8 3528 352.58 3538 353.58 354

12 43212 432.512 43312 433.512 434

16 62916 629.516 63016 630.516 631

22 25222 252.522 25322 253.522 254

2627282930

4 199.54 2004 200.54 2014 201.5

6 297.56 2986 298.56 2996 299.5

8 354.58 3558 355.58 3568 356.5

12 434.512 43512 435.512 43612 436.5

16 631.516 63216 632.516 63316 633.5

22 254.522 25522 255.522 25622 256.5

3132333435

4 202 6 300 8 3578 357.58 3588 358.58 359

12 43712 437.512 43812 438.512 439

16 63416 634.516 63516 635.516 636

22 25722 257.522 25822 258.522 259

3637383940

8 359.58 3608 360.58 3618 361.5

12 439.512 44012 440.512 44112 441.5

16 636.516 63716 637.516 63816 638.5

22 259.522 26022 260.522 26122 261.5

4142434445

8 3628 362.58 3638 363.58 364

12 44212 442.512 44312 443.512 444

16 63916 639.516 64016 640.516 641

22 26222 262.522 26322 263.522 264

4647484950

8 364.58 3658 365.58 3718 371.5

12 444.512 44512 445.512 44612 446.5

16 641.516 64216 642.516 64316 643.5

22 264.522 26522 265.522 26622 266.5

5152535455

8 3728 372.58 3738 373.58 374

12 44712 447.512 44812 448.512 449

16 64416 644.516 64516 645.516 646

22 26722 267.522 26822 268.522 269

5657585960

8 374.58 3758 375.58 376

12 449.512 45012 450.512 45112 451.5

16 646.516 64716 647.516 64816 648.5

22 269.522 27022 270.522 27122 271.5


Frequency bands (cont.)Channel


6162636465

12 45212 452.512 45312 453.512 454

16 64916 649.516 65016 650.516 651

22 27222 272.522 27322 273.522 274

6667686970

12 454.512 45512 455.512 45612 456.5

16 651.516 65216 652.516 65316 653.5

22 274.522 27522 275.522 27622 276.5

7172737475

12 45712 457.512 45812 458.512 459

16 65416 654.516 65516 655.516 656

22 27722 277.522 27822 278.522 279

7677787980

12 459.512 46012 460.512 46112 461.5

16 656.516 65716 657.516 65816 658.5

8182838485

12 46212 462.512 46312 463.512 464

16 65916 659.516 66016 660.516 661

8687888990

12 464.512 46512 465.512 46612 466.5

16 661.516 66216 662.516 66316 663.5

9192939495

12 46712 467.512 46812 468.512 469

16 66416 664.516 66516 665.516 666

96 97 98 99100

12 469.512 47012 470.512 47112 471.5

16 666.516 66716 667.516 66816 668.5

230 Maritime Manual

Frequency bands (end)Channel


101102103104105

12 47212 472.512 47312 473.512 474

16 66916 669.516 67016 670.516 671

106107108109110

12 474.512 47512 475.512 47612 476.5

16 671.516 67216 672.516 67316 673.5

111112113114115

16 67416 674.516 67516 675.516 676

116117118119120

16 676.516 67716 677.516 67816 678.5

121122123124125

16 67916 679.516 68016 680.516 681

126127128129

16 681.516 68216 682.516 683



Table of transmitting frequencies in theVHF maritime mobile band

(See Article 52)

NOTE A – For assistance in understanding the Table, see Notes a) to q ) below. (WRC-07)

NOTE B – The Table below defines the channel numbering for maritime VHF communicationsbased on 25 kHz channel spacing and use of several duplex channels, but also allows the use of12.5 kHz channel spacing. The channel numbering for 12.5 kHz channels and the conversion oftwo-frequency channels for single-frequency operation shall be in accordance withRecommendation ITU-R M.1084-4 Annex 4, Tables 1 and 3. (WRC-07)

Channeldesignator Notes

Transmittingfrequencies

(MHz) Inter-ship

Port operationsand ship movement Public

corres-pondenceFrom ship

stationsFrom coast

stationsSingle

frequencyTwo

frequency

60 m), o) 156.025 160.625 x* x x01 m), o) 156.050 160.650 x* x x

61 m), o) 156.075 160.675 x x x02 m), o) 156.100 160.700 x x x

62 m), o) 156.125 160.725 x x x03 m), o) 156.150 160.750 x x x

63 m), o) 156.175 160.775 x x x04 m), o) 156.200 160.800 x x x

64 m), o) 156.225 160.825 x x x05 m), o) 156.250 160.850 x x x

65 m), o) 156.275 160.875 x x x06 f ) 156.300 x

66 m), o) 156.325 160.925 x* x x07 m), o) 156.350 160.950 x* x x

67 h) 156.375 156.375 x x08 156.400 x

68 156.425 156.425 x09 i) 156.450 156.450 x x

69 156.475 156.475 x x10 h), q ) 156.500 156.500 x x

70 f), j) 156.525 156.525 Digital selective calling for distress, safety andcalling

232 Maritime Manual – Part B – SECTION II – AP18



(MHz) Inter-ship



stationsFrom coast

stationsSingle

frequencyTwo

frequency11 q ) 156.550 156.550 x

71 156.575 156.575 x12 156.600 156.600 x

72 i) 156.625 x13 k) 156.650 156.650 x x

73 h), i) 156.675 156.675 x x14 156.700 156.700 x

74 156.725 156.725 x15 g) 156.750 156.750 x x

75 n) 156.775 156.775 x16 f ) 156.800 156.800 DISTRESS, SAFETY AND CALLING

76 n) 156.825 156.825 x17 g) 156.850 156.850 x x

77 156.875 x18 m) 156.900 161.500 x x x

78 m) 156.925 161.525 x* x x19 m) 156.950 161.550 x* x x

79 m) 156.975 161.575 x* x x20 m) 157.000 161.600 x* x x

80 m) 157.025 161.625 x* x x21 m) 157.050 161.650 x* x x

81 m) 157.075 161.675 x* x x22 m) 157.100 161.700 x x x

82 m), o) 157.125 161.725 x x x23 m), o) 157.150 161.750 x x x

83 m), o) 157.175 161.775 x x x24 m), o) 157.200 161.800 x x x

84 m), o) 157.225 161.825 x x x25 m), o) 157.250 161.850 x x x

85 m), o) 157.275 161.875 x x x26 m), o) 157.300 161.900 x x x

86 m), o) 157.325 161.925 x x x27 157.350 161.950 x x

87 157.375 157.375 x


Notes referring to the Table

General notes

a) Administrations may designate frequencies in the inter-ship, port operations and shipmovement services for use by light aircraft and helicopters to communicate with ships orparticipating coast stations in predominantly maritime support operations under the conditionsspecified in Nos. 51.69, 51.73, 51.74, 51.75, 51.76, 51.77 and 51.78. However, the use of thechannels which are shared with public correspondence shall be subject to prior agreementbetween interested and affected administrations.

b) The channels of the present Appendix, with the exception of channels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, 70,75 and 76, may also be used for high-speed data and facsimile transmissions, subject tospecial arrangement between interested and affected administrations.

c) The channels of the present Appendix, but preferably channel 28 and with the exception ofchannels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, 70, 75 and 76, may be used for direct-printing telegraphy and datatransmission, subject to special arrangement between interested and affected administrations.

d) The frequencies in this table may also be used for radiocommunications on inland waterwaysin accordance with the conditions specified in No. 5.226.

e) Administrations may apply 12.5 kHz channel interleaving on a non-interference basis to25 kHz channels, in accordance with the most recent version of RecommendationITU-R M.1084, provided:

– it shall not affect the 25 kHz channels of the present Appendix maritime mobile distressand safety frequencies, especially the channels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 70, nor the technicalcharacteristics set forth in Recommendation ITU-R M.489-2 for those channels;

– implementation of 12.5 kHz channel interleaving and consequential national requirementsshall be subject to coordination with affected administrations. (WRC-07)



(MHz) Inter-ship



stationsFrom coast

stationsSingle

frequencyTwo

frequency

28 157.400 162.000 x x88 157.425 157.425 x

AIS 1 f ), l), p) 161.975 161.975AIS 2 f ), l), p) 162.025 162.025* Note by the Secretariat: Added by the RRB until the necessary action is taken by a future

WRC.

234 Maritime Manual – Part B – SECTION II – AP18

Specific notesf ) The frequencies 156.300 MHz (channel 06), 156.525 MHz (channel 70), 156.800 MHz

(channel 16), 161.975 MHz (AIS 1) and 162.025 MHz (AIS 2) may also be used by aircraftstations for the purpose of search and rescue operations and other safety-relatedcommunication. (WRC-07)

g) Channels 15 and 17 may also be used for on-board communications provided the effectiveradiated power does not exceed 1 W, and subject to the national regulations of theadministration concerned when these channels are used in its territorial waters.

h) Within the European Maritime Area and in Canada, these frequencies (channels 10, 67, 73)may also be used, if so required, by the individual administrations concerned, forcommunication between ship stations, aircraft stations and participating land stations engagedin coordinated search and rescue and anti-pollution operations in local areas, under theconditions specified in Nos. 51.69, 51.73, 51.74, 51.75, 51.76, 51.77 and 51.78.

i) The preferred first three frequencies for the purpose indicated in Note a) are 156.450 MHz(channel 09), 156.625 MHz (channel 72) and 156.675 MHz (channel 73).

j) Channel 70 is to be used exclusively for digital selective calling for distress, safety andcalling.

k) Channel 13 is designated for use on a worldwide basis as a navigation safety communicationchannel, primarily for intership navigation safety communications. It may also be used for theship movement and port operations service subject to the national regulations of theadministrations concerned.

l) These channels (AIS 1 and AIS 2) are used for an automatic identification system (AIS)capable of providing worldwide operation, unless other frequencies are designated on aregional basis for this purpose. Such use should be in accordance with the most recent versionof Recommendation ITU-R M.1371. (WRC-07)

m) These channels may be operated as single frequency channels, subject to coordination withaffected administrations. (WRC-07)

n) The use of these channels (75 and 76) should be restricted to navigation-relatedcommunications only and all precautions should be taken to avoid harmful interference tochannel 16, e.g. by limiting the output power to 1 W or by means of geographical separation.

o) These channels may be used to provide bands for new technologies, subject to coordinationwith affected administrations. Stations using these channels or bands for new technologiesshall not cause harmful interference to, and shall not claim protection from, other stationsoperating in accordance with Article 5. The design of such systems shall be such as topreclude the possibility of interference to the detection of AIS signals on 161.975 or162.025 MHz. (WRC-07)

p) Additionally, AIS 1 and AIS 2 may be used by the mobile-satellite service (Earth-to-space)for the reception of AIS transmissions from ships. (WRC-07)

q) When using these channels (10 and 11), all precautions should be taken to avoid harmfulinterference to channel 70. (WRC-07)

SECTION III

Resolutions

(Extracts)

Part B – SECTION III – RES18 237

RESOLUTION 18 (Rev.WRC-07)

Relating to the procedure for identifying and announcing the positionof ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict1

The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2007),

considering

a) that ships and aircraft encounter considerable risk in the vicinity of an area ofarmed conflict;

b) that for the safety of life and property it is desirable for ships and aircraft ofStates not parties to an armed conflict to be able to identify themselves and announcetheir position in such circumstances;

c) that radiocommunication offers such ships and aircraft a rapid means of self-identification and providing location information prior to their entering areas of armedconflict and during their passage through the areas;

d) that it is considered desirable to provide a supplementary signal and procedurefor use, in accordance with customary practice, in the area of armed conflict by shipsand aircraft of States representing themselves as not parties to an armed conflict,

resolves

1 that the frequencies for urgency signal and messages specified in the RadioRegulations may be used by ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflictfor self-identification and establishing communications. The transmission will consistof the urgency or safety signals, as appropriate, described in Article 33 followed by theaddition of the single group “NNN” in radiotelegraphy and by the addition of the singleword “NEUTRAL” pronounced as in French “neutral” in radiotelephony. As soon aspracticable, communications shall be transferred to an appropriate working frequency;

2 that the use of the signal as described in the preceding paragraph indicates thatthe message which follows concerns a ship or aircraft of a State not party to an armedconflict. The message shall convey at least the following data:a) call sign or other recognized means of identification of such ship or aircraft;b) position of such ship or aircraft;

_______________1 Administrations are invited to study the text of this Resolution and provide any proposals to afuture competent Conference.

238 Maritime Manual

c) number and type of such ships or aircraft;

d) intended route;

e) estimated time en route and of departure and arrival, as appropriate;

f ) any other information, such as flight altitude, radio frequencies guarded,languages and secondary surveillance radar modes and codes;

3 that the provisions of Article 33 relating to urgency and safety transmissions,and medical transports shall apply as appropriate to the use of the urgency and safetysignals, respectively, by such ship or aircraft;

4 that the identification and location of ships of a State not party to an armedconflict may be effected by means of appropriate standard maritime radar transponders.The identification and location of aircraft of a State not party to an armed conflict maybe effected by the use of the secondary surveillance radar (SSR) system in accordancewith procedures to be recommended by the International Civil Aviation Organization(ICAO);

5 that the use of the signals described above would not confer or implyrecognition of any rights or duties of a State not party to an armed conflict or a party tothe conflict, except as may be recognized by common agreement between the parties tothe conflict and a non-party;

6 to encourage parties to a conflict to enter into such agreements,

requests the Secretary-General

to communicate the contents of this Resolution to the International MaritimeOrganization, the International Civil Aviation Organization, the InternationalCommittee of the Red Cross, and the International Federation of Red Cross and RedCrescent Societies for such action as they may consider appropriate,

requests ITU-R

to recommend an appropriate signal in the digital selective calling system for use in themaritime mobile service and other appropriate information as necessary, in consultationwith concerned organizations.


RESOLUTION 205 (Rev.Mob-87)

Protection of the band 406-406.1 MHz allocated tothe mobile-satellite service1

The World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services, Geneva, 1987,

considering

a) that WARC-79 allocated the band 406-406.1 MHz to the mobile-satelliteservice in the Earth-to-space direction;

b) that Nos. 5.266 and 5.267 limit the use of the band 406-406.1 MHz to low-power satellite emergency position-indicating radiobeacons (EPIRBs);

c) that WARC Mob-83 made provision in the Radio Regulations for theintroduction and development of a global distress and safety system;

d) that the use of satellite EPIRBs is an essential element of this system;

e) that, like any frequency band reserved for a distress and safety system, theband 406-406.1 MHz is entitled to full protection against all harmful interference;

f) that WARC Mob-83 adopted Recommendation 604 (Rev.Mob-83)* whichrecommends that the ITU-R continue its studies on the technical and operationalquestions for EPIRBs, including those using the frequencies in the band 406-406.1 MHz;

g) that the ITU-R has initiated a study of the compatibility between satelliteEPIRBs in the band 406-406.1 MHz and services using adjacent bands,

considering further

h) that some administrations have developed and implemented an operationallow-altitude, near-polar orbiting satellite system (COSPAS-SARSAT) operating in theband 406-406.1 MHz to provide alerting and to aid in the locating of distress incidents;

i) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has decided that EPIRBsoperating in the COSPAS-SARSAT system will form part of the Global MaritimeDistress and Safety System (GMDSS);

_______________1 WRC-97 made editorial amendments to this Resolution.* Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-07.

240 Maritime Manual

j) that observations of the use of frequencies in the band 406-406.1 MHz showthat they are being used by stations other than those authorized by No. 5.266, and thatthese stations have caused harmful interference to the mobile-satellite service, andparticularly to the reception of satellite EPIRB signals by the COSPAS-SARSATsystem;

k) that in the future, new satellite systems which may be either geostationary ornon-geostationary may be introduced in this band,

recognizing

that it is essential for the protection of human life and property that bands allocatedexclusively to a service for distress and safety purposes be kept free from harmfulinterference,

resolves

to instruct the Radiocommunication Bureau

to organize monitoring programmes in the band 406-406.1 MHz in order to identify thesource of any unauthorized emission in that band,

to urge administrations

1 to take part in monitoring programmes requested by the Bureau in accordancewith No. 16.5, in the band 406-406.1 MHz, with a view to identifying and locatingstations of services other than those authorized in the band;

2 to ensure that stations other than those operated under No. 5.266 abstain fromusing frequencies in the band 406-406.1 MHz;

3 to take the appropriate measures to eliminate harmful interference caused tothe distress and safety system,

invites the ITU-R

to continue on an urgent basis its study of compatibility between satellite EPIRBs in theband 406-406.1 MHz and services using adjacent bands.



Measures to address unauthorized use of and interference tofrequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service

and to the aeronautical mobile (R) service


considering

a) that the HF frequencies currently used by the aeronautical and maritimemobile services for distress, safety and other communications, including allottedoperational frequencies, suffer from harmful interference and are often subject todifficult propagation conditions;

b) that WRC-97 considered some aspects of the use of the HF bands for distressand safety communications in the context of the Global Maritime Distress and SafetySystem (GMDSS), especially with regard to regulatory measures;

c) that unauthorized operations using maritime and aeronautical frequencies inthe HF bands are continuing to increase and are already a serious risk to HF distress,safety and other communications;

d) that some administrations have resorted to, for example, transmitting warningmessages on operational HF channels as a means of deterring unauthorized users;

e) that provisions of the Radio Regulations prohibit the unauthorized use ofcertain safety frequencies for communications other than those related to safety;

f) that enforcing compliance with these regulatory provisions is becomingincreasingly difficult with the availability of low-cost HF single side-band (SSB)transceivers;

g) that monitoring observations of the use of frequencies in the band 2 170-2 194 kHz and in the bands allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile servicebetween 4063 kHz and 27 500 kHz and to the aeronautical mobile (R) service between2 850 kHz and 22000 kHz show that a number of frequencies in these bands are stillbeing used by stations of other services, many of which are operating in contraventionof No. 23.2;

h) that, in certain situations, HF radio is the sole means of communication for themaritime mobile service and that certain frequencies in the bands mentioned inconsidering g) are reserved for distress and safety purposes;

242 Maritime Manual

i) that, in certain situations, HF radio is the sole means of communication for theaeronautical mobile (R) service and that this is a safety service;

j) that WRC-2000 and this Conference have reviewed the use of the HF bands bythe aeronautical mobile (R) and maritime mobile services with a view to protectingoperational, distress and safety communications;

k) that this Resolution identifies several interference mitigation techniques thatcan be employed by administrations on a non-mandatory basis,

considering in particular

a) that it is of paramount importance that the distress and safety channels of themaritime mobile service be kept free from harmful interference, since they are essentialfor the protection of the safety of life and property;

b) that it is also of paramount importance that channels directly concerned withthe safe and regular conduct of aircraft operations be kept free from harmfulinterference, since they are essential for the safety of life and property,

resolves to invite ITU-R and ITU-D, as appropriate

to increase regional awareness of appropriate practices in order to help mitigateinterference in the HF bands, especially on distress and safety channels,

invites administrations

1 to ensure that stations of services other than the maritime mobile serviceabstain from using frequencies in distress and safety channels and their guardbands andin the bands allocated exclusively to that service, except under the conditions expresslyspecified in Nos. 4.4, 5.128, 5.129*, 5.137 and 4.13 to 4.15; and to ensure that stationsof services other than the aeronautical mobile (R) service abstain from usingfrequencies allocated to that service except under the conditions expressly specified inNos. 4.4 and 4.13;

2 to make every effort to identify and locate the source of any unauthorizedemission capable of endangering human life or property and the safe and regularconduct of aircraft operations, and to communicate their findings to theRadiocommunication Bureau;

3 to participate, in accordance with item 4 in the Annex, in any monitoringprogrammes organized by the Bureau or administrations, if so agreed among thoseadministrations, without adversely affecting the rights of other administrations orconflicting with any provisions of the Radio Regulations;

_______________* Note by the Secretariat: WRC-07 suppressed provision No. 5.129 and modified provisionNo. 5.128 by merging the contents of former provisions Nos. 5.128 and 5.129.


4 to make every effort to prevent unauthorized transmissions in bands allocatedto the maritime mobile service and the aeronautical mobile (R) service;

5 to request their competent authorities to take, within their respectivejurisdiction, such legislative or regulatory measures which they consider necessary orappropriate in order to prevent stations from unauthorized use of distress and safetychannels or from operating in contravention of No. 23.2;

6 to take all necessary steps in such cases of contravention of No. 23.2 to ensurethe cessation of any transmissions contravening the provisions of the Radio Regulationson the frequencies or in the bands referred to in this Resolution;

7 to employ as many of the interference mitigation techniques referred to in theAnnex as are appropriate for the maritime mobile and aeronautical mobile (R) services,

instructs the Radiocommunication Bureau

1 to seek the cooperation of administrations in identifying the sources of thoseemissions by all available means and in securing the cessation of those emissions;

2 when the station of another service transmitting in a band allocated to themaritime mobile service or to the aeronautical mobile (R) service has been identified, toinform the administration concerned;

3 to include the problem of interference to maritime and aeronautical distressand safety channels on the agenda of relevant regional radiocommunication seminars,

instructs the Secretary-General

to bring this Resolution to the attention of the International Maritime Organization andthe International Civil Aviation Organization for such actions as they may considerappropriate.

ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 207 (Rev.WRC-03)

Interference mitigation techniques

This Annex lists several possible HF interference mitigation techniques that may beused, either in combination or singly, depending on the resources of administrations.Use of any or all of these techniques is not mandatory.

244 Maritime Manual

1 Alternative modulation methodsThe use of digitally modulated emissions, such as QPSK, to replace or supplementanalogue SSB voice (J3E) and data (J2B) emissions. This initiative would need to beadopted internationally to allow the interoperability of equipment. For example, ICAOhas adopted an HF data-link standard to provide packet data communications usingautomated link establishment and adaptive frequency control techniques as asupplement to analogue SSB voice communications (see ICAO Convention, Annex 10).

2 Passive and active/adaptive antenna systemsUse of passive and active/adaptive antenna systems to reject unwanted signals.

3 Channel barringAdministrations should ensure through their licensing, equipment standardization andinspection arrangements that, in compliance with No. 43.1, HF radio equipment cannottransmit on frequencies exclusively allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service, asdetailed in Appendix 27, except for frequencies allocated for worldwide use and sharedwith the aeronautical mobile (OR) service (see Appendix 26/3.4).

4 Regional HF monitoring and direction-finding facilitiesCollaboration and cooperation between regional administrations to coordinate the useof monitoring and direction-finding facilities.

5 Transmission of warning messagesTransmission of multilanguage warning messages on specific channels affected bystrong or persistent interference. Such transmissions should be conducted aftercoordination with the users of the affected services and the administration(s) orcompetent authorities concerned.

6 Education and publicity initiativesAdministrations should provide education and publicity initiatives on the proper use ofthe radio-frequency spectrum in these bands.



Transition to the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System(GMDSS)


noting

that all ships subject to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea(SOLAS), 1974, as amended, are required to be fitted for the Global Maritime Distressand Safety System (GMDSS),

noting further

a) that a number of administrations have taken steps to implement the GMDSSalso for classes of vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended;

b) that an increasing number of vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended,are making use of the techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS prescribed inChapter VII;

c) that this Conference has amended Chapter VII to provide for maintaininginteroperability between ships fitted for GMDSS and ships not yet fully equipped forGMDSS;

d) that there may be a need to maintain existing shore-based distress and safetyservices for the reception of distress, urgency and safety calling by voice on VHFchannel 16 so that vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended and not yet usingthe techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS will be able to attract attention andobtain assistance from these services;

e) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) is of the view that SOLASships, while at sea, should be required to keep a listening watch on VHF channel 16, forthe foreseeable future, with a view to providing:– a distress alerting and communication channel for non-SOLAS ships; and– bridge-to-bridge communications;

f ) that IMO has urged administrations to require all seagoing vessels undernational legislation, and encourage all vessels voluntarily carrying VHF radioequipment to be fitted with facilities for transmitting and receiving distress alerts bydigital selective calling (DSC) on VHF channel 70;

g) that the Radio Regulations require GMDSS ships to keep watch on theappropriate DSC distress frequencies;

246 Maritime Manual

h) that separate provisions in the existing Radio Regulations designate VHFchannel 16 as the international channel for general calling by radiotelephony;

i) that several administrations have established Vessel Traffic Service (VTS)systems and require their vessels to keep watch on local VTS channels;

j) that ships that are required by SOLAS to carry a radio station have beenequipped with DSC, and many vessels subject to national carriage requirements are alsobeing equipped with DSC, but the majority of vessels that carry a radio station on avoluntary basis might not yet have DSC equipment;

k) that similarly, many administrations have established distress and safetyservice based on DSC watchkeeping, but the majority of port stations, pilot stations andother operational coast stations might not yet have been equipped with DSC facilities;

l) that Nos 52.190 to 52.192 and 52.232 to 52.234 allow frequency 2 182 kHzand channel 16 to be used for call and reply,

recognizing

a) that, as indicated in noting further a), b), f), j) and k) above, stations in themaritime mobile service are increasingly making use of the frequencies and techniquesof GMDSS;

b) that this Conference has adopted provisions for distress, urgency and safetycalling by radiotelephony on VHF channel 16, requiring ships, where practicable, tomaintain watch on VHF channel 16;

c) the need to maintain existing shore-based distress and safety services forreception of distress, urgency and safety calling by voice on VHF channel 16 for someyears after this Conference so that vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended,and not yet using the techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS, will be able to attractattention and obtain assistance from these services until such time as they are able toparticipate in the GMDSS;

d) the need indicated in noting further d) above for maintaining existing shore-based distress, urgency and safety services on VHF channel 16,

resolves

1 to retain the provisions permitting use of VHF channel 16 and the frequency2 182 kHz for general voice-calling;

2 to urge all administrations to assist in enhancing safety at sea by:

– encouraging all vessels to finalize the transition to the GMDSS as soon aspossible;


– encouraging, where appropriate, establishment of suitable shore-basedfacilities for GMDSS, either on an individual basis or in cooperation withother relevant parties in the area;

– encouraging all vessels carrying maritime VHF equipment to be fitted withDSC on VHF channel 70 as soon as possible, taking into account the relevantdecisions of IMO;

– encouraging vessels to limit their use of VHF channel 16 and the frequency2 182 kHz for calling to the minimum necessary, noting the provisions ofNo. 52.239;

3 that coast stations forming part of shore-based arrangements in the areaconcerned for reception of distress calling by radiotelephony on VHF channel 16should maintain an efficient watch on VHF channel 16. Such watch should be indicatedin the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations;

4 that administrations may release their ship stations and coast stations from thelistening watch on VHF channel 16 in respect of distress, urgency and safety calling byvoice, in accordance with relevant decisions of IMO and ITU on aural watch-keepingrequirements on channel 16, taking into account the GMDSS radio systems available inthe area concerned;

when doing so, administrations should:

– inform IMO of their decisions and submit to IMO details on the areaconcerned;

– inform the Secretary-General of the necessary details for inclusion in the Listof Coast Stations and Special Service Stations,

resolves further

that the Secretary-General should ensure that such arrangements and details regardingthe area concerned be indicated in relevant maritime publications,

invites ITU-R

to monitor the development of and changes to the GMDSS, in particular:

– watch-keeping requirements;

– distress alerting;

– carriage requirements,

and report to a future world radiocommunication conference on when furtherrationalization of Chapter VII should be considered,

248 Maritime Manual


to bring this Resolution to the attention of IMO, the International Civil AviationOrganization (ICAO) and the International Association of Marine Aids to Navigationand Lighthouse Authorities (IALA).



Coordination of NAVTEX services


considering

a) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has established aCoordinating Panel on NAVTEX to, inter alia, coordinate the operational aspects ofNAVTEX services, such as allocation of transmitter identification character (B1) andtime schedules, in the planning stages for transmissions on the frequencies 490 kHz,518 kHz or 4209.5 kHz;

b) that coordination in the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4209.5 kHz isessentially operational;

c) that the frequency band around 518 kHz is also allocated to the aeronauticalradionavigation service on a primary basis,

resolves

to invite administrations to apply the procedures established by IMO, taking intoaccount the IMO NAVTEX Manual, for coordinating the use of the frequencies490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4 209.5 kHz,


to invite IMO to provide ITU with information on a regular basis on operationalcoordination for NAVTEX services on the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz and4 209.5 kHz,

instructs the Director of the Radiocommunication Bureau

to publish this information in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations(List IV) (see No. 20.7).

250 Maritime Manual


New technologies to provide improved efficiency in the use of theband 156-174 MHz by stations in the maritime mobile service

The World Radiocommunication Conference (Istanbul, 2000),

considering

a) that the agenda of this Conference included the consideration of the use of newtechnologies for the maritime mobile service in the band 156-174 MHz and theconsequential revision of Appendix 18;

b) Recommendation 318 (Mob-87)*, particularly noting b) and c) thereof;

c) that Appendix 18 identifies frequencies to be used for distress and safetycommunications on an international basis;

d) that the introduction of new technology in the maritime mobile service shallnot disrupt distress and safety communications in the VHF band including thoseestablished by the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS),1974, as amended;

e) that the date for full implementation of the global maritime distress and safetysystem (GMDSS) was 1 February 1999;

f) that ITU-R is conducting studies on improving efficiency in the use of thisband, and that these studies are still ongoing;

g) that changes made in Appendix 18 should not prejudice the future use of thesefrequencies or the capabilities of systems or new applications required for use by themaritime mobile service;

h) that the congestion on Appendix 18 frequencies calls for the implementation ofefficient new technologies;

i) that the use of new technology on maritime VHF frequencies will make itpossible to better respond to the emerging demand for new services;

j) that ITU-R has approved Recommendation ITU-R M.1312 relating to a long-term solution for improved efficiency in the use of the band 156-174 MHz by stationsin the maritime mobile service;

_______________* Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-07.


k) that ITU-R has approved Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 relating totechnical characteristics for a universal shipborne automatic identification system usingtime-division multiple access in the VHF maritime mobile band;

l) that there is a need to maintain some duplex channels for specific applications,

noting

a) that the global maritime market may not be of a sufficient size to warrant thedevelopment of a new system solely for the maritime service;

b) that digital systems have been successfully implemented in the land mobileservice,

noting also

that this Conference has modified Appendix 18, including the addition of note o), topermit the possible use on a voluntary basis of various channels or bands created by theconversion of some duplex channels to simplex channels, for the initial testing and thepossible future introduction of new technologies,

resolves

1 that, in order to provide full worldwide interoperability of equipment on ships,there should be one technology, or more than one interoperable worldwide technology,implemented under Appendix 18;

2 that, as soon as the ITU-R studies are complete, a future competent conferenceshould consider any necessary changes to Appendix 18 to enable the use of newtechnologies by the maritime mobile service,

invites ITU-R

to finalize the following studies:

a) identify the future requirements of the maritime mobile service;

b) identify suitable technical characteristics of the system or interoperablesystems to replace existing technology;

c) identify necessary modifications to the Table of frequencies contained inAppendix 18;

d) recommend a transition plan for the introduction of new technologies;

e) recommend how new technologies can be introduced while ensuringcompliance with the distress and safety requirements,

252 Maritime Manual


to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization and theInternational Association of Lighthouse Authorities.


RESOLUTION 343 (WRC-97)

Maritime certification for personnel of ship stations and ship earthstations for which a radio installation is not compulsory


considering

a) that WRC-97 has considered the question of certification for personnel of shipstations and ship earth stations within the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System(GMDSS);

b) that GMDSS will be fully implemented on 1 February 1999 by ships subject toan international agreement;

c) that ships not subject to an international agreement have begun to adoptGMDSS systems and techniques;

d) that use of GMDSS equipment should be accompanied by appropriate trainingand certification;

e) that the Radio Regulations stipulate that the service of every ship radio stationworking on frequencies assigned for international use shall be performed by operatorsholding a certificate;

f) that the present certificates described in Article 47 may be too demanding forradio operators of ship stations and ship earth stations on board ships for which a radioinstallation is not compulsory,

noting

that a number of administrations currently issue radio operator certificates speciallydesigned for the non-compulsory sector,

resolves

that administrations wishing to implement special certification for the non-compulsorysector should implement the certificates contained in the Annex to this Resolution,

invites ITU-R

to develop a Recommendation describing these certificates,

254 Maritime Manual


to bring this Resolution to the attention of the International Maritime Organization(IMO).

ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 343 (WRC-97)

Examination syllabus for radio operator’s certificates appropriate tovessels using the frequencies and techniques of the Global Maritime

Distress and Safety System on a non-compulsory basis

Introduction

The introduction of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) inFebruary 1992 made it necessary to harmonize the examination requirements forcertificates for professional radio operators. Harmonized examination procedures forthe general operator’s Certificate and restricted operator’s Certificate, based on thesyllabuses described in Article 47, have already been introduced for maritime radiooperators performing radiocommunication duties on board vessels subject to theInternational Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended. TheGMDSS will be fully implemented on 1 February 1999 for vessels subject to SOLAS,1974, as amended.

For vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, and which install radiocom-munication equipment on a voluntary basis, there are significant advantages to alsousing the GMDSS. However, it was foreseen by some administrations that such vesselswould use some, but not all, of the frequencies and techniques of the GMDSS and thatradio personnel on board such vessels would not need the same level of certification asradio personnel on board vessels which use all of the frequencies and techniques of theGMDSS on a compulsory basis. A syllabus has been developed which provides theflexibility for a depth of study, level of knowledge, and length of course appropriate tomeet the certification requirements of radio personnel on board vessels which use someof the frequencies and techniques of the GMDSS on a non-compulsory basis. Thesyllabus also provides for certification in the use of satellite equipment whereappropriate.

This Annex describes the syllabus developed to meet the certification requirementsreferred to above, and which are implemented in a number of countries under the title“Long Range Certificate” and “Short Range Certificate”. The Short Range Certificateshould at least contain those elements of the syllabus which are relevant to sea area A1.


Examination syllabus

The examination should consist of theoretical and practical tests and should include atleast:

A General knowledge of radiocommunications in the maritime mobileservice

A.1 The general principles and basic features of the maritime mobile service.

B Detailed practical knowledge and ability to use radio equipmentB.1 The VHF radio installation. Use of VHF equipment in practice.B.2 The MF/HF radio installation. Use of MF/HF equipment in practice.B.3 Purpose and use of digital selective calling facilities and techniques.

C Operational procedures of the GMDSS and detailed practical operation ofGMDSS subsystems and equipment

C.1 Basic introduction to GMDSS procedures.C.2 Distress, urgency and safety communication procedures in the GMDSS.C.3 Distress, urgency and safety communication procedures by radiotelephony in

the old distress and safety system.C.4 Protection of distress frequencies.C.5 Maritime safety information (MSI) systems in the GMDSS.C.6 Alerting and locating signals in the GMDSS.

D Operational procedures and regulations for radiotelephone communi-cations

D.1 Ability to exchange communications relevant to the safety of life at sea.D.2 Regulations, obligatory procedures and practices.D.3 Practical and theoretical knowledge of radiotelephone procedures.D.4 Use of the international phonetic alphabet and, where appropriate, parts of the

IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases.

E Optional examination module for the maritime mobile-satellite service forvessels not subject to a compulsory fit

E.1 The general principles and basic features of the maritime mobile-satelliteservice.

E.2 Operational procedures and detailed practical operation of ship earth stationsin the GMDSS.

256 Maritime Manual


Management of the maritime mobile service identitynumbering resource


noting

a) that the installation of digital selective calling equipment or Inmarsat B, Cor M ship earth station equipment on ships participating in the Global Maritime Distressand Safety System (GMDSS) on a mandatory or voluntary basis requires theassignment of a unique nine-digit maritime mobile service identity (MMSI);

b) that such equipment offers the possibility to connect with publictelecommunication networks;

c) that only mobile-satellite systems have been able to resolve the various billing,routeing, charging and signalling requirements needed to provide full two-wayautomatic connectivity between ships and the international public correspondenceservice;

d) that ships using the present generation of mobile-satellite ship earth stationshave to be assigned an MMSI ending with three trailing zeros in order to supportautomatic access to public telecommunication networks through a diallable shiptelephone number whose format is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation E.164 butcan only accommodate the first six digits of the MMSI;

e) that the first three digits of a ship station MMSI form the maritimeidentification digits (MID), which denote the ship’s administration or geographical areaof origin;

f) that each MID only has sufficient capacity to identify 999 ships using thethree-trailing-zero number format, with the result that widespread use of MMSIs withthree trailing zeros will rapidly exhaust the capacity of each MID,

considering

a) that digital selective calling distress alerts require valid identities recognizableby search and rescue authorities in order to ensure a timely response;

b) that Recommendation ITU-R M.585 contains guidance for the assignment ofMMSIs,


recognizing

a) that even domestic ships which install the present generation of ship earthstations operating to Inmarsat B, C or M standards will require the assignment of MMSInumbers from those numbers originally intended for ships communicating worldwide,further depleting the resource;

b) that future growth of Inmarsat B, C or M ship earth station use bynon-compulsory ships may further deplete the MMSI and MID resources;

c) that future generations of mobile-satellite systems offering access to publictelecommunication networks and participating in the GMDSS will employ a free-formnumbering system that need not include any part of the MMSI,

noting further

a) that ITU-T has recommended that ITU-R assume sole responsibility formanaging the MMSI and MID numbering resources;

b) that ITU-R can monitor the status of the MMSI resource, through regularreviews of the spare capacity available within the MIDs already in use, and theavailability of spare MIDs, taking account of regional variations,

resolves to instruct the Director of the Radiocommunication Bureau

1 to manage the allotment and distribution of the MID resource within theMMSI numbering format, taking into account:

– Sections II, V and VI of Article 19;

– regional variations in MMSI use;

– spare capacity within the MID resource; and

– the guidelines on MID and MMSI management contained in the most recentversion of Recommendation ITU-R M.585, in particular as regards the reuse ofMMSIs;

2 to report to each world radiocommunication conference on the use and statusof the MMSI resource, noting in particular the anticipated reserve capacity and anyindications of rapid exhaustion of the resource,

258 Maritime Manual

invites ITU-R

to keep under review the Recommendations for assigning MMSIs, with a view to:

– improving the management of the MID and MMSI resources; and

– identifying alternative resources if there is an indication of rapid exhaustion ofthese resources,


to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization.



Operation of Global Maritime Distress and Safety Systemequipment on and assignment of maritime mobile service

identities to non-compulsory fitted vessels


noting

a) that ships not required by international agreement to carry Global MaritimeDistress and Safety System (GMDSS) equipment could elect to do so for safetypurposes;

b) that such vessels may only carry VHF digital selective calling (DSC)equipment;

c) that some administrations may not require operators on such vessels to haveappropriate training, certification or licence;

d) that not all administrations assign and register identities to users of VHF DSCequipment on such ships,

considering

that VHF DSC false distress alerts are a problem for rescue coordination centres,particularly when incorrect identities are used, or when the radio is operated by personsuntrained in its use,

recognizing

that administrations have different training requirements for users of VHF DSCequipment,

resolves

1 to invite ITU-R to consider DSC standards and operating procedures in orderto simplify operation of this equipment;

2 to invite ITU-T and ITU-R to review the process for assigning maritimemobile service identities for simplifying the process, taking into account cases of newinstallation, sale of the vessel or transfer of the equipment to a new ship;

260 Maritime Manual

3 to invite ITU-T and ITU-R to undertake studies to ensure the registration andcontinuous accessibility and availability of identities to rescue authorities,


to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization forconsideration and comments.



Operational procedures for cancelling false distress alerts in theGlobal Maritime Distress and Safety System


considering

a) that the 1974 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS),as amended, prescribes that ships subject to that Convention shall be fitted with GlobalMaritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) equipment as appropriate;

b) that non-SOLAS vessels are also being equipped with GMDSS equipment;

c) that the transmission and relay of false distress alerts is a significant problemwithin the GMDSS,

noting

that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has developed similar operationalprocedures to cancel false distress alerts,

resolves

1 to urge administrations to take all necessary measures to avoid false distressalerts and to minimize the unnecessary burden on rescue organizations which occurs;

2 to urge administrations to encourage the correct use of GMDSS equipment,with particular attention to appropriate training;

3 to urge administrations to implement the operational procedures contained inthe Annex to this Resolution;

4 that administrations should take any consequential appropriate action in thisrespect,


to bring this Resolution to the attention of IMO.

262 Maritime Manual


Cancelling of false distress alerts

If a distress alert is inadvertently transmitted, the following steps shall be taken tocancel the distress alert.

1 VHF digital selective calling1) Reset the equipment immediately;

2) Set to channel 16; and

3) Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, callsign and maritime mobile service identity (MMSI), and cancel the falsedistress alert.

2 MF digital selective calling1) Reset the equipment immediately;

2) Tune for radiotelephony transmission on 2182 kHz; and

3) Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, callsign and MMSI, and cancel the false alert.

3 HF digital selective calling1) Reset the equipment immediately;

2) Tune for radiotelephony on the distress and safety frequency in each band inwhich a false distress alert was transmitted (see Appendix 15); and

3) Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, callsign and MMSI, and cancel the false alert on the distress and safety frequencyin each band in which the false distress alert was transmitted.

4 Inmarsat ship earth station

Notify the appropriate rescue coordination centre that the alert is cancelled by sending adistress priority message by way of the same coast earth station through which the falsedistress alert was sent. Provide ship name, call sign and Inmarsat identity with thecancelled alert message.


5 Emergency position indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB)

If for any reason an EPIRB is activated inadvertently, contact the appropriate rescuecoordination centre through a coast station or land earth station and cancel the distressalert.

6 General

Notwithstanding the above, ships may use additional appropriate means available tothem to inform the appropriate authorities that a false distress alert has been transmittedand should be cancelled.

264 Maritime Manual


Use of the carrier frequencies 12290 kHz and 16420 kHz forsafety-related calling to and from rescue coordination centres


considering

a) that this Conference modified No. 52.221A to allow safety-related calling toand from rescue coordination centres on the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and16 420 kHz;

b) that this limited safety-related calling function on these carrier frequencies willenhance the capability of those search and rescue organizations which maintain watchon these distress and safety frequencies to call vessels not utilizing the Global MaritimeDistress and Safety System (GMDSS),

noting

a) that regulation IV/4.8 of the International Convention for the Safety of Life atSea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, requires that SOLAS ships, while at sea, be capableof transmitting and receiving general radiocommunications to and from shore-basedradio systems or networks;

b) that general communications may include safety-related communicationsnecessary for the safe operation of vessels,

further noting

that safety-related communications require adequate, effective and immediate accessand protection,

recognizing

a) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) notes that distress,urgency and safety radiocommunications include, but are not limited to:

– transmissions of maritime safety information;– distress calls and traffic;– acknowledgment and relaying of distress calls;– search and rescue coordination communications;– ship movement service communications;


– communications related to the safe operation of ships;– communications related to navigation;– meteorological warnings;– meteorological observations;– ship position reports; and– medical emergencies (e.g. MEDICO/MEDIVAC);

b) that distress, urgency and safety communications are defined in Articles 32and 33,

resolves

1 that the carrier frequencies 12290 kHz and 16 420 kHz be used only fordistress, urgency and safety communications, and safety-related calling limited to thatto and from rescue coordination centres;

2 that safety-related calling be initiated only after determination that othercommunications are not present on these frequencies;

3 that safety-related calling be minimized and not cause interference to distress,urgency and safety communications,

invites administrations

to encourage the coast and ship stations under their jurisdiction to use digital selectivecalling techniques,


to bring this Resolution to the attention of the IMO.

266 Maritime Manual


Distress and safety radiotelephony procedures for 2 182 kHz


noting

a) that all ships subject to the International Convention for the Safety of Life atSea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, are required to be fitted for the Global MaritimeDistress and Safety System (GMDSS);

b) that some vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, may not bemaking use of the techniques and frequencies of GMDSS prescribed in Chapter VII andmay wish to continue using radiotelephony procedures for distress and safetycommunications on 2 182 kHz until such time as they are able to participate in theGMDSS;

c) that some administrations may have a need to maintain shore-basedradiotelephony distress and safety services on 2182 kHz so that vessels not subject toSOLAS, 1974, as amended, and not yet using the techniques and frequencies ofGMDSS will be able to obtain assistance from these services until such time as they areable to participate in GMDSS,

considering

that there needs to be some recognized guidance for the use of radiotelephony on2 182 kHz for distress and safety communications,

resolves

1 that ships, when in distress or when engaged in urgency or safety-relatedcommunications on 2 182 kHz, use the radiotelephony procedures contained in theAnnex to this Resolution;

2 that coast stations, in order to maintain communication with non-GMDSSships that are in distress or engaged in urgency or safety related communications on2 182 kHz, use the radiotelephony procedures contained in the Annex to thisResolution.



Distress and safety radiotelephony procedures for 2 182 kHz*

PART A1 – GENERAL

§ 1 The frequencies and techniques specified in this Resolution may be used in themaritime mobile service for stations1 not required by national or international regulationto fit GMDSS equipment and for communications between those stations and aircraft.However, stations of the maritime mobile service, when additionally fitted with any ofthe equipment used by stations operating in conformity with the provisions specified inChapter VII, should, when using that equipment, comply with the appropriateprovisions of that Chapter.

§ 2 1) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by a mobile station ormobile earth station in distress of any means at its disposal to attract attention, makeknown its position, and obtain help.

2) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by stations on boardaircraft or ships engaged in search and rescue operations, in exceptional circumstances,of any means at their disposal to assist a mobile station or mobile earth station indistress.

3) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by a land station or coastearth station, in exceptional circumstances, of any means at its disposal to assist amobile station or mobile earth station in distress (see also No. 4.16).

§ 3 In cases of distress, urgency or safety, communications by radiotelephonyshould be made slowly and distinctly, each word being clearly pronounced to facilitatetranscription.

§ 4 The abbreviations and signals of Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 and thePhonetic Alphabet and Figure Code in Appendix 14 should be used where applicable2.

_______________* Distress and safety communications include distress, urgency and safety calls and messages.1 These stations may include rescue coordination centres. The term “Rescue CoordinationCentre” as defined in the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) refersto a unit responsible for promoting the efficient organization of search and rescue services andfor coordinating the conduct of search and rescue operations within a search and rescue region.2 The use of the Standard Marine Communication Phrases and, where language difficultiesexist, the International Code of Signals, both published by the International MaritimeOrganization, is also recommended.

268 Maritime Manual

§ 5 Distress, urgency and safety communications may also be made using digitalselective calling and satellite techniques and/or direct-printing telegraphy, inaccordance with the provisions specified in Chapter VII and relevant ITU-RRecommendations.

§ 6 Mobile stations3 of the maritime mobile service may communicate for safetypurposes with stations of the aeronautical mobile service. Such communications shallnormally be made on the frequencies authorized, and under the conditions specified, inSection I of Part A2 (see also § 2 1)).

§ 7 Mobile stations of the aeronautical mobile service may communicate fordistress and safety purposes with stations of the maritime mobile service in conformitywith the provisions of this Resolution.

§ 8 Any aircraft required by national or international regulations to communicatefor distress, urgency or safety purposes with stations of the maritime mobile serviceshall be capable of transmitting and receiving class J3E emissions when using thecarrier frequency 2182 kHz or the carrier frequency 4125 kHz.

PART A2 – FREQUENCIES FOR DISTRESS AND SAFETY

Section I – Availability of frequencies

A – 2182 kHz

§ 1 1) The carrier frequency 2 182 kHz is an international distress frequency forradiotelephony; it may be used by ship, aircraft and survival craft stations whenrequesting assistance from the maritime services. It is used for distress calls and distresstraffic, for the urgency signal and urgency messages and for the safety signal. Safetymessages should be transmitted, when practicable, on a working frequency, after apreliminary announcement on 2 182 kHz. The class of emission to be used forradiotelephony on the frequency 2 182 kHz shall be J3E. Distress traffic on 2 182 kHzfollowing the reception of a distress call using digital selective calling should take intoaccount that some shipping in the vicinity may not be able to receive this traffic.

2) If a distress message on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz has not beenacknowledged, the distress call and message may be transmitted again on a carrierfrequency of 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz, as appropriate.

_______________3 Mobile stations communicating with the stations of the aeronautical mobile (R) service inbands allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service shall conform to the provisions of theRegulations which relate to that service and, as appropriate, any special arrangements betweenthe governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile (R) service is regulated.


3) However, ship stations and aircraft which cannot transmit either on thecarrier frequency 2 182 kHz or on the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz mayuse any other available frequency on which attention might be attracted.

4) Coast stations using the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz for distress purposesand to send navigational warnings may transmit an audible alarm signal4 of shortduration for the purpose of attracting attention to the message which follows.

B – 4125 kHz

§ 2 1) The carrier frequency 4125 kHz is used to supplement the carrierfrequency 2182 kHz for distress and safety purposes and for call and reply. Thisfrequency is also used for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony.

2) The carrier frequency 4 125 kHz may be used by aircraft to communicatewith stations of the maritime mobile service for distress and safety purposes, includingsearch and rescue.

C – 6215 kHz

§ 3 The carrier frequency 6215 kHz is used to supplement the carrier frequency2 182 kHz for distress and safety purposes and for call and reply. This frequency is alsoused for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony.

Section II – Protection of distress and safety frequencies

A – General

§ 4 Test transmissions on any of the distress and safety frequencies describedabove shall be kept to a minimum and, wherever practicable, be carried out on artificialantennas or with reduced power.

§ 5 Before transmitting on any of the frequencies identified for distress and safetycommunications, a station shall listen on the frequency concerned to make sure that nodistress transmission is being sent (see Recommendation ITU-R M.1171). This does notapply to stations in distress.

_______________4 Alarm signals may consist of transmissions of sinusoidal audio frequency tones 1 300 Hz,2 200 Hz, or both. Different tone generation patterns may be used to signal the type of messagewhich follows, and an alarm signal ending in a 10-second continuous tone could be used toidentify a transmission by a coast station.

270 Maritime Manual

B – 2182 kHz

§ 6 1) Except for transmissions authorized on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHzand on the frequencies 2174.5 kHz, 2177 kHz, 2187.5 kHz and 2 189.5 kHz, alltransmissions on the frequencies between 2 173.5 kHz and 2 190.5 kHz are forbidden(see also Appendix 15).

2) To facilitate the reception of distress calls, all transmissions on 2182 kHzshould be kept to a minimum.

Section III – Watch on distress frequencies

A – 2182 kHz

§ 7 1) Coast stations may maintain a watch on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz ifso directed by their Administration. Such assignments should be indicated in the List ofCoast Stations and Special Service Stations.

2) Ship stations not fitted with equipment compatible with the GMDSS areencouraged to keep the maximum watch practicable on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz.

B – 4125 kHz, 6215 kHz

§ 8 Coast stations may maintain additional watch, as permitted, on the carrierfrequencies 4 125 kHz and 6215 kHz. Such assignments should be indicated in the Listof Coast Stations and Special Service Stations.

PART A3 – DISTRESS COMMUNICATIONS


§ 1 The general provisions for distress communications are found in Section I ofArticle 32 (see Nos. 32.1, 32.3, and 32.4).

Section II – Distress signal, call and message

§ 2 The radiotelephone distress signal, call and message are described in Section IIof Article 32 (see Nos. 32.13BA, 32.9, 32.13B, 32.13C, and 32.13D).


Section III – Procedures

§ 3 After the transmission by radiotelephony of its distress message, the mobilestation may be requested to transmit suitable signals, followed by its call sign or otheridentification, to permit direction-finding stations to determine its position. This requestmay be repeated at frequent intervals if necessary.

§ 4 1) The distress message, preceded by the distress call, shall be repeated atintervals until an answer is received.

2) The intervals shall be sufficiently long to allow time for replying stations,in their preparations, to start their sending apparatus.

§ 5 When the mobile station in distress receives no answer to a distress messagesent on the distress frequency, the message may be repeated on any other availablefrequency on which attention might be attracted.

Section IV – Transmission of a distress relay message by a station not itself indistress

§ 6 The radiotelephone procedures for the transmission of a distress relay messageby a station not itself in distress are found in Section II of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.16 to32.19A and 32.19D to 32.19F).

Section V – Receipt and acknowledgement of a distress message

§ 7 The procedures relating to the receipt and acknowledgement of a distressmessage are found in Section II of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.23, 32.26, 32.28, 32.29,32.30 and 32.35).

Section VI – Distress traffic

§ 8 The radiotelephone procedures relating to the distress traffic are found inSection III of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.39 to 32.42, 32.45 to 32.47, 32.49 to 32.52 and32.54 to 32.59).

§ 9 1) Every mobile station acknowledging receipt of a distress message shall,on the order of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehicle, transmit thefollowing information in the order shown as soon as possible:

– its name;

– its position;

– the speed at which it is proceeding towards, and the approximate time it willtake to reach, the mobile station in distress;

272 Maritime Manual

– additionally, if the position of the ship in distress appears doubtful, shipstations should also transmit, when available, the true bearing of the ship indistress.

2) Before transmitting the message specified in § 9 1), the station shallensure that it will not interfere with the emissions of other stations better situated torender immediate assistance to the station in distress.

PART A4 – URGENCY AND SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS

Section I – Urgency communications

§ 1 The radiotelephone procedures for urgency communications are found inSections I and II of Article 33 (see Nos. 33.1 to 33.7 and 33.8, 33.8B to 33.9A and33.11 to 33.16).

Section II – Safety communications

§ 2 The radiotelephone procedures for safety communications are found inSections I and IV of Article 33 (see Nos. 33.31, 33.31C, 33.32, 33.34 to 33.35 and33.38B).

___________

SECTION IV

ITU-R Recommendationsincorporated by reference

(Extracts)

Note: In accordance with the decisions of WRC-2000, the editions of the RadioRegulations (RR) use a new numbering scheme which consists, inter alia, in abolishingthe prefix “S” in front of the provision numbers, Article numbers and Appendixnumbers. However, since the Recommendations included in this Section were notrevised after 1999, the references made to the RR in these Recommendations refer tothe (simplified) Radio Regulations, edition of 1998 (references commencing with “S”)which were provisionally applicable as from 1 January 1999, or to the former RR,edition of 1994 (complemented by Volume 4, edition of 1996) (references without “S”).

Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.489-2 275

RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.489-2*

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VHF RADIOTELEPHONEEQUIPMENT OPERATING IN THE MARITIME MOBILE

SERVICE IN CHANNELS SPACED BY 25 kHz

(1974-1978-1995)

SummaryThe Recommendation describes the technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephone transmittersand receivers (or transceivers) used in the maritime mobile service when operating in 25 kHzchannels of Appendix S18 [Appendix 18] of the Radio Regulations (RR). It also contains thoseadditional characteristics of transceivers required to operate digital selective calling.

The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly,

considering

a) that Resolution No. 308 of the World Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva,1979) stipulated that:– all maritime mobile VHF radiotelephone equipment shall conform to 25 kHz standards by

1 January 1983;

b) that RR Appendix S18 [Appendix 18] gives a table of transmitting frequencies whichis based upon the principle of 25 kHz channel separations for the maritime mobile service;

c) that in Opinion 42, the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has beeninvited to advise the ITU Radiocommunication Sector of any methods of measurementapplicable to radio equipment used in land mobile services; and that such methods ofmeasurement may also be suitable for radio equipment used in maritime mobile services;

d) that there is a need to specify the technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephoneequipment operating in the maritime mobile service in channels spaced by 25 kHz,

recommends

1 that the following characteristics should be met by VHF (metric) FM radiotelephoneequipment used for the maritime mobile services operating on the frequencies specified in RRAppendix S18 [Appendix 18].

_______________Note by the Secretariat: The references made to the Radio Regulations (RR) in this Recommendation referto the RR as revised by the World Radiocommunication Conference 1995. These elements of the RR willcome into force on 1 June 1998. Where applicable, the equivalent references in the current RR are alsoprovided in square brackets.

276 Maritime Manual

1.1 General characteristics

1.1.1 The class of emission should be F3E/G3E.

1.1.2 The necessary bandwidth should be 16 kHz.

1.1.3 Only phase modulation (frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis characteristic of6 dB/octave) should be used.

1.1.4 The frequency deviation corresponding to 100% modulation should approach 5 kHzas nearly as practicable. In no event should the frequency deviation exceed 5 kHz. Deviationlimiting circuits should be employed such that the maximum frequency deviation attainableshould be independent of the input audio frequency.

1.1.5 Where duplex or semi-duplex systems are in use, the performance of the radioequipment should continue to comply with all the requirements of this Recommendation.

1.1.6 The equipment should be designed so that frequency changes between assignedchannels can be carried out within 5 s.

1.1.7 Emissions should be vertically polarized at the source.

1.1.8 Stations using digital selective calling shall have the following capabilities:

a) sensing to determine the presence of a signal on 156.525 MHz (channel 70); and

b) automatic prevention of the transmission of a call, except for distress and safety calls, whenthe channel is occupied by calls.

1.2 Transmitters

1.2.1 The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed 5 parts in 106,and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed 10 parts in 106.

1.2.2 Spurious emissions on discrete frequencies, when measured in a non-reactive loadequal to the nominal output impedance of the transmitter, should be in accordance with theprovisions of RR Appendix S3 [Appendix 8].

1.2.3 The carrier power for coast stations should not normally exceed 50 W.

1.2.4 The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W. Means shouldbe provided to readily reduce this power to 1 W or less for use at short ranges, except for digitalselective calling equipment operating on 156.525 MHz (channel 70) in which case the powerreduction facility is optional (see also Recommendation ITU-R M.541 recommends 3.7).

1.2.5 The upper limit of the audio-frequency band should not exceed 3 kHz.

1.2.6 The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 W. In some radio environments,lower values may be required.


1.3 Receivers

1.3.1 The reference sensitivity should be equal to or less than 2.0 V, e.m.f., for a givenreference signal-to-noise ratio at the output of the receiver.

1.3.2 The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.

1.3.3 The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.

1.3.4 The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 65 dB.

1.3.5 The power of any conducted spurious emission, measured at the antenna terminals,should not exceed 2.0 nW at any discrete frequency. In some radio environments lower valuesmay be required.

1.3.6 The effective radiated power of any cabinet radiated spurious emission on anyfrequency up to 70 MHz should not exceed 10 nW. Above 70 MHz, the spurious emissionsshould not exceed 10 nW by more than 6 dB/octave in frequency up to 1 000 MHz. In someradio environments, lower values may be required;

2 that reference should also be made to Recommendations ITU-R SM.331 and ITU-RSM.332 and to the relevant IEC publications on methods of measurement.

278 Maritime Manual

RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.492-6

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR THE USE OF DIRECT-PRINTINGTELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE

(Question ITU-R 5/8)

(1974-1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1995)Rec. ITU-R M.492-6

SummaryThe Recommendation provides in Annex 1 operational procedures for the use of direct-printingtelegraph equipment in communication between a ship and a coast station in the selective ARQ-mode on a fully automated or semi-automated basis and to a number of ship stations or a singleship in the broadcast FEC-mode. It also specifies interworking between equipments inaccordance with technical characteristics given in Recommendations ITU-R M.476 andITU-R M.625. Appendix 1 contains procedures for setting up of calls.


considering

a) that narrow-band direct-printing telegraph services are in operation using equipment asdescribed in Recommendations ITU-R M.476, ITU-R M.625 and ITU-R M.692;

b) that an improved narrow-band direct-printing telegraph system providing automaticidentification and capable of using the 9-digit ship station identity is described inRecommendation ITU-R M.625;

c) that the operational procedures necessary for such services should be agreed upon;

d) that, as far as possible, these procedures should be similar for all services and for allfrequency bands (different operational procedures may be required in frequency bands otherthan the HF and MF bands);

e) that a large number of equipments complying with Recommendation ITU-R M.476exist;

f) that interworking between equipments in accordance with RecommendationsITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625 is required, at least for a transitionary period,

recommends

1 that the operational procedures given in Annex 1 be observed for the use of narrow-band direct-printing telegraph equipment in accordance with either RecommendationITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 in the MF and HF bands of the maritime mobile service;

2 that when using direct-printing telegraphy or similar systems in any of the frequencybands allocated to the maritime mobile service, the call may, by prior arrangement, be made on aworking frequency available for such systems.


ANNEX 1

Operational procedures

1 Mode A (ARQ)1.1 Methods used for setting up narrow-band direct-printing telegraph communicationsbetween a ship station and a coast station in the ARQ-mode should be on a fully automatic orsemi-automatic basis, insofar that a ship station should have direct access to a coast station on acoast station receiving frequency and a coast station should have direct access to a ship stationon a coast station transmitting frequency.

1.2 However, where necessary, prior contact by Morse telegraphy, radiotelephony or othermeans is not precluded.

1.3 Through connection to a remote teleprinter station over a dedicated circuit or to asubscriber of the international telex network may be achieved by manual, semi-automatic orautomatic means.NOTE 1 – Before an international automatic service can be introduced, agreement has to bereached on a numbering plan, traffic routing and charging. This should be considered by boththe ITU-T and the ITU-R.NOTE 2 – Recommendations ITU-R M.476 (see § 3.1.5) and ITU-R M.625 (see § 3.8) makeprovision for automatic re-establishment of radio circuits by rephasing in the event ofinterruption. However, it has been reported that this procedure has, in some countries, resulted intechnical and operational problems when radio circuits are extended into the public switchednetwork or to certain types of automated switching or store-and-forward equipments. For thisreason, some coast stations do not accept messages if the rephasing procedure is used.NOTE 3 – When a connection is set up in the ARQ mode with the international telex networkvia a coast station, where practicable the general requirements specified in ITU-TRecommendation U.63 should be met.

1.4 When, by prior arrangement, unattended operation is required for communication froma coast station to a ship station, or between two ship stations, the receiving ship station shouldhave a receiver tuned to the other station’s transmitting frequency and a transmitter tuned or atransmitter capable of being tuned automatically to the appropriate frequency and ready totransmit on this frequency.

1.5 For unattended operation a ship station should be called selectively by the initiatingcoast or ship station as provided for by Recommendations ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625. Theship station concerned could have available traffic stored ready for automatic transmission ondemand of the calling station.

1.6 At the “over” signal, initiated by the calling station, any available traffic in the ship’straffic store could be transmitted.

1.7 At the end of the communication, an “end of communication” signal should betransmitted, whereupon the ship’s equipment should automatically revert to the “stand-by”condition.

280 Maritime Manual

1.8 A “free channel” signal may be transmitted by a coast station where necessary toindicate when a channel is open for traffic. The “free channel” signals should preferably berestricted to only one channel per HF band and their duration should be kept as short as possible.In accordance with Article 18 of the Radio Regulations and recognizing the heavy loading of thefrequencies available for narrow-band direct printing in the HF bands, “free channel” signalsshould not be used in future planned systems.

1.9 The format of the “free channel” signal should be composed of signals in the 7-uniterror detecting code as listed in § 2 of Annex 1 to Recommendation ITU-R M.476 and § 2 ofAnnex 1 to Recommendation ITU-R M.625. Three of these signals should be grouped into ablock, the middle signal being the “signal repetition” (RQ), the first signal of the block beingany of the signals VXKMCF TBOZA and the third signal of the block being any of the signalsVMPCYFS OIRZDA (see Recommendation ITU-R M.491). These signals should be indicatedin the ITU List of Coast Stations.

Selections of new signals should preferably be chosen to correspond to the first two digits of thatcoast station’s 4-digit identification number. If this is not possible because the characters neededare not listed above, or if this is not desired because this combination is already in use byanother coast station, it is preferred that a combination of characters be selected from those listedabove in the second part of each row, i.e. TBOZA for the first signal and OIRZDA for the thirdsignal of the free channel block. The signals in the block are transmitted at a modulation rate of100 Bd and the blocks are separated by pauses of 240 ms. For manual systems this “freechannel” signal should be interrupted either by a period of no signal or by a signal or signals,that would enable an operator to recognize the “free channel” condition by ear. An aurallyrecognizable signal, e.g. a Morse signal, may be used alone as the “free channel” signal inmanual systems. At least 8 blocks of the 7-unit signal should be transmitted before interruption.

1.10 In the case of single frequency operation, as described in RecommendationITU-R M.692, the free channel signal should be interrupted by listening periods of at least 3 s.

1.11 General operational procedures for setting up calls between ship stations and betweenship stations and coast stations are given below and specific procedures are given in Appendix 1.

1.12 Manual procedures

1.12.1 Ship to coast station

1.12.1.1 The operator of the ship station establishes communication with the coast station byA1A Morse telegraphy, telephony or by other means using normal calling procedures. Theoperator then requests direct-printing communication, exchanges information regarding thefrequencies to be used and, when applicable, gives the ship station the direct-printing selectivecall number assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 asappropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A.

1.12.1.2 The operator of the coast station then establishes direct-printing communication on thefrequency agreed, using the appropriate identification of the ship.


1.12.1.3 Alternatively the operator of the ship station, using the direct-printing equipment, callsthe coast station on a predetermined coast station receive frequency using the identification ofthe coast station assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625as appropriate, or the coast station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface toList VII A.

1.12.1.4 The operator of the coast station then establishes direct-printing communication on thecorresponding coast station transmit frequency.

1.12.2 Coast station to ship

1.12.2.1 The operator of the coast station calls the ship station by A1A Morse telegraphy,telephony or other means, using normal calling procedures.

1.12.2.2 The operator of the ship station then applies the procedures of § 1.12.1.1 or § 1.12.1.3.

1.12.3 Intership

1.12.3.1 The operator of the calling ship station establishes communication with the called shipstation by A1A Morse telegraphy, telephony, or by other means, using normal callingprocedures. The operator then requests direct-printing communication, exchanges informationregarding the frequencies to be used and, when applicable, gives the direct-printing selective callnumber of the calling ship station assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with thePreface to List VII A.

1.12.3.2 The operator of the called ship station then establishes direct-printing communicationon the frequency agreed, using the appropriate identification of the calling ship.

1.13 Procedures for automatic operation

1.13.1 Ship to coast station

1.13.1.1 The ship station calls the coast station on a predetermined coast station receivefrequency, using the direct-printing equipment and the identification signal of the coast stationassigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, orthe coast station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A.

1.13.1.2 The coast station’s direct-printing equipment detects the call and the coast stationresponds directly on the corresponding coast station transmit frequency, either automatically orunder manual control.

1.13.2 Coast station to ship

1.13.2.1 The coast station calls the ship station on a predetermined coast station transmitfrequency, using the direct-printing equipment and the ship station direct-printing selective callnumber assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 asappropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A.

282 Maritime Manual

1.13.2.2 The ship station’s direct-printing equipment tuned to receive the predetermined coaststation transmit frequency detects the call, whereupon the reply is given in one of the followingways:

a) the ship station replies either immediately on the corresponding coast station receivefrequency or at a later stage, using the procedure of § 1.12.1.3; or

b) the ship station’s transmitter is automatically started on the corresponding coast stationreceive frequency and the direct-printing equipment responds by sending appropriatesignals to indicate readiness to receive traffic automatically.

1.14 Message format

1.14.1 Where the appropriate facilities are provided by the coast station, traffic may beexchanged with the telex network:

a) in a conversational mode where the stations concerned are connected directly, eitherautomatically or under manual control; or

b) in a store-and-forward mode where traffic is stored at the coast station until the circuit tothe called station can be set up, either automatically or under manual control.

1.14.2 In the shore-to-ship direction, the message format should conform to normal telexnetwork practice (see also Appendix 1, § 2).

1.14.3 In the ship-to-shore direction, the message format should conform to the operationalprocedures specified in Appendix 1, § 1.

2 Mode B (FEC)

2.1 Messages may, by prior arrangement, be sent in the B mode from a coast station or aship station to a number of ships or to a single ship, preceded if desired by the selective call codeof the ship(s) concerned where:

2.1.1 a receiving ship station is not permitted or not able to use its transmitter, or

2.1.2 communications are intended for more than one ship, or

2.1.3 unattended reception of the B mode is required and automatic acknowledgement is notnecessary.

In such cases, the ship station receivers should be tuned to the appropriate coast or ship stationtransmitting frequency.

2.2 All B mode messages should start with “carriage return” and “line feed” signals.

2.3 When the ship station receives phasing signals in the B mode, its teleprinter shouldstart automatically and should stop automatically when reception of the emission ceases.


2.4 Ship stations may acknowledge the reception of B mode messages by A1A Morsetelegraphy, telephony or by other means.

3 Inter-working between equipments in accordance with Recommenda-tions ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625

3.1 Recommendation ITU-R M.625 provides for automatic inter-working with equipmentwhich is in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476. The criteria for determiningwhether one or both stations are of the Recommendation ITU-R M.476 type are the length of thecall signal and the composition of the call blocks.

3.2 If both stations have equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.625,automatic station identification is a part of the automatic call set-up procedures. However, if oneor both stations have equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476, noautomatic station identification takes place. For this reason, and because RecommendationITU-R M.625 accommodates the use of the 9-digit ship station identity for the direct-printingequipment call signal, it is desirable that all new equipment be in accordance withRecommendation ITU-R M.625 at the earliest practicable time.

3.3 In order to attain full compatibility with the large number of existing equipment, it willbe necessary to assign both a 9-digit and a 5- (or 4-) digit identity (i.e. 7- and 4-signal callsignals) to such new stations. Ship and coast station lists should contain both signals.

284 Maritime Manual

APPENDIX 1

1 Procedure for setting up a call in the ship-to-coast station direction

GA

(7)

GA

MSG + ?(5)

QRC + ?

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

? (3)

(2)

TLX xyDIRTLX xy

MSG +

TGMURGRTLOPRWXNAVSTAPOSFREQSVCMANMEDOBSHELPHELP...AMVBRK

MULTLX xy xy xySTS x

VBTLX xyFAX xyTEL xyDATA xyRPT ...TSTTRF

INF

“Message reference charged time, etc.” (8)

Coast station Ship station

Ship initiates the call

Go to step 4 orend of communication

Exchange answer-backs (1)

Step


Ship transmits itsAAIC, followed by + ? (3) (4)

Message procedure (6)

(2.1) or(2.2) or(2.3) or(2.4) or(2.5) or(2.6) or(2.7) or(2.8) or(2.9) or(2.10) or(2.11) or(2.12) or(2.13) or(2.14) or(2.15) or(2.16) or(2.17) or(2.18) or(2.19) or(2.20) or(2.21) or(2.22) or(2.23) or(2.24) or(2.25) or(2.26) or(2.27) or(2.28) or(2.29) or(2.30)

D01

FIGURE ...[D01] = 20 CM


2 Procedure for setting up a call in the coast-to-ship station direction

Operation in the direction coast station to ship may need to be in the store-and-forward modeowing to the fact that radio propagation conditions may not allow the setting up of a call at theintended time.

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

GA

Go to step 3or

Coast station Ship stationStep


Message procedure

If ship has traffic for coast station go to step 4 of Part 1

orEnd of communication

Coast station initiatescall


D02

FIGURE 1...[D02] = 9 CM

Notes relative to § 1 and 2:(1) a) In automatic operation the answer-back exchange is initiated and controlled by the coast

station. For calls set up by the ship station the answer-back exchange in manual operation maybe initiated by the ship station.

For calls set up by the coast station the answer-back exchange in manual operation is initiatedby the coast station, thereby defining the order in which the exchange takes place.

b) Answer-back code as defined in ITU-T Recommendations F.130 for ship stations and F.60 forcoast stations.

(2) A coast station need not provide all of the facilities indicated. However, where specific facilities areprovided, the facility codes indicated should be used. The facility “HELP” should always beavailable.

(2.1) MSG indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive any messages held for it at thecoast station.

286 Maritime Manual

(2.2) TLX xy indicates that the following message is for immediate connection to a store-and-forwardfacility located at the coast station.

y indicates the subscriber’s national telex number.

x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by0 (when applicable). (Where the store-and-forward system is remote from the coast station, TLXalone may be used.)

TLXA may optionally be used instead of TLX which indicates that ship wishes to be advised (usingthe normal shore-to-ship procedures) when the message has been delivered to the indicated telexnumber.

(2.3) DIRTLX xy indicates that a direct telex connection is required.


x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by0 (when applicable).

RDL + may optionally be used to indicate that the last DIRTLX xy telex number should beredialled.

(2.4) TGM indicates that the following message is a radio telegram.(2.5) URG indicates that the ship station needs to be connected immediately to a manual assistance

operator and an audible alarm may be activated. This code should only be used in case ofemergency.

(2.6) RTL indicates that the following message is a radio telex letter.(2.7) OPR indicates that connection to a manual assistance operator is required.(2.8) WX indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive weather information.(2.9) NAV indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive navigational warnings.(2.10) STA indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive a status report of all store-and-

forward messages which have been sent by that ship station, but which the ship station has notalready received on retransmitted or non-delivered information (see also (6)). STA x may also beused where the ship station needs to immediately receive a status report of such a message where xindicates the message reference provided by the coast station.

(2.11) POS indicates that the following message contains the ship’s position. Some administrations usethis information to assist in the subsequent automatic transmission or reception of messages (e.g.for calculating the optimum traffic frequency and/or the appropriate directional antennas to use).

(2.12) FREQ indicates that the following message indicates the frequency on which the ship is keepingwatch.

(2.13) SVC indicates that the following message is a service message (for subsequent manual attention).(2.14) MAN indicates that the following message is to be stored and manually forwarded to a country

which cannot be accessed automatically.(2.15) MED indicates that an urgent medical message follows.(2.16) OBS indicates that the following message is to be sent to the meteorological organization.(2.17) HELP indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive a list of available facilities within

the system.


(2.18) If information is needed on the application of procedures for individual facilities at a coast station,request for further details concerning the specific procedure can be obtained by the facility codeHELP followed by the appropriate facility code for which the information is needed, e.g.:< HELP DIRTLX + indicates that the ship station needs information on the procedures(action by ship operator) for ordering a dialogue-mode connection with a telex network subscribervia the coast station.

(2.19) AMV indicates that the following message is to be sent to the AMVER organization.(2.20) BRK indicates that the use of the radio path is to be immediately discontinued (for use where the

ship’s operator can only use a teleprinter for controlling the ARQ equipment).(2.21) MULTLX xy/xy/xy+ indicates that the following message is a multiple address message for

immediate connection to a store-and-forward facility located at the coast station.


x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by0 (when applicable).

Each separate xy indicates a different telex number to which the same message should beforwarded. At least two separate telex numbers should be included.

MULTLXA may optionally be used instead of MULTLX which indicates that the ship wishes to beadvised (using the normal shore-to-ship procedures) when the messages have been delivered to theindicated telex numbers.

(2.22) STS x + indicates that the following message is for transmission to a ship using a store-and-forward facility located at the coast station. x indicates the addressed ship’s 5- or 9-digit identitynumber.

(2.23) INF indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive information from the coast station’sdatabase. Some administrations provide a variety of different database information in which caseINF returns a directory listing and a subsequent facility code is used to select the desiredinformation.

(2.24) VBTLX xy indicates that the following message should be dictated, by the coast station, to avoicebank (voice messaging) telephone number for subsequent retrieval by the addressee, and thata copy of the message should be forwarded to telex number xy. The voicebank telephone numbershould be included in the first line of the message text.

(2.25) FAX xy indicates that the following message should be forwarded, via the PSTN, by facsimile tothe telephone number xy.

(2.26) TEL xy indicates that the following message should be telephoned, by the coast station, to thetelephone number xy.

(2.27) DATA xy indicates that the following message should be forwarded by the coast station usingdata facilities to the subscriber number xy (via the PSTN).

(2.28) RPT xy indicates that the ship needs to receive, using the ARQ mode, a specific identifiedmessage (e.g., earlier transmitted in the FEC mode), if still available for automatic retransmission.x is used as the message identifier.

(2.29) TST indicates that the ship needs to receive an automatically transmitted test text (e.g. “the quickbrown fox ”).

(2.30) TRF indicates that the ship needs to receive information, automatically transmitted, on tariffscurrently applicable to the coast station.

(3) The symbol “?” is not necessary where the coast station is automatic. It is normally required onlyfor manual systems.

288 Maritime Manual

(4) In cases where the coast station requires information about the relevant Accounting AuthorityIdentification Code (AAIC), this information should be provided by the ship operator on receipt ofthe combination < QRC + from the coast station.

Some coast stations may request additional information, e.g. ship’s name, call sign, etc.

(5) This sequence may be preceded where necessary by suitable prompts or facility selectioninformation and, if appropriate, any consequent ship station reply, or may be deleted where notapplicable (e.g. where facility codes WX, NAV, STA, MSG or HELP are input at step 4). Wherefacility code DIRTLX xy was input at step 4, this sequence may be replaced by the distant endanswer-back or by any service signal (e.g. NC, OCC, etc.) received from the telex network.

(6) Message procedures depend on which facility is used:

For TLX where the store-and-forward system is remote from the coast station, ITU-TRecommendation F.72 may apply. Where the store-and-forward system is located at the coaststation, the complete information content of the message sent at this step will be forwarded to thesubscriber whose telex number is given by xy.

For DIRTLX, see ITU-T Recommendation F.60.

For TGM, see ITU-T Recommendations F.1 and F.31.

For SVC and MED, the message will normally be plain text and no specific message procedure isrequired.

For RTL, the message will be plain text but should include the postal address of the addressee.

For STA, the appropriate status information is returned to the ship in accordance with ITU-TRecommendation F.72, § 11.3 and 11.4.

For POS and FREQ, specific national procedures may apply.

(7) This sequence of 4 K’s “KKKK” (4 combination No. 11 signals in the letter case) indicates that anynetwork connection should be cleared but that the radio path should be maintained and that theprocedure should immediately proceed to step 11. This sequence may be used elsewhere in theprocedure in which case the procedure reverts to step 3.

(8) This step is optional and may not apply to all facilities.



Operational procedures for the use of digital selective-callingequipment in the maritime mobile service

(1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1994-1995-1996-1997-2004)

Summary

The Recommendation contains the operational procedures for digital selective-calling(DSC) equipment whose technical characteristics are given in RecommendationITU-R M.493. The Recommendation contains five annexes. In Annexes 1 and 2 theprovisions and procedures are described for distress, urgency and safety calls and forroutine calls, respectively. In Annexes 3 and 4 the operational procedures for ships andfor coast stations are described and Annex 5 lists the frequencies to be used for DSC.


considering

a) that digital selective-calling (DSC) will be used as described inRecommendation ITU-R M.493;

b) that the requirements of Chapter IV of the International Convention for theSafety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, for the Global Maritime Distress andSafety System (GMDSS) are based on the use of DSC for distress alerting and callingand that operational procedures are necessary for the use of that system;

c) that, as far as is practicable, operational procedures in all frequency bands andfor all types of communications should be similar;

d) that DSC may provide a useful supplementary means of transmitting a distressalert in addition to the provisions of transmitting the distress alert by existing methodsand procedures in the Radio Regulations (RR);

e) that conditions when alarms have to be actuated should be specified,

recommends

1 that the technical characteristics of equipment used for DSC in the maritimemobile service should be in conformity with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations;

290 Maritime Manual

2 that the operational procedures to be observed in the MF, HF and VHF bandsfor DSC should be in accordance with Annex 1 for distress and safety calls andAnnex 2 for other calls;

3 that provisions should be made at stations equipped for DSC for:

3.1 the manual entry of address, type of call, category and various messages intoa DSC sequence;

3.2 the verification and if necessary the correction of such manually formedsequences;

3.3 a specific aural alarm and visual indication to indicate receipt of a distress orurgency call or a call having distress category. It should not be possible to disable thisalarm and indication. Provisions should be made to ensure that they can be reset onlymanually;

3.4 aural alarm(s) and visual indication for calls other than distress and urgency.The aural alarm(s) may be capable of being disabled;

3.5 such visual indicators to indicate:

3.5.1 type of received call address (to all stations, to a group of stations,geographical, individual);

3.5.2 category;

3.5.3 identity of calling station;

3.5.4 numerical or alpha-numerical type of information, e.g. frequency informationand telecommand;

3.5.5 type of “end of sequence” character;

3.5.6 detection of errors, if any;

3.6 monitoring the DSC channel to determine the presence of a signal and, exceptfor distress, urgency, and non-test safety calls, provide facilities for automaticallypreventing the transmission of a DSC call until the channel is free;

4 that the equipment should be simple to operate;

5 that the operational procedures given in Annexes 3 and 4, which are based onthe relevant procedures from Annexes 1 and 2 and from the RR, be used as guidance forships and coast stations;

6 that the frequencies used for distress and safety purposes using DSC are thosecontained in Annex 5 to this Recommendation (see RR Appendix 15).


NOTE 1 – The following definitions are used throughout this Recommendation:

Single frequency: the same frequency is used for transmission and reception.

Paired frequencies: frequencies which are associated in pairs; each pair consisting ofone transmitting and one receiving frequency.

International DSC frequencies: those frequencies designated in the RR for exclusiveuse for DSC on an international basis.

National DSC frequencies: those frequencies assigned to individual coast stations or agroup of stations on which DSC is permitted (this may include working frequencies aswell as calling frequencies). The use of these frequencies must be in accordance withthe RR.

Automatic DSC operation at a ship station: a mode of operation employing automatictunable transmitters and receivers, suitable for unattended operation, which provide forautomatic call acknowledgements upon reception of a DSC and automatic transfer tothe appropriate working frequencies.

Call attempt: one or a limited number of call sequences directed to the same stations onone or more frequencies and within a relatively short time period (e.g. a few minutes).A call attempt is considered unsuccessful if a calling sequence contains the symbol RQat the end of the sequence and no acknowledgement is received in this time interval.

Annex 1

Provisions and procedures for distress, urgency and safety calls

1 Introduction

The terrestrial elements of the GMDSS adopted by the 1988 Amendments to theInternational Convention for SOLAS, 1974, are based on the use of DSC for distressand safety communications.

1.1 Method of calling

The provisions of RR Chapter VII are applicable to the use of DSC in cases of distress,urgency or safety.

292 Maritime Manual

2 DSC distress alertThe DSC distress alert provides for alerting, self-identification, ship’s positionincluding time, and nature of distress as defined in the RR (See RR Chapter VII).

3 Procedures for DSC distress alerts

3.1 Transmission by a mobile unit in distress

3.1.1 The DSC equipment should be capable of being preset to transmit the distressalert on at least one distress alerting frequency.

3.1.2 The distress alert shall be composed in accordance with RecommendationITU-R M.493; the ship’s position information, the time at which it was taken and thenature of distress should be entered as appropriate. If the position of the ship cannot beentered, then the position information signals shall be transmitted automatically as thedigit 9 repeated ten times. If the time cannot be included, then the time informationsignals shall be transmitted automatically as the digit 8 repeated four times.

3.1.3 Distress alert attempt

At MF and HF a distress alert attempt may be transmitted as a single frequency or amulti-frequency call attempt. At VHF only single frequency call attempts are used.

3.1.3.1 Single frequency call attempt

A distress alert attempt should be transmitted as 5 consecutive calls on one frequency.To avoid call collision and the loss of acknowledgements, this call attempt may betransmitted on the same frequency again after a random delay of between 3 ½ and4 ½ min from the beginning of the initial call. This allows acknowledgements arrivingrandomly to be received without being blocked by retransmission. The random delayshould be generated automatically for each repeated transmission, however it should bepossible to override the automatic repeat manually.

At MF and HF, single frequency call attempts may be repeated on different frequenciesafter a random delay of between 3½ and 4½ min from the beginning of the initial call.However, if a station is capable of receiving acknowledgements continuously on alldistress frequencies except for the transmit frequency in use, then single frequency callattempts may be repeated on different frequencies without this delay.

3.1.3.2 Multi-frequency call attempt

A distress alert attempt may be transmitted as up to 6 consecutive (see Note 1) callsdispersed over a maximum of 6 distress frequencies (1 at MF and 5 at HF). Stationstransmitting multi-frequency distress alert attempts should be able to receiveacknowledgements continuously on all frequencies except for the transmit frequency inuse, or be able to complete the call attempt within 1 min.


Multi-frequency call attempts may be repeated after a random delay of between 3½ and4 ½ min from the beginning of the previous call attempt.

NOTE 1 – A VHF call may be transmitted simultaneously with an MF/HF call.

3.1.4 Distress

In the case of distress the operator should:

3.1.4.1 enter the desired mode of the subsequent communication and if timepermits, enter the ship’s position and time (see Note 1) it was taken and the nature ofdistress (see Note 1);

NOTE 1 – If these are not provided automatically.

3.1.4.2 select the distress frequency(ies) to be used (see Note 1 of § 3.1.4.1);

3.1.4.3 activate the distress alert attempt by a dedicated distress button.

3.2 Reception

The DSC equipment should be capable of maintaining a reliable watch on a 24-hourbasis on appropriate DSC distress alerting frequencies.

3.3 Acknowledgement of distress alerts

Acknowledgements of distress alerts should be initiated manually.

Acknowledgements should be transmitted on the same frequency as the distress alertwas received.

3.3.1 Distress alerts should normally be acknowledged by DSC only by appropriatecoast stations. Coast stations should, in addition, set watch on radiotelephony and, if the“mode of subsequent communication” signal in the received distress alert indicatesteleprinter, also on narrow-band direct-printing (NBDP) (see Recommendation ITU-RM.493). In both cases, the radiotelephone and NBDP frequencies should be thoseassociated with the frequency on which the distress alert was received.

3.3.2 Acknowledgements by coast stations of DSC distress alerts transmitted on MFor HF should be initiated with a minimum delay of 1 min after receipt of a distress alert,and normally within a maximum delay of 2 ¾ min. This allows all calls within a singlefrequency or multi-frequency call attempt to be completed and should allow sufficienttime for coast stations to respond to the distress alert. Acknowledgements by coaststations on VHF should be transmitted as soon as practicable.

294 Maritime Manual

3.3.3 The acknowledgement of a distress alert consists of a single DSCacknowledgement call which should be addressed to “all ships” and include theidentification (see Recommendation ITU-R M.493) of the ship whose distress alert isbeing acknowledged.

3.3.4 Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should set watch on anassociated radiotelephone distress and safety traffic frequency and acknowledge the callby radiotelephony.

If a ship station continues to receive a DSC distress alert on an MF or VHF channel, aDSC acknowledgement should be transmitted to terminate the call only after consultingwith a Rescue Coordination Centre or a Coast Station and being directed to do so.

3.3.5 The automatic repetition of a distress alert attempt should be terminatedautomatically on receipt of a DSC distress acknowledgement.

3.3.6 When distress, urgency, and safety traffic cannot be successfully conductedusing radiotelephony, an affected station may indicate its intention to conductsubsequent communications on the associated frequency for NBDP telegraphy.

3.4 Distress relays

Distress relay calls should be initiated manually.

3.4.1 A distress relay call should use the telecommand signal “distress relay” inaccordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493 and the calling attempt should followthe procedures described in § 3.1.3 to 3.1.3.2 for distress alerts, except that the alert issent manually as a single call on a single frequency.

3.4.2 Any ship, receiving a distress alert on an HF channel which is notacknowledged by a coast station within 5 min, should transmit a distress relay call tothe appropriate coast station.

3.4.3 Distress relay calls transmitted by coast stations, or by ship stations addressedto more than one vessel, should be acknowledged by ship stations using radiotelephony.Distress relay calls transmitted by ship stations should be acknowledged by a coaststation transmitting a “distress relay acknowledgement” call in accordance with theprocedures for distress acknowledgements given in § 3.3 to 3.3.3.

4 Procedures for DSC urgency and safety calls

4.1 DSC, on the distress and safety calling frequencies, should be used by coaststations to advise shipping, and by ships to advise coast stations and/or ship stations, ofthe impending transmission of urgency, vital navigational and safety messages, exceptwhere the transmissions take place at routine times. The call should indicate theworking frequency which will be used for the subsequent transmission of an urgent,vital navigational or safety message.


4.2 The announcement and identification of medical transports should be carriedout by DSC techniques, using appropriate distress and safety calling frequencies. Suchcalls should use the category “urgency”, and telecommand “medical transport” and beaddressed to all ships at VHF and Geographic Area at MF/HF.

4.3 The operational procedures for urgency and safety calls should be inaccordance with the relevant parts of Annex 3, § 2.1 or 2.2 and 3.1. or 3.2.

5 Testing the equipment used for distress and safety calls

Testing on the exclusive DSC distress and safety calling frequencies should be avoidedas far as possible by using other methods. VHF, MF and HF test calls should be inaccordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493 (see Table 4.7) and the call may beacknowledged by the called station. Normally there would be no further communicationbetween the two stations involved.

Annex 2

Provisions and procedures for routine calls

1 Frequency/channels

1.1 As a rule, paired frequencies should be used at HF and MF, in which case anacknowledgement is transmitted on the frequency paired with the frequency of thereceived call. In exceptional cases for national purposes a single frequency may beused. If the same call is received on several calling channels, the most appropriate shallbe chosen to transmit the acknowledgement. A single frequency channel should be usedat VHF.

1.2 International calling

The paired frequencies listed in RR Appendix 17, Part A and in Annex 5 of thisRecommendation should be used for international DSC calling.

1.2.1 At HF and MF international DSC frequencies should only be used for shore-to-ship calls and for the associated call acknowledgements from ships fitted forautomatic DSC operation where it is known that the ships concerned are not listening tothe coast station’s national frequencies.

296 Maritime Manual

1.2.2 All ship-to-shore DSC calling at HF and MF should preferably be done on thecoast station’s national frequencies.

1.3 National calling

Coast stations should avoid using the international DSC frequencies for calls that maybe placed using national frequencies.

1.3.1 Ship stations should keep watch on appropriate national and internationalchannels. (Appropriate measures should be taken for an even loading of national andinternational channels.)

1.3.2 Administrations are urged to find methods and negotiate terms to improve theutilization of the DSC channels available, e.g.:

– coordinated and/or joint use of coast station transmitters;

– optimizing the probability of successful calls by providing information to shipson suitable frequencies (channels) to be watched and by information fromships to a selected number of coast stations on the channels watched on-board.

1.4 Method of calling

1.4.1 The procedures set out in this section are applicable to the use of DSCtechniques, except in cases of distress, urgency or safety, to which the provisions of RRChapter VII are applicable.

1.4.2 The call shall contain information indicating the station or stations to whichthe call is directed, and the identification of the calling station.

1.4.3 The call should also contain information indicating the type of communicationto be set up and may include supplementary information such as a proposed workingfrequency or channel; this information shall always be included in calls from coaststations, which shall have priority for that purpose.

1.4.4 An appropriate digital selective calling channel chosen in accordance with theprovisions of RR Nos. 52.128 to 52.137 or Nos. 52.145 to 52.153, as appropriate, shallbe used for the call.

2 Operating procedures

The technical format of the call sequence shall be in conformity with the relevantITU-R Recommendations.

The reply to a DSC requesting an acknowledgement shall be made by transmitting anappropriate acknowledgement using DSC techniques.


Acknowledgements may be initiated either manually or automatically. When anacknowledgement can be transmitted automatically, it shall be in conformity with therelevant ITU-R Recommendations.

The technical format of the acknowledgement sequence shall be in conformity with therelevant ITU-R Recommendations.

For communication between a coast station and a ship station, the coast station shallfinally decide the working frequency or channel to be used.

The forwarding traffic and the control for working for radiotelephony shall be carriedout in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171.

A typical DSC calling and acknowledgement sequence contains the following signals(see Recommendation ITU-R M.493).

Composition of a typical routine DSC calling and acknowledgement sequence

2.1 Coast station initiates call to ship station (see Note 1)

Figures 1 and 2 illustrate the procedures below in flow chart and by time sequencediagram respectively.

NOTE 1 – See Recommendations ITU-R M.689 and ITU-R M.1082 for further details ofprocedures applicable only to the semi-automatic/automatic services.

2.1.2 If a direct connection exists between the calling subscriber and the coaststation, the coast station asks the calling subscriber for the approximate position of theship.

Signal Method of composition– format specifier operator selected– address operator entered– category (routine) automatically selected– self-identification pre-programmed– telecommand information seleccionada por el operador– frequency information (if appropriate) operator selected or entered– telephone number (semi-

automatic/automaticship-to-shore connections only) operator entered

– end of sequence signal automatically selected.

298 Maritime Manual

2.1.3 If the ship’s position cannot be indicated by the caller, the coast stationoperator tries to find the location in the information available at the coast station.

2.1.4 The coast station checks to see whether the call would be more appropriatethrough another coast station (see § 1.3.2).

2.1.5 The coast station checks to see whether the transmission of a DSC isinappropriate or restricted (e.g. ship not fitted with DSC or barred).

2.1.6 Assuming a DSC is appropriate the coast station composes the callingsequence as follows:

– selects format specifier,

– enters address of the ship,

– selects category,

– selects telecommand information,

– inserts working frequency information in the message part of the sequence, ifappropriate,

– usually selects “end of sequence” signal “RQ”. However, if the coast stationknows that the ship station cannot respond or the call is to a group of ships thefrequency is omitted and the end of sequence signal should be 127, in whichcase the following procedures (§ 2.1.13 to 2.1.15) relating to anacknowledgement are not applicable.


0541-01

2.1.2

2.1.3

2.1.42.1.5

2.1.62.1.7

2.1.8

2.1.8.1

2.1.12

2.1.9

2.1.8.1

2.1.14

2

2.1.13.2

2.1.13.2

2.1.14.2

2.1.13.42.1.13.3

2.1.14

1

2.1.13

2.1.13.32.1.13.4 2.1.13.1

2.1.13.12.1.13.3/4

2.1.13.12.1.13.3/4

2.1.13.1

2.1.14

2.1.8.2

2.1.11

1/10 min6/24 h 2.1.13.4

2.1.14

Autom.

2.1.15

2.1.8.1

SHORE(coast station)

Ask caller forposition of ship

if a directconnection exists

NoPosition?

YesTry to findthe position

of ship

Is callappropriate?

No

Compose andverify a calling

sequence

Select callingfrequency

Monitor theselected calling

frequency

YesBusy?

Transmitthe callingsequence

Doestransmitted

sequence containRQ?

No

YesMonitorreceivingchannel

YesIs ack.received?

NoCheck

transmissioninterval

No Isinterval long

enough?Yes

YesIs shipon working

channel?

No

No Has callattempt beencompleted?

Check thenumber of

call attempts

Can callattempt berepeated?

Yes

No

Contact withcaller if

necessary

END

Wait for acall from ship

station

END

Contact shipstation on working

channel agreed

Yes

No Is theship able to comply

immediately?

See Fig. 3

SHIP

Record andindicatemessagereceived

Withacknowledgement

RQ?No

Yes

TXautom. ormanu.?

Automaticcomposition of

acknowledgementsequence

Checktransmission

interval

Isinterval long

enough?

Transmitautomatically theacknowledgement

YesWith“unable tocomply”

No

Contact coaststation on

working channelagreed

Iscontact success-

ful?

Yes

END

Monitor workingchannel proposed

if appropriate

Manual

Canacknowledgement

be transmittedwithin 5 min of

receipt?

Yes

Compose andverify an

acknowledgement sequence

No


sequence

SeeFig. 3

FIGURE 1Flow chart of operational procedures for calling in the shore-to-ship direction

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

300 Maritime Manual

0541-02

t1t4t1

t3

t1

t2

t1t5t1

t3

t1t4t1

t2

t1t5t1

t3

TX RX RX TX f1 fl

Coaststation

Shipstation

Workingfrequencies

Contact onworking

frequencies

a) Automated transmitter (able to comply)

b) Automated transmitter (unable to comply)

Contact onworking

frequencies

Contact onworking

frequencies

c) Ship transmitter not automated. Ship makes a delayed (>5 min) response to coast station and encounters queue on working frequency

: transmission time of a DSC sequence: interval between the DSC reception at the ship and transmission from the ship after the operator’s appearance in the radio room (from several minutes up to several hours): transition time from calling to working frequency including, if necessary, the time for working channel clearing (queue waiting time): as defined in § 2.1.13.2: time for coast station to prepare acknowledgement (see § 2.2.6)

1

2

3

4

5

FIGURE 2Examples of timing diagrams for calling in shore-to-ship direction

tt

t

tt

F

I

CT1

T2

f1, f1RQ, BQ

A: format specifier: called station address: calling station self-identification: category: first telecommand signal, (104) indicates unable to comply: second telecommand signal, (103) indicates queue: working frequencies: end of sequence signals

suffix (c) or (s) indicates coaststation or ship station respectively


2.1.7 The coast station verifies the calling sequence.

The call shall be transmitted once on a single appropriate calling channel or frequencyonly. Only in exceptional circumstances may a call be transmitted simultaneously onmore than one frequency.

2.1.8 The coast station operator chooses the calling frequencies which are mostsuitable for the ship’s location.

2.1.8.1 After checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress, the coaststation operator initiates the transmission of the sequence on one of the frequencieschosen. Transmission on any one frequency should be limited to no more than 2 callsequences separated by intervals of at least 45 s to allow for reception of anacknowledgement from the ship.

2.1.8.2 If appropriate, a “call attempt” may be transmitted, which may include thetransmission of the same call sequence on other frequencies (if necessary with a changeof working frequency information to correspond to the same band as the callingfrequency) made in turn at intervals of not less than 5 min, following the same patternas in § 2.1.8.1.

2.1.9 If an acknowledgement is received further transmission of the call sequenceshould not take place.

The coast station shall then prepare to transmit traffic on the working channel orfrequency it has proposed.

2.1.10 The acknowledgement of the received call should only be transmitted uponreceipt of a calling sequence which terminates with an acknowledgement request.

2.1.11 When a station called does not reply, the call attempt should not normally berepeated until after an interval of at least 15 min. The same call attempt should not berepeated more than five times every 24 h. The aggregate of the times for whichfrequencies are occupied in one call attempt, should normally not exceed 1 min.

The following procedures apply at the ship:

2.1.12 Upon receipt of a calling sequence at the ship station, the received messageshould be displayed.

2.1.13 When a received call sequence contains an end of sequence signal “RQ”, anacknowledgement sequence should be composed and transmitted.

The format specifier and category information should be identical to that in the receivedcalling sequence.

302 Maritime Manual

2.1.13.1 If the ship station is not equipped for automatic DSC operation, the ship’soperator initiates an acknowledgement to the coast station after a delay of at least 5 sbut no later than 4 ½ min of receiving the calling sequence, using the ship-to-shorecalling procedures detailed in § 2.2. However the transmitted sequence should containa “BQ” end of sequence signal in place of the “RQ” signal.

If such an acknowledgement cannot be transmitted within 5 min of receiving the callingsequence then the ship station should instead transmit a calling sequence to the coaststation using the ship-to-shore calling procedure detailed in § 2.2.

2.1.13.2 If the ship is equipped for automatic DSC operation, the ship stationautomatically transmits an acknowledgement with an end of sequence signal “BQ”. Thestart of the transmission of this acknowledgement sequence should be within 30 s forHF and MF or within 3 s for VHF after the reception of the complete call sequence.

2.1.13.3 If the ship is able to comply immediately the acknowledgement sequenceshould include a telecommand signal which is identical to that received in the callingsequence indicating that it is able to comply.

If no working frequency was proposed in the call, the ship station should include aproposal for a working frequency in its acknowledgement.

2.1.13.4 If the ship is not able to comply immediately the acknowledgementsequence should include the telecommand signal 104 (unable to comply), with a secondtelecommand signal giving additional information (see RecommendationITU-R M.493).

At some later time when the ship is able to accept the traffic being offered, the ship’soperator initiates a call to the coast station using the ship-to-shore calling proceduresdetailed in § 2.2.

2.1.14 If a call is acknowledged indicating ability to comply immediately andcommunication between coast station and ship station on the working channel agreed isestablished, the DSC call procedure is considered to be completed.

2.1.15 If the ship station transmits an acknowledgement which is not received by thecoast station then this will result in the coast station repeating the call (in accordancewith § 2.1.11). In this event the ship station should transmit a new acknowledgement. Ifno repeated call is received the ship station should transmit an acknowledgement orcalling sequence in accordance with § 2.1.13.1.


2.2 Ship station initiates call to coast station (see Note 1)

Figures 3 and 4 illustrate the procedures below in flow chart and by time sequencediagram respectively.

This procedure should also be followed both as a delayed response to a call receivedearlier from the coast station (see § 2.1.13.1) and to initiate traffic from the ship station.

NOTE 1 – See Recommendations ITU-R M.689 and ITU-R M.1082 for further details ofprocedures applicable only to the semi-automatic/automatic services.

2.2.1 The ship composes the calling sequence as follows:

– operator selects the format specifier,

– operator enters address,

– automatically selected category,

– pre-programmed self-identification,

– operator selects the telecommand information,

– operator inserts (selects or enters) working frequency, or enters position (forMF/HF only) information in the message part of the sequence if appropriate,

– operator enters telephone number required (semi-automatic/automaticconnections only),

– automatically selected “end of sequence” signal RQ.

304 Maritime Manual

0541-03

2.2.1/2.2.2

1

2.1.13.1

2.2.3

2.2.4

2.1.13.1

2

2.2.4

2.2.5/2.2.9

2.1.13.4

2.2.6

2.2.6

2.2.8 2.2.8

2.2.7

2.2.5

SHIP


sequence

SeeFig. 1

Selectcalling

frequency

Monitorthe callingfrequency

Busy? Yes

Yes

NoIs

this a callingsequence?

See Fig. 1

Transmit theacknowledgement

sequence

Transmitthe callingsequence

Checkreceivingchannel

Isacknowledgement

received?Yes

Checktransmission

interval

Isinterval long

enough?No

Yes

Isanother attempt

required?Yes

No

No YesWith“unable tocomply”?


Record andindicatemessagereceived

Compose andverify an

acknowledgementsequence

Selectacknowledgement

frequency

Delay ifnecessary(manual

connections)

Transmit the acknowledgement

sequence

Contact shipstation on


END END

Contact coaststation on


Yes

Yes

No

No

Is alternativefrequencyproposed?

Is alternativefrequency

acceptable?

Ship transmit callindicating “unable

to comply”

FIGURE 3Flow chart of operational procedures for calling in the ship-to-shore direction

No

No


0541-04

t1

t5

t3

t1

t1

t5

t3

t1

TX RX RX TX f1 f1

Contact onworking

frequencies

Contact onworking

frequencies

a) Able to comply immediately

b) Queue exists on working frequency

FIGURE 4Examples of timing diagrams for calling in ship-to-shore direction

Coast station

Shipstation

Workingfrequencies

: transmission time of a DSC sequence: transition time from calling to working frequency including, if necessary, the time for working channel clearing (queue waiting time): time for coast station to prepare acknowledgement (see § 2.2.6): format specifier: called station address

t1t3

t5FA

: calling station self-identification: category: first telecommand signal, (104) indicates unable to comply: second telecommand signal, (103) indicates queue: working frequencies: end of sequence signals

suffix (c) or (s) indicates coast stationor ship station respectively

I

CT1T2f1, f1'RQ, BQ

2.2.2 The ship verifies the calling sequence.

2.2.3 The ship selects the single most appropriate calling frequency preferably usingthe coast station’s nationally assigned calling channels, for which purpose it shall senda single calling sequence on the selected frequency.

2.2.4 The ship initiates the transmission of the sequence on the frequency selectedafter checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress on that frequency.

306 Maritime Manual

0541-05

(1)

(2)

(3)(4)(5)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(2)

(5)


or SHIP

Calling Calling/acknowledgement

SelectacknowledgementBQ as EOS signal

Unableto comply?

Yes

No

NoAlternativefrequency proposal?

Yes

Enter frequencyproposal

Select 1st telecommand“unable to comply” (104)

and 2nd telecommand as appropriate

Selecttelecommandinformation

Selectcategory

Enteraddress

Select formatspecifier

2.1.6 (Coast)2.2.1 (Ship)

Withfrequency?

No

Yes

Select frequencyof working

channel

No Semi-automatic/automatic

ship-to-shoreconnection

Yes

Enter telephonenumber

END

Queue? No

Yes

Entertelecommands104 and 103

Selecttelecommandinformation

FIGURE 5Composition procedures for calling and acknowledgement sequences

(for calls other than distress and safety)

Normally acknowledgement RQ may automatically be selected as an EOS signal of a callingsequence to an individual station.The format specifier and the category are automatically transferred from the receivedcall.The self-ID in the received sequence is automatically transferred into theaddress part of acknowledgement sequence by selecting acknowledgement BQ.The frequency information is automatically transferred from the received call.This procedure is only for coast stations.When able to comply, and no queue exists, then the telecommand information isautomatically transferred from the received call.

“Routine” or“ship business

priority”

Select EOSsignal(1)

Acknowledgement 2.1.13 (Ship)2.2.6 (Coast)


2.2.5 If a called station does not reply, the call sequence from the ship station shouldnot normally be repeated until after an interval of at least 5 min for manual connections,or 5 s or 25 s in the case of semi-automatic/automatic VHF or MF/HF connectionsrespectively. These repetitions may be made on alternative frequencies if appropriate.Any subsequent repetitions to the same coast station should not be made until at least15 min have elapsed.

2.2.6 The coast station should transmit an acknowledgement sequence (afterchecking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress on the frequency selected),after a delay of at least 5 s but not later than 4½ min for manual connections, or, within3 s for semi-automatic/automatic connections, containing the format specifier, theaddress of the ship, the category, the coast station self-identification and:

– if able to comply immediately on the working frequency suggested, the sametelecommand and frequency information as in the call request;

– if no working frequency was suggested by the ship station then theacknowledgement sequence should include a channel/frequency proposal;

– if not able to comply on the working frequency suggested but able to complyimmediately on an alternative frequency, the same telecommand informationas in the call request but an alternative working frequency;

– if unable to comply immediately the telecommand signal 104 with a secondtelecommand signal giving additional information. For manual connectionsonly, this second telecommand signal may include a queue indication.

The end of sequence signal BQ should also be included.

2.2.7 For manual connections, if a working frequency is proposed in accordancewith § 2.2.6 but this is not acceptable to the ship station, then the ship station shouldimmediately transmit a new call requesting an alternative frequency.

2.2.8 If an acknowledgement is received further transmission of the call sequenceshould not take place. On receipt of an acknowledgement which indicates ability tocomply, the DSC procedures are complete and both coast station and ship stationshould communicate on the working frequencies agreed with no further exchange ofDSC calls.

2.2.9 If the coast station transmits an acknowledgement which is not received at theship station then the ship station should repeat the call in accordance with § 2.2.5.

2.3 Ship station initiates call to ship station

The ship-to-ship procedures should be similar to those given in § 2.2, where thereceiving ship station complies with the procedures given for coast stations, asappropriate, except that, with respect to § 2.2.1, the calling ship should always insertworking frequency information in the message part of the calling sequence.

308 Maritime Manual

Annex 3

Operational procedures for ships for DSC communicationson MF, HF and VHF

Introduction

Procedures for DSC communications on MF and VHF are described in § 1 to 5 below.

The procedures for DSC communications on HF are in general the same as for MF andVHF. Special conditions to be taken into account when making DSC communicationson HF are described in § 6 below.

1 Distress

1.1 Transmission of DSC distress alert

A distress alert should be transmitted if, in the opinion of the Master, the ship or aperson is in distress and requires immediate assistance.

A DSC distress alert should as far as possible include the ship’s last known position andthe time (in UTC) when it was valid. The position and the time may be includedautomatically by the ship’s navigational equipment or may be inserted manually.

The DSC distress alert is transmitted as follows:– tune the transmitter to the DSC distress channel (2187.5 kHz on MF,

channel 70 on VHF (see Note 1)). NOTE 1 – Some maritime MF radiotelephony transmitters shall be tuned to a

frequency 1 700 Hz lower than 2187.5 kHz, i.e. 2 185.8 kHz, in order to transmit theDSC distress alert on 2 187.5 kHz;

– if time permits, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard– the nature of distress,– the ship’s last known position (latitude and longitude),– the time (in UTC) the position was valid,– type of subsequent distress communication (telephony),

in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions;– transmit the DSC distress alert;– prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning the transmitter and the

radiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic channel in the same band, i.e.2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF, while waiting for the DSC distressacknowledgement.


1.2 Actions on receipt of a distress alert

Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should normally notacknowledge the distress alert by DSC since acknowledgement of a DSC distress alertby use of DSC is normally made by coast stations only (see Annex 1 § 3.3.4 andAnnex 3 § 6.1.4).

If a ship station continues to receive a DSC distress alert on an MF or VHF channel, aDSC acknowledgement should be transmitted to terminate the call only after consultingwith a Rescue Coordination Centre or a Coast Station and being directed to do so.

Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should also defer theacknowledgement of the distress alert by radiotelephony for a short interval, if the shipis within an area covered by one or more coast stations, in order to give the coast stationtime to acknowledge the DSC distress alert first.

Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship shall:– watch for the reception of a distress acknowledgement on the distress channel

(2 187.5 kHz on MF and channel 70 on VHF);– prepare for receiving the subsequent distress communication by tuning the

radiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic frequency in the same band inwhich the DSC distress alert was received, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16on VHF;

– acknowledge the receipt of the distress alert by transmitting the following byradiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency in the same band in which theDSC distress alert was received, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF:– “MAYDAY”,– the 9-digit identity of the ship in distress, repeated 3 times,– “this is”,– the 9-digit identity or the call sign or other identification of own ship,

repeated 3 times,– “RECEIVED MAYDAY”.

1.3 Distress traffic

On receipt of a DSC distress acknowledgement the ship in distress should commencethe distress traffic by radiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency (2182 kHz onMF, channel 16 on VHF) as follows:– “MAYDAY”,– “this is”,– the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of the ship,

310 Maritime Manual

– the ship’s position in latitude and longitude or other reference to a knowngeographical location,

– the nature of distress and assistance wanted,

– any other information which might facilitate the rescue.

1.4 Transmission of a DSC distress relay call

In no case is a ship permitted to transmit an all ships DSC distress relay call on receiptof a DSC distress alert on either VHF or MF channels. If no aural watch is present onthe relative channel (2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF), the coast station should becontacted by sending an individual DSC distress relay call.

1.4.1 Transmission of a DSC distress relay call on behalf of someone else

A ship knowing that another ship is in distress shall transmit a DSC distress relay callif:

– the ship in distress is not itself able to transmit the distress alert,

– the Master of the ship considers that further help is necessary.

The DSC distress relay call is transmitted as follows:

– tune the transmitter to the DSC distress channel (2187.5 kHz on MF,channel 70 on VHF),

– select the distress relay call format on the DSC equipment,

– key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard:

– All Ships Call (VHF). Geographic Area Call (MF/HF) or the 9-digitidentity of the appropriate coast station,

– the 9-digit identity of the ship in distress, if known,

– the nature of distress,

– the latest position of the ship in distress, if known,

– the time (in UTC) the position was valid (if known),

– type of subsequent distress communication (telephony);

– transmit the DSC distress relay call;

– prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning the transmitter and theradiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic channel in the same band, i.e.2 182 kHz on MF and channel 16 on VHF, while waiting for the DSC distressacknowledgement.


1.5 Acknowledgement of a DSC distress relay call received from a coaststation

Coast stations, after having received and acknowledged a DSC distress alert, may ifnecessary, retransmit the information received as a DSC distress relay call, addressed toall ships (VHF only), all ships in a specific geographical area (MF/HF only), or aspecific ship.

Ships receiving a distress relay call transmitted by a coast station shall not use DSC toacknowledge the call, but should acknowledge the receipt of the call by radiotelephonyon the distress traffic channel in the same band in which the relay call was received, i.e.2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF.

Acknowledge the receipt of the distress relay call by transmitting the following byradiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency in the same band in which the DSCdistress relay call was received:

– “MAYDAY” RELAY,

– the 9-digit identity or the call sign or other identification of the calling coaststation,

– “this is”,

– the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of own ship,

– “RECEIVED MAYDAY RELAY”.

1.6 Acknowledgement of a DSC distress relay call received from another ship

Ships receiving a distress relay call from another ship shall follow the same procedureas for acknowledgement of a distress alert, i.e. the procedure given in § 1.2 above.

1.7 Cancellation of an inadvertent distress alert

A station transmitting an inadvertent distress alert shall cancel the distress alert usingthe following procedure:

1.7.1 Immediately cancel the distress alert aurally over the telephony distress trafficchannel associated with each DSC channel on which the “distress alert” wastransmitted.

1.7.2 Monitor the telephony distress traffic channel associated with the DSC channelon which the distress was transmitted, and respond to any communications concerningthat distress alert as appropriate.

312 Maritime Manual

2 Urgency

2.1 Transmission of urgency messages

Transmission of urgency messages shall be carried out in two steps:– announcement of the urgency message,– transmission of the urgency message.

The announcement is carried out by transmission of a DSC urgency call on the DSCdistress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF).

The urgency message is transmitted on the distress traffic channel (2182 kHz on MF,channel 16 on VHF).

The DSC urgency call may be addressed to all stations at VHF, or a geographic area atMF/HF, or to a specific station. The frequency on which the urgency message will betransmitted shall be included in the DSC urgency call.

The transmission of an urgency message is thus carried out as follows:

Announcement:– tune the transmitter to the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF,

channel 70 on VHF);– select the appropriate calling format on the DSC equipment (all ships (VHF

only), geographical area (MF/HF only) or individual);– key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard:

– specific area or 9-digit identity of the specific station, if appropriate,– the category of the call (urgency),– the frequency or channel on which the urgency message will be

transmitted,– the type of communication in which the urgency message will be given

(radiotelephony),in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions;

– transmit the DSC urgency call.

Transmission of the urgency message:– tune the transmitter to the frequency or channel indicated in the DSC urgency

call;– transmit the urgency message as follows:

– “PAN PAN”, repeated 3 times,– “ALL STATIONS” or called station, repeated 3 times,


– “this is”,– the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of own ship,– the text of the urgency message.

2.2 Reception of an urgency message

Ships receiving a DSC urgency call announcing an urgency message addressed to morethan one station shall NOT acknowledge the receipt of the DSC call, but should tunethe radiotelephony receiver to the frequency indicated in the call and listen to theurgency message.

3 Safety

3.1 Transmission of safety messages

Transmission of safety messages shall be carried out in two steps:– announcement of the safety message,– transmission of the safety message.

The announcement is carried out by transmission of a DSC safety call on the DSCdistress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF).

The safety message is normally transmitted on the distress and safety traffic channel inthe same band in which the DSC call was sent, i.e. 2182 kHz on MF, channel 16on VHF.

The DSC safety call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), ships in a specificgeographical area (MF/HF only), or to a specific station.

The frequency on which the safety message will be transmitted shall be included in theDSC call.

The transmission of a safety message is thus carried out as follows:

Announcement:– tune the transmitter to the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF,

channel 70 on VHF);– select the appropriate calling format on the DSC equipment (all ships (VHF

only), geographical area (MF/HF only), or individual);– key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard:

– specific area or 9-digit identity of specific station, if appropriate,– the category of the call (safety),

314 Maritime Manual

– the frequency or channel on which the safety message will be transmitted,

– the type of communication in which the safety message will be given(radiotelephony),

in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions;

– transmit the DSC safety call.

Transmission of the safety message:– tune the transmitter to the frequency or channel indicated in the DSC safety

call;– transmit the safety message as follows:

– “SECURITE”, repeated 3 times,

– “ALL STATIONS” or called station, repeated 3 times,– “this is”,

– the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of own ship,

– the text of the safety message.

3.2 Reception of a safety message

Ships receiving a DSC safety call announcing a safety message addressed to more thanone station shall NOT acknowledge the receipt of the DSC safety call, but should tunethe radiotelephony receiver to the frequency indicated in the call and listen to the safetymessage.

4 Public correspondence

4.1 DSC channels for public correspondence

4.1.1 VHF

The VHF DSC channel 70 is used for DSC for distress and safety purposes as well asfor DSC for public correspondence.

4.1.2 MF

International and national DSC channels separate from the DSC distress and safetycalling channel 2 187.5 kHz are used for digital selective-calling on MF for publiccorrespondence.

Ships calling a coast station by DSC on MF for public correspondence shouldpreferably use the coast station’s national DSC channel.


The international DSC channel for public correspondence may as a general rule be usedbetween ships and coast stations of different nationality. The ships transmittingfrequency is 2 189.5 kHz, and the receiving frequency is 2 177 kHz.

The frequency 2177 kHz is also used for DSC between ships for generalcommunication.

4.2 Transmission of a DSC call for public correspondence to a coast station oranother ship

A DSC call for public correspondence to a coast station or another ship is transmitted asfollows:

– tune the transmitter to the relevant DSC channel;

– select the format for calling a specific station on the DSC equipment;

– key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard:

– the 9-digit identity of the station to be called,

– the category of the call (routine),

– the type of the subsequent communication (normally radiotelephony),

– a proposed working channel if calling another ship. A proposal for aworking channel should NOT be included in calls to a coast station; thecoast station will in its DSC acknowledgement indicate a vacant workingchannel,

in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions;

– transmit the DSC call.

4.3 Repeating a call

A DSC call for public correspondence may be repeated on the same or another DSCchannel, if no acknowledgement is received within 5 min.

Further call attempts should be delayed at least 15 min, if acknowledgement is still notreceived.

4.4 Acknowledgement of a received call and preparation for reception of thetraffic

On receipt of a DSC call from a coast station or another ship, a DSC acknowledgementis transmitted as follows:

– tune the transmitter to the transmit frequency of the DSC channel on which thecall was received,

316 Maritime Manual

– select the acknowledgement format on the DSC equipment,

– transmit an acknowledgement indicating whether the ship is able tocommunicate as proposed in the call (type of communication and workingfrequency),

– if able to communicate as indicated, tune the transmitter and theradiotelephony receiver to the indicated working channel and prepare toreceive the traffic.

4.5 Reception of acknowledgement and further actions

When receiving an acknowledgement indicating that the called station is able to receivethe traffic, prepare to transmit the traffic as follows:

– tune the transmitter and receiver to the indicated working channel;

– commence the communication on the working channel by:

– the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of the called station,

– “this is”,

– the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of own ship.

It will normally rest with the ship to call again a little later in case theacknowledgement from the coast station indicates that the coast station is not able toreceive the traffic immediately.

In case the ship, in response to a call to another ship, receives an acknowledgementindicating that the other ship is not able to receive the traffic immediately, it willnormally rest with the called ship to transmit a call to the calling ship when ready toreceive the traffic.

5 Testing the equipment used for distress and safety

Testing on the exclusive DSC distress and safety calling frequency 2187.5 kHz shouldbe avoided as far as possible by using other methods.

Test calls should be transmitted by the ship station and acknowledged by the calledstation. Normally there would be no further communication between the two stationsinvolved.

A VHF and MF test call to a station is transmitted as follows:

– tune the transmitter to the DSC distress and safety calling frequency (i.e.channel 70 and 2 187.5 kHz),


– key in or select the format for the test call on the DSC equipment inaccordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions,

– key in the 9-digit identity of the station to be called,– transmit the DSC call after checking as far as possible that no calls are in

progress on the frequency,– wait for acknowledgement.

6 Special conditions and procedures for DSC communication on HFGeneral

The procedures for DSC communication on HF are – with some additions described in§ 6.1 to 6.3 below – equal to the corresponding procedures for DSC communications onMF/VHF.

Due regard to the special conditions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 should be given whenmaking DSC communications on HF.

6.1 Distress

6.1.1 Transmission of DSC distress alert

DSC distress alert should be sent to coast stations – e.g. in A3 and A4 sea areas on HF – and on MF and/or VHF to other ships in the vicinity.

The DSC distress alert should as far as possible include the ship’s last known positionand the time (in UTC) it was valid. If the position and time is not inserted automaticallyfrom the ship’s navigational equipment, it should be inserted manually.

Ship-to-shore distress alert

Choice of HF band

Propagation characteristics of HF radio waves for the actual season and time of the dayshould be taken into account when choosing HF bands for transmission of DSC distressalert.

As a general rule the DSC distress channel in the 8 MHz maritime band (8414.5 kHz)may in many cases be an appropriate first choice.

Transmission of the DSC distress alert in more than one HF band will normallyincrease the probability of successful reception of the alert by coast stations.

DSC distress alert may be sent on a number of HF bands in two different ways:a) either by transmitting the DSC distress alert on one HF band, and waiting a

few minutes for receiving acknowledgement by a coast station;

318 Maritime Manual

if no acknowledgement is received within 3 min, the process is repeated bytransmitting the DSC distress alert on another appropriate HF band etc.;

b) or by transmitting the DSC distress alert at a number of HF bands with no, oronly very short, pauses between the calls, without waiting foracknowledgement between the calls.

It is recommended to follow procedure a) in all cases, where time permits to do so; thiswill make it easier to choose the appropriate HF band for commencement of thesubsequent communication with the coast station on the corresponding distress trafficchannel.

Transmitting the DSC distress alert (see Note 1):

– tune the transmitter to the chosen HF DSC distress channel (4207.5, 6 312,8 414.5, 12 577, 16804.5 kHz) (see Note 2);

– follow the instructions for keying in or selection of relevant information on theDSC equipment keyboard as described in § 1.1;

– transmit the DSC distress alert.

NOTE 1 – Ship-to-ship distress alert should normally be made on MF and/or VHF, using theprocedures for transmission of DSC distress alert on MF/VHF described in § 1.1.

NOTE 2 – Some maritime HF transmitters shall be tuned to a frequency 1 700 Hz lower than theDSC frequencies given above in order to transmit the DSC distress alert on the correctfrequency.

In special cases, for example in tropical zones, transmission of DSC distress alert on HFmay, in addition to ship-to-shore alerting, also be useful for ship-to-ship alerting.

6.1.2 Preparation for the subsequent distress traffic

After having transmitted the DSC distress alert on appropriate DSC distress channels(HF, MF and/or VHF), prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning theradiocommunication set(s) (HF, MF and/or VHF as appropriate) to the correspondingdistress traffic channel(s).

Where multiple frequency call attempts are transmitted the corresponding distresstraffic frequency should be 8 291 kHz.

If method b) described in § 6.1.1 has been used for transmission of DSC distress alerton a number of HF bands:

– take into account in which HF band(s) acknowledgement has beensuccessfully received from a coast station;


– if acknowledgements have been received on more than one HF band,commence the transmission of distress traffic on one of these bands, but if noresponse is received from a coast station then the other bands should be usedin turn.

The distress traffic frequencies are (see RR Appendix 15, Table 15-1):

HF (kHz):

Telephony 4125 6 215 8291 12 290 16 420 Telex 4177.5 6 268 8376.5 12 520 16 695

MF (kHz):

Telephony 2182 Telex 2174.5

VHF: Channel 16 (156.800 MHz).

6.1.3 Distress traffic

The procedures described in § 1.3 are used when the distress traffic on MF/HF iscarried out by radiotelephony.

The following procedures shall be used in cases where the distress traffic on MF/HF iscarried out by radiotelex:

– The forward error correcting (FEC) mode shall be used;

– all messages shall be preceded by:

– at least one carriage return,

– line feed,

– one letter shift,


– The ship in distress should commence the distress telex traffic on theappropriate distress telex traffic channel as follows:

– carriage return, line feed, letter shift,

– the distress signal “MAYDAY”,

– “this is”,

– the 9-digit identity and call sign or other identification of the ship,

320 Maritime Manual

– the ship’s position if not included in the DSC distress alert,

– the nature of distress,

– any other information which might facilitate the rescue.

6.1.4 Actions on reception of a DSC distress alert on HF from another ship

Ships receiving a DSC distress alert on HF from another ship shall not acknowledge thealert, but should:

– watch for reception of a DSC distress acknowledgement from a coast station;

– while waiting for reception of a DSC distress acknowledgement from a coaststation:

prepare for reception of the subsequent distress communication by tuning theHF radiocommunication set (transmitter and receiver) to the relevant distresstraffic channel in the same HF band in which the DSC distress alert wasreceived, observing the following conditions:

– if radiotelephony mode was indicated in the DSC distress alert, the HFradiocommunication set should be tuned to the radiotelephony distresstraffic channel in the HF band concerned;

– if telex mode was indicated in the DSC distress alert, the HFradiocommunication set should be tuned to the radiotelex distress trafficchannel in the HF band concerned. Ships able to do so should additionallywatch the corresponding radiotelephony distress channel;

– if the DSC distress alert was received on more than one HF band, theradiocommunication set should be tuned to the relevant distress trafficchannel in the HF band considered to be the best one in the actual case. Ifthe DSC distress alert was received successfully on the 8 MHz band, thisband may in many cases be an appropriate first choice;

– if no distress traffic is received on the HF channel within 1 to 2 min, tunethe HF radiocommunication set to the relevant distress traffic channel inanother HF band deemed appropriate in the actual case;

– if no DSC distress acknowledgement is received from a coast stationwithin 5 min, and no distress communication is observed going onbetween a coast station and the ship in distress:

– inform a Rescue Coordination Centre (RCC) via appropriateradiocommunications means,

transmit a DSC distress relay call.


6.1.5 Transmission of DSC distress relay call

In case it is considered appropriate to transmit a DSC distress relay call:

distress relay calls on HF should be initiated manually;

– tune the transmitter(s) to the relevant DSC distress channel, following theprocedures described in § 6.1.1 above (except the call is sent manually as asingle call on a single frequency);

– follow the instructions for keying in or selection of call format and relevantinformation on the DSC equipment keyboard as described in § 1.4;

– transmit the DSC distress relay call.

6.1.6 Acknowledgement of a HF DSC distress relay call received from a coaststation

Ships receiving a DSC distress relay call from a coast station on HF, addressed to allships within a specified area, should NOT acknowledge the receipt of the relay alert byDSC, but by radiotelephony on the telephony distress traffic channel in the sameband(s) in which the DSC distress relay call was received.

6.2 Urgency

Transmission of urgency messages on HF should normally be addressed:

– either to all ships within a specified geographical area,

– or to a specific coast station.

Announcement of the urgency message is carried out by transmission of a DSC callwith category urgency on the appropriate DSC distress channel.

The transmission of the urgency message itself on HF is carried out by radiotelephonyor radiotelex on the appropriate distress traffic channel in the same band in which theDSC announcement was transmitted.

6.2.1 Transmission of DSC announcement of an urgency message on HF

– choose the HF band considered to be the most appropriate, taking into accountpropagation characteristics for HF radio waves at the actual season and time ofthe day; the 8 MHz band may in many cases be an appropriate first choice;

– tune the HF transmitter to the DSC distress channel in the chosen HF band;

– key in or select call format for either geographical area call or individual callon the DSC equipment, as appropriate;

– in case of area call, key in specification of the relevant geographical area;

322 Maritime Manual

– follow the instructions for keying in or selection of relevant information on theDSC equipment keyboard as described in § 2.1, including type ofcommunication in which the urgency message will be transmitted(radiotelephony or radiotelex);

– transmit the DSC call; and– if the DSC call is addressed to a specific coast station, wait for DSC

acknowledgement from the coast station. If acknowledgement is not receivedwithin a few minutes, repeat the DSC call on another HF frequency deemedappropriate.

6.2.2 Transmission of the urgency message and subsequent action– tune the HF transmitter to the distress traffic channel (telephony or telex)

indicated in the DSC announcement;– if the urgency message is to be transmitted using radiotelephony, follow the

procedure described in § 2.1;– if the urgency message is to be transmitted by radiotelex, the following

procedure shall be used:– use the forward error correcting (FEC) mode unless the message is

addressed to a single station whose radiotelex identity number is known;– commence the telex message by:

– at least one carriage return, line feed, one letter shift,– the urgency signal “PAN PAN”,– “this is”,– the 9-digit identity of the ship and the call sign or other identification

of the ship,– the text of the urgency message.

Announcement and transmission of urgency messages addressed to all HF equippedships within a specified area may be repeated on a number of HF bands as deemedappropriate in the actual situation.

6.3 Safety

The procedures for transmission of DSC safety announcement and for transmission ofthe safety message are the same as for urgency messages, described in § 6.2, exceptthat:– in the DSC announcement, the category SAFETY shall be used,– in the safety message, the safety signal “SECURITE” shall be used instead of

the urgency signal “PAN PAN”.


Annex 4

Operational procedures for coast stations for DSCcommunications on MF, HF and VHF

Introduction

Procedures for DSC communications on MF and VHF are described in § 1 to 5 below.

The procedures for DSC communications on HF are in general the same as for MF andVHF. Special conditions to be taken into account when making DSC communicationson HF are described in § 6 below.

1 Distress (see Note 1)

1.1 Reception of a DSC distress alert

The transmission of a distress alert indicates that a mobile unit (a ship, aircraft or othervehicle) or a person is in distress and requires immediate assistance. The distress alert isa digital selective call using a distress call format.

Coast stations in receipt of a distress alert shall ensure that it is routed as soon aspossible to an RCC. The receipt of a distress alert is to be acknowledged as soon aspossible by the appropriate coast station.NOTE 1 – These procedures assume that the RCC is sited remotely from the DSC coast station;where this is not the case, appropriate amendments should be made locally.

1.2 Acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert

The coast station shall transmit the acknowledgement on the distress calling frequencyon which the call was received and should address it to all ships. The acknowledgementshall include the identification of the ship whose distress alert is being acknowledged.

The acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert is transmitted as follows:

– use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency on which the distress alertwas received;

– in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in orselect on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1):

– distress alert acknowledgement,

– 9-digit identity of the ship in distress,

324 Maritime Manual

– nature of distress,

– distress coordinates,

– the time (in UTC) when the position was valid.

NOTE 1 – Some or all of this information might be included automatically bythe equipment;

– transmit the acknowledgement;

– prepare to handle the subsequent distress traffic by setting watch onradiotelephony and, if the “mode of subsequent communication” signal in thereceived distress alert indicates teleprinter, also on NBDP, if the coast stationis fitted with NBDP. In both cases, the radiotelephone and NBDP frequenciesshould be those associated with the frequency on which the distress alert wasreceived (on MF 2 182 kHz for radiotelephony and 2 174.5 kHz for NBDP, onVHF 156.8 MHz/channel 16 for radiotelephony; there is no frequency forNBDP on VHF).

1.3 Transmission of a DSC distress relay call

Coast stations shall initiate and transmit a distress relay call in any of the followingcases:

– when the distress of the mobile unit has been notified to the coast station byother means and a broadcast alert to shipping is required by the RCC; and

– when the person responsible for the coast station considers that further help isnecessary (close cooperation with the appropriate RCC is recommended undersuch conditions).

In the cases mentioned above, the coast station shall transmit a shore-to-ship distressrelay call addressed, as appropriate, to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area(MF/HF only) or to a specific ship.

The distress relay call shall contain the identification of the mobile unit in distress, itsposition and other information which might facilitate rescue.

The distress relay call is transmitted as follows:

– use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress alerts(2187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz/channel 70 on VHF);

– in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in orselect on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex):

– distress relay call,

– the format specifier (all ships (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HFonly), or individual station),


– if appropriate, the address of the ship, or geographical area,

– 9-digit identity of the ship in distress, if known,

– nature of distress,

– distress coordinates,

– the time (in UTC) when the position was valid;

– transmit the distress relay call;

– prepare for the reception of the acknowledgements by ship stations and forhandling the subsequent distress traffic by switching over to the distress trafficchannel in the same band, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, 156.8 MHz/channel 16on VHF.

1.4 Reception of a distress relay call

If the distress relay call is received from a ship station, coast stations on receipt of thedistress relay call shall ensure that the call is routed as soon as possible to an RCC. Thereceipt of the distress relay call is to be acknowledged as soon as possible by theappropriate coast station using a DSC distress relay acknowledgement addressed to theship station. If the distress relay call is received from a coast station, other coast stationswill normally not have to take further action.

2 Urgency

2.1 Transmission of a DSC announcement

The announcement of the urgency message shall be made on one or more of the distressand safety calling frequencies using DSC and the urgency call format.

The DSC urgency call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area(MF/HF only), or to a specific ship. The frequency on which the urgency message willbe transmitted after the announcement shall be included in the DSC urgency call.

The DSC urgency call is transmitted as follows:

– use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress calls(2187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz /channel 70 on VHF);


– the format specifier (all ships call (VHF), geographical area (MF/HFonly), or individual station),


326 Maritime Manual

– the category of the call (urgency),

– the frequency or channel on which the urgency message will betransmitted,

– the type of communication in which the urgency message will betransmitted (radiotelephony);

– transmit the DSC urgency call.

After the DSC announcement, the urgency message will be transmitted on thefrequency indicated in the DSC call.

3 Safety

3.1 Transmission of a DSC announcement

The announcement of the safety message shall be made on one or more of the distressand safety calling frequencies using DSC and the safety call format.

The DSC safety call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area(MF/HF only), or to a specific ship. The frequency on which the safety message will betransmitted after the announcement shall be included in the DSC safety call.

The DSC safety call is transmitted as follows:

– use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress alerts(2187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz/channel 70 on VHF);


– the format specifier (all ships call (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HFonly), or individual station),


– the category of the call (safety),

– the frequency or channel on which the safety message will be transmitted,

– the type of communication in which the safety message will betransmitted (radiotelephony);

– transmit the DSC safety call.

After the DSC announcement, the safety message will be transmitted on the frequencyindicated in the DSC call.


4 Public correspondence

4.1 DSC frequencies/channels for public correspondence

4.1.1 VHF

The frequency 156.525 MHz/channel 70 is used for DSC for distress and safetypurposes. It may also be used for calling purposes other than distress and safety, e.g.public correspondence.

4.1.2 MF

For public correspondence national and international frequencies are used which aredifferent from the frequencies used for distress and safety purposes.

When calling ship stations by DSC, coast stations should use for the call, in the order ofpreference:– a national DSC channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch;– the international DSC calling channel, with the coast station transmitting on

2 177 kHz and receiving on 2 189.5 kHz. In order to reduce interference on thischannel, it may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships ofanother nationality, or in cases where it is not known on which DSCfrequencies the ship station is maintaining watch.

4.2 Transmission of a DSC call to a ship

The DSC call is transmitted as follows:– use a transmitter which is tuned to the appropriate calling frequency;– in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or

select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex):– the 9-digit identity of the ship to be called,– the category of the call routine,– the type of subsequent communication (radiotelephony),– working frequency information;

– after checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress, transmit theDSC call.

4.3 Repeating a call

Coast stations may transmit the call twice on the same calling frequency with aninterval of at least 45 s between the two calls, provided that they receive noacknowledgement within that interval.

328 Maritime Manual

If the station called does not acknowledge the call after the second transmission, the callmay be transmitted again on the same frequency after a period of at least 30 min or onanother calling frequency after a period of at least 5 min.

4.4 Preparation for exchange of traffic

On receipt of a DSC acknowledgement with the indication that the called ship stationcan use the proposed working frequency, the coast station transfers to the workingfrequency or channel and prepares to receive the traffic.

4.5 Acknowledgement of a received DSC call

Acknowledgements shall normally be transmitted on the frequency paired with thefrequency of the received call. If the same call is received on several calling channels,the most appropriate channel shall be chosen for transmission of the acknowledgement.

The acknowledgement of a DSC call is transmitted as follows:

– use a transmitter which is tuned to the appropriate frequency;


– the format specifier (individual station),

– 9-digit identity of the calling ship,

– the category of the call routine,

– if able to comply immediately on the working frequency suggested by theship station, the same frequency information as in the received call,

– if no working frequency was suggested by the calling ship station, thenthe acknowledgement should include a channel/frequency proposal,

– if not able to comply on the working frequency suggested, but able tocomply immediately on an alternative frequency, the alternative workingfrequency,

– if unable to comply immediately the appropriate information in thatregard;

– transmit the acknowledgement (after checking as far as possible that there areno calls in progress on the frequency selected) after a delay of at least5 seconds, but not later than 4 ½ minutes.

After having transmitted the acknowledgement, the coast station transfers to theworking frequency or channel and prepares to receive the traffic.


5 Testing the equipment used for distress and safety calls

Perform VHF, MF and HF test calls in accordance with RecommendationITU-R M.493, Table 4.7.

Acknowledgement of a DSC test call

The coast station should acknowledge test calls.

6 Special conditions and procedures for DSC communication on HF

General

The procedures for DSC communication on HF are – with some additions described in§ 6.1 to 6.3 below – equal to the corresponding procedures for DSC communications onMF/VHF.

Due regard to the special conditions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 should be given whenmaking DSC communications on HF.

6.1 Distress

6.1.1 Reception and acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert on HF

Ships in distress may in some cases transmit the DSC distress alert on a number of HFbands with only short intervals between the individual calls.

The coast station shall transmit DSC acknowledgement on all HF DSC distresschannels on which the DSC distress alert was received in order to ensure as far aspossible that the acknowledgement is received by the ship in distress and by all shipswhich received the DSC distress alert.

6.1.2 Distress traffic

The distress traffic should, as a general rule, be initiated on the appropriate distresstraffic channel (radiotelephony or NBDP) in the same band in which the DSC distressalert was received.

For distress traffic by NBDP the following rules apply:

– all messages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, line feed, oneletter shift and the distress signal MAYDAY;

– FEC broadcast mode should be used.

330 Maritime Manual

6.1.3 Transmission of DSC distress relay call on HF

HF propagation characteristics should be taken into account when choosing HF band(s)for transmission of DSC distress relay call.

IMO Convention ships equipped with HF DSC for distress and safety purposes arerequired to keep continuous automatic DSC watch on the DSC distress channel in the8 MHz band and on at least one of the other HF DSC distress channels.

In order to avoid creating on board ships uncertainty regarding on which band thesubsequent establishment of contact and distress traffic should be initiated, the HF DSCdistress relay call should be transmitted on one HF band at a time and the subsequentcommunication with responding ships be established before eventually repeating theDSC distress relay call on another HF band.

6.2 Urgency

6.2.1 Transmission of urgency announcement and message on HF

For urgency messages by NBDP the following apply:

– the urgency message shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, linefeed, one letter shift, the urgency signal PAN PAN and the identification of thecoast station;

– FEC broadcast mode should normally be used.

ARQ mode should be used only when considered advantageous to do so in theactual situation and provided that the radiotelex number of the ship is known.

6.3 Safety

6.3.1 Transmission of safety announcements and messages on HF

For safety messages by NBDP the following apply:

– the safety message shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, line feed,one letter shift, the safety signal SECURITE and the identification of the coaststation;

– FEC broadcast mode should normally be used.

ARQ mode should be used only when considered advantageous to do so in theactual situation and provided that the radiotelex number of the ship is known.


Annex 5

Frequencies used for DSC

1 The frequencies used for distress, urgency, and safety purposes using DSC areas follows (RR Appendix 15):

2 187.5 kHz

4 207.5 kHz

6 312 kHz

8 414.5 kHz

12 577 kHz

16 804.5 kHz

156.525 MHz (Note 1)

NOTE 1 – The frequency 156.525 MHz may also be used for DSC purposes other than distress,urgency, and safety.

2 The frequencies assignable on an international basis to ship and coast stationsfor DSC, for purposes other than distress, urgency, and safety, are as follows (seeNote 2):

2.1 Ship stations (see Note 2)458.5 kHz

2 177 (Note 3) 2 189.5 kHz

4 208 4 208.5 4 209 kHz

6 312.5 6 313 6 313.5 kHz

8 415 8 415.5 8 416 kHz

12 577.5 12 578 12 578.5 kHz

16 805 16 805.5 16 806 kHz

18 898.5 18 899 18 899.5 kHz

22 374.5 22 375 22 375.5 kHz

25 208.5 25 209 25 209.5 kHz

156.525 MHz

332 Maritime Manual

2.2 Coast stations (see Note 2)

455.5 kHz

2 177 kHz

4 219.5 4 220 4 220.5 kHz

6 331 6 331.5 6 332 kHz

8 436.5 8 437 8 437.5 kHz

12 657 12 657.5 12 658 kHz

16 903 16 903.5 16 904 kHz

19 703.5 19 704 19 704.5 kHz

22 444 22 444.5 22 445 kHz

26 121 26 121.5 26 122 kHz

156.525 MHz

NOTE 2 – The following (kHz) paired frequencies (for ship/coast stations) 4208/4 219.5,6 312.5/6331, 8 415/8 436.5, 12 577.5/12657, 16 805/16 903, 18 898.5/19 703.5, 22 374.5/22444and 25 208.5/26121 are the first choice international frequencies for DSC (See RR Appendix 17,Part A, footnote j) and l)).

NOTE 3 – The frequency 2177 kHz is available to ship stations for intership calling only.

3 In addition to the frequencies listed in § 2 above, appropriate workingfrequencies in the following bands may be used for DSC (see RR Chapter II, Article 5):

415-526.5 kHz (Regions 1 and 3)

415-525 kHz (Region 2)

1 606.5-3 400 kHz (Regions 1 and 3)

1 605.5-3 400 kHz (Region 2) (For the band 1 605-1 625 kHz, see RRNo. 5.89)

4 000-27 500 kHz

156-174 MHz

Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171 333

RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1171*

RADIOTELEPHONY PROCEDURES IN THEMARITIME MOBILE SERVICE

(1995)Rec. ITU-R M.1171

ANNEX 1

Section I. Introduction

§ 1. Radiotelephone stations should, as far as possible, be equipped with devices forinstantaneous switching from transmission to reception and vice versa. This equipment isnecessary for all stations participating in communication between ships and subscribers of theland telephone system.

§ 2. (1) Stations equipped for radiotelephony may transmit and receive radiotelegrams bymeans of radiotelephony. Coast stations providing such service and open for publiccorrespondence shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations.

(2) To facilitate radiocommunications the service abbreviations given inRecommendation ITU-R M.1172 may be used.

Section II. Calls by Radiotelephony

§ 3. The provisions of this Section relating to the intervals between calls are not applicableto a station operating under conditions involving distress, urgency or safety.

§ 4. (1) As a general rule, it rests with the ship station to establish communication withthe coast station. For this purpose the ship station may call the coast station only when it comeswithin the service area of the latter, that is to say, that area within which, by using an appropriatefrequency, the ship station can be heard by the coast station.

(2) However, a coast station having traffic for a ship station may call this station if ithas reason to believe that the ship station is keeping watch and is within the service area of thecoast station.


334 Maritime Manual

§ 5. (1) In addition, each coast station shall, so far as practicable, transmit its calls in theform of “traffic lists” consisting of the call signs or other identification in alphabetical order ofall ship stations for which it has traffic on hand. These calls shall be made at specified timesfixed by agreement between the administrations concerned and at intervals of not less than twohours and not more than four hours during the working hours of the coast station.

(2) Coast stations shall transmit their traffic lists on their normal working frequenciesin the appropriate bands. The transmission shall be preceded by a general call to all stations.

(3) The general call to all stations announcing the traffic lists may be sent on acalling frequency in the following form: – “Hello all ships” or CQ (spoken as CHARLIE QUEBEC) not more than three

times;

– the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of languagedifficulties);

– “ . . . Radio” not more than three times;

– “Listen for my traffic list on . . . kHz”.

In no case may this preamble be repeated.

(4) However, in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz when the conditions forestablishing contact are good, the call described in § 5.(3) above may be replaced by:

– “Hello all ships” or CQ (spoken as CHARLIE QUEBEC), once;


– “ . . . Radio”, twice;

– “Listen for my traffic list on channel . . . ”.

In no case may this preamble be repeated.

(5) The provisions of § 5.(3) are obligatory when 2 182 kHz or 156.8 MHz is used.

(6) The hours at which coast stations transmit their traffic lists and the frequenciesand classes of emission which they use for this purpose shall be stated in the List of CoastStations.

(7) Ship stations should as far as possible listen to the traffic lists transmitted by coaststations. On hearing their call sign or other identification in such a list they must reply as soon asthey can do so.

(8) When the traffic cannot be sent immediately, the coast station shall inform eachship station concerned of the probable time at which working can begin, and also, if necessary,the frequency and class of emission which will be used.

§ 6. When a coast station receives calls from several ship stations at practically the sametime, it decides the order in which these stations may transmit their traffic. Its decision shall bebased on the priority (see RR No. S53.1 [No. 4441]) of the radiotelegrams or radiotelephonecalls that the ship stations have on hand and on the need for allowing each calling station to clearthe greatest possible number of communications.


§ 7. (1) When a station called does not reply to a call sent three times at intervals of twominutes, the calling shall cease.

(2) However, when a station called does not reply, the call may be repeated at three-minute intervals.

(3) In areas where reliable VHF communication with a called coast station ispracticable, the calling ship station may repeat the call as soon as it is ascertained that traffic hasbeen terminated at the coast station.

(4) In the case of a communication between a station of the maritime mobile serviceand an aircraft station, calling may be renewed after an interval of five minutes.

(5) Before renewing the call, the calling station shall ascertain that the station calledis not in communication with another station.

(6) If there is no reason to believe that harmful interference will be caused to othercommunications in progress, the provisions of § 7.(4) above are not applicable. In such cases thecall, sent three times at intervals of two minutes, may be repeated after an interval of not lessthan three minutes.

(7) However, before renewing the call, the calling station shall ascertain that furthercalling is unlikely to cause interference to other communications in progress and that the stationcalled is not in communication with another station.

(8) Ship stations shall not radiate a carrier wave between calls.

§ 8. When the name and address of the administration or private operating agencycontrolling a ship station are not given in the appropriate list of stations or are no longer inagreement with the particulars given therein, it is the duty of the ship station to furnish as amatter of regular procedure, to the coast station to which it transmits traffic, all the necessaryinformation in this respect.

§ 9. (1) The coast station may, by means of the abbreviation TR (spoken as TANGOROMEO), ask the ship station to furnish it with the following information:

a) position and, whenever possible, course and speed;

b) next port of call.

(2) The information referred to in § 9.(1) above, preceded by the abbreviation TR,should be furnished by ship stations, whenever this seems appropriate, without prior requestfrom the coast station. The provision of this information is authorized only by the master or theperson responsible for the ship.

336 Maritime Manual

Section III. Method of Calling, Reply to Calls andSignals Preparatory to Traffic when Using Calling

Methods Other than Digital Selective Calling

A. Method of Calling

§ 10. (1) The call consists of:

– the call sign or other identification of the station called, not more than threetimes;


– the call sign or other identification of the calling station, not more than threetimes.

(2) However, in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz when the conditions forestablishing contact are good, the call described in § 10.(1) above may be replaced by:

– the call sign of the station called, once;


– the call sign or other identification of the calling station, twice.

(3) When calling a VHF coast station operating on more than one channel, a shipstation calling on a working channel should include the number of that channel in the call.

(4) When contact is established, the call sign or other identification may thereafter betransmitted once only.

(5) When the coast station is fitted with equipment for selective calling in accordancewith Recommendation ITU-R M.541, and the ship station is fitted with equipment for receivingsuch selective calls, the coast station shall call the ship by transmitting the appropriate codesignals. The ship station shall call the coast station by speech in the manner given in § 10.(1)(see also Annex 2 to Recommendation ITU-R M.257).

§ 11. Calls for internal communications on board ship when in territorial waters shall consistof:

a) From the master station:

– the name of the ship followed by a single letter (ALFA, BRAVO,CHARLIE, etc.) indicating the sub-station not more than three times;


– the name of the ship followed by the word CONTROL;


b) From the sub-station:

– the name of the ship followed by the word CONTROL not more than threetimes;


– the name of the ship followed by a single letter (ALFA, BRAVO,CHARLIE, etc.) indicating the sub-station.

B. Frequency to Be Used for Callingand for Preparatory Signals

B1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz

§ 12. (1) A radiotelephone ship station calling a coast station should use for the call, inorder of preference:

a) a working frequency on which the coast station is keeping watch;

b) the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz;

c) in Regions 1 and 3 and in Greenland, the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz (assignedfrequency 2 192.4 kHz) when a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz is being used fordistress;

d) in Region 2 except for Greenland, the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz as asupplementary calling frequency in those areas of heavy usage of 2 182 kHz.

(2) A radiotelephone ship station calling another ship station should use for the call:

a) the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz;

b) an intership frequency, whenever and wherever traffic density is high and priorarrangements can be made.

(3) Subject to the provisions of § 12.(6), coast stations shall, in accordance with therequirements of their own country, call ship stations of their own nationality either on a workingfrequency or, when calls to individual ships are made, on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz.

(4) However, a ship station which keeps watch simultaneously on the carrierfrequency 2 182 kHz and a working frequency should be called on the working frequency.

(5) As a general rule, coast stations should call radiotelephone ship stations ofanother nationality on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz.

(6) Coast stations may call ship stations equipped to receive selective calls inaccordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.257 and ITU-R M.541.

338 Maritime Manual

B2. Bands Between 4000 kHzand 27 500 kHz

§ 13. (1) A ship station calling a coast station by radiotelephony shall use either one of thecalling frequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.221 [No. 4375] or the working frequencyassociated with that of the coast station, in accordance with RR Appendix S17, Part B Section I,[Appendix 16, Section A].

(2) A coast station calling a ship station by radiotelephony shall use one of the callingfrequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.222 [No. 4376], one of its working frequencies shown inthe List of Coast Stations, or the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz, in accordance withthe provisions of RR Nos. S52.221.2 and S52.221.3 [Nos. 4375.2 and 4375.3].

(3) The preliminary operations for the establishment of radiotelephonecommunications may also be carried out by radiotelegraphy using the procedure appropriate toradiotelegraphy (see Recommendation ITU-R M.1170 § 17).

(4) The provisions of § 13.(1) and § 13.(2) do not apply to communications betweenship stations and coast stations using the simplex frequencies specified in RR Appendix S17,Part B, Section I [Appendix 16, Section B].

B3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

§ 14. (1) In the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, intership and coast station to shipcalling should, as a general rule, be made on 156.8 MHz. However, coast station to ship callingmay be conducted on a working channel or on a two-frequency calling channel which has beenimplemented in accordance with RR No. S52.236 [No. 4391]. Except for distress, urgency orsafety communications, when 156.8 MHz should be used, ship to coast station calling should,whenever possible, be made on a working channel or on a two-frequency calling channel whichhas been implemented in accordance with RR No. S52.236 [No. 4391]. Ships wishing toparticipate in a port operations service or ship movement service should call on a port operationsor ship movement working frequency, indicated in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations.

(2) When 156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency or safety communications, aship station desiring to participate in the port operations service may establish contact on156.6 MHz, or another port operations frequency indicated in heavy type in the List of CoastStations.

B4. Procedure for Calling a StationProviding Pilot Service

§ 15. A radiotelephone ship station calling a station providing pilot service should use forthe call, in order of preference:

a) an appropriate channel in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz;

b) a working frequency in the bands between 1605 kHz and 4 000 kHz;

c) the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, and then only to determine the workingfrequency to be used.


C. Form of Reply to Calls

§ 16. The reply to calls consists of:

– the call sign or other identification of the calling station, not more than threetimes;


– the call sign or other identification of the station called, not more than three times.

D. Frequency for Reply

D1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz

§ 17. (1) When a ship station is called on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz, it should replyon the same carrier frequency unless another frequency is indicated by the calling station.

(2) When a ship station is called by selective calling in accordance withRecommendation ITU-R M.257 it shall reply on a frequency on which the coast station keepswatch.

(3) When a ship station is called on a working frequency by a coast station of thesame nationality, it shall reply on the working frequency normally associated with the frequencyused by the coast station for the call.

(4) When calling a coast station or another ship station, a ship station shall indicatethe frequency on which a reply is required if this frequency is not the normal one associated withthe frequency used for the call.

(5) A ship station which frequently exchanges traffic with a coast station of anothernationality may use the same procedure for reply as ships of the nationality of the coast station,where this has been agreed by the administrations concerned.

(6) As a general rule a coast station shall reply:

a) on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz to calls made on the carrier frequency2 182 kHz, unless another frequency is indicated by the calling station;

b) on a working frequency to calls made on a working frequency;

c) on a working frequency to calls made in Regions 1 and 3 and in Greenland on thecarrier frequency 2 191 kHz (assigned frequency 2 192.4 kHz).

340 Maritime Manual

D2. Bands Between 4 000 kHzand 27 500 kHz

§ 18. (1) A ship station called by a coast station shall reply either on one of the callingfrequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.221 [No. 4375] or on the working frequency associatedwith that of the coast station, in accordance with RR Appendix S17, Part B, Section I[Appendix 16, Section A].

(2) A coast station called by a ship station shall reply on one of the callingfrequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.222 [No. 4376], or on one of its working frequenciesshown in the List of Coast Stations.

(3) When a station is called on the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz it should reply on thesame frequency unless another frequency is indicated for that purpose by the calling station.

(4) When a station is called on the carrier frequency 6 215 kHz it should reply on thesame frequency unless another frequency is indicated for that purpose by the calling station.

(5) The provisions of § 18.(1) and § 18.(2) do not apply to communication betweenship stations and coast stations using the simplex frequencies specified in RR Appendix S17,Part B, Section I [Appendix 16, Section B].

D3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

§ 19. (1) When a station is called on 156.8 MHz it should reply on the same frequencyunless another frequency is indicated by the calling station.

(2) When a coast station open to public correspondence calls a ship either by speechor by selective calling in accordance with Annex 2 to Recommendation ITU-R M.257, using atwo-frequency channel, the ship station shall reply by speech on the frequency associated withthat of the coast station; conversely, a coast station shall reply to a call from a ship station on thefrequency associated with that of the ship station.

E. Indication of the Frequency to Be Used for Traffic

E1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz

§ 20. If contact is established on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz, coast and ship stationsshall transfer to working frequencies for the exchange of traffic.

E2. Bands Between 4000 kHzand 27 500 kHz

§ 21. After a ship station has established contact with a coast station, or another ship station,on the calling frequency of the band chosen, traffic shall be exchanged on their respectiveworking frequencies.


E3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz

§ 22. (1) Whenever contact has been established between a coast station in the publiccorrespondence service and a ship station either on 156.8 MHz or on a two-frequency callingchannel (see RR No. S52.237 [No. 4392]), the stations shall transfer to one of their normal pairsof working frequencies for the exchange of traffic. The calling station should indicate thechannel to which it is proposed to transfer by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably,to its channel designator.

(2) When contact on 156.8 MHz has been established between a coast station in theport operations service and a ship station, the ship station should indicate the particular servicerequired (such as navigational information, docking instructions, etc.) and the coast station shallthen indicate the channel to be used for the exchange of traffic by reference to the frequency inMHz, or, preferably, to its channel designator.

(3) When contact on 156.8 MHz has been established between a coast station in theship movement service and a ship station, the coast station shall then indicate the channel to beused for the exchange of traffic by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably, to itschannel designator.

(4) A ship station, when it has established contact with another ship station on156.8 MHz, should indicate the intership channel to which it is proposed to transfer for theexchange of traffic by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably, to its channeldesignator.

(5) However, a brief exchange of traffic not to exceed one minute concerning thesafety of navigation need not be transmitted on a working frequency when it is important that allships within range receive the transmission.

(6) Stations hearing a transmission concerning the safety of navigation shall listen tothe message until they are satisfied that the message is of no concern to them. They shall notmake any transmission likely to interfere with the message.

F. Agreement on the Frequency to Be Used for Traffic

§ 23. (1) If the station called is in agreement with the calling station, it shall transmit:

a) an indication that from that moment onwards it will listen on the workingfrequency or channel announced by the calling station;

b) an indication that it is ready to receive the traffic of the calling station.

(2) If the station called is not in agreement with the calling station on the workingfrequency or channel to be used, it shall transmit an indication of the working frequency orchannel proposed.

(3) For communications between a coast station and a ship station, the coast stationshall finally decide the frequency or channel to be used.

(4) When agreement is reached regarding the working frequency or channel whichthe calling station shall use for its traffic, the station called shall indicate that it is ready toreceive the traffic.

342 Maritime Manual

G. Indication of Traffic

§ 24. When the calling station wishes to exchange more than one radiotelephone call, or totransmit one or more radiotelegrams, it should indicate this when contact is established with thestation called.

H. Difficulties in Reception

§ 25. (1) If the station called is unable to accept traffic immediately, it should reply to thecall as indicated in § 16 followed by “Wait . . . minutes” (or SA spoken as ALFA SIERRA . . .(minutes) in case of language difficulties), indicating the probable duration of waiting time inminutes. If the probable duration exceeds ten minutes the reason for the delay shall be given.Alternatively the station called may indicate, by any appropriate means, that it is not ready toreceive traffic immediately.

(2) When a station receives a call without being certain that such a call is intendedfor it, it shall not reply until the call has been repeated and understood.

(3) When a station receives a call which is intended for it, but is uncertain of theidentification of the calling station, it shall reply immediately asking for a repetition of the callsign or other identification of the calling station.

Section IV. Forwarding (Routing) of Traffic

A. Traffic Frequency

§ 26. (1) Every station should transmit its traffic (radiotelephone calls or radiotelegrams)on one of its working frequencies in the band in which the call has been made.

(2) In addition to its normal working frequency, printed in heavy type in the List ofCoast Stations, a coast station may use one or more supplementary frequencies in the same band,in accordance with the provisions of RR Article S52 [Article 60].

(3) The use of frequencies reserved for calling shall be forbidden for traffic, exceptdistress traffic (see RR Appendix S13 [Chapter IX]).

(4) After contact has been established on the frequency to be used for traffic, thetransmission of a radiotelegram or radiotelephone call shall be preceded by:

– the call sign or other identification of the station called;


– the call sign or other identification of the calling station.

(5) The call sign or other identification need not be sent more than once.


B. Establishment of Radiotelephone Callsand Transmission of Radiotelegrams

B1. Establishment of Radiotelephone Calls

§ 27. (1) In setting up a radiotelephone call, the coast station should establish connectionwith the telephone network as quickly as possible. In the meantime, the ship station shallmaintain watch on the appropriate working frequency as indicated by the coast station.

(2) However, if the connection cannot be quickly established, the coast station shallinform the ship station accordingly. The latter station shall then either:

a) maintain watch on the appropriate frequency until an effective circuit can beestablished; or

b) contact the coast station later at a mutually agreed time.

(3) When a radiotelephone call has been completed, the procedure indicated in§ 29.(3) shall be applied unless further calls are on hand at either station.

B2. Transmission of Radiotelegrams

§ 28. (1) The transmission of a radiotelegram should be made as follows:

– radiotelegram begins: from . . . (name of ship or aircraft);

– number . . . (serial number of radiotelegram);

– number of words . . . ;

– date . . . ;

– time . . . (time radiotelegram was handed in aboard ship or aircraft);

– service indicators (if any);

– address . . . ;

– text . . . ;

– signature . . . (if any);

– radiotelegram ends, over.

(2) As a general rule, radiotelegrams of all kinds transmitted by ship stations shall benumbered in a daily series; number 1 shall be given to the first radiotelegram sent each day toeach separate station.

(3) A series of numbers which has begun in radiotelegraphy should be continued inradiotelephony and vice versa.

(4) Each radiotelegram should be transmitted once only by the sending station.However, it may, when necessary, be repeated in full or in part by the receiving or the sendingstation.

344 Maritime Manual

(5) In transmitting groups of figures, each figure shall be spoken separately and thetransmission of each group or series of groups shall be preceded by the words “in figures”.

(6) Numbers written in letters shall be spoken as they are written, their transmissionbeing preceded by the words “in letters”.

B3. Acknowledgement of Receipt

§ 29. (1) The acknowledgement of receipt of a radiotelegram or a series of radiotelegramsshall be given by the receiving station in the following manner:

– the call sign or other identification of the sending station;


– the call sign or other identification of the receiving station;

– “Your No. . . . received, over” (or R spoken as ROMEO . . . (number), K spokenas KILO in case of language difficulties); or

` – “Your No. . . . to No. . . . received, over” (or R spoken as ROMEO . . . (numbers),K spoken as KILO in case of language difficulties).

(2) The radiotelegram, or series of radiotelegrams, shall not be considered as cleareduntil this acknowledgement has been received.

(3) The end of work between two stations shall be indicated by each of them bymeans of the word “Out” (or VA spoken as VICTOR ALFA in case of language difficulties).

Section V. Duration and Control of Working

§ 30. (1) In communications between coast stations and ship stations, the ship station shallcomply with the instructions given by the coast station in all questions relating to the order andtime of transmission, to the choice of frequency, and to the duration and suspension of work.

(2) In communications between ship stations, the station called controls the workingin the manner indicated in § 30.(1) above. However, if a coast station finds it necessary tointervene, the ship stations shall comply with the instructions given by the coast station.


RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1173*

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SINGLE-SIDEBAND TRANSMITTERSUSED IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE FOR RADIOTELEPHONY INTHE BANDS BETWEEN 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz REGION 2) AND 4 000 kHz

AND BETWEEN 4 000 kHz AND 27500 kHz

(1995)Rec. ITU-R M.1173

ANNEX 1

Technical characteristics of single-sideband transmitters used inthe maritime mobile service for radiotelephony in the bands

between 1606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz Region 2) and 4000 kHzand between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz

1 Power of the carrier:

For class J3E emissions the power of the carrier shall be at least 40 dB below the peakenvelope power.

2 Coast and ship stations shall use only the upper sideband.

3 The transmitter audio-frequency band shall be 350 Hz to 2 700 Hz with a permittedamplitude variation of 6 dB.

4 The carrier frequencies shall be maintained within the tolerances specified inRecommendation ITU-R SM.1137.

5 The unwanted frequency modulation of the carrier shall be sufficiently low to preventharmful distortion.


346 Maritime Manual

6 When class H3E or J3E emissions are used, the power of any unwanted emissionsupplied to the antenna transmission line on any discrete frequency shall, when the transmitter isdriven to full peak envelope power, be in accordance with the following Tables:

a) Transmitters installed before 2 January 1982:

Transmitters using suppressed carrier emission may, as far as concerns out-of-bandemissions 2 and those spurious emissions 3 which are a result of the modulation process but donot fall in the spectrum of out-of-band emissions 2, be tested for compliance with this regulationby means of a two-tone-audio input signal with a frequency separation between the tones suchthat all intermodulation products occur at frequencies at least 1.6 kHz removed from theassigned frequency 4.

b) Transmitters installed after 1 January 1982:

Transmitters using suppressed carrier emission may, as far as concerns out-of-bandemissions 2 and those spurious emissions 3 which are a result of the modulation process but donot fall in the spectrum of out-of-band emissions 2, be tested for compliance with this regulationby means of a two-tone-audio input signal with a frequency separation between the tones suchthat all intermodulation products occur at frequencies at least 1.5 kHz removed from theassigned frequency 4.

_______________1 Unwanted emission: see RR No. S1.146 [No. 140].2 Out-of-band emission: see RR No. S1.144 [No. 138].3 Spurious emission: see RR No. S1.145 [No. 139].4 The assigned frequency is 1 400 Hz higher than the carrier frequency: see RR No. S.52.177 [No. 4325].

Separation between the frequencyof the unwanted emission 1

and the assigned frequency 4

(kHz)

Minimum attenuation belowpeak envelope power

1.6 4.8 28 dB 4.8 8 38 dB 8 43 dB without the unwanted emission power

exceeding the power of 50 mW

Separation between the frequencyof the unwanted emission 1

and the assigned frequency 4

(kHz)

Minimum attenuation belowpeak envelope power

1.5 4.5 31 dB 4.5 7.5 38 dB 7.5 43 dB without the unwanted emission power

exceeding the power of 50 mW



Technical characteristics of equipment used for on-boardvessel communications in the bands

between 450 and 470 MHz

(1995-1998-2004)

Annex 1

Technical characteristics of equipment used for on-boardvessel communications in the bands

between 450 and 470 MHz

1 The equipment should be fitted with sufficient channels for satisfactoryoperation in the area of intended use.

2 The effective radiated power should be limited to the maximum required forsatisfactory operations, but should in no case exceed 2 W. Wherever practicable theequipment should be fitted with a suitable device to reduce readily the output power byat least 10 dB.

3 In the case of equipment installed at a fixed point on the ship, the height of itsantenna should not be more than 3.5 m above the level of the bridge.

348 Maritime Manual

25 kHz channels 12.5 kHz channels

4 Only frequency modulation with apre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phasemodulation) should be used.

Only frequency modulation with apre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phasemodulation) should be used.

5 The frequency deviationcorresponding to 100% modulationshould approach 5 kHz as nearlyas practicable. In no event shouldthe frequency deviation exceed

5 kHz.

The frequency deviation correspondingto 100% modulation should approach

2.5 kHz as nearly as practicable. In noevent should the frequency deviationexceed 2.5 kHz.

6 The frequency tolerance should be5 parts in 106.

The frequency tolerance should be2.5 parts in 106.

7 The audio-frequency band shouldbe limited to 3000 Hz.

The audio-frequency band should belimited to 2550 Hz.

8 Control, telemetry and other non-voice signals such as paging, should becoded in such a manner as to minimize the possibility of false response to interferingsignals. The frequencies specified in RR No. 5.287 for on-board communications maybe used for single frequency and two-frequency simplex operation.

9 When used in the duplex mode the base transmitter frequency should beselected from the lower range for improved operability.

10 If the use of a repeater station is required on board a ship, the followingfrequency pairs should be used (see RR No. 5.287 and 5.288):

457.525 MHz and 467.525 MHz

457.550 MHz and 467.550 MHz

457.575 MHz and 467.575 MHz

457.5375 MHz and 467.5375 MHz

457.5625 MHz and 467.5625 MHz.


11 Frequencies

The frequencies specified in RR No. 5.287 (subject to national regulations) may beused:

For 25 or 12.5 kHz channel spacing:

457.525 MHz

457.550 MHz

457.575 MHz

467.525 MHz

467.550 MHz

467.575 MHz.

For equipment designed to operate with 12.5 kHz channel spacing the additionalfrequencies referred to in RR No. 5.287 are:

457.5375 MHz

457.5625 MHz

467.5375 MHz

467.5625 MHz.

_______________

PART C

Extracts from other ITU-RRecommendations

(M and SM Series)

Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13 353


Digital selective-calling system for usein the maritime mobile service

(1974-1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1994-1995-1997-1997-2000-2004-2007-2009)

Annex 1

General purpose equipment characteristics

1 General1.1 The system is a synchronous system using characters composed from a ten-biterror-detecting code as listed in Table 1.

1.1.1 The first seven bits of the ten-bit code of Table 1 are information bits. Bits 8, 9and 10 indicate, in the form of a binary number, the number of B elements that occurin the seven information bits, a Y element being a binary number 1 and a B elementa binary number 0. For example, a BYY sequence for bits 8, 9 and 10 indicates3 (0 4 + 1 2 + 1 1) B elements in the associated seven information bit sequence;and a YYB sequence indicates 6 (1 4 + 1 2 + 0 1) B elements in the associatedseven information bit sequence. The order of transmission for the information bits isleast significant bit first but for the check bits it is most significant bit first.

1.2 Time diversity is provided in the call sequence as follows:

1.2.1 Apart from the phasing characters, each character is transmitted twice in atime-spread mode; the first transmission (DX) of a specific character is followed by thetransmission of four other characters before the re-transmission (RX) of that specificcharacter takes place, allowing for a time-diversity reception interval of:

1.2.1.1 400 ms for HF and MF channels, and

1.2.1.2 331/3 ms for VHF radio-telephone channels.

1.3 The classes of emission, frequency shifts and modulation rates are as follows:

1.3.1 F1B or J2B 170 Hz and modulation rate of 100 Bs (bit/s) 30 × 106 for use onHF and MF DSC calling channels. When frequency-shift keying is effected by applyingaudio signals to the input of single-sideband transmitters (J2B), the centre of the audio-frequency spectrum offered to the transmitter is 1 700 Hz. When a DSC call is

354 Maritime Manual

transmitted on HF and MF working channels for public correspondence, the class ofemission is J2B. In this case, audio tones with frequencies 1700 Hz 85 Hz andmodulation rate 100 Bs (bit/s) 30 × 106 are used in order for the DSC call to betransmitted.

1.3.2 Frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phase modulation)with frequency-shift of the modulating sub-carrier for use on VHF channels:– frequency-shift between 1300 and 2 100 Hz; the sub-carrier being at 1700 Hz;– the frequency tolerance of the 1 300 and 2100 Hz tones is 10 Hz;

– the modulation rate is 1 200 B s (bit/s) 30 × 106;– the index of modulation is 2.0 10%.

1.3.3 The radio-frequency tolerances of new designs of both transmitters andreceivers in the MF and HF bands should be:

– coast station: 10 Hz,– ship station: 10 Hz,– receiver bandwidth: should not exceed 300 Hz.

1.4 The higher frequency corresponds to the B-state and the lower frequencycorresponds to the Y-state of the signal elements.

1.5 The information in the call is presented as a sequence of seven-bitcombinations constituting a primary code.

1.5.1 The seven information bits of the primary code express a symbol numberfrom 00 to 127, as shown in Table 1, and where:

1.5.1.1 the symbols from 00 to 99 are used to code two decimal figures according toTable 2;

1.5.1.2 the symbols from 100 to 127 are used to code service commands (see Table 3).

1.6 Where the distress alert repetitions described in § 11 apply, the followingconditions are considered necessary:

1.6.1 the transmitter encoder must provide repetitive transmission of the callsequence in accordance with § 11; and

1.6.2 the receiver decoder should provide maximum utilization of the receivedsignal, including use of the error-check character and by using an iterative decodingprocess with adequate memory provision.

1.7 When the transmission of a DSC distress alert is automatically repeated, ships’DSC equipments must be capable of automatically receiving a subsequent distressacknowledgement (see Recommendation ITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3.1, 3.1.3.2and 3.3.5).


TABLE 1

Ten-bit error-detecting code

SymbolNo.

Emitted signaland bit position

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SymbolNo.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SymbolNo.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

00010203040506070809101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

BBBBBBBYYYYBBBBBBYYBBYBBBBBYYBYYBBBBBYBYBBYBBBBYYBYBYBBBBYBYBYYBBBBYBYYYYBBBBYBBBBBYBBBYYBYBBYBBBYBYBYBYBBBYBYYYBYBBBYBBBBYYBBBYBYYBYYBBBYBBBYYYBBBYBBYYYYBBBBYYBBBBYBBYYBYBBBYBBYBYBYBBYBBYBYYYBBYBBYBBBBYBYBBYBYYBYBYBBYBBBYYBYBBYBBYYYBYBBBYYBBBYYBBYBYYBBYYBBYBBBYBYYBBYBBYYBYYBBBYYBBYYYBBYBBYBYYYBBBYYBYYYYBBBYYYYYYYBBBYBBBBBBYBYYBYBBBBYBYBYBYBBBYBYBYYYBBBYBYBBBBYBBYBYBYYBYBBYBYBBBYYBBYBYBBYYYBBYBBYYBBBYBYBYBYYBBYBYBYBBBYBYBYBYBB

43444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485

YYBYBYBBYYBBYYBYBYBBYBYYBYBBYYBYYYBYBBYYYYYYBYBBYBBBBBYYBYBYYBBBYYBYBBBYBBYYBYBBYYBBYYBBYYBBYBYYBYBBYBYBYYBBYYBYYBYYBBYYYYYBYYBBYBBBBYYYBYBBYBBYYYBBYYBYBYYYBBYYYYBYYYBBYBBBYYYYBBYYYBYYYYBBYBBYYYYYBBYBYYYYYYBBBYBBBBBBYYYBYBBBBBYYBYBYBBBBYYBYYYBBBBYYBBBBYBBBYYBYYBYBBBYYBBBYYBBBYYBBYYYBBBYBYYBBBYBBYYBYYBBYBBYYBBBYBYBBYYBBYYBYBBYBYYBBYYBBYYBBYBYYBBYBYYBYYYBBYBYYYYYYBBYBYBBBBBYBYYBYYBBBYBYYBBBYBBYBYYBBYYBBYBYBYYBBYBYBYYBBYBYBYBYBYY

8687888990919293949596979899

100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127

BYYBYBYBYYYYYBYBYBYBBBBYYBYYBBYBBYYBYBYYBYBYYBYBYYYYBYYBYBYBBBYYYBYBYYYBYYYBYBYBBYYYYBYBYBYYYYYBYBBYBBBBBYYYBYYBBBBYYYBBBYBBBYYYBBYYBBBYYBYYBBYBBYYYBBYBYBBYYBYYBYYBBYYBYYYYYBBYYBYBBBBYBYYYBBYBBYBYYBYYBYBYBYYBYYYYBYBYYBYBBBYYBYYBYYYBYYBYYBYBBYYYBYYBYBYYYYBYYBBYBBBBYYYYBBYBBBYYYBYYBYBBYYYBYYYYBBYYYBYBBBYBYYYBYYYBYBYYYBYBBYYBYYYBYBYYYBYYYBBYBBBYYYYBYYYBBYYYYBYBBYBYYYYBYBYYBYYYYBBYBBYYYYYBYBYBYYYYYBBYBYYYYYYBBYYYYYYYYBBB

B 0Y 1

Order of bit transmission: bit 1 first.

356 Maritime Manual

TABLE 2

Packing table for decimal numbers into ten-bit characters

TABLE 3

Use of symbol Nos. 100 to 127

The digits for the

Thousandsof millions

D2

Hundredsof millions

D1

Tens ofmillions

D2

MillionsD1

Hundreds ofthousands

D2

Tens ofthousands

D1

ThousandsD2

HundredsD1

TensD2

UnitsD1

Character 5 Character 4 Character 3 Character 2 Character 1

NOTE 1 – Character 1 is the last character transmitted.

The digit sequence D2-D1 varies from 00 to 99 inclusive in each character (character 1 to 5 inclusive). The character thatrepresents a particular two-decimal figure is transmitted as the symbol number (see Table 1) that is identical to that particulartwo-decimal figure.

When the number consists of an odd number of decimal digits, a zero shall be added in front of the most significant positionto provide an integral number of ten-bit characters.

SymbolNo.

Phasingand uniquefunctions

Format specifier(1) Category(1) Nature ofdistress(1)

Firsttelecommand(1)

Secondtelecommand(1)

100 Routine Fire,explosion

F3E/G3EAll modes TP

No reason given(2)

101 Flooding F3E/G3Eduplex TP

Congestion atmaritime switchingcentre

102 Geographicalarea

Collision Busy(2)

103 (3) (3) Grounding Polling Queue indication(2)

104 PhasingRX-0position

Listing, indanger ofcapsizing

Unable tocomply

Station barred(2)


Sinking End of call(4) No operatoravailable(2)


(6) Disabled andadrift

Data Operator temporarilyunavailable(2)


Undesignateddistress

Equipment disabled(2)


Safety Abandoningship

Unable to useproposed channel(2)


TABLE 3 (cont.)

SymbolNo.



Firsttelecommand(1)



Piracy/armedrobbery attack

J3E TP Unable to useproposed mode(2)


(5) Urgency Manoverboard

Distressacknowledgement

Ships and aircraft ofStates not parties to anarmed conflict


(6) Medical transports(as defined in 1949Geneva Conventionsand additionalProtocols)

112 Distress Distress EPIRBemission

Distress relay Pay-phone/public calloffice

113 F1B/J2BTTY-FEC

Facsimile/dataaccording toRecommendationITU-R M.1081

114 Ships havingcommon interest

115 F1B/J2BTTY-ARQ

(6)

116 All ships(7) (6) (6)

117 Ack. RQ(EOS)

(6) (6)

118 Test (6)

119 (6) (6)

120 Individual stations (6) (6)

121 Reserved fornationalnon-callingpurposes e.g.ReportITU-R M.1159

Ship positionor locationregistrationupdating

(6)

122 Ack. BQ(EOS)

(6) (6)

123 Individual stationsemi-automatic/automatic service

(6) (6)

124 (5) (6) (6)

358 Maritime Manual

TABLE 3 (end)

2 Technical format of a call sequence2.1 The technical format of the call sequence is:

0493-00

Dot patternSee § 3

Phasing sequenceSee § 3

Call contentSee Tables 4.1 to 4.10.2

Closing sequenceSee § 9, § 10 and Fig. 1

2.2 Examples of typical call sequences and the construction of the transmissionformat are given in Figs. 1 to 3.

2.3 The flow charts illustrating the operation of the DSC system are shown inFigs. 4 and 5.

3 Dot pattern and phasing3.1 The phasing sequence provides information to the receiver to permit correct bitphasing and unambiguous determination of the positions of the characters within a callsequence (see Note 1).

SymbolNo.



Firsttelecommand(1)


125 PhasingDXposition

(6) (6)

126 * No information No information

127 EOS (6) (6)

TP: TelephonyTTY: Direct printingARQ: Rec. ITU-R M.476 or Rec. ITU-R M.625 equipment(1) Unassigned symbols should be rejected. The DSC equipment should take no action.(2) Currently unassigned when used with first telecommands other than symbol No. 104 – for future use.(3) Used for selective call to a group of ships in a specified VTS area (Rec. ITU-R M.825). Reception of calls having

format specifier 103, for (or) category shall not activate any alarms on shipborne DSC controller. Should not be usedin any future expansion.

(4) Only used for semi-automatic/automatic service.(5) Used in the automatic VHF/UHF service (Rec. ITU-R M.586). Should not be used in any future expansion.(6) Should not be used in any future expansion.(7) MF/HF used only for distress alert acknowledgment and coast station receive (see Table 4).


NOTE 1 – Acquisition of character synchronization should be achieved by means of characterrecognition rather than, for example, by recognizing a change in the dot pattern, in order toreduce false synchronization caused by a bit error in the dot pattern.

3.2 The phasing sequence consists of specific characters in the DX and RXpositions transmitted alternatively. Six DX characters are transmitted.

3.2.1 The phasing character in the DX position is symbol No. 125 of Table 1.

3.2.2 The phasing characters in the RX position specify the start of the informationsequence (i.e. the format specifier) and consist of the symbol Nos. 111, 110, 109, 108,107, 106, 105 and 104 of Table 1, consecutively.

3.3 Phasing is considered to be achieved when two DXs and one RX, or two RXsand one DX, or three RXs in the appropriate DX or RX positions, respectively, aresuccessfully received. These three phasing characters may be detected in eitherconsecutive or non-consecutive positions but in both cases all bits of the phasingsequence should be examined for a correct 3-character pattern. A call should be rejectedonly if a correct pattern is not found anywhere within the phasing sequence.

3.4 To provide appropriate conditions for earlier bit synchronization and to allowfor scanning methods to monitor several HF and MF frequencies by ship stations, thephasing sequence should be preceded by a dot pattern (i.e. alternating B-Y or Y-Bsequence bit synchronization signals) with duration of:

3.4.1 200 bits

At HF and MF for:– distress alerts;– distress acknowledgements;– distress relays addressed to a geographic area;– distress relay acknowledgements addressed to all ships;– all calls addressed to a ship station other than those specified in § 3.4.2.

3.4.2 20 bits

At HF and MF, for all acknowledgements to individual calls having format specifiers120 and 123 and for all calling to coast stations. At VHF for all calls.

4 Format specifier4.1 The format specifier characters which are transmitted twice in both the DXand RX positions (see Fig. 1) are:

4.1.1 symbol No. 112 for a “distress” alert; or

4.1.2 symbol No. 116 for an “all ships” call; or

360 Maritime Manual

4.1.3 symbol No. 114 for a selective call to a group of ships having a commoninterest (e.g. belonging to one particular country, or to a single ship owner, etc.); or

4.1.4 symbol No. 120 for a selective call to a particular individual station; or

4.1.5 symbol No. 102 for a selective call to a group of ships in a particulargeographic area; or

4.1.6 symbol No. 123 for a selective call to a particular individual station using thesemi-automatic/automatic service.

4.2 It is considered that receiver decoders must detect the format specifiercharacter twice for “distress” alerts and “all ships” calls to effectively eliminate falsealerting. For other calls, the address characters provide additional protection againstfalse alerting and, therefore, single detection of the format specifier character isconsidered satisfactory (see Table 3).

5 Address

5.1 “Distress” alerts and “all ships” calls do not have addresses since these callsare implicitly addressed to all stations (ship stations and coast stations).

5.2 For a selective call directed to an individual ship, to a coast station or to agroup of stations having a common interest, the address consists of the characterscorresponding to the station’s maritime mobile service identity, the sequence consistingof characters coded in accordance with Table 2 (see Note 1).NOTE 1 – According to RR Article 19, maritime mobile service identities are formed of a seriesof nine digits, consisting of three digits of the Maritime Identification Digits (MID) and six moredigits.

These identities are included in the address and self-identification parts of the call sequence andare transmitted as five characters C5C4C3C2C1, comprising the ten digits of:

(X1, X2) (X3, X4) (X5, X6) (X7, X8) and (X9, X10)respectively, whereas digit X10 is always the figure 0 unless the equipment is also designed inaccordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1080.

Example:MID X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 being the ship station identity is transmitted by the DSC equipment as:

(M, I) (D, X4) (X5, X6) (X7, X8) (X9, 0)

5.3 For a selective call directed to a group of ships in a particular geographic areaa numerical geographic coordinates address consisting of ten digits (i.e. 5 characters), isconstructed as follows (see Fig. 6 and Note 1):


NOTE 1 – In order to comply with commonly accepted practice, the order of entry and read-outshould be: first latitude and then longitude.

5.3.1 the designated geographic area will be a rectangle in Mercator projection;

5.3.2 the upper left-hand (i.e. North-West) corner of the rectangle is the referencepoint for the area;

5.3.3 the first digit indicates the azimuth sector in which the reference point islocated, as follows:

5.3.3.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit “0”,

5.3.3.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit “1”,

5.3.3.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit “2”,

5.3.3.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit “3”;

5.3.4 the second and third digits indicate the latitude of the reference point in tensand units of degrees;

5.3.5 the fourth, fifth and sixth digits indicate the longitude of the reference point inhundreds, tens and units of degrees;

5.3.6 the seventh and eighth digits indicate the vertical (i.e. North-to-South) side ofthe rectangle, , in tens and units of degrees;

5.3.7 the ninth and tenth digits indicate the horizontal (i.e. West-to-East) side of therectangle, , in tens and units of degrees.

6 Category

6.1 The “category” information is coded as shown in Table 3 and defines thedegree of priority of the call sequence.

6.2 For a “distress” alert the priority is defined by the format specifier and nocategory information is included in the call sequence.

6.2.1 For distress relays, distress relay acknowledgements and distressacknowledgements the category is distress.

6.3 For safety related calls, the “category” information specifies:

6.3.1 urgency; or

6.3.2 safety.

6.4 For other calls, the “category” information specifies:

6.4.1 routine.

362 Maritime Manual

7 Self-identification7.1 The maritime mobile service identity (MMSI) assigned to the calling station,coded as indicated in § 5.2 and its Note 1, is used for self-identification.

8 MessagesThe messages that are included in a call sequence contain the following messageelements, which are listed in the order in which they would appear in each message. Allmessage formats are explicitly defined in Tables 4.1 through 4.10.2:

8.1 For a “distress” alert (see Table 4.1) the distress information is contained infour messages in the following order:

8.1.1 Message 1 is the “nature of distress” message, coded as shown in Table 3, i.e.:

8.1.1.1 fire, explosion;

8.1.1.2 flooding;

8.1.1.3 collision;

8.1.1.4 grounding;

8.1.1.5 listing, in danger of capsizing;

8.1.1.6 sinking;

8.1.1.7 disabled and adrift;

8.1.1.8 undesignated distress;

8.1.1.9 abandoning ship;

8.1.1.10 piracy/armed robbery attack;

8.1.1.11 man overboard;

8.1.1.12 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) emission.

8.1.2 Message 2 is the “distress coordinates” message, consisting of ten digitsindicating the location of the vessel in distress, coded on the principles described inTable 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits (see Note 1 to § 5.3):

8.1.2.1 The first digit indicates the quadrant in which the incident has occurred, asfollows:

8.1.2.1.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit “0”,

8.1.2.1.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit “1”,

8.1.2.1.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit “2”,

8.1.2.1.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit “3”.


8.1.2.2 The next four figures indicate the latitude in degrees and minutes.

8.1.2.3 The next five figures indicate the longitude in degrees and minutes.

8.1.2.4 If “distress coordinates” cannot be included, or if the position information hasnot been updated for 23½ h, the 10 digits following the “nature of distress” should beautomatically transmitted as the digit 9 repeated 10 times.

8.1.3 Message 3 is the time indication (UTC) when the coordinates were validconsisting of four digits coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs startingfrom the first and second digits.

8.1.3.1 The first two digits indicate the time in hours.

8.1.3.2 The third and fourth digits indicate the part of the hours in minutes.

8.1.3.3 If the time cannot be included the four time indicating digits should betransmitted automatically as “8 8 8 8”.

8.1.4 Message 4 is a single character to indicate the type of communication(telephone or FEC teleprinter) which is preferred by the station in distress forsubsequent exchange of distress traffic. This character is coded as shown in Table 3first telecommand.

8.2 For a distress relay, distress relay acknowledgement, distressacknowledgement (see Tables 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4) the distress information is contained infive messages in the following order:

8.2.1 Message 0 is the “MMSI” of the vessel in distress.

8.2.2 Message 1 is the “nature of distress” message, coded as shown in Table 3, i.e.:

8.2.2.1 fire, explosion;

8.2.2.2 flooding;

8.2.2.3 collision;

8.2.2.4 grounding;

8.2.2.5 listing, in danger of capsizing;

8.2.2.6 sinking;

8.2.2.7 disabled and adrift;

8.2.2.8 undesignated distress;

8.2.2.9 abandoning ship;

8.2.2.10 piracy/armed robbery attack;

8.2.2.11 man overboard;

8.2.2.12 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) emission.

364 Maritime Manual

8.2.3 Message 2 is the “distress coordinates” message, consisting of ten digitsindicating the location of the vessel in distress, coded on the principles described inTable 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits (see Note 1 to § 5.3):

8.2.3.1 The first digit indicates the quadrant in which the incident has occurred, asfollows:

8.2.3.1.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit “0”,

8.2.3.1.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit “1”,

8.2.3.1.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit “2”,

8.2.3.1.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit “3”.

8.2.3.2 The next four figures indicate the latitude in degrees and minutes.

8.2.3.3 The next five figures indicate the longitude in degrees and minutes.

8.2.3.4 If “distress coordinates” cannot be included, or if the position information hasnot been updated for 23½ h, the 10 digits following the “nature of distress” should beautomatically transmitted as the digit 9 repeated 10 times.

8.2.4 Message 3 is the time indication (UTC) when the coordinates were validconsisting of four digits coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs startingfrom the first and second digits.

8.2.4.1 The first two digits indicate the time in hours.

8.2.4.2 The third and fourth digits indicate the part of the hours in minutes.

8.2.4.3 If the time cannot be included the four time indicating digits should betransmitted automatically as “8 8 8 8”.

8.2.5 Message 4 is a single character to indicate the type of communication(telephone or FEC teleprinter) which is preferred by the station in distress forsubsequent exchange of distress traffic. This character is coded as shown in Table 3first telecommand.

8.3 For other types of calls (see Table 4.5 through 4.10.2 and Figs. 2 and 3)messages are included in the following order:

8.3.1 Message 1 is the “telecommand” information and consists of 2 characters (firstand second telecommand) coded as shown in Table 3;

8.3.1.1 if no information additional to that conveyed by the first telecommandcharacter is required, then the second telecommand signal should be symbol No. 126(no information) (see Table 3);

8.3.1.2 if no telecommand information is used, symbol No. 126 is transmitted twice.


8.3.1.3 If the telecommand 1 is “F3E/G3E duplex TP” (symbol 101) in a request,which can be complied with, the telecommand 1 “F3E/G3E all modes TP”(symbol 100) should be used in the acknowledgement.

8.3.2 Message 2 may contain two “channel or frequency message” elements, each ofwhich always consists of three characters, “character 1”, “character 2” and “character3”, indicating the proposed working frequency (in the F1B/J2B mode the assignedfrequency should be used) in multiples of 100 Hz or the channel number (coded inaccordance with Table 5) or the ship’s position. The first frequency element (the RXfield) in the call indicates the called station receive frequency and the second frequencyelement (the TX field) indicates the called station transmit frequency. Inacknowledgements the RX and TX fields indicate the receive and transmit frequency ofthe acknowledging station respectively (see also Fig. 2 and Note 1).

NOTE 1 – If only one channel or frequency message element is used, this indicates the calledstation receive channel or frequency or a two-frequency (paired) channel. A second channel orfrequency message element may be used to designate the called station transmit channel orfrequency. If the calling station indicates only the called station receive frequency (for broadcastmode transmissions) then the symbol No. 126 repeated three times should be transmitted insteadof the called station transmit channel or frequency message element. If no “channel or frequencymessage” elements are used, the symbol No. 126 is transmitted six times. For calls using thesemi-automatic/automatic VHF service (see Table 4.10.1) then only one “channel or frequencymessage” element is transmitted which indicates the paired channel number. In the absence ofthis element the symbol No. 126 should be transmitted three times.

8.3.2.1 Frequency information

The frequency (in the F1B/J2B mode the assigned frequency should be used) inmultiples of 100 Hz may only be indicated as such when the frequency is below30 MHz. The three characters provide for the required six decimal digits. Character 1represents the units (U) and tens (T) of 100 Hz, character 2 the hundreds (H) andthousands (M) and character 3 the tens of thousands (TM) and hundreds of thousands(HM) of 100 Hz. For MF/HF DSC, use frequency selection mode, vice channelselection mode, to ensure international interoperability.

8.3.2.2 Channel information

8.3.2.2.1 HF and MF channels

If the HM digit is 3, this indicates that the number represented by the digits TM, M, H,T and U is the HF/MF working channel number (either single frequency or twofrequency channels). This mode should only be used for decoding received calls, toensure interoperability with older equipment.

366 Maritime Manual

8.3.2.2.2 VHF channels

If the HM digit is 9, this indicates that the number represented by the values of thedigits M, H, T and U is the VHF working channel number. If the M digit is 1, thisindicates that the ship stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplexchannel frequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 2, this indicates thatthe coast stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channel frequencyfor both ship and coast stations.

8.3.2.3 Ship’s position information

8.3.2.3.1 For MF/HF calls, Message 2 may contain the ship’s position, consisting ofthe digit 5 repeated two times and ten digits (five characters) indicating this position,coded in accordance with § 8.1.2 to § 8.1.2.3 (see Table 6).

8.3.2.3.2 For position requests message 2 consists of 6 no information symbols(symbol No. 126).

8.3.2.3.3 In acknowledgements to a call requesting ship’s position (see Fig. 3d))message 2 consists of twelve digits (six symbols), the first of which should be coded inaccordance with § 8.1.2 to § 8.1.2.3 followed by one symbol No. 126.

Message 3 follows message 2 in this case and contains the time (UTC) when thecoordinates were valid, coded as indicated in § 8.1.3 to § 8.1.3.3.

8.3.3 Message 3 follows message 2 when using the DSC system for calls initiated byship stations requiring a semi-automatic or automatic connection (see Table 4.10.1 and4.10.2) and contains the public switched network number (e.g. telephone number). Inthis case the format specifier used is symbol No. 123.

8.3.3.1 This number is coded by up to nine symbols in a manner similar to that shownin Table 2, except that the first character transmitted should be either symbol No. 105 orNo. 106 to indicate whether the network number contains an odd or even number ofsignificant digits. As an example, the number 0012345 would be coded as symbolnumbers 105 00 01 23 45 whereas the number 00123456 should be coded as symbolnumbers 106 00 12 34 56.

8.4 For “distress relay” including shore-to-ship alerts, “distress relayacknowledgement” and “distress acknowledgement” calls, the message formats areindicated in Tables 4.3, 4.4 and 4.2 respectively.

8.4.1 When sending a distress alert on behalf of another ship which is unable to sendits own alert, and where the identity of the station in distress is unknown, the distressrelay call should contain the symbol No. 126 transmitted five times for the“identification of the station in distress”.


8.5 Test calls

Test calls on the distress and safety frequencies for MF and HF and VHF channel 70may be conducted using the test call sequence in Table 4.7.

9 End of sequence

The “end of sequence” (EOS) character is transmitted three times in the DX positionand once in the RX position (see Fig. 1b)). It is one of the three unique characterscorresponding to symbol Nos. 117, 122 and 127 as follows:

9.1 symbol No. 117 if the call requires acknowledgement (Acknowledge RQ),used for individual and automatic/semiautomatic calls only;

9.2 symbol No. 122 if the sequence is an answer to a call that requiresacknowledgement (Acknowledge BQ), used for individual and automatic/semiautomatic calls and all distress relay acknowledgements;

9.3 symbol No. 127 for all other calls.

10 Error-check character

10.1 The error-check character (ECC) is the final character transmitted and it servesto check the entire sequence for the presence of errors which are undetected by the ten-unit error-detecting code and the time diversity employed.

10.2 The seven information bits of the ECC shall be equal to the least significant bitof the modulo-2 sums of the corresponding bits of all information characters (i.e. evenvertical parity). The format specifier and the EOS characters are considered to beinformation characters. The phasing characters and the retransmission (RX) charactersshall not be considered to be information characters. Only one format specifiercharacter and one EOS character should be used in constructing the ECC. The ECCshall also be sent in the DX and RX positions.

10.3 Automatic acknowledgement transmissions should not start unless the ECC isreceived and decoded correctly. A received ECC which does not match that calculatedfrom the received information characters may be ignored if this was due to an errordetected in the ten-unit error-detecting code of the information characters which wascorrectable by use of the time diversity code.

10.4 The receiver decoder should provide maximum utilization of the receivedsignal, including use of the error-check character.

368 Maritime Manual

11 Distress alert attempt

11.1 Distress alerts may be transmitted as a single frequency or a multi-frequencycall attempt preceded by a dot pattern. MF/HF equipment should be capable of usingboth single and multi-frequency call attempts. Where a distress alert attempt containsmore than one consecutive distress alert on the same frequency (see RecommendationITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3), these consecutive alerts should be transmitted with nogap between the end of one call and the start of the dot pattern of the following call toenable bit synchronization to be maintained (see Fig. 1c)). Multi-frequency callattempts should always include at least the MF and HF 8 MHz band DSC distress andsafety frequencies.

11.2 A distress alert should be activated only by means of a dedicated distressbutton which should be clearly identified and be protected against inadvertent operationwith a spring loaded lid or cover. The initiation of a distress alert should at least requiretwo independent actions.

11.3 Calls with format specifier “distress” or category “distress”, “urgency” and“safety” should be initiated manually only. This applies also for ships equipped forautomatic DSC operation. For automatic repetition of distress alerts seeRecommendation ITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3 and 3.3.5.

11.4 Immediately following a distress alert a DSC expansion message givingenhanced position resolution according to Recommendation ITU-R M.821 should betransmitted in the following manner.

11.4.1 For a single frequency distress alert attempt the expansion message should betransmitted immediately after the last of five consecutive distress alerts.

11.4.2 For a multi-frequency distress alert attempt the expansion message should betransmitted immediately after each distress alert.

12 Shipborne human machine interface (HMI)

12.1 Shipborne aural alarm

Shipborne alarms should start softly and increase in volume if not silenced by theoperator. This will give the operator the opportunity to acknowledge the alarm withoutinterrupting the ship’s current communications. It should be possible for the operator todisable all audible alarms except those of distress, priority and urgency.

Distress and urgency calls should have a distinctive two tone alarm. The alarm shouldconsist of two substantially sinusoidal audio-frequency tones, transmitted alternately.One tone should have a frequency of 2 200 Hz and the other a frequency of 1 300 Hz.The duration of each tone should be 250 ms.


Distress calls and urgency calls should activate an alarm. For HF and MF distress calls,the alarm should activate only when a distress alert, distress acknowledgement, or adistress relay is received and the distress position is within 500 nm (926 km) of thereceiving vessel’s position, or if the distress position is in the polar areas (latitudegreater than 70 N or 70 S). The alarm should also activate when the call is receivedand the distance between the vessel in distress and the receiving vessel cannot bedetermined.

NOTE 1 – Disabling of aural alarm does not affect handling of call.

For geographic area calls, the alarm appropriate to the category should activate whenthe receiving station’s position is within the area specified by the call or the receivingstation’s position is not known. The alarm should not be activated where duplicatedistress relay calls are received within one hour. A duplicate distress relay call is onehaving format specifier all ships or geographic area that contains identical messageinformation, as defined in § 8.1 and an identical distress MMSI.

12.2 Inactivity timer

During normal operation, the equipment should include an inactivity timer to return theDSC system display to default or standby mode if the operator is in a menu where DSCcall reception is disabled and does not make any selections or changes for 10 min.

12.3 Display

The information on the display should be visible in all shipboard lighting conditions. Itshould have the means to display, in plain language, the information contained in thereceived call. For Class A/B DSC equipment, the display should have a minimum of160 characters in two or more lines.

12.4 MMSI

DSC equipment should not transmit any DSC call until own ship’s MMSI allocated tothe ship by the relevant administration has been configured and stored in the DSCequipment. Once stored, it should not be possible for the user to change the MMSIwithout advice from the manufacturer.

The DSC equipment should display own ship’s MMSI on start-up unless the MMSI hasnot been configured. If the MMSI has not been configured, the equipment will display awarning that the unit will not transmit any DSC calls until own ship’s MMSI is entered.The equipment should stay in this state until the operator confirms he has read thedisplay and input own ship’s MMSI.

The MMSI should be readily displayed on the HMI when the DSC equipment is on.

370 Maritime Manual

12.5 Disabling of DSC automatic channel switching function on VHF

Automatic switching to a subsequent communications channel on receipt of a DSC callmight in some cases disrupt important ongoing communications. Where such capabilityexists, a means for disabling that function should therefore be provided for all callsother than individual station calls of category distress or urgency. The DSC equipmentshould provide visual indication that the automatic switching function is disabled.

12.6 Data interface

DSC equipment should be provided with facilities for exchange of data from shipbornenavigational equipment or systems, or other shipborne equipment as necessary inaccordance with IEC 61162 for purposes including automatic position updating.

12.7 Position updating

DSC equipment should accept valid IEC 61162 position information including the timeat which the position was determined, from an external source utilizing the datainterface described in § 12.6, for automatic update of own ship’s DSC position.

The DSC equipment may also be provided with an internal electronic position fixingdevice. In which case, the DSC equipment should automatically switch to the internalsource if the external IEC 61162 position information is not valid or not available.

If the automatic position update is not available, a displayed and audible reminder tomanually update the position should occur before the position information is 4 h old.The displayed reminder should remain until position updating has been carried out. Anyposition information not updated for more than 23½ h should automatically be erased.

Own ship’s DSC position information and the source of that information (external,internal, or manually entered) should be displayed on the DSC equipment.

12.8 Geographic area entry

DSC equipment should be provided with means for transforming a geographical areaspecified by the user as a centre point and a range to the corresponding Mercator areacall format specified in § 5.3. The centre point should default to the ships positioninformation and the range should default to 500 nm (926 km). The transformation of theentered range and centre-point should result in the minimum rectangular area thatencompasses the entered data.

12.9 Medical transport and neutral ships and aircraft

The capability of using second telecommands “Ships and aircraft of States not parties toan armed conflict” and “Medical Transports” should not be available by default butonly after changing relevant parameters in the setup menu.

372 Maritime Manual

374 Maritime Manual

0493-04

FIGURE 4Example of operational flow chartTransmitting

Messagecomposition*

Transmitmessage

Receiving

Operation in general

No (Yes)

Yes (No)

Branching (decision)

Manual operation

Beginning or endof the procedures

This method may be used when either single channel receivers(without scanning) or multi-channel receivers are used.This method is preferable when scanning receivers are usedon DSC channels.Message composition flow chart is shown in Fig. 5b.

AcknowledgeBQ

AcknowledgeRQ

Scanning?

Addresserror free?

Addresscorresponds to astored address?

Receive and processmessage

Store message Receivemessage

Messagereceived error

free?

Addresscorresponds to astored address?

No

YesYes

ReceivedECC

matches?Indicate

ECC errorNo

Read informationof received

message

Yes

Yes (2)

No

No

Safetyrelated?

End ofsequence

Yes

Proceduresas given in RR

No

Messagecomposition

Messagecomposition with

unableto comply


acknowledgeBQ

Transmitmessage

End

Wait on workingfrequency/

channel

Able tocomply?

Allacceptable?

No

Yes Message composition*

Yes

Yes


new proposal

No(1)

*

(1)

(2)

No

Yes

No

Note – This chart is informative only.


0493-05

FIGURE 5Example of message composition flow chart

Distress

Area Group Specialsequences

Select address*

Enter self-identification**

Individualaddress*

Groupaddress*

Areaaddress*

Enter natureof distress

Includenature of dis-

tress?

Yes

No

Routine

Safety DistressUrgencyEnter self-identification**

Acknowl-edge reply?

Distresscoordinatesavailable?

Yes

No

No

Additionalinformation?

Allacceptable?

Enter distresscoordinates

and time ***

Entertelecommandinformation

Processorcopies message

No

No

No

YesTele-

command infor-mation?

YesSpecify

telecommandinformation?

Specify receiverfrequency

information

Receiverfrequency infor-

mation?

Transmitterfrequency infor-

mation?

Yes

No

Specifytransmitterfrequency

informationNo

No

No

Enter ship’sposition***

Entertelephonenumber

Ship’sposition infor-

mation?

Semi-automatic/

automatic ship-to-shore required?

Acknowl-edge RQ or BQ?

RQBQ

End of sequenceProcessor addsacknowledge

BQ

Processoradds end ofsequence

End ofmessage

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

For reply message, processor copiesself-identification of received message.The self-identification of a callingsequence is automatically entered.This may be entered automatically.

*

**

***

Processor addsacknowledge

RQ

IndividualIndividual* Area Group*

Distress ACK/relay, urgency, safety

All ships

Select address*

Note – This chart is informative only.

376 Maritime Manual

0493-06

–15°

–20°

15° 20°

a

–15° –10° –5°

–5°

–10°

E

N

S

c

–20°

10°

5°

0° 5° 10°

b

c

c

2 1 1 0 1 2 0 3 0 5

12 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 0 0 2 0 2 0 3 0

0

a)

b)

c)

a a

= 3° = 5°

= 10° = 10°

= 20° = 30°

FIGURE 6Geographic coordinates

W

Formatspecifier Category

Category

Category

Sector

a – 11° (South) a = 12° (East)

b = – 10° (South) b = 10° (East)

c = 10° (North) c = – 20° (West)

Formatspecifier

Formatspecifier


Legend for Tables 4.1 to 4.10.2

Symbol/expression Meaning

Required

Required for backward compatibility

Symbols 100-127 Symbols in accordance with Table 3

Area Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 5.3

Frequency Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.2.2

MMSI Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 5.2

Pos1 Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.1.2

Pos2 Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3.1



Pos5 Coded in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.821

UTC Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.1.3

n/a This field is not included in this call

ECC Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 10.2

expan1 Expansion sequence 1



Does not apply

NOTE 1 – For Class A and B all functions are identical for VHF and MF. HF does not apply toClass B.

TABLE 4.1

Distress alerts

Fre-quencyband Type

Applicable to Technical format of call sequence

Shipstation

Class A/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E Coast station

Formatspecifier

(2 identical)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

Rec. ITU-RM.821

expansionsequence

(9)

1 2 3 4

Natureof

distress(1)

Distresscoordi-nates

(5)Time

(2)

Subse-quent

commu-nications

(1)Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

VHF Distress(RT) 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 127 ECC 127 expan1

Distress(EPIRB) 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 127 ECC 127 expan1

MF/HF Distress(RT) 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 127 ECC 127 expan1

Distress(FEC) 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 127 ECC 127 expan1

Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence

Type Expansion data specifier(1)

Enhanced position resolution(4)

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

expan1 100 Pos5 127 ECC 127

TABLE 4.2

Distress acknowledgements

Type


Shipstation

Class A/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E

Coaststation

Formatspecifier(2 iden-

tical)

Cate-gory(1)

Self-ID

(5)(1)

Tele-command

(1)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

Rec. ITU-RM.821

expansionsequence

(9)

0 1 2 3 4

DistressMMSI

(5)

Nature ofdistress

(1)


(5)Time

(2)

Subse-quent

commu-nications

(1)

Fre-quencyband Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

VHF Distress acknowl-edgement (RT) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 127 ECC 127 expan1

Distress acknowl--edgement (EPIRB) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 127 ECC 127 expan1

MF Distress acknowl-edgement (RT) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 127 ECC 127 expan1

Distress acknowl-edgement (FEC) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 127 ECC 127 expan1

HF Distress acknowl-edgement (RT) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 127 ECC 127 expan1

Distress acknowl-edgement (FEC) 116 112 MMSI 110 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 127 ECC 127 expan1

(1) Distress acknowledgments where the transmitting MMSI and ship in distress MMSI are the same, themessage should be interpreted as a self Cancel operation. This should be displayed on all receivingstations. The function should be implemented on new equipment. (NOTE 1 – Class D and Eequipment should be capable of transmitting a self cancel.)

The message should match the received distressalert information, except for manuallygenerated distress acknowledgements by coaststations.




EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)


TABLE 4.3

Distress relays

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation


tical)Address

(5)

Cate-gory(1)

Self-ID(5)

Tele-command

(1)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

Rec. ITU-RM.821

expansionsequence

(9)

0 1 2 3 4

DistressMMSI

(5)

Nature ofdistress

(1)


(5)Time

(2)

Subse-quentcom-

munications(1)

Frequencyband Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

VHF Individual (RT) (1) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 117 ECC 117 expan2

Individual(EPIRB)

(1) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 117 ECC 117 expan2

Geographicarea (RT)

(1) 102 Zone 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 à 111 Pos1 UTC 100 127 ECC 127 expan1

Geographicarea (EPIRB)

(1) 102 Zone 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 127 ECC 127 expan1

All ships (RT) (1) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 127 ECC 127 expan1

All ships(EPIRB)

(1) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 127 ECC 127 expan1

MF/HF Individual (RT) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 117 ECC 117 expan2

Individual(FEC) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 117 ECC 117 expan2

Geographicarea (RT) 102 Zone 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 127 ECC 127 expan1

Geographicarea (FEC) 102 Zone 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 127 ECC 127 expan1

(1) This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.

TABLE 4.3 (end)

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation


tical)

Ad-dress

(5)

Cate-gory(1)

Self-ID(5)

Tele-command

(1)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

Rec. ITU-RM.821

expansionsequence

(9)

0 1 2 3 4

DistressMMSI

(5)

Nature ofdistress

(1)


(5)Time

(2)

Subse-quent

communica-tions(1)


MF/HF(End )

All ships(RT) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 127 ECC 127 expan1

All ships(FEC) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 127 ECC 127 expan1

The message should match the receiveddistress alert information, except for manuallygenerated relays observed or notified by non-DSC means.




EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)



TABLE 4.4Distress relay acknowledgements

Frequencyband Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation Format

specifier(2 iden-

tical)

Ad-dress

(5)

Cate-gory(1)

Self-ID(5)

Tele-command

(1)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

Rec. ITU-RM.821

expansionsequence

(9)

0 1 2 3 4

DistressMMSI

(5)

Nature ofdistress

(1)


(5)Time

(2)

Subse-quent

commu-nications


VHFIndividual(RT) (1) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 122 ECC 122 expan3Individual(EPIRB) (1) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 122 ECC 122 expan3All ships(RT) (1) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 100 122 ECC 122 expan3All ships(EPIRB) (1) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 Pos1 UTC 126 122 ECC 122 expan3

MF/HFIndividual(RT) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 122 ECC 122 expan3Individual(FEC) 120 MMSI 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 122 ECC 122 expan3All ships(RT) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 109 122 ECC 122 expan3All ships(FEC) 116 n/a 112 MMSI 112 MMSI 100 to 111 Pos1 UTC 113 122 ECC 122 expan3

(1) This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment. The message should match the received distressrelay call information.




EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)


TABLE 4.5

Urgency and safety calls – All ships

Frequencyband Type


Shipstation

Class A/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E

Coaststation

Formatspecifier

(2 identical)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

1 2

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)Frequency


VHF All modes RT (2) 116 108 or 110 MMSI 100 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

Duplex RT(1) 116 108 or 110 MMSI 101 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

Medical transports 116 110 MMSI 100 111 Frequency 127 ECC 127

Ships and aircraft(Res. 18) 116 110 MMSI 100 110 Frequency 127 ECC 127

MF/HF J3E RT 116 108 or 110 MMSI 109 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

F1B FEC 116 108 or 110 MMSI 113 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

(1) See § 8.3.1.3.(2) This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.

TABLE 4.6

Urgency and safety – Geographic area calls

Frequencyband Type


Shipstation

Class A/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E

Coaststation

Formatspecifier

(2 identical)Address

(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

1 2

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Fre-quency


MF/HFJ3E (RT) 102 Area 108 or 110 MMSI 109 126 Fre-

quency 127 ECC 127

F1B (FEC) 102 Area 108 or 110 MMSI 113 126 Fre-quency 127 ECC 127

Medical transports 102 Area 110 MMSI 109 or 113 111 Fre-quency 127 ECC 127

Ships and aircraft(Res. 18) 102 Area 110 MMSI 109 or 113 110 Fre-

quency 127 ECC 127

TABLE 4.7

Urgency and safety – Individual calls and their acknowledgements

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation

Formatspecifier


(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

1 2 3

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequencyor pos

number(6)

Time(2)


VHF All modes RT 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 100 126 Frequency n/a 117 ECC 117

Duplex RT(1) 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 101 126 Frequency n/a 117 ECC 117

RTacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 100 126 Frequency n/a 122 ECC 122

Unable to complyacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 104 100 to 109 Frequency n/a 122 ECC 122

Position request 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 121 126 Pos3 n/a 117 ECC 117

Positionacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 121 126 Pos4 UTC 122 ECC 122

Test 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 118 126 126 n/a 117 ECC 117

Testacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 118 126 126 n/a 122 ECC 122

TABLE 4.7 (end)

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation

Formatspecifier


(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

1 2 3

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequencyor pos

number(6)

Time(2)


EOS(2 iden-

tical)

MF/HF J3E RT 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 109 126 Frequency n/a 117 ECC 117

J3E RT with posnumber 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 109 126 Pos2 n/a 117 ECC 117

J3E RTacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 109 126 Frequency n/a 122 ECC 122

F1B FEC or ARQ 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115 126 Frequency n/a 117 ECC 117

F1B FEC or ARQwith pos number 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115 126 Pos2 n/a 117 ECC 117

F1B FEC or ARQacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115 126 Frequency n/a 122 ECC 122

Unable to complyacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 or 110 MMSI 104 100 to 109 Frequency n/a 122 ECC 122

Position request 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 121 126 Pos3 n/a 117 ECC 117

Positionacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 121 126 Pos4 UTC 122 ECC 122

Test 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 118 126 126 n/a 117 ECC 117

Testacknowledgement 120 MMSI 108 MMSI 118 126 126 n/a 122 ECC 122

(1) See § 8.3.1.3.

TABLE 4.8

Routine group calls

Frequencyband Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation

Formatspecifier


(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

1 2

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequency


VHF All mode RT 114 MMSI 100 MMSI 100 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

Duplex RT(1) 114 MMSI 100 MMSI 101 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

MF/HF J3E RT 114 MMSI 100 MMSI 109 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

F1B FEC 114 MMSI 100 MMSI 113 126 Frequency 127 ECC 127

(1) See § 8.3.1.3.

TABLE 4.9

Routine individual calls and their acknowledgements

Frequency

band Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation

Formatspecifier


(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

1 2

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequencyor pos

number(6)Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

VHF All mode RT 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 100 126 Frequency 117 ECC 117

Duplex RT(1) 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 101 126 Frequency 117 ECC 117

RT acknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 100 126 Frequency 122 ECC 122

Data 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 106 126 Frequency 117 ECC 117

Data acknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 106 126 Frequency 122 ECC 122

Unable to complyacknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 104 100 to 109 Frequency 122 ECC 122

Polling 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 103 126 126 117 ECC 117

Polling acknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 103 126 126 122 ECC 122

TABLE 4.9 (end)

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass

D

ShipstationClass

ECoaststation


tical)Address

(5)

Cate-gory(1)

Self-ID(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 identical)

1 2

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequencyor pos

number(6)


MF/HF J3E RT 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 109 126 Frequency 117 ECC 117

J3E RT with pos number 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 109 126 Pos2 117 ECC 117

J3E RT acknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 109 126 Frequency 122 ECC 122

F1B FEC, ARQ or data 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 113, 115, 106 126 Frequency 117 ECC 117

FEC, ARQ or data withpos number 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 113, 115, 106 126 Pos2 117 ECC 117

F1B FEC, ARQ or dataacknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 113, 115, 106 126 Frequency 122 ECC 122

Unable to complyacknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 104 100 à 109 Frequency 122 ECC 122

Polling 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 103 126 126 117 ECC 117

Polling acknowledgement 120 MMSI 100 MMSI 103 126 126 122 ECC 122

(1) See § 8.3.1.3.

TABLE 4.10.1

Semi/auto VHF (optional)

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E

Coaststation Format

specifier(2 iden-

tical)Address

(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

1 2 3

1st tele-command

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)Frequency

(3)Number

(2-9)Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

Request (2) (2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 100, 101, 106 126 Frequency Number 117 ECC 117

Able to complyacknowledgement

(2) (2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 100, 101, 106 126 Frequency Number 122 ECC 122

Start of call(on working channel)

(2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 100, 101, 106 126 Frequency Number 127 ECC 127

Unable to complyacknowledgement

(2) (2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 104 100-109 Frequency Number 122 ECC 122

End of call request(on working channel)

(2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 105 126 Frequency Number 117 ECC 117

End of callacknowledgement(on working channel)(1)

(2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 105 126 Duration Number 122 ECC 122

(1) Upon call completion the coast station may send the end of call acknowledgement without a request from the ship station. The EOS symbol being 127.(2) This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.

NOTE 1 – See Recommendation ITU-R M.689.

NOTE 2 – For Class D symbol 123 does not need to be displayed.

TABLE 4.10.2Semi/auto MF/HF (optional)

Type


ShipstationClassA/B

ShipstationClass D

ShipstationClass E

Coaststation


tical)Address

(5)Category

(1)Self-ID

(5)

Message

EOS(1)

ECC(1)

EOS(2 iden-

tical)

1 2 3

1st telecommand

(1)

2nd tele-command

(1)

Frequencyor pos

number(6)

Number(2-9)Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

J3E RT/F1B FEC/ARQ

Request coast station 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 Frequency Number 117 ECC 117

Request ship station 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 126 or Pos2 Number 117 ECC 117

Able to complyacknowledgement 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 Frequency Number 122 ECC 122

Signal strength test by ship(on working channel)(1) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 Frequency Number 117 ECC 117

Coast station acknowledgementwith new working frequency(1) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 New

frequency Number 122 ECC 122

Call start: Coast stationacknowledgement with sameworking frequency(1)

123 MMSI 100 MMSI 109, 113, 115 126 Samefrequency Number 122 ECC 122

Unable to comply 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 104 100 a 109 Frequency Number 122 ECC 122

End of call request (on workingchannel) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 105 126 Frequency Number 117 ECC 117

End of call acknowledgement (onworking channel)(2) 123 MMSI 100 MMSI 105 126 Duration Number 122 ECC 122

(1) This call involves signal strength testing. The ship requests call by sending the coast station its position. Once the ship or coast station is able to comply the ship station sends test DSCs on theworking frequency. If the coast station acknowledges with a new working frequency, the ship station sends a test DSC on the new frequency. When the coast station acknowledges with anunchanged frequency, the subsequent communication may begin.

(2) Upon call completion the coast station may send the end of call acknowledgement without a request from the ship station. The EOS symbol being 127.

NOTE 1 – See Recommendation ITU-R M.1082.

NOTE 2 – For Class E symbol 123 does not need to be displayed.

392 Maritime Manual

TABLE 5

Frequency or channel information

TABLE 6

Position information (Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3)

Frequency012

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

The frequency in multiples of 100 Hz as indicated bythe figures for the digits HM, TM, M, H, T, U. Thisshould be used for MF, HF equipment.

3 X X X X X The HF/MF working channel number indicated bythe values of the digits TM, M, H, T and U. Thisshould be used for backward compatibility in receiveonly mode.

Channels 8 X X X X X Only used for Recommendation ITU-R M.586equipment.

9 0 X(1) X X X The VHF working channel number indicated by thevalues of the digits M, H, T and U.

HM TM M H T U

Character3

Character2

Character1(2)

(1) If the M digit is 1 this indicates that the ship stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channelfrequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 2 this indicates that the coast stations transmittingfrequency is being used as a simplex channel frequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 0, thisindicates the frequency being used is in accordance with RR Appendix 18 for both single and two frequencychannels.

(2) Character 1 is the last character transmitted.

Quadrantdigit

NE 0NO 1SE 2SO 3

Latitude Longitude

Tensof

degrees

Unitsof

degrees

Tensof

minutes

Unitsof

minutes

Hundredsof

degrees

Tensof

degrees

Unitsof

degrees

Tensof

minutes

Unitsof

minutes

55 X X X X X X X X X X

Character6

Character5

Character4

Character3

Character2

Character5(1)

(1) Character 1 is the last character transmitted.


Annex 2

Equipment classes

1 Equipment classes only apply to shipborne equipment

Class A equipment, which includes all the facilities defined in Annex 1, will complywith the IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for MF/HF installations and/or VHFinstallations.

Class B equipment providing minimum facilities for equipment on ships not required touse Class A equipment and complying with the minimum IMO GMDSS carriagerequirements for MF and/or VHF installations.

Class D equipment is intended to provide minimum facilities for VHF DSC distress,urgency and safety as well as routing calling and reception, not necessarily in fullaccordance with IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for VHF installations.

Class E equipment is intended to provide minimum facilities for MF and/or HF DSCdistress, urgency and safety as well as routine calling and reception, not necessarily infull accordance with IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for MF/HF installations.

Class A and Class B equipment may support the optional semi-automatic/automaticservice in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.689, ITU-R M.1082 andTables 4.10.1 and 4.10.2 and are encouraged to do so.

Class D and Class E equipment may also support the optional semi-automatic/automaticservice.

NOTE 1 – Class C, F and G equipment as defined in earlier versions of this Recommendation(e.g., Recommendations ITU-R M.493-5 (Geneva, 1992) and ITU-R M.493-7 (Geneva, 1995))did not provide vital minimum DSC functions (transmitting and receiving distress alerts) andhave therefore been withdrawn.

394 Maritime Manual

2 Class requirements for B, D and E are given in § 3, 4 and 5 (SeeTables 4.1 to 4.10.2 for technical requirements)

3 Class B (MF and/or VHF only)

3.1 Transmit capabilities

3.1.1 Format specifier: DistressAll shipsGeographic areaIndividual stationSemi-automatic/automatic serviceShips having common interest (group).

3.1.2 The numerical identification of the called station (address).

3.1.3 Category: DistressUrgencySafetyRoutine.

3.1.4 Self-identification (automatically inserted).

3.1.5 Messages

3.1.5.1 For distress alerts:

Message 1: Nature of distress, defaulting to undesignated distress

Message 2: Distress coordinates

Message 3: Time for last position update

Message 4: Type of subsequent communication:MF: J3EVHF: F3E/G3E simplex.

3.1.5.2 For distress relay calls:

First telecommand: Distress relay

Identification of the ship: As defined in Annex 1

Messages 1 to 4: As § 3.1.5.1.


3.1.5.3 For distress acknowledgement calls:

First telecommand: Distress acknowledgement

Identification of the ship: As defined in Annex 1

Messages 1 to 4: As § 3.1.5.1.

3.1.5.4 For all other calls:

First telecommand: Unable to comply.

MF: For individual station calls, J3E or “test” (seeAnnex 1 § 8.4); for calls using thesemi-automatic/automatic MF-services, J3Eor “end of call”.

VHF: For individual station calls, F3E/G3E or“polling” (see Annex 1 § 8.4); for calls usingthe semi-automatic/automatic VHF-servicesF3E/G3E or “end of call”.

Second telecommand: No information.

Frequency/channel or ship’s position: As defined in Annex 1.

Selection information (semi-automatic/automatic service): Telephone number of public telephone subscriber.

3.1.6 End of sequence character: As defined in Annex 1.

3.2 Receive capabilities

3.2.1 Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 3.1plus all distress relay calls having the format specifier “geographical area calls”, alldistress acknowledgement calls and all “unable to comply” calls.

3.2.2 Audible alarm upon reception of any DSC call.

396 Maritime Manual

4 Class D (VHF only)1


4.1.1 Format specifier: DistressAll shipsIndividual stationShips having common interest (group).




4.1.5 Messages

4.1.5.1 For distress calls:




Message 4: Type of subsequent communication: F3E/G3E simplex.


First telecommand: F3E/G3E simplex Unable to comply Polling.


Frequency/channel information: VHF working channel, defaulting tochannel 16 for urgency and safety calls and arecognized intership channel(RR Appendix 18) for all other calls.


_______________1 Requirements for sub-category hand-held equipment are specified in Annex 1 Tables 4.1

to 4.10.2.



Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 4.1 plus alldistress relay calls except those having the format specifier “geographical area calls”,all distress acknowledgement calls and all “unable to comply” calls.

5 Class E (MF and/or HF only)


5.1.1 Format specifier: DistressGeographic areaIndividual stationShips having common interest (group).




5.1.5 Messages

5.1.5.1 For distress calls:




Message 4: Type of subsequent communication J3E.


First telecommand: J3E telephonyUnable to complyTest.


Frequency/channel information: MF/HF working channel, on MF defaulting to2 182 kHz for urgency and safety calls.

398 Maritime Manual



Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 5.1 plus alldistress relay calls having the format specifier “geographical area calls”, all distressacknowledgement calls and all “unable to comply” calls.



Assignment and use of maritime mobile service identities

(1982-1986-1990-2003-2007-2009)


considering

a) the need for a unique ship identity for safety and telecommunication purposes;

b) that the unique number should be the maritime mobile service identity(MMSI);

c) the need for this identity to be usable with automated radiocommunicationsystems;

d) that the identities assigned to ship stations, coast stations, aircraft participatingin search and rescue operations, aids to navigation, craft associated with a parent ship,and used for establishing group calls should be of a similar nature;

e) that it is possible to use the MMSI to establish a telephone call to a ship afterrouting through the public switched networks to an appropriate coast station;

f) that the public switched networks in many countries have restrictions on themaximum number of digits that may be dialled or keyed to identify the called shipstation and the routing coast station, which would prevent the translation of thecomplete MMSI directly into a diallable number for the ship that is compliant withITU-T Recommendation E.164;

g) that whatever restrictions may be required should, in the interests of thedevelopment of automatic shore-to-ship operations, be as few as possible;

h) that mobile-satellite systems enable the maritime community to participate inor interwork with international public correspondence telecommunication systems on afully automatic basis, utilizing the numbering, naming and addressing schemepertaining to the service being used;

j) that the current generation of mobile-satellite systems participating in theglobal maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) have signalling and routingcharacteristics requiring ships using these networks to have an MMSI ending with threezeroes;

400 Maritime Manual

k) that the numbering scheme specified for future generations of mobile-satellitesystems participating in the GMDSS will be designed to meet the needs of theinternational public correspondence service and is unlikely to offer the facility toincorporate any part of the MMSI in a diallable number for a ship,

recommends

1 that ships complying with the International Convention for the Safety of Lifeat Sea, 1974, as amended, and other ships equipped with automatedradiocommunication systems, including Automatic Identification Systems (AIS),Digital Selective Calling (DSC), and/or carrying alerting devices of the GMDSS shouldbe assigned maritime mobile service identities in accordance with Annexes 1, 2, 3, 4 or5 to this Recommendation, as appropriate;

2 that ship, coast stations, and aircraft participating in search and rescueoperations using digital selective calling equipment in accordance withRecommendation ITU-R M.493 should use their 9-digit numerical identities transmittedas a 10-digit address/self-identity, normally with a digit 0 added at the end of theidentity (see also Recommendation ITU-R M.1080);

3 that ship, coast stations, and non-shipborne stations using AIS equipment inaccordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 should use their 9-digit numericalidentities;

4 for the purpose of ensuring compatibility with the GMDSS, the numbers,names and addresses of ship earth stations participating in internationaltelecommunication services should be made readily available to all authorized entitiesby the telecommunication service providers concerned;

5 that the guidance given in Annex 6 to this Recommendation should beemployed regarding the reuse of MMSI, particularly those with three trailing zeroes.

Annex 1

Assignment of identification to ship station

1 Ships participating in the maritime radio services mentioned in recommends 1should be assigned a nine digit unique ship station identity in the formatM1I2D3X4X5X6X7X8X9 where in the first three digits represent the MaritimeIdentification Digits (MID) and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID denotes thegeographical area of the administration responsible for the ship station so identified.


2 Restrictions may apply with respect to the maximum number of digits, whichcan be transmitted on some national telex and/or telephone networks for the purpose ofship station identification.

3 The maximum number of digits that could be transmitted over the nationalnetworks of many countries for the purpose of determining ship station identity was six.The digits carried on the network to represent the ship station identity are referred to asthe “ship station number” in this text and in the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. Theuse of the techniques described below should have made it possible for the coaststations of such countries to engage in the automatic connection of calls to ship stations.

To obtain the required nine digit ship station identity a series of trailing zeros wouldhave to be added automatically to the ship station number by the coast station in orderto complete a shore-originated telephone call, for example, carried over the publicswitched telephone network:

Ship station number Ship station identity

M1I2D3X4X5X6 M1I2D3X4X5X6070809

4 In accordance with the above, and the relevant ITU-T Recommendations, anumbering plan was instituted for Inmarsat Standard B, C and M systems, which alsorequires that MMSI with three trailing zeroes be assigned to ships fitting standard B, Cand M ship earth stations.

5 The above restrictions do not necessarily apply to Inmarsat Standard Csystems, as they are not diallable terminals from the public switched telephone networkbut are only data terminals.

6 With respect to Inmarsat Standard B and M systems and as long as the aboverestrictions apply, ships reasonably expected to be affected by the above limitationsshould only be assigned ship station identities with X7X8X9 000.

7 Group ship station call identities for calling simultaneously more than one shipare formed as follows:

01M2I3D4X5X6X7X8X9

where the first figure is zero and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents onlythe territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the group ship stationcall identity and does not therefore prevent group calls to fleets containing more thanone ship nationality.

402 Maritime Manual

8 With the evolution of global mobile-satellite systems, ships earth stations areable to participate in international public correspondence telecommunication services.Ship earth stations having this functionality may be assigned internationaltelecommunication numbers that have no direct correspondence with the ship stationMMSI. Those authorized to assign the numbers, names and addresses associated withsuch ship earth stations should maintain a record of the cross reference relationshipswith the MMSI, for example in an appropriate database. For the purposes of GMDSSthe details of these relationships should be made available to authorized entities such asbut not limited to the Rescue Coordination Centres (RCC)1. Such availability should beon an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year.

Annex 2

Assignment of identification to coast station

1 Coast stations and other stations on land participating in the maritime radioservices mentioned in recommends 2 should be assigned a nine-digit unique coaststation identity in the format 0102M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 representthe MID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID reflects the territory or geographicalarea in which the coast station or coast earth station is located.

2 As the number of coast stations decreases in many countries, an administrationmay wish to assign MMSI of the format above to harbour radio stations, pilot stations,system identities and other stations participating in the maritime radio services. Thestations concerned should be located on land or on an island in order to use the00MIDXXXX format.

3 The administration may use the sixth digit to further differentiate betweencertain specific uses of this class of MMSI, as shown in the example applicationsbelow:

a) 00MID1XXX Coast radio stations

b) 00MID2XXX Harbour radio stations

c) 00MID3XXX Pilot stations, etc.

4 This format scheme creates blocks of 999 numbers for each category ofstation, however the method is optional and should be used only as a guidance. Manyother possibilities exist if the administration concerned wishes to augment the scheme.

_______________1 IMO Resolution A.1001(25) requires that distress priority communications in these systems

should, as far as possible, be routed automatically to an RCC.


5 Group coast station call identities for calling simultaneously more than onecoast station are formed as a subset of coast station identities, as follows:

0102M3I4D5X6X7X8X9

where the first two figures are zeros and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MIDrepresents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning thegroup coast station call identity. The identity may be assigned to stations of oneadministration which are located in only one geographical region as indicated in therelevant ITU-T Recommendations.

6 The combination 0102M3I4D506070809 should be reserved for a Group CoastStation Identity and should address all 00MIDXXXX stations within the administration.The administration may further augment this use with additional Group Call identities,i.e. 00MID1111, etc.

7 For the purpose of the GMDSS the details of these MMSI assignments shouldbe made available to authorized entities such as, but not limited to, RCC. Suchavailability should be on an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year.

8 The combination 010293949506070809 is reserved for the All Coast StationsIdentity and should address all VHF 00XXXXXXX stations. It is not applicable to MFor HF coast stations.

Annex 3

Assignment of identification to aircraft

1 When an aircraft is required to use maritime mobile service identities for thepurposes of conducting search and rescue communications with stations in the maritimemobile service, the responsible administration should assign a nine-digit unique aircraftidentity, in the format 111213M4I5D6X7X8X9 where the digits 4, 5 and 6 represent theMID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory orgeographical area of the administration assigning the aircraft call identity.

2 The format shown above will accommodate 999 aircraft per MID. If theadministration concerned has more Search and Rescue (SAR) aircraft than 999 theymay use an additional country code (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU.

3 The administration may use the seventh digit to differentiate between certainspecific uses of this class of MMSI, as shown in the example applications below:a) 111MID1XX Fixed-wing aircraftb) 111MID5XX Helicopters

404 Maritime Manual

4 This format scheme creates blocks of 99 numbers for each of the category ofstations, however, the method shown here is optional.

5 The combination 111213M4I5D6070809 should be reserved for a Group AircraftIdentity and should address all 111MIDXXX stations within the administration. Theadministration may further augment this with additional Group Call identities,i.e. 111MID111, etc.

6 For the purpose of search and rescue the details of these MMSI assignmentsshould be made available to authorized entities such as, but not limited to, RCC. Suchavailability should be on an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year.

7 The MMSI assigned to SAR aircraft should also be available from the ITUMARS database (see Radio Regulations (RR) No. 20.16).

Annex 4

Assignment of identification to AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN)

1 When a means of automatic identification is required for a station aidingnavigation at sea, the responsible administration should assign a nine-digit uniquenumber in the format 9192M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 represent theMID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory orgeographical area of the administration assigning the call identity for the navigationalaid.

2 The format shown above applies to all types of AtoN as listed in the mostrecent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1371, see AIS Message 21 parameter“Type of aids to navigation” and the associated table for this parameter. This format isused for all AIS stations for the transmission of messages that relate to AtoN. In thecase where an AIS base station is collocated with an AIS AtoN station the messagesrelated to the base station operation should be assigned an identification number in theformat given in Annex 2.

3 The format scheme shown above will accommodate 10 000 AtoN per MID. Ifthe administration concerned has more than 10 000 they may use an additional countrycode (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU giving a further 10 000 identities.

4 The administration may use the sixth digit to differentiate between certainspecific uses of the MMSI, as shown in the example applications below:

a) 99MID1XXX Physical AIS AtoN

b) 99MID6XXX Virtual AIS AtoN


5 This format scheme creates blocks of 999 numbers for each category ofstation, however the method shown here is optional and should be used only as aguidance.

6 In addition to the use of the sixth digit to differentiate between specificnavigational aids as explained above, the seventh digit may be used for nationalpurposes, to define areas where the AIS AtoN are located or types of AIS AtoN to thediscretion of the administration concerned.

7 The details of these MMSI assignments should be made available but notlimited to the International Association of Marine Aids to Navigation and LighthouseAuthorities (IALA) and appropriate national authorities.

8 The assigned MMSI to aids of navigation should also be available from theITU MARS database (see RR No. 20.16).

Annex 5

Assignment of identification to craft associated with a parent ship

1 Craft associated with a parent ship, need unique identification. These craftswhich participate in the maritime mobile service should be assigned a nine-digit uniquenumber in the format 9182M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 represent theMID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory orgeographical area of the administration assigning the call identity for the craftassociated with a parent ship.

2 This numbering format is only valid for devices on board craft associated witha parent ship. A craft may carry multiple devices which would be identified by theMMSI assigned to the craft. These devices may be located in lifeboats, life-rafts, MOB-boats or other craft belonging to a parent ship.

3 A unique MMSI should be assigned for each craft associated with a parentship and will have to be separately registered and linked to the MMSI of the parentship.

4 The format scheme shown above will accommodate 10 000 crafts associatedwith parent ships per MID. If the administration concerned has more than 10 000 theymay use an additional country code (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU giving afurther 10 000 identities.

5 The assigned MMSI to these craft associated with a parent ship should also beavailable from the ITU MARS database (see RR No. 20.16).

406 Maritime Manual

Annex 6

Guidance on the conservation and management of MMSI

1 Administrations should employ the following measures to manage the limitedMMSI numbering resource, particularly for the reuse of MMSI with three trailingzeroes, in order to avoid depletion of MID and the corresponding MMSI series:

a) implement effective national procedures for MMSI assignment andregistration;

b) provide the Bureau with regular updates of assigned numbers in conformitywith RR No. 20.16;

c) ensure that the period from the expiration of the ship station licence associatedwith the number assignment until the date of reassignment of that number issufficient for the changes to be incorporated in the relevant ITU servicepublications, taking into account the standard intervals between successivepublished editions;

d) ensure that when ships move from the flag of registration of oneadministration to that of another administration, all of the assigned means ofship station identification, including the MMSI, are reassigned as appropriateand that the changes are notified to the Bureau as soon as possible(see RR No. 20.16).

2 It is essential for a lapsed number assignment to remain dormant before takingit back into use again, in order to avoid confusion over the origin of distresscommunications or over the responsible parties for billing and reconciling accounts formaritime radiocommunications.

3 The objective is to ensure that a period of five years should pass before alapsed MMSI is reused and entered into national and international databases pursuant toRR No. 20.16.

4 Administrations could also apply the above procedures to MMSI assignedwith 2, 1 or no trailing zeroes in the interests of the long term conservation of MMSIand MID resources. However these number formats are normally not critical to theassignment of an additional MID to an administration (see Section VI of RRArticle 19).



Technical characteristics for searchand rescue radar transponders

(1986-1990-1992-1994-2006)

Scope

This Recommendation contains technical characteristics for search and rescue radartransponders (SART). A SART is used for locating a ship or survival craft at sea whenit is in distress.

A ship or survival craft at sea can use a SART to indicate that it is in distress. TheSART can be detected by radars operating in the 9 GHz frequency band.


considering

a) that Regulations III/6.2.2 and IV/7.1.3 of the 1988 Amendments to theInternational Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974 require thecarriage of radar transponders operating in the 9 GHz frequency band for locating theship when it is in distress at sea or its survival craft;

b) that such radar transponders may also be used by ships not subject to the 1974SOLAS Convention; some of these radar transponders may be installed with a float-freerelease and activation arrangement or with a float-free Emergency Position IndicatingRadio Beacon (EPIRB) or float-free satellite EPIRB;

c) that Regulations V/19 of the 2000 Amendments to the 1974 SOLASConvention require that passenger ships irrespective of size and cargo ships of300 gross tonnage and upwards carry a radar installation or if they are of 5 000 grosstonnage and upwards, two radar installations; from 1 February 1995, the radarinstallation or at least one of the radar installations shall be capable of operating in the9 GHz frequency band;

d) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has adopted aRecommendation on performance standards for survival craft radar transponders for usein search and rescue operations (Resolution A.802(19));

408 Maritime Manual

e) that location is part of the basic requirements for the GMDSS;

f) that a locating system would be more effective if the radar transponder was inconformity with internationally agreed technical and operating characteristics,

recommends

1 that the technical characteristics of search and rescue radar transponders(SART) operating in the frequency range 9 200-9500 MHz should be in accordancewith Annex 1;

2 that the maximum detection range of a SART having technical characteristicsin accordance with Annex 1 by a radar conforming with IMO Resolution MSC.192(79)should be assessed using its measured technical characteristics in conjunction with thetheoretical method given in Annex 2;

3 Notes 1 and 2 are part of this Recommendation.NOTE 1 – The propagation losses of a SART signal caused by a survival craft and its occupantsare explained in Annex 3.

NOTE 2 – The technical characteristics of circular polarization SARTs are described inAnnex 4.

Annex 1

Technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transpondersoperating over the band 9 200-9 500 MHz

1 Frequency: 9 200-9500 MHz.

2 Polarization: horizontal or circular.

3 Sweep rate: 5 s per 200 MHz, nominal.

4 The response signal should consist of 12 sweeps.

5 Form of sweep: sawtooth, forward sweep time: 7.5 s 1 s,return sweep time: 0.4 s 0.1 s.The response should commence with a returnsweep.

6 Pulse emission: 100 s nominal.

7 e.i.r.p.: not less than 400 mW (equivalent to 26 dBm).

8 Effective receiver sensitivity: better than –50 dBm (equivalent to 0.1 mW/m2)(see Note 1).


9 Duration of operation: 96 h in stand-by condition followed by 8 h oftransponder transmissions while beingcontinuously interrogated with a pulserepetition frequency of 1 kHz.

10 Temperature range: ambient: –20° C to 55° C,stowage: –30° C to +65° C.

11 Recovery time following excitation: 10 s or less.

12 Effective antenna height: 1 m (see Note 2).

13 Delay between receipt of radar signal and start of transmission: 0.5 s or less.

14 Antenna vertical beamwidth: at least 12.5° relative to the radartransponders’ horizontal plane.

15 Antenna azimuthal beamwidth: omnidirectional within 2 dB.NOTE 1 – Effective receiver sensitivity includes antenna gain.

– Effective receiver sensitivity of better than –50 dBm applies to interrogating radar pulses(medium and long) of 400 ns.

– Effective receiver sensitivity of better than –37 dBm applies to interrogating radar pulses(short) of 100 ns.

– The receiver should be capable of correct operation when subjected to the radiated field(28 dB(W/m2)) emitted from a shipborne radar complying with IMOResolution MSC.192(79) at any distance 20 m.

NOTE 2 – This effective antenna height is applicable for equipment required byRegulations III/6.2.2 and IV/7.1.3 of the 1988 Amendments to the 1974 SOLAS Convention.

Annex 2

The maximum detection range of a SART of given or measured e.i.r.p. and effectivereceiver sensitivity when deployed with a radar conforming with IMO ResolutionMSC.192(79) may be assessed using Fig. 1.

The essential parameters of the radar are:

– transmitter power 25 kW,

– antenna gain 30 dBi,

– antenna height 15 m,

– receiver sensitivity –94 dBm.

410 Maritime Manual

Figure 1 shows the propagation curves for SARTs of height 0.5 m, 1 m and 1.5 m in afairly calm sea (wave height 0.3 m). For rougher seas, the sea reflection coefficient isreduced and the propagation curves move back towards the free space line dependingon atmospheric refraction. For an SART of 1 m height, the maximum detection range isat least 5 NM.

The method of using Fig. 1 is as follows:

– calculate the radar received power (Pr) at range 1 NM using the formula:

Pr SART e.i.r.p. radar antenna gain ( /4 R)2

that is Pr (dBm) SART e.i.r.p. (dBm) –87 dB;

– set the calculated Pr against point A on the radar received power scale andcomplete the scale (10 dB per division);

– set the SART effective receiver sensitivity (ERS) on the transponder receivedpower scale and read the intercept with the appropriate propagation curve atthat level to obtain the radar to SART maximum detection range;

– take the –94 dBm level on the radar received power scale and read theintercept with the appropriate propagation curve at that level to obtain theSART to radar maximum detection range.

The smaller of the two maximum detection ranges so obtained is the requiredassessment of SART maximum detection range, which should be at least 5 NM asrequired by IMO Resolution A.802(19).

412 Maritime Manual

Annex 3

Effects of antenna height and obstruction of the signal path by a survivalcraft and its occupants on the detection range of SARTs

1 Introduction

This Annex discusses the effects on the propagation path of SART signals, taking intoaccount the height of the SART antenna above the surface of the sea and also theattenuation caused by the materials of the survival craft and its occupants.

2 Effects of SART antenna height on detection range

This Recommendation requires that the height of the installed SART antenna should beat least 1 m above the sea surface in order to obtain the five nautical mile detectionrange required by IMO Resolution A.802(19). Practical tests have confirmed thisperformance. Tests on a sample of six SARTs from different manufacturers gavedetection ranges between 8.2 NM and 9.2 NM with an antenna height of 1 m.

2.1 Tests have also shown the importance of maintaining a SART antenna heightof at least 1 m. The following results were obtained with a SART in a survival craft:

– SART lying flat on the floor: range 1.8 NM

– SART standing upright on the floor: range 2.5 NM

– SART floating in the water: range 2.0 NM

3 Effects of survival craft on SART signal

Tests have been made with a SART mounted on a survival craft to give a 1 m antennaheight, in order to determine whether the body of the survival craft and its occupantsmay cause an obstruction.

3.1 Figures 2-4 give the results of these tests carried out on two different modelsof an eight-man SOLAS life-raft. In each case, the SART was placed at the centre of aturntable in an open field site, and was triggered with a pulsed radar signal. Each set ofmeasurements was conducted with and without the life-raft and "survivors" present,keeping the SART at the centre of the turntable.

3.2 Figure 2 shows the results obtained from a SART mounted on a telescopicpole fitted to the life-raft’s antenna mounting. In this case, the SART antenna was levelwith the canopy support tube of the raft. One of the rafts had little effect on the SARTsignal, whereas the other (which has carbon in the material of the support tube) causeda dip in the signal through an angle of about 30°.


3.3 Figure 3 shows the results obtained with the same rafts, but with a SARTdesigned to hang from the support tube, inside the canopy of the raft. A smaller loss ofsignal was noted due to the carbon loaded tubes, as the signal was only passing throughthe vertical sections. Dips were also noted, however, due to the presence of retro-reflective tape on the outside of the life-raft canopies. On one raft, there was a severereduction in signal over a very small angle, due to the proximity of a Lithium batterypack mounted on the canopy for powering the life-raft location light.

3.4 Figure 4 shows the blanking effect caused by a survivor holding the SART atarm’s length. In this case however the SART height was only 0.5 m.

414 Maritime Manual

4

2

0

0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 360

7

8

0628-02

7.5

7.2

6.5

6.1

FIGURE 2Pole mounted SART

Azimuth angleSignal masked by carbon loaded

canopy support tube

Mounted on raft 1

Mounted on raft 2


2

0

180900

8

7

66

0628-03

7.2

6.5

6.1

FIGURE 3SART hung inside raft

Azimuth angleSignal masked by battery for light

Mounted in raft 1

Mounted in raft 2

7.5

Dips caused by reflective tapeand/or carbon in support tube

416 Maritime Manual

2

0 7

6

5

7

6

5

7

6

5

0628-04

6.5

6.1

FIGURE 4Hand-held SART

Azimuth angle

Hand held in raft 1

5.2


3.5 On each figure approximate detection ranges are given. These are derivedtheoretically assuming an 8 NM detection range for a 1 m height SART and a 7 NMrange for 0.5 m height.

3.6 It can be seen from the figures that best performance was obtained with thepole mounted SART where the reduction in detection range due to the survival craftwas generally no more than 0.5 NM. In all cases there was reduced performance overnarrow sectors of 1.5-2.0 NM but in practice with the survival craft moving in the seathis will not be a serious operational problem. The reduction shown in Fig. 4 caused bya person, will not be significant in practice as a person seated in a survival craft is lowerin height than 1 m.

3.7 The above results were obtained with the survival craft dry as it was on a testsite. Table 1 gives the propagation loss for the canopy and air tube cloths used in anumber of different manufacturers’ survival crafts. The last two entries give the losswhen the materials are sprayed with sea water. It can be seen that in the worst case theadditional loss for wet material was 3.35 dB which equates to a reduction in detectedrange of about a further 0.5 NM.

TABLE 1

Transmission loss through canopy of life-raft (measurement results)

Transmission loss (dB) vs. slant ofcanopy

Test Sample Thickness(mm)

Weight(kg/m2)

Slant

= 0° = 30° = 45° = 60°1 Canopy cloth of

company A0.18 0.22 0 –0.1 –0.2 0

2 Air tube cloth ofcompany A

0.53 0.7 –0.05 –0.05 –0.3 –0.2

3 Canopy cloth ofcompany B

0.25 0.27 0 –0.1 –0.15 –0.05

4 Air tube cloth ofcompany B

0.57 0.67 0 –0.4 –0.4 –0.45

5 Canopy cloth ofcompany C

0.26 0.3 –0.2 –0.5 –0.3 –0.4

6 Air tube cloth ofcompany C

0.54 0.67 –0.6 –1.4 –1.9 –2.4

418 Maritime Manual

TABLE 1 (end)

4 ConclusionsThe tests indicated that properly mounted SARTs will achieve the detection rangerequired by IMO, even allowing for the blanketing effects of the survival craft. There isno necessity to mount the SART more than 1 m above the sea particularly if the extraheight is likely to lead to difficulties by survivors in achieving the mounting, but infuture improved antenna mountings may be feasible giving additional detection range.

4.1 The tests did not consider the effect on SART performance of a radar reflectorbut it would be expected that this would seriously degrade the SART response.Survivors are advised not to deploy a SART and a radar reflector on the same survivalcraft because the reflector may obscure the SART.

Annex 4

Performance of circular polarization SARTs

Foreword

Horizontal polarization has been used as the method of polarization for SARTs. Recentexaminations in Japan have shown that circular polarization would be suitable for usewith SARTs. A SART using circular polarization with a helical antenna was made fortrial purposes, and water tank experiments and sea trials were conducted. The resultsshowed the superiority of circular polarization used with SARTs and it was concludedthat this will enable a reduction in the size of SARTs.

Test Sample Thickness(mm)

Weight(kg/m2)

Transmission loss (dB) vs. slant ofcanopySlant

= 0° = 30° = 45° = 60°7 Spraying salt

water(4.8% NaCl)over “1”

– – –0.35 –0.55 –0.95 –1.1

8 Spraying saltwater(4.8% NaCl)over “3”

– – –1.3 –1.9 –2.6 –3.4

Measurement freqency: 9.4 GHzSample size: 600 800 mm


1 Characteristics of SART signal in the tank tests

Measurements of the received power of the SART signal and observations of visibilityof the signal on radar PPI were carried out in an artificial waves water tank at a researchlaboratory in Japan. The results showed that circular polarization was superior tohorizontal polarization for SARTs.

2 Characteristics of SART signal in the on-sea trial

This experiment was conducted in 2000, in cooperation with ships and aircraft of themaritime authorities of Japan in Sagami Bay, by observing the visibility of the SARTsignal on the radars on board the ships and aircraft. In the meantime, the received powerof the SART signal was measured by a land-based radar. The following results wereobtained:

a) With aircraft radar, the maximum visible distance of the SART signal ofcircular polarization was 37 NM, while that of horizontal polarization was30 NM. This confirms the superiority of circular polarization.

b) With marine radar, the maximum visible distance of the SART signal ofcircular polarization was 14 NM, while that of horizontal polarization was11.5 NM. These results confirm the superiority of circular polarization.

c) With land-based marine radar, the result shown in Fig. 5 was obtained. TheSART of circular polarization was moved on the sea by an escorting smallvessel. The distance between the radar and the SART was changed. Thereceived power of the SART was measured by the land-based marine radar. InFig. 5, the black dots show the actually measured SART signal of circularpolarization, and dotted lines show the theoretical value of SART signal ofhorizontal polarization. The measured data always appears above thetheoretical value curve for “SART to radar”. The appearance of the SARTsignal of circular polarization on the radar PPI was stronger and clearer thanthat of horizontal polarization. These results confirm the superiority of circularpolarization. The reason is as follows: Because the electric field revolves,circular polarization is resolved in the horizontal polarization element and thevertical polarization element. For these two composition elements, thereflection characteristic of the surface of the sea is different. Therefore thecurve of reception strength when the direct wave and the surface of the seareflection wave interfere changes with distance. This phenomenon leads to thedetectable distance of a circular polarization wave SART increasing overhorizontal polarization SART by 30% or more.

420 Maritime Manual

FIGURE 5

Observed data of SART signal of circular polarization and theoretical valueof horizontal polarization

Furthermore, in 2004, measurements of the received power of a SART signal werecarried out in rough weather conditions using a marine radar of a research laboratory inJapan. As a result, it was confirmed that a SART with circular polarization was notinferior compared with that of horizontal polarization.



INTERNATIONAL MARITIME VHF RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM WITHAUTOMATIC FACILITIES BASED ON DSC SIGNALLING FORMAT**


(1990-1992-1994)Rec. ITU-R M.689-2


recommends

1. that the operational procedures described in Annex 1 be observed when operating aninternational radiotelephone system with automatic facilities based on the DSC signallingformat, and using the public correspondence channels listed in RR Appendix 18;

2. that the same RR Appendix 18 channel can be used for both automatic and manualoperation by the same coast station depending on the requirements of the ship stations;

3. that the technical characteristics of the ship and coast station equipment should be inaccordance with Annex 2.

ANNEX 1

Operational procedures

1. Introduction

These procedures are initiated by using DSC on the VHF calling channel and based onthe technical characteristics and operational procedures detailed in RecommendationsITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. Connection to the PSTN is effected using any appropriateVHF public correspondence working channel listed in RR Appendix 18 without in any wayimpairing their use for manual operation.

Appendix 1 illustrates the timing of the call set-up, calling and acknowledgementsequences described by these procedures in the ship-to-shore direction and in the shore-to-shipdirection.

_______________** Coast stations may also use other procedures with automatic facilities based on DSC signalling format

directly on VHF radiotelephone working channels.

422 Maritime Manual

2. Operational procedures in the ship-to-shore direction

2.1 Ship station initiates call

2.1.1 The user aboard the ship (hereafter referred to as the user) composes the callingsequence (see Note 1) on his DSC equipment as follows:

– selects the format specifier 123 (automatic/semi-automatic service);

– enters address (identification) of required VHF coast station;

– selects the category routine (100);

– (the ship station self-identification is entered automatically);

– selects first telecommand 101 (duplex F3E/G3E) or 100 (simplex F3E/G3E) or 106 (data)(see Note 2) and second telecommand as appropriate;

– inserts subscriber number required (e.g. telephone number);

– selects “end of sequence” signal “RQ”.

Note 1 – It is assumed that commercial equipment will be produced which simplifies thecomposition of the calling sequence. In practice the user should only need to key the VHF coaststation address and the required subscriber number, all other information being insertedautomatically.

Note 2 – Duplex mode of operation should be used for data communications.

2.1.2 The user selects the VHF DSC calling channel (channel 70 of RR Appendix 18) andinitiates transmission of the sequence on the calling channel. In order to reduce the probability ofcall collisions, the DSC equipment should automatically inhibit transmission of this sequenceuntil the calling channel is clear of any signal.

2.1.3 If the ship station does not receive an error-free acknowledgement from the calledcoast station (see § 2.2) within 5 s, the calling sequence should be automatically repeated. If anerror-free acknowledgement is still not received within a further 5 s, then any further repetitionsshould be effected by manually initiating a new calling sequence. Such further repetitions to thesame coast station should not, however, be initiated until at least 15 min have elapsed.

2.2 Coast station acknowledgement

2.2.1 The coast station should, within 3 s of receipt of the calling sequence, initiate thetransmission of an acknowledgement sequence on the DSC calling channel. The coast stationequipment should also automatically inhibit transmission of the acknowledgement until thecalling channel is clear.

2.2.2 If the coast station can comply immediately with the call request, then it shouldimmediately:

– radiate an “engaged channel” signal on the coast station transmit frequency of theappropriate working channel;


– transmit the acknowledgement sequence which should contain the same information as inthe call request with the following exceptions:

– the address will be that of the ship;

– the self-identification will be that of the coast station;

– the working channel number will be included;

– the “end of sequence” signal will be “BQ”.

2.2.3 If the coast station cannot comply immediately with the call request due to theappropriate working channel(s) being busy, then the acknowledgement sequence should be as in§ 2.2.2 except that the first telecommand will be 104 (unable to comply) and the secondtelecommand will be 103 (queue) if the optional ring-back procedure is applied, else 102 (busy)and three symbols No. 126 should be included in the channel information field.

2.2.4 If the coast station cannot comply for other reasons, the acknowledgement sequenceshould be as in § 2.2.3, except that the second telecommand signal should be one of symbolnumbers 100-109 as appropriate.

2.2.5 The ship station, on receipt of an error-free acknowledgement in accordance with§ 2.2.2 (ability to comply), should, within 5 s of receipt, change to the working channelindicated in the acknowledgement and transmit, on that working channel, a carrier for aminimum period of 2 s. Fully automated ship station equipment should, within that transmission,transmit a DSC call which is identical to the initial call (see § 2.1.1) except that the “end ofsequence” signal should be 127 (see Note 1).

Note 1 – In some regional applications, ships do not transmit DSC signals on the workingchannels. Equipment on ships sailing beyond these regional applications and participating in theautomated service, should be able to comply with the requirements for the fully automatedservice.

2.2.6 If the ship station receives an error-free acknowledgement in accordance with § 2.2.3indicating “unable to comply – queue” then, if the user still requires the call connection, the shipstation should continue to monitor the DSC calling channel for any calls from the coast station.

2.2.7 The ship station, on receipt of an acknowledgement indicating “unable to comply” inaccordance with § 2.2.4 (or, if the coast station does not operate the “ring-back” procedure(§ 2.3.2), in accordance with § 2.2.3), should, if an automatic connection is still required, initiatean appropriate new call in accordance with § 2.1.

2.2.8 If the coast station transmitted an acknowledgement indicating “unable to comply” inaccordance with § 2.2.4 (or, if the coast station does not operate the “ring-back” procedure(§ 2.3.2), in accordance with § 2.2.3), then it should take no further action with respect to thecall request.

424 Maritime Manual

2.3 Procedures subsequent to the exchange of initial DSC calls

2.3.1 Mandatory procedure

2.3.1.1 If the coast station transmitted an acknowledgement indicating “able to comply”(§ 2.2.2) then, if a DSC call (§ 2.2.5) containing the same self-identification as that of the callingship is detected on the coast station receive frequency of the working channel, the coast stationshould immediately start to dial the required subscriber number (see Note 1, § 2.3.1.2).

2.3.1.2 If a further call identical to the original calling sequence is received from the shipstation within 16 s of receipt of the original calling sequence (see § 2.1.1) then the coast stationshould repeat the acknowledgement (§ 2.2.2). If a DSC call in accordance with § 2.3.1.1(Note 1) is not detected within this 16 s period then the coast station should remove the“engaged channel” signal.

Note 1 – Some coast stations detect only the presence of a carrier at this stage. In areas of high-traffic density, carrier detection may not ensure that the calling ship has transferred to theworking channel and should be avoided where practicable.

2.3.2 Optional “ring-back” procedure

The following additional sequence will tend to reduce repetitive ship calling andprovide a better service to the ship:

2.3.2.1 If the coast station transmitted an “unable to comply – queue” acknowledgement (see§ 2.2.3) then the ship’s identification and required subscriber number should be stored until anappropriate working channel becomes available. This information should be retained for aperiod of 15 min.

2.3.2.2 If an appropriate working channel becomes available within the 15 min period, thecoast station should immediately radiate an “engaged channel” signal on the coast stationtransmit frequency of that working channel and initiate a DSC call on the DSC calling channelto the ship station with the same format as the acknowledgement (see § 2.2.2) except that the“end of sequence” should be “RQ”. If no appropriate working channel becomes available withinthis 15 min period then the information should be cleared and no further action taken by thecoast station.

2.3.2.3 If an acknowledgement of the above call is not received from the ship station (see§ 2.3.2.4) within 5 s then the coast station should repeat the call. If there is no acknowledgementto this second call then the ship’s call details should be cleared and the “engaged channel” signalremoved.

2.3.2.4 The ship station, on receipt of such a calling sequence (§ 2.3.2.2) should, if the callconnection is still required, automatically initiate an acknowledgement within 2 s on the callingchannel (the acknowledgement being transmitted only when the channel is clear). Thisacknowledgement should be identical to the received calling sequence except that the addressshould be that of the coast station, the self-identification should be that of the ship station andthe “end of sequence” should be “BQ”.


2.3.2.5 The ship station should then continue to listen to the calling channel for a further 5 s,then change to the working channel and transmit a carrier and DSC call as described in § 2.2.5.If a further calling sequence is received within this 5 s period, the acknowledgement should berepeated.

2.3.2.6 The coast station, after receipt of an acknowledgement from the ship station, should,when a DSC call in accordance with § 2.3.1.1 (see Note 1, § 2.3.1.2) is detected on this workingchannel, immediately start to dial the subscriber number.

2.3.2.7 If, after a period of 15 min a ship has not received a call as indicated in § 2.3.2.2 then,if the call connection is still required, a new call should be manually initiated in accordance with§ 2.1.1.

2.4 Call connection

2.4.1 Once the coast station begins dialling the subscriber number it should connect the linecircuit to the radio path. Timing of the call for billing purposes should commence after thesubscriber answers, i.e. “off-hook” condition detected. The call connection is now retained andthe user should commence communication as soon as the subscriber answers.

For a ship working on a duplex basis (see Note 1) the carrier must be transmitted forthe total duration of the call.

For a ship not working on a duplex basis the carrier must be activated at least onceevery 45 s. Such activation, when it does not occur naturally (due to the ship transmitting)should preferably be automatic. If automatic activation is not provided then means could beprovided to timely alert the user that carrier activation is necessary.

Note 1 – Ships capable of working duplex but using a semi-duplex operation should use thetelecommand signal 100.

2.4.2 If the called subscriber does not answer within a period of 1 min from completion ofdialling, then the call should be considered as not started and the coast station should clear thecircuit in accordance with § 2.5.5. The user, on hearing the ringing tones stop or hearinganything other than “ringing” tones (e.g. engaged, number unobtainable, etc.) should refrainfrom any further transmissions on the working channel. If a further call is required, the usershould initiate a new call on the DSC calling channel. The ship’s equipment should prevent thetransmission of a new call on the DSC calling channel until at least 5 s have elapsed afterclearance to prevent malfunction of the coast station “call completion due to ship stationclearance” procedure (see § 2.4.4.1, 2.4.4.2 and 2.5.5).

2.4.3 If a further call is attempted from the same ship within the “time-out period” (semi-duplex operation, see § 2.4.4.2), the coast station may use the information derived from the callto disconnect the previously allocated working channel.

2.4.4 If, during any period of the call, the coast station equipment detects the absence of theship’s carrier, the following procedures apply:

2.4.4.1 If the first telecommand indicated duplex operation and the coast station equipmentdetects the absence of the ship’s carrier for a period greater than 5 s, then the call should beconsidered to be complete.

426 Maritime Manual

2.4.4.2 If the first telecommand indicated simplex operation and the coast station equipmentdetects the absence of the ship’s carrier for a period greater than 45 s, then the call should beconsidered to be complete.

2.4.5 If during any period of the call, a fully automated ship station equipment detects theabsence of the coast station’s carrier for a period greater than 5 s, the call should be consideredto be complete.

2.5 Call completion (Note 1, § 2.2.5 applies to § 2.5.1 to 2.5.4)

2.5.1 When the ship station wishes to terminate the call connection to the PSTN, it transmitsan “end of call” DSC call on the working channel and removes the carrier. The format of thiscall should be the same as that described in § 2.1.1 except that the first telecommand should be105 (end of call) and the second telecommand should be 126.

2.5.2 On receipt of that call (see Note 1), if it contains the same self-identification as that ofthe calling ship, the landline is disconnected, the call timing is stopped, the coast stationtransmits a DSC acknowledgement on the working channel within 1 s of receipt and removes itscarrier from the working channel. The format of that acknowledgement should be the same asthat described in § 2.5.1 except that the “end of sequence” signal should be BQ and:

– the chargeable duration of the call should be inserted in the “frequency/channel” field bycoding the three characters as hours, minutes, seconds, e.g. a chargeable duration of 6 minand 50 s would be coded as 00 06 50;

– if the chargeable duration of the call is not available then the “frequency/channel” fieldshould contain three symbols 126.

Note 1 – Some coast stations do not recognize this “end of call” DSC call or transmit the aboveacknowledgement but rely solely on the procedures described in § 2.5.5.

2.5.3 If the coast station receives a second “end of call” DSC from the ship station within 4 sthen it should repeat the procedure given in § 2.5.2.

2.5.4 If the ship station does not receive an “end of call acknowledgement” within 2 s then itshould automatically repeat the “end of call”, then after a further 2 s or after receipt of an “endof call acknowledgement” (whichever occurs first) it should consider the call to be complete andremove the carrier from the working channel.

2.5.5 If the coast station does not receive the “end of call” as described in § 2.5.1, then thecall will be considered to be complete when the “on-hook” condition is detected from the PSTNor if no reply within 1 min or loss of ship’s carrier for more than 5 s (duplex) or 45 s (simplex) isdetected (see § 2.4.2 to 2.4.4.2). When this indication is registered at the coast station, thefollowing action should take place:

– call timing is stopped;

– the line is cleared and disconnected from the radio circuit;

– the coast station transmits an “end of call” DSC call whose format is the same as that of theacknowledgement described in § 2.5.2 except that the “end of sequence” signal should be127;

– the coast station’s carrier is removed from the working channel.


The radio channel is now free to handle other traffic.

2.5.6 If the ship station detects the absence of the coast station’s carrier for a period greaterthan 5 s, then it should cease to transmit on the working channel. If further calls are required bythe ship then a new call should be initiated on the DSC calling channel.

3. Operational procedures in the shore-to-ship direction

3.1 Coast station initiates call

3.1.1 The equipment of a VHF coast station should provide the capability to distinguish theship’s identity, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.585, when transmitted from thePSTN.

3.1.2 When receiving a call request from the PSTN and if there is a working channelavailable, the coast station equipment should radiate an engaged channel signal on the coaststation transmit frequency of that working channel.

3.1.3 If the coast station cannot comply immediately with the call request because noworking channel is available, then it should transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber.

3.1.4 If there is a working channel available and a ship’s identity is detected in accordancewith § 3.1.1, the coast station should transmit a calling sequence on the DSC calling channel inaccordance with the following conditions:

– the format specifier will be 123 (automatic/semi-automatic service),

– the address will be that of the ship,

– the category will be 100 (routine),

– the self-identification will be that of the coast station,

– the first telecommand will be 101 (duplex F3E/G3E) or 100 (simplex F3E/G3E) or 106(data) (see Note 1) and second telecommand as appropriate,

– the working channel number will be included,

– the PSTN subscriber number may follow if known,

– the “end of sequence” signal will be RQ.

Note 1 – Duplex mode of operation should be used for data communications.

3.1.5 If the coast station has not received an error-free acknowledgement from the calledship station (see § 3.2) within 5 s, the calling sequence should be repeated automatically. If anerror-free acknowledgement of the repeated call is not received within the following 5 s, the callis regarded as not started. The engaged channel signal is then removed and a busy signal istransmitted to the calling subscriber for 5 s, after which the line is cleared.

428 Maritime Manual

3.2 Ship station acknowledgement

3.2.1 On receipt of an error-free calling sequence in accordance with § 3.1.4, the ship stationshould, within 3 s of receiving it, automatically initiate the transmission of an acknowledgementsequence on the DSC calling channel.

3.2.2 If the ship station can comply immediately with the call request, the acknowledgementsequence should contain the same information as in the call request (§ 3.1.4), with the followingexceptions:

– the address will be that of the coast station,

– the self-identification will be that of the ship,

– the first and second telecommands will be as appropriate,

– the “end of sequence” signal will be BQ.

3.2.3 If the ship station cannot comply immediately with the call request, theacknowledgement sequence should be as in § 3.2.2, except that the first telecommand should be104 (unable to comply) and the second telecommand should be as appropriate to indicate thereason for being unable to comply or symbol No. 126.

3.2.4 If the coast station receives an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.2 then itshould transmit a ringing signal to the calling subscriber.

3.2.5 If the coast station receives an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.3 then itshould remove the engaged channel signal and transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriberfor 5 s and then release the line.

3.3 Procedures subsequent to the exchange of initial DSC calls

3.3.1 If the ship station transmitted an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.2 then itshould continue to listen to the calling channel for a further 5 s, and when the ship subscriberindicates that he is able to accept the call (e.g. by lifting the handset) it should change to theworking channel and transmit a carrier as described in § 2.2.5. A DSC call, if contained withinthat transmission, should be in accordance with § 3.2.2. If a further calling sequence inaccordance with § 3.1.4 is received within this 5 s period, the acknowledgement should berepeated. If the ship subscriber does not accept the call within 1 min then the call should beconsidered as not started and the procedures described in § 2.4.2 to 2.5.5 applied.

3.3.2 If the coast station does not receive a transmission on the working channel within1 min, the call is regarded as not started, the carrier is removed from the working channel, and abusy signal is transmitted to the calling subscriber for 5 s, after which the PSTN subscriber isdisconnected from the coast station.

3.4 Call connection

The coast station, on receipt of a transmission on the working channel in accordancewith § 3.3.1, should stop transmitting the ringing signal to the calling subscriber and begintiming the call.


3.5 Call completion

The procedures for completion of the call should be as described in § 2.5, except thatindication of chargeable duration of the call in the “end of call” sequence to the ship may beomitted.

APPENDIX 1*

Timing diagram of call set-up sequences when the ship stationinitiates the call

Coast station able to comply Coast station unable to comply (busy)

Time (s)

Ship Coast station Ship Coast station

0 Initiate call (§ 2.1.2) Initiate call (§ 2.1.2)

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive call andradiate engagedchannel signal(§ 2.2.2)

Receive call

2

3

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiateacknowledgement(able) (§ 2.2.2)

Initiateacknowledgement(unable) (§ 2.2.3 and2.2.4)Store ship ID andtelephone number(§ 2.3.2.1) if “ring back”procedure

5 Receiveacknowledgement(§ 2.2.5) {or initiate 2ndcall (§ 2.1.3)}

Receiveacknowledgement andcontinue monitoringDSC channel (§ 2.2.4){or initiate 2nd call(§ 2.1.3)}

6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Receive 2nd call (andradiate engagedchannel signal if 1stcall not received –§ 2.2.2)}

{Receive 2nd call}

7

8

9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Initiateacknowledgement dueto 2nd call (§ 2.3.1.2and § 2.2.2)}

{Initiateacknowledgement due to2nd call (§ 2.3.1.2,§ 2.2.2.3 and § 2.2.2.4)}

_______________* This timing diagram is only applicable to fully automated ship station equipment that operate with coast

stations employing DSC signalling on the working channels.

430 Maritime Manual


Time (s)


10 Transmit carrier and DSCcall on working channel(§ 2.2.5){or receive “2nd”acknowledgement}

{Receive “2nd”acknowledgement andcontinue monitoringDSC channel (§ 2.2.6)}

11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recognize DSC callthen dial (§ 2.3.1.1)

12

13

14

15 {If not already done so,transmit carrier and DSCcall on working channel(§ 2.2.5)}

16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {If not already done so,recognize DSC call thendial (§ 2.3.1.1)}

17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {If no DSC callrecognized, removeengaged channel signaland delete calling record(§ 2.3.1.2)}

< 15 min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If working channelavailable then radiateengaged channel signalon working channel andtransmit DSC “ring-back” call (§ 2.3.2.2)

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive “ring-back”call

6 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit “ring-back”

acknowledgement(§ 2.3.2.4)

8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive “ring-back”acknowledgement

9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Initiate 2nd “ring-back”call (§ 2.3.2.3)}

10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Receive 2nd “ring-back” call}

11

12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit carrier andDSC call on workingchannel {and transmitacknowledgement dueto 2nd call} (§ 2.3.2.5)



Time (s)


13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recognize DSC callthen dial (§ 2.3.2.6){and receive “2nd”“ring-back”acknowledgement}

14 15

16

17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {If not already doneso, transmit carrier andDSC call on workingchannel due to 2nd call(§ 2.3.2.5)}

18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {If not already done sorecognize DSC call thendial (§ 2.3.2.6) or, if noDSC call andacknowledgement,remove engaged channelsignals and clear calldetails (§ 2.3.2.3)}

Timing diagram of call set-up sequences when the coast stationinitiates the call

Time

(s)


0 Transmit DSC call on calling channel (§ 3.1.4) andengaged channel signal on the reserved workingchannel (§ 3.1.2)

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive call on calling channel (§ 3.2.1)

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiate acknowledgement able (§ 3.2.2) or unable(§ 3.2.3)

5 Receive acknowledgement on calling channel

If able, transmit ringing signal to the calling subscriber(§ 3.2.4)

If unable, remove the engaged channel signal andtransmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber (§ 3.2.5)

6 {Transmit 2nd call if error-free acknowledgement notreceived (§ 3.1.5)}

7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Receive 2nd call (§ 3.3.1)}

10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {Transmit 2nd acknowledgement (§ 3.3.1)}

11 {Receive 2nd acknowledgement (§ 3.3.1)}

If error-free acknowledgement still not received,remove the engaged channel signal and transmit a busysignal to the calling subscriber (§ 3.2.5)

432 Maritime Manual

Time

(s)


71 Lift handset and transmit within 5 s on workingchannel (§ 3.3.1)

76 Receive call on working channel (§ 3.4). Connect radiopath to the calling subscriber. If no call received,remove the engaged channel signal, transmit a busysignal to the calling subscriber and release the line(§ 3.3.2)

Note 1 – Timing diagram assumes 1 s between call initiation and reception and assumes maximum timingbetween calls and acknowledgements.

Note 2 – Sequences in parentheses { . . . } are only applicable if repeat calls or acknowledgements arenecessary.

ANNEX 2

Technical characteristics

1. Ship station1.1 The DSC equipment should meet the VHF technical characteristics detailed inRecommendation ITU-R M.493, Annexes 1 or 2. This equipment need not necessarily provideall combinations of codes, e.g. it may be simplified DSC equipment (with no distress functions),but it must provide all the necessary formats for automatic/semi-automatic VHF DSC signalling.

1.2 The VHF transceiver should be capable of operating on all public correspondenceworking channels listed in RR Appendix 18 and on the DSC calling channel and be capable ofautomatic channel selection and carrier transmission under control of the DSC equipment.

1.3 The equipment should be capable of sensing the presence of a signal on the DSCcalling channel (see RR Appendix 19).

1.4 After initiation of a DSC call, the equipment should be capable of automaticprevention of the transmission of that call, when the calling channel is occupied by calls (see RRAppendix 19).

1.5 The equipment should be capable of operating in accordance with the operationalprocedures described in Annex 1.

2. Coast station2.1 The DSC equipment should meet the VHF technical characteristics detailed inRecommendation ITU-R M.493, Annex 1. The installation should be capable of receiving andtransmitting all types of VHF DSC calls on the DSC calling channel.


2.2 The VHF installation should be capable of operating in full duplex mode on the coaststation’s designated public correspondence working channels and in simplex mode on the DSCcalling channel.

2.3 After initiation of a DSC call, the equipment should be capable of automaticprevention of the transmission of that call when the calling channel is occupied by calls (see RRAppendix 19).

2.4 The coast station equipment should be capable of detecting the presence of a DSC callon a working channel and also the line subscriber’s “off-hook” and “on-hook” conditions.

2.5 The coast station should be capable of radiating an “engaged channel” signal on any ofits working channels which should be dissimilar from any present line signalling tones.

2.6 The equipment should be capable of operating in accordance with the operationalprocedures described in Annex 1.

434 Maritime Manual

RECOMMENDATION ITU-R SM.1138-2

Determination of necessary bandwidths including examplesfor their calculation and associated examples for

the designation of emissions(1995-2007-2008)

Annex 1

Determination of necessary bandwidths, including examples for theircalculation and associated examples for the designation of emissions

1 The necessary bandwidth is not the only characteristic of an emission to beconsidered in evaluating the interference that may be caused by that emission.

2 In the formulation of the table, the following terms have been employed: Bn: necessary bandwidth (Hz) B: modulation rate (Bd) N: maximum possible number of black plus white elements to be transmitted

per second, in facsimile M: maximum modulation frequency (Hz) C: sub-carrier frequency (Hz) D: peak deviation, i.e. half the difference between the maximum and

minimum values of the instantaneous frequency. The instantaneousfrequency (Hz) is the time rate of change in phase (rad) divided by 2

t: pulse duration (s) at half-amplitude

tr: pulse rise time (s) between 10% and 90% amplitude K: an overall numerical factor which varies according to the emission and

which depends upon the allowable signal distortion. In the case oforthogonal frequency division multiplexed multi-carrier signal, K is thenumber of active sub-carriers as defined by equation (52) inRecommendation ITU-R SM.328

Nc: number of baseband channels in radio systems employing multichannelmultiplexing

Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2 435

fp: continuity pilot sub-carrier frequency (Hz) (continuous signal utilized toverify performance of frequency-division multiplex systems)

Ns: frequency separation between two sub-carriers (kHz).

Descriptionof emission

Necessary bandwidth Designationof emissionFormula Sample calculation

I. NO MODULATING SIGNAL

Continuous waveemission

– – NONE

II. AMPLITUDE MODULATION

1. Signal with quantized or digital information

Continuous wavetelegraphy, Morse code

Bn = BKK = 5 for fadingcircuitsK = 3 for non-fadingcircuits

25 words per minuteB = 20, K = 5Bandwidth: 100 Hz 100HA1AAN

Telegraphy by on-offkeying of a tonemodulated carrier,Morse code

Bn = BK + 2MK = 5 for fadingcircuitsK = 3 for non-fadingcircuits

25 words per minuteB = 20, M = 1 000, K = 5Bandwidth: 2 100 Hz = 2.1 kHz 2K10A2AAN

Selective calling signalusing sequential singlefrequency code, single-sideband full carrier

Bn = M Maximum code frequency is:2 110 HzM = 2 110Bandwidth: 2 110 Hz = 2.11 kHz

2K11H2BFN

Direct-printingtelegraphy using afrequency shiftedmodulating sub-carrier,with error-correction,single-sideband,suppressed carrier(single channel)

Bn = 2M + 2DK

2BM

B = 50D = 35 Hz (70 Hz shift)K = 1.2Bandwidth: 134 Hz 134HJ2BCN

Telegraphy,multichannel withvoice frequency,error-correction, somechannels are time-division multiplexed,single-sideband,reduced carrier

Bn = highest centralfrequency + M + DK

2BM

15 channels;highest central frequency is:2 805 HzB = 100D = 42.5 Hz (85 Hz shift)K = 0.7Bandwidth: 2 885 Hz = 2.885 kHz

2K89R7BCW

2. Telephony (commercial quality)

Telephony,double-sideband(single channel)

Bn = 2M M = 3 000Bandwidth: 6 000 Hz = 6 kHz 6K00A3EJN

436 Maritime Manual




Telephony, single-sideband,full carrier (singlechannel)

Bn = M M = 3 000Bandwidth: 3 000 Hz = 3 kHz 3K00H3EJN

Telephony, single-sideband,suppressed carrier(single channel)

Bn = M – lowestmodulation frequency

M = 3 000lowest modulation frequency =300 HzBandwidth: 2 700 Hz = 2.7 kHz

2K70J3EJN

Telephony withseparate frequencymodulated signal tocontrol the level ofdemodulated speechsignal, single-sideband,reduced carrier(Lincompex) (singlechannel)

Bn = M Maximum control frequency =2 990 HzM = 2 990Bandwidth: 2 990 Hz = 2.99 kHz

2K99R3ELN

Telephony withprivacy, single-sideband, suppressedcarrier (two or morechannels)

Bn = Nc M – lowestmodulation frequencyin the lowest channel

Nc = 2M = 3 000lowest modulation frequency =250 HzBandwidth: 5 750 Hz = 5.75 kHz

5K75J8EKF

Telephony,independent sideband(two or more channels)

Bn = sum of M for eachsideband

2 channelsM = 3 000Bandwidth: 6 000 Hz = 6 kHz 6K00B8EJN

3. Sound broadcasting

Sound broadcasting,double-sideband

Bn = 2MM may vary between4 000 and 10 000depending on thequality desired

Speech and musicM = 4 000Bandwidth: 8 000 Hz = 8 kHz 8K00A3EGN

Sound broadcasting,single-sideband,reduced carrier (singlechannel)

Bn = MM may vary between4 000 and 10 000depending on thequality desired

Speech and musicM = 4 000Bandwidth: 4 000 Hz = 4 kHz 4K00R3EGN

Sound broadcasting,single-sideband,suppressed carrier

Bn = M – lowestmodulation frequency

Speech and musicM = 4 500lowest modulation frequency =50 HzBandwidth: 4 450 Hz = 4.45 kHz

4K45J3EGN




4. Television

Television, vision andsound

Refer to relevantITU-R documents forthe bandwidths of thecommonly usedtelevision systems

Number of lines: 625Nominal video bandwidth 5 MHzSound carrier relative tovideo carrier: 5.5 MHzTotal vision Bandwidth: 6.25 MHzFM sound bandwidth includingguardbands: 750 kHzRF channel Bandwidth: 7 MHz

6M25C3F --

750KF3EGN

5. Facsimile

Analogue facsimile bysub-carrier frequencymodulation of a single-sideband emission withreduced carrier,monochrome

Bn = C +2N + DK

K = 1.1(typically)

N = 1 100 corresponding to an indexof cooperation of 352 and a cyclerrotation speed of 60 rpm. Index ofcooperation is the product of thedrum diameter and number of linesper unit length.C = 1 900D = 400 HzBandwidth: 2 890 Hz = 2.89 kHz

2K89R3CMN

Analogue facsimile;frequency modulationof an audio frequencysub-carrier whichmodulates the maincarrier, single-sidebandsuppressed carrier

Bn = 2M + 2DK

M =2N

K = 1.1(typically)

N = 1 100D = 400 HzBandwidth: 1 980 Hz = 1.98 kHz 1K98J3C --

6. Composite emissions

Double-sideband,television relay

Bn 2C 2M 2D Video limited to 5 MHz, audio on6.5 MHz, frequency modulatedsub-carrier, sub-carrier deviation50 kHz:C 6.5 106

D 50 103 HzM 15 000Bandwidth: 13.13 106 Hz

13.13 MHz13M1A8W --

Double-sidebandradio-relay system,frequency divisionmultiplex

Bn 2M 10 voice channels occupyingbaseband between 1 kHz and164 kHzM 164 000Bandwidth: 328 000 Hz 328 kHz

328KA8E --

438 Maritime Manual




Double-sidebandemission of VOR withvoice(VOR: VHFomnidirectionalradio range)

Bn 2Cmax 2M2DKK 1(typically)

The main carrier is modulated by:– a 30 Hz sub-carrier– a carrier resulting from a9 960 Hz tone frequency modulatedby a 30 Hz tone– a telephone channel– a 1 020 Hz keyed tone forcontinual Morse identificationCmax 9 960M 30D 480 HzBandwidth: 20 940 Hz 20.94 kHz

20K9A9WWF

Independent sidebands;several telegraphchannels with error-correction togetherwith several telephonechannels with privacy;frequency divisionmultiplex

Bn sum of M for eachsideband

Normally composite systems areoperated in accordance withstandardized channel arrangements(e.g. Rec. ITU-R F.348).3 telephone channels and15 telegraphy channels requirethe bandwidth:12 000 Hz 12 kHz

12K0B9WWF

7. Standard frequency and time signals7.1 High frequency (voice)

Voice announcements,double-sideband

Bn 2M SpeechM = 4 000Bandwidth: 8 000 Hz = 8 kHz 8K00A3XGN

7.2. High frequency (time code)

Time code astelegraphy

Bn BK 2M B = 1/sM = 1K = 5Bandwidth: 7 Hz 7H00A2XAN

7.3. Low frequency (time code)

Time code astelegraphy

Bn BK 2M B = 1/sM = 1K = 3Bandwidth: 5 Hz 5H00A2XAN




III-A. FREQUENCY MODULATION

1. Signal with quantized or digital information

Telegraphy withouterror-correction (singlechannel)

Bn = 2M + 2DK

2BM

K 1.2(typically)

B 100D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift)Bandwidth: 304 Hz 304HF1BBN

Telegraphy, narrow-band direct-printingwith error-correction(single channel)

Bn = 2M + 2DK

2BM

K 1.2(typically)

B 100D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift)Bandwidth: 304 Hz 304HF1BCN

Selective calling signal Bn = 2M + 2DK

2BM

K 1.2(typically)

B 100D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift)Bandwidth: 304 Hz 304HF1BCN

Four-frequency duplextelegraphy

Bn = 2M + 2DKB: modulation rate(Bd) of the fasterchannel.If the channels aresynchronized:

2BM (otherwise,

M 2B)K 1.1(typically)

Spacing between adjacentfrequencies 400 HzSynchronized channelsB 100M 50D 600 HzBandwidth: 1 420 Hz 1.42 kHz 1K42F7BDX


Commercial telephony Bn = 2M + 2DKK 1(typically, but undercertain conditions ahigher value of K maybe necessary)

For an average case of commercialtelephony,D 5 000 HzM 3 000Bandwidth: 16 000 Hz 16 kHz 16K0F3EJN

3. Sound broadcasting

Sound broadcasting Bn = 2M + 2DKK 1(typically)

MonauralD 75 000 HzM 15 000Bandwidth: 180 000 Hz 180 kHz 180KF3EGN

440 Maritime Manual



4. Facsimile

Facsimile by directfrequency modulationof the carrier; blackand white

Bn = 2M + 2DK

2NM

K 1.1(typically)

N 1 100 elements/sD 400 HzBandwidth: 1 980 Hz 1.98 kHz 1K98F1C --

Analogue facsimile Bn = 2M + 2DK

2NM

K 1.1(typically)

N 1 100 elements/sD 400 HzBandwidth: 1 980 Hz 1.98 kHz 1K98F3C --

5. Composite emissions (see Table III-B)

Radio-relay system,frequency divisionmultiplex

Bn 2fp 2DKK 1(typically)

60 telephone channels occupyingbaseband between 60 kHz and300 kHz;r.m.s. per-channel deviation:200 kHz; continuity pilot at331 kHz produces 100 kHz r.m.s.deviation of main carrier.D 200 103 3.76 2.02

1.52 106 Hzfp 0.331 106 HzBandwidth: 3.702 106 Hz

3.702 MHz

3M70F8EJF


Bn 2M 2DKK 1(typically)

960 telephone channels occupyingbaseband between 60 kHz and4 028 kHz; r.m.s. per-channeldeviation: 200 kHz;continuity pilot at 4 715 kHzproduces 140 kHz r.m.s. deviationof main carrier.D 200 103 3.76 5.5

4.13 106 HzM 4.028 106

fp 4.715 106

(2M 2DK) 2 fpBandwidth: 16.32 106 Hz16.32 MHz

16M3F8EJF




5. Composite emissions (see Table III-B)


Bn 2fp 600 telephone channels occupyingbaseband between 60 kHz and2 540 kHz;r.m.s. per-channel deviation:200 kHz;continuity pilot at 8 500 kHzproduces140 kHz r.m.s. deviation of maincarrier.D 200 103 3.76 4.36

3.28 106 HzM 2.54 106

K 1fp 8.5 106

(2M 2DK) 2 fpBandwidth: 17 106 Hz 17 MHz

17M0F8EJF

Stereophonic soundbroadcasting withmultiplexed subsidiarytelephony sub-carrier

Bn 2M 2DKK 1(typically)

Pilot tone system;M 75 000D 75 000 HzBandwidth: 300 000 Hz 300 kHz 300KF8EHF

442 Maritime Manual

III-B. MULTIPLYING FACTORS FOR USE IN COMPUTING D,PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION, IN FM FREQUENCY DIVISION

MULTIPLEX (FM-FDM) MULTI-CHANNEL EMISSSIONS

For FM-FDM systems the necessary bandwidth is:

Bn 2M 2DKThe value of D, or peak frequency deviation, in these formulae for Bn is calculated by multiplying ther.m.s. value of per-channel deviation by the appropriate “multiplying factor” shown below.In the case where a continuity pilot of frequency fp exists above the maximum modulation frequency M,the general formula becomes:

Bn 2fp 2DKIn the case where the modulation index of the main carrier produced by the pilot is less than 0.25, and therms frequency deviation of the main carrier produced by the pilot is less than or equal to 70% of the r.m.s.value of per-channel deviation, the general formula becomes either:

Bn = 2fp or Bn = 2M 2DKwhichever if greater.

Multiplying factor(1)

Number oftelephone channels

Nc20

levelreferencemodulationabovedBinvalueantilog)factorPeak(

3 Nc 12

a value in dB specified by the equipment manufacturer orstation licensee, subject to administration approval

4.47 antilog20

12 Nc 60 20log22.6antilog76.3 cN

Multiplying factor(2)

Number oftelephone channels

Nc20

levelreferencemodulationabovedBinvalueantilog)factorPeak(

60 Nc 240 20log4–1antilog76.3 cN

Nc 240 20log01–15antilog76.3 cN

(1) In the above chart, the multipliers 3.76 and 4.47 correspond to peak factors of 11.5 and 13.0 dB,respectively.

(2) In the above chart, the multipliers 3.76 correspond to peak factors of 11.5 dB.




IV. PULSE MODULATION

1. Radar

Unmodulated pulseemission t

KBn2

K depends upon theratio of pulse durationto pulse rise time. Itsvalue usually fallsbetween 1 and 10 andin many cases it doesnot need to exceed 6

Primary radarrange resolution 150 mK 1.5 (triangular pulsewhere t ~ tr,only components down to 27 dBfrom the strongest are considered)Then:

lightofvelocity)resolution(range2t

81031502

1 10–6 s

Bandwidth: 3 106 Hz 3 MHz

3M00P0NAN


Radio-relay systemtKBn

2

K 1.6

Pulse position modulated by 36voice channel baseband; pulsewidth at half amplitude 0.4 sBandwidth: 8 106 Hz 8 MHz(Bandwidth independent of thenumber of voice channels)

8M00M7EJT

3. Standard frequency and time signals3.1 High frequency (tone bursts)

Ticks used forepoch measurement

Bn = 2/tr tr = 1 msBandwidth: 2 000 Hz = 2 kHz 2K00K2XAN

3.2 Low frequency (time code)

Time code leadingedge used for epochmeasurement

Bn = 2/tr tr = 1 msBandwidth = 2 000 Hz = 2 kHz 2K00K2XAN

V. MISCELLANEOUS

Orthogonalfrequency divisionmultiplexing(OFDM) or codedOFDM (COFDM)

Bn = Ns·K 53 active sub-carriers are used,each spaced 312.5 kHz apart(K = 53 and Ns = 312.5 kHz). Datasub-carriers can be BPSK, QPSK,QAM modulatedBn = 312.5 kHz × 53 = 16.6 MHz

16M6W7D

444 Maritime Manual


Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEX ranges and protectionof the A2 global maritime distress and safety

system distress watch channel


(2000-2006)

Annex 1

Prediction of A2 and NAVTEX ranges

1 Overview

In order to establish a new A2 sea area it is necessary to account for variations in thepropagation conditions. A2 coverage is by groundwave, which is largely stable,enabling the extent of the service area to be confirmed by measurement, as isrecommended by the IMO, before committing capital expenditure.

The design criteria to be used for establishing A2 and NAVTEX sea areas are definedby the IMO in Annex 3 to their Resolution A.801(19).

2 Prediction of A2 and NAVTEX ranges

2.1 IMO performance criteria

The criteria developed by the IMO for determination of A2 and NAVTEX ranges arereproduced in Table 1 and should be used in the determination of ranges for A2 andNAVTEX services.


TABLE 1

Performance criteria for A2 and NAVTEX transmissions

2.2 Achieving the required quality of signal

2.2.1 The effect of received noise

On a very quiet site, man-made noise dominates below 4 MHz and galactic noiseabove. These combine, at the receive antenna with seasonal levels of atmospheric noise,and also transmitter sideband noise, as shown in Fig. 1. Recommendation ITU-R P.372should be used to account for atmospheric and normal man-made noise levels.

Distress channel Radiotelephony DSC ARQ NBDP NAVTEX

Frequency (kHz) 2 182 2 187.5 2 174.50 490 and 518

Bandwidth (Hz) 3 000 300 300 300

Propagation Groundwave Groundwave Groundwave Groundwave

Ship’s power (W) 60 60 60

Ship’s antenna efficiency(%)

25 25 25 25

RF full bandwidth signal/noise ratio (S/N) (dB)

9 12 18 min(1) 8

Mean Tx power belowpeak (dB)

8 0 0 0

Fading margin (dB) 3 Not stated 3

IMO reference for above Res. A.801(19) Res. A.804(19) Rec. ITU-R F.339 Res. A.801(19)

Availability required (%) 95(2) Not stated Not stated 90

DSC: digital selective calling

NBDP: narrow-band direct printing(1) Stated as 43 dB(Hz) under stable and 52 dB(Hz) under fading conditions with 90% traffic efficiency.(2) Availability can be relaxed to 90% in cases where the noise data used or performance achieved can be proven by

measurement.

446 Maritime Manual

Paragraph 3.5 should be used to ensure that the levels of transmitter sideband noise andintermodulation products reaching the receive antenna by groundwave do not exceedthe tolerable limit for protection of the A2 DSC watch frequency.

2.2.2 C/N required for single sideband (SSB) radiotelephony

In order to maintain the intelligibility of a received SSB radiotelephony signal it isnecessary to provide the operator with a minimum AF signal/noise plus distortion ratio(SINAD), which in turn defines the RF C/N required at the receive antenna.

The capture range for an A2 receive system should be calculated assuming an RF C/Ndensity figure of 52 dB(Hz) at the shore-based receive antenna. This will ensure that aship’s transmitter operating with a peak-to-mean ratio of 8 dB provides the shore-basedoperator with a 9 dB S/N in a 3 000 Hz bandwidth, as stipulated by the IMO.

The receive antenna and multicoupler should be designed to offer good linearity tominimize the risk of intermodulation products being generated on the watchfrequencies. With good electronic design the noise generated within the receive systemitself can be ignored below 3 MHz.

2.2.3 C/N required for NAVTEX broadcasts

The transmit range for NAVTEX broadcasts should be calculated assuming an RF C/Ndensity figure of 35 dB(Hz) at the ship’s antenna. This will ensure that the NAVTEXreceiver is provided with an RF S/N of 8 dB in a 300 Hz bandwidth.


2.3 Accounting for ships topside noise

Topside noise refers to the environmental noise generated by ship-borne machinery,and other sources, and a figure is required for entry into NOISEDAT and otherprograms. Table 2 shows a number of published figures, and for reference purposesincludes galactic and quasi-minimum noise levels, which is accepted as representing thebest achievable noise floor.

TABLE 2

Naval environmental categories for topside noise

The Australian Department of Defence (DOD) and Advisory Group for AeronauticalResearch and Development (AGARD) have both published relevant figures. TheAGARD figure represents a naval vessel under normal cruise conditions, whilst theDOD figure represents the maximum level under battle conditions with all machinery inoperation.

The levels of noise to be expected on commercial vessels can be expected to rangebetween these figures. The IPS Radio and Space Services (IPS) of the AustralianDepartment of Industry have adopted an intermediate figure in their GWPS, which iswell accepted as representing the noise level encountered on container vessels, pleasurecruisers, and utility ships. This figure, 142 dBW, should be used in prediction ofcoverage area of shore-based GMDSS transmitters.

2.4 Determination of external noise factor, Fa, for the required availability

An A2 area in the GMDSS is defined as the area within which ship stations can alertshore stations by using DSC on MF and communicate with the shore stations using MFradiotelephony (class of emission J3E). The communications ranges for voice signalsare shorter than for DSC and the IMO criteria for determination of A2 areas shouldtherefore be based on the communication of voice signals.

Environmental category dB below 1 Wref. 3 MHz

DOD Cat 1 mobile platform 137.0IPS ship (ASAPS and GWPS) 142.0AGARD ship 148.0Quasi-minimum noise 156.7Noise galactic (Rec. ITU-R P.372) 163.6

ASAPS: advanced stand alone prediction systemGWPS: groundwave prediction system

448 Maritime Manual

The range achieved by a transmitter or a receiver depends upon the radiated power, thepropagation loss, and the ability of the receiver to discriminate between the wantedsignal and the unwanted noise or interference. The level of each component in thereceived signal will drift as the propagation conditions change with time, and thereforearrive at the receive antenna in varying proportions. The final system design shouldtherefore ensure that the level of the signal will exceed the level of the noise by anadequate amount for an adequate proportion of the time. This proportion is called theavailability, and is determined by quantifying the behaviour of the signal and the noisewith time as shown in Fig. 2.

Equation (1) should be used to calculate an upper value Fa for the external noise factorwhich corresponds to the required availability:

22stama DDFF dB above k T0 B (1)


where:

Fam : median external noise factor

Ds : variation in signal level expected for the required timepercentage, to which is ascribed the figure of 3 dB specified bythe IMO as fading margin

Dt : variation in noise level expected for the required percentage oftime.

90% availability is required for NAVTEX broadcasts, and so the upper decile value Dushould be substituted for Dt in equation (1).

95% availability is required for A2 coverage. To achieve this, substitute Dt = Du 3 dBin equation (1).

First Fam and Du should be determined by running the Noise1 program, which comeswith the ITU NOISEDAT package. The program requests seasons required, sitelocation, frequency, level or category of man-made noise, and type of data outputrequired (select Fa), local mean time, and statistical parameters required (select overallmedian). For prediction of external noise factor on ship stations, the reference figure of

142 dBW should be used to account for topside noise, if no better data is available.

The data is presented in seasonal blocks as shown in Table 3, the data fields beingexplained in Table 4.

TABLE 3

Sample NOISEDAT output

LAT –51.45, LONG –57.56, DUMMY SITE

WINTER FMHZ 2.182, QUIET RURAL NOISEOVERALL NOISE

TIME BLOCK ATMO GAL MANMADE OVERALL DL DU SL SM SU

0000-0400 59.3 44.2 43.9 59.6 7.2 9.2 2.3 3.5 2.6

0400-0800 54.0 44.2 43.9 54.5 4.1 1.9 3.2 3.4 2.70800-1200 28.2 44.2 43.9 45.9 4.3 9.0 2.2 3.4 1.3

1200-1600 31.0 44.2 43.9 46.0 4.2 8.9 2.2 3.3 1.3

1600-2000 53.5 44.2 43.9 53.9 10.4 12.2 3.6 3.9 2.92000-2400 54.3 44.2 43.9 55.2 7.2 9.2 2.3 3.7 2.6

450 Maritime Manual

TABLE 4

Fields presented for use in the NOISEDAT output

The median and upper values for Fa should be organized as shown in Table 5, and theseasonal spread in the value of Fa for the required availability should be plotted as abar graph in Fig. 3. This presentation enables the process to be reviewed if anyanomalies occur.

TABLE 5

External noise factor, Fa

Field Symbol Description

TIME BLOCK Time block during which original measurements were made

ATMO Level of atmospheric component

GAL Level of galactic component

MANMADE Level of man-made componentOVERALL Fam Median level of Fa

DL Dl Lower decile of deviation from median

DU Du Upper decile of deviation from medianSL Dl Standard deviation of Dl

SM Fam Standard deviation of Fam

SU Du Standard deviation of Du

Median value, Fam

Fa for required availability

stam DDF 22

Time block Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn

0000-0400 59.6 55.9 52 52.2 71.7 65.2 60.2 60.9

0400-0800 54.5 43.7 45.9 46 66.8 56.2 55.6 59.5

0800-1200 45.9 45.9 45.8 45.9 55.4 55.4 55.3 55.4

1200-1600 46 41.9 37.7 45.8 55.4 54.8 52.5 55.7

1600-2000 53.9 43.2 43.6 43.9 66.5 59.7 59.5 58.2

2000-2400 55.2 55 54.4 55.8 64.9 63.2 61.4 64.3


IMO Resolution A.801(19) states “Administrations should determine time-periods andseasons appropriate to their geographic area based on prevailing noise levels”.

2.5 Accounting for propagation by groundwave

2.5.1 Introduction

Horizontally polarized waves will not propagate along the surface of normal ground, asthe electric vector runs tangential to the surface causing a current to flow, which resultsin absorption and heavy transmission losses. For this reason groundwaves have to bevertically polarized, and can only be generated by a vertical antenna, or to a limitedextent by an antenna which is not perfectly horizontal, either because one end is higherthan the other, or because the elements droop.

The prime mover for groundwave propagation is the cymomotive force (c.m.f.) exertedby the transmit antenna. In free space, power flux-density (W/m2) decreases inverselywith the square of distance, and so the field strength decreases inversely with distanceand has a value equal to the product of c.m.f. and distance. The c.m.f. is synonymouswith the effective monopole radiated power (e.m.r.p.), which is the power (kW) which

452 Maritime Manual

would have to be fed into a short lossless monopole to achieve the same c.m.f., and indB terms the two have the same value. A short lossless monopole on a perfect groundfed with 1 kW has a c.m.f. of 300 V, which is the reference used in the groundwavecurves given in Recommendation ITU-R P.368.

Subsequent calculation of the transmitter power required should take account of thefollowing losses associated with the antenna:

– the transmitter output power may be de-rated by an antenna offering a poormatch;

– power will be absorbed by the ground and the feeder;

– whereas an ideal monopole will produce maximum radiation along the ground,the radiation from a real antenna will peak a few degrees above the ground andtuck in to a lower value along the ground.

2.5.2 Proof of performance tests

IMO Resolution A.801(19) stipulates that the range of the A2 sea area should beverified by field strength measurement. The c.m.f. of any shore-based transmitter andantenna should therefore be determined by operating the transmitter continuously atpeak power, and measuring the resulting field strength using a portable field strengthmeter. This should be done on an arc around the station with an approximate radius of1 km in the required directions of propagation. The precise location of the antenna andeach measurement point should be fixed using a GPS navigator. The c.m.f. on eachbearing is then the product of field strength (mV/m) and range (km) for eachmeasurement point. The antenna drive point current should also be recorded before andafter the measurement.

The procedures in this Recommendation should be used by administrations todetermine the c.m.f. required to establish coverage, which should then be demonstratedby the equipment supplier, effectively eliminating uncertainties in performance due tolocal ground conditions, and the antenna and station earthing system.

2.5.3 Determination of extent of A2 service area

The extent of the A2 service area is determined by the range over which SSBcommunication is effective at 2182 kHz between ship and shore. The ship is consideredto be fitted with a 60 W transmitter, feeding a short monopole antenna with anefficiency of 25%, as given in Table 1.

The range is fixed by the maximum distance at which the ship can be from the shorestation to produce an S/N of 9 dB in a 3 kHz bandwidth out of the receive antenna at theshore station. The shore transmit station must transmit sufficient power to return thesame S/N at the output of the ship’s receive antenna.


The range in both directions depends upon the sensitivity of the receive antenna, whichdepends upon the levels of natural and man-made noise present, and the ability of theantenna to discriminate between the wanted signal and the unwanted radiated noise.Although some improvement can be achieved by using a directional receive antenna,this often proves to be uneconomic and impractical, and is outside the scope of thisRecommendation. It will be assumed that a short whip antenna is used for reception,that it has been installed on clear ground on an earth mat, and that it is regularlymaintained to avoid the effects of corrosion. The noise factor of the receive systemconnected to the antenna can be ignored at 2 182 kHz.

2.5.3.1 Determination of shore-based receive range

The IMO minimum range thus achieved should be determined for all seasonal values ofFa using the 15 W curve in Fig. 4. Additional curves have been included to demonstratethe benefit of vessels using higher transmit powers.

454 Maritime Manual

2.5.3.2 Determination of shore-based transmit power required

Effective two-way SSB radiotelephony requires matched conditions in both directions.Since the transmission loss is the same in both directions the power required to return acall depends primarily upon the difference in noise levels at each end, and also thedifference in transmit antenna efficiency. However the following additional factorshave a direct impact on the power to be transmitted by the shore station:

– peaks and troughs in the radiation pattern of the receive antenna on the ship,due to interaction with the ship’s hull;

– losses due to the condition of the ship’s receive antenna on the ship.

Tests on scale models of a number of vessels indicate that variability in gain of receiveantennas is typically 5 dB. Furthermore, allowance should be made for ships whoseantennas are in poorly maintained condition. A figure of 10 dB has been included in thecalculation of shore-ship power budget to take account of these factors.

To determine the radiated power required from the shore-based transmitter the externalnoise factors for the receive stations on shore, Fac, and ship, Fas, should first beestablished as described in § 2.4. The minimum e.m.r.p. required to return a GMDSScall at the same S/N to a ship on the limit of the service area should then be calculatedusing equation (2):

Pe.m.r.p. (Fas – Fac) –16 Rpm dB(kW) (2)

where:

Rpm: peak-to-mean ratio of the transmitter used on the shore station(dB).

The transmitter power required, PTx, should then be determined from equation (3), inwhich La should account for all the losses associated with the antenna described in§ 2.5.1:

PTx Pe.m.r.p. La (3)

Substituting typical figures (Fas – Fac) 10 dB, Rpm 3 dB, and La 3 dB yields atypical value of 1000 W for the minimum required transmitter power at the coaststation.

If the antenna efficiency Effant is required it should then be determined fromequation (4):

Effant Pe.m.r.p./PTx (4)


2.5.4 Determination of the range achieved using NAVTEX operation

The range achieved by a given NAVTEX transmitter depends upon the efficiency of thetransmit antenna, and the external noise factor on board the ship, as shown in Fig. 5.The antenna efficiency depends upon the quality of the Earth system provided, andonce the required c.m.f. has been determined, it should be measured as described in§ 2.5.2, and the efficiency determined.

456 Maritime Manual

IMO Resolution A.801(19) specifies 90% availability and so the upper decile value forFa should be calculated using the statistical data produced by NOISEDAT.

3 Protection of A2 watch frequency

The IMO specify that the distress channels should be watched 24 h per day. The systemshould be designed so that the watch function is not desensitized by noise orinterference. It is essential therefore that all transmit channels assigned for use on thetransmitting station are selected so that no intermodulation products are allowed to fallwithin the frequency bands of the watch channels.

For very close channel separations the watch process can be threatened by energy inupper sideband of the adjacent SSB transmission falling within the receiver passband,where the wanted signal could be swamped by blocking or reciprocal mixing. Wherechannel separation is large enough to remove the threat of reciprocal mixing, a further,but lesser threat to the watch process may be sideband noise from the transmitter fallingin the receiver passband.

The resulting DSC signal level reaching the shore station will depend upon the declaredA2 range for the shore station, and in turn depend upon the sensitivity, Fa.

The level to be protected would be the level reaching the shore station after suffering a3 dB fading loss, and is shown in Fig. 6.


3.1 Impact of site separation on system performance

3.2 Estimating the level of the interference field

The tolerable amount of sideband noise leaving the transmit antenna, and the level ofadjacent channel isolation required by the watch receiver both depend upon theseparation between the transmit and receive antenna, and Fig. 7 provides a referencepower Pref (mW), which corresponds to the radiated power which would produce a fieldstrength at the receive antenna equal to the DSC field strength to be protected and Fig. 8provides a rule of thumb to relate this to transmitter and receiver characteristics.

458 Maritime Manual


3.3 Required adjacent channel selectivity

The level of adjacent channel isolation required by the watch receiver depends upon theseparation between transmit and receive antennas. Figure 7 provides a reference power,Pref, which corresponds to the radiated power which would produce a field strength atthe receive antenna equal to the DSC field strength to be protected. If the receiver hasan adjacent channel isolation figure of Iadj (dB), then the maximum power radiated bythe station should be limited to:

Prad = Pref Iadj (5)

Three grades of receiver may be considered for providing the DSC watch: commercialcommunications receivers, ship’s DSC watch receivers, or high performancecrystallized DSC watch receivers, conforming with Table 6:

TABLE 6

3.4 Protection from adjacent channel interference

The maximum permitted transmitter power should be determined using equation (6):

PTx = 30 10 log(Pref) Iadj – 10 log(Effant) (6)

where:

PTx: transmitter power (dBW)

Iadj: adjacent channel isolation figure for the receiver

Effant: antenna efficiency.

For example, consider a receiver of the grade used on board ship having a typicaladjacent channel isolation figure of 60 dB, on a site offering an Fa of 65 dB located2.5 km from a transmit antenna with an efficiency of 75%. Figure 7 gives a Pref of0.1 mW and so the maximum level of radiated power would be 60 dB above 0.1 mW,which is 100 W. Allowing for antenna efficiency the maximum transmitter powerwould be 133 W. In order to benefit from a 500 W transmitter a pre-filter offering anadditional 4 dB adjacent channel isolation would be required.

Selectivity(dB)

Offset(Hz)

6 Between 150 and 22030 Less than 27060 Below 40080 Less than 550

460 Maritime Manual

3.5 Protection from transmitter sideband noise

The maximum tolerable level of sideband noise is determined by the required C/N atthe receive antenna. In the above example, for a S/N of 10 dB, the maximum tolerablelevel of sideband power would be 10 mW, which is quite low, and may call for use of apost-selector to reduce the noise leaving the transmitter modulator unit.

3.6 Co-site operation

Figure 9 shows the effect of reducing the separation between the transmit and receiveantenna below 1 km to 300 m, the minimum value computed using GRWAVE. By wayof example, if a station close to the shoreline had a maximum annual median externalnoise factor Fa of 65 dB then from Fig. 4 the range achieved would be just over200 nautical miles. If the adjacent channel isolation were 80 dB, then for an e.m.r.p. of200 W the antenna separation should be not less than 450 m.


Under such circumstances a long feeder would be required to attain the separationrequired. As the frequency increases there is a considerable reduction in external noiseand increase in feeder loss. At 2 MHz the external noise factor is very much greaterthan the system noise factor, and for a system noise factor of 15 dB up to 10 dB offeeder loss would be tolerable on a well designed and maintained system. A cost-effective way to avoid the cost of a very long low loss coaxial cable would be to use aseparate antenna for A2.

4 Software requirements

4.1 Noise calculation

To simplify the determination of range for A2 and NAVTEX transmissions a modifiedform of NOISEDAT is ideally required including calculation of Fam in accordance withthe procedures of this Recommendation.

4.2 Intermodulation

In order to protect the DSC watch channels from the harmful effects of interferencecaused by intermodulation products, a new program is ideally required to enable thefrequencies assigned for use on a shore-based transmitting station to be checked toensure that no intermodulation products are produced within the passbands of the DSCwatch receivers, down to at least the 9th order. Such software should account for theoffset spectrum occupied by SSB transmissions to be used.

462 Maritime Manual


Characteristics of VHF radio systems and equipment forthe exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime

mobile service RR Appendix 18 channels

(2008-2009)


considering

a) that Resolution 342 (Rev.WRC-2000) of the World RadiocommunicationConference invites ITU-R to finalize studies currently ongoing, inter alia:

– identify the future requirements of the maritime mobile service;

– identify suitable technical characteristics of the system or interoperablesystems;

– identify necessary modifications to the table of frequencies contained inAppendix 18;

b) that IMO has stated that the maritime industry has a need forradiocommunications for business and safety. At IMO the future need forharmonization of systems using maritime VHF channels was considered, and ITU-Rhas been informed of the possible future need for worldwide systems for the exchangeof data and electronic mail on maritime VHF channels,

recognizing

that in accordance with RR Appendix 18 channels used for VHF data shall not causeharmful interference to and shall not claim protection from other stations operating inaccordance with RR Article 5. This includes SOLAS applications such as GMDSS onchannel 70 and AIS 1 and AIS 2,

recommends

1 that the characteristics for VHF data described in the Annexes to thisRecommendation should be considered as examples of such systems;

2 this Recommendation should be used as a guideline for future digitaltechnologies in the maritime mobile service VHF bands;

3 that new VHF data systems introduced should provide characteristics that arecompatible with the existing voice and data system, particularly the AIS.


Annex 1

VHF data system example 1

The following characteristics should be indicative of a VHF radio system for theexchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service.

1 General characteristics

1.1 The class of emission should be 16K0F1DDN.

1.2 The necessary band should cater for the channels in RR Appendix 18designated with footnote o), each with 25 kHz bandwidth.

1.3 The modulation may be either /4 DQPSK at 28.8 kbit/s or /8 D8-PSK at43.2 kbit/s, depending on required station-station radio range and channelsignal fidelity.

1.4 The access method may be carrier sense time division multiple access(CSTDMA).

1.5 The following area coverage techniques may be used:

– cellular channel reuse;

– time sharing transmission.

1.6 The following handover techniques may be utilized:

– uninterrupted handover (channel and base station);

– uninterrupted file transfer.

1.7 The equipment should be designed so that frequency changes betweenassigned channels can be carried out in less than 100 ms.

1.8 Switching between reception and transmission should not take more than 2 ms.

1.9 The serial communication channels (SCC) on a single radio modem may be:

– Ethernet;

– RS232 (NMEA).

1.10 The radio equipment should meet the following norms:

– radio parameters: ETSI EN 300 113-1;

– EMC: ETSI EN 301 489-5.

464 Maritime Manual

2 Transmitters

2.1 The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed5 parts in 106, and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed 10 partsin 106.

2.2 Spurious emissions should be in accordance with the provisions of RRAppendix 3.

2.3 The carrier power for coast station transmitters should not exceed 50 W.

2.4 The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W.

2.5 The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 µW.

2.6 The adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) should be at least 70 dB (seeFig. 3).

3 Receivers

3.1 The receiver sensitivity for bit error rate (BER) 10–3 should be betterthan –107 dBm.

3.2 The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.

3.3 The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.

3.4 The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.

3.5 The power of any conducted spurious emission at the antenna terminals shouldnot exceed 2.0 nW.

4 Sample emissions spectrum based on variations of ETSI TETRAstandard modulation

This proposal refers to the work of RTCM Special Committee 123 (RTCM SC123)which evaluated the ETSI TETRA modulation schemes for use in RR Appendix 18.


FIGURE 1

36 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 54 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulation spectra

RTCM SC123 test results for TETRA-TEDS modulation

ResultsFigure 1 presents the spectra for TETRA and TEDS modulations, at their normal36/54 kbit/s data rates, along with the IEC 61993-2 25 kHz mask for comparison. It isapparent these modulations fail to meet the mask; their power exceeds the –25 dBmlimit at a 10 kHz offset from the carrier.

466 Maritime Manual

FIGURE 2

Family of spectrum plots for different data rates

RTCM test results for slightly reduced data rates to fit Appendix 18 emissions mask

Somewhat lower 32/48 kbit/s and 28.8/43.2 kbit/s data rate combinations were thentested. Figure 2 overlays these results with those of Fig. 1. It is evident 32 kbit/s

/4-DQPSK and 48 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulations just barely fit or violate the maskwhereas 28.8 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 43.2 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulationscomfortably fit the mask.


FIGURE 3

Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) performance

RTCM test results: 28.8 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 43.2 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulation

468 Maritime Manual

5 Conclusions on emissions

Emissions spectrum requirements for RR Appendix 18 based on maritime IEC teststandards will allow both /4 DQPSK at 28.8 kbit/s and /8 D8-PSK at 43.2 kbit/smodulation to be used.

6 System interoperability

6.1 Ship-to-shore

In the ship-to-shore direction interoperability is maintained by the internet serviceprovider (ISP) at the internet protocol (IP) level. Typically, a ship will enter anelectronic mail, with or without attachments, in the electronic mail system and thenclick on the “send” button.

6.2 Shore-to-ship

In this system, there are no interoperability concerns on the part of the shore-side user.The shore-based sender of an electronic mail to a ship can merely:a) click on the “reply” button, or

b) address the message to [email protected] or [email protected].

The electronic mail will be delivered via whatever system the ship is using. If there is asystem failure, there will be an automatic re-route via an alternate system. Theseautomated decisions are based on the contents of an extensive database. Consequently,the electronic mail may be delivered via HF or an alternate satellite-based system. Ifthere is an overall system failure, addressing problem or non-delivery for any reason,the system support operators will be alerted and take corrective action. This ensures thatshore-based users need not be concerned about what system or network the ship isusing. They need only address the electronic mail and click on “send”.

6.3 Ship-to-ship

The VDL protocol should also provide for direct transmission between ships wherepossible (within radio propagation range) in the simplex ship-ship mode. The duplexship-shore-ship mode should be used for extended range (beyond the ship-ship radiopropagation range).

6.4 Efficient use of the VHF data link (VDL)

System interoperability should be achieved for all transmission modes, ship-to-shore,shore-to-ship, and ship-to-ship. Spectrum efficiency and data throughput should also beconsidered. For example, application of the electronic mail internet protocol (IP) at thenetwork level and not on the VDL would result in an efficiency improvement of 3:1.




Annex 2

VHF data system example 2

Introduction

This Annex describes an existing narrowband VHF data system for the exchange ofdata and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service. The system is currently in use,operating from base stations ashore and on offshore installations.

1 General characteristics

1.1 The system is operating on nine duplex 25 kHz channels in the maritime VHFband.

1.2 The class of emission is 16K0F1DDN.

1.3 The modulation is 4-level GMSK. Transmitted bit rate 21.1 kbit/s.

1.4 The access method is time division multiple access (TDMA).

1.5 The following area coverage techniques are used:

– cellular channel reuse;

– time sharing transmission.

1.6 The following handover techniques are utilized:

– uninterrupted handover (channel and base station);

– uninterrupted file transfer.

1.7 The equipment is designed so that frequency changes between assignedchannels can be carried out in less than 100 ms.

1.8 Emissions are vertically polarized at the source.

1.9 Switching between reception and transmission should not take more than 2 ms.

1.10 The serial communication channels (SCC) on a single radio modem should be:

– Ethernet;

– RS232 (NMEA);

– IEC 61162.

1.11 The radio equipment should meet the following norms:

– radio parameters: ETSI EN 300 113-1;

– EMC: ETSI EN 301 489-5 and IEC 60945.

470 Maritime Manual

2 Transmitters

2.1 The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed fiveparts in 106, and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed ten parts in106.

2.2 In order to prevent harmful interference to other users of the maritime VHFband, spurious emissions should be in accordance with the provisions of RRAppendix 3.

2.3 The carrier power for coast station transmitters should not exceed 50 W.

2.4 The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W.

2.5 The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 µW.

2.6 Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) should be at least 70 dB.

3 Receivers

3.1 The receiver sensitivity for bit-error rate (BER) 10–3 should be betterthan –107 dBm .

3.2 The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.

3.3 The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.

3.4 The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.

3.5 The power of any conducted spurious emission at the antenna terminals shouldnot exceed 2.0 nW.

4 Possibilities and advantages

4.1 Coverage and stability

The VHF band has very good qualities regarding range and stability. Typicalrange from a land-based station is up to 70 NM.

4.2 IP – Ethernet

The common used Ethernet protocol that makes connection to local datanetworks and other data services easy.

4.3 Fixed IP address at the radio on board the ship

This makes it possible to send data to the ship without anyone being needed toactivate the link. The ship may also have ten local IP addresses.


4.4 Always connected

There is no connection time. This makes the system very effective for real-time applications, e.g. banking terminals.

4.5 Several services in parallel from one radio on the ship

The system is based on packets all the way. From one radio on the ship onemay carry out several different services at the same time. The system istherefore frequency efficient.

4.6 Automatic reconnection after disruption

The system will automatically reconnect and continue the tasks again at theright point. This happens both after short breaks as well as long breaks, e.g.outside radio coverage area.

4.7 Integrated data router

The radio is delivered with an integrated router. It means that tasks may beprogrammed directly into the radio and may be carried out without the use of aPC. For example, the fishing boat positioning and moving report system isprogrammed into the radio/router. In addition, the router has very largecapacity to carry out several tasks, among other things compression anddecompression of electronic mail, web applications and weather maps.

4.8 Several inputs to the radio

Ethernet cable may be plugged directly into the radio or the router, enablingeasy establishment of a local net on board the ship. Other digital or analogueinputs may be used for GNSS, measuring instruments, etc.

4.9 Connection to local WLAN

The system may be combined with local wireless networks on board the ship.

4.10 External communication carriers

The system may be delivered with possibilities for seamless connection toexternal networks, e.g. wireless LANs in harbour areas or to satellitecommunication.

5 ApplicationsSome current and possible future applications of VHF data are listed below: – safe SeaNet reporting (ISPS);

472 Maritime Manual

– fishery catch reporting;

– fishing boat position and movement reporting;

– weather maps;

– general electronic mail;

– messages to the ship’s agent, the pilot or harbour authorities;

– banking terminals, especially on passenger ships;

– safety-related information;

– telemetry information;

– updating of electronic maps.

6 System interoperability

6.1 Ship-to-shore

In the ship-to-shore direction interoperability is maintained by the Internetservice provider (ISP) at the internet protocol (IP) level. Typically, a ship willenter an electronic mail, with or without attachments, in the electronic mailsystem and then click on the “send” button.

6.2 Shore-to-ship

In this system, there are no interoperability concerns on the part of the shore-side user. The shore-based sender of an electronic mail to a ship can merely:

a) click on the “reply” button, or

b) address the message to [email protected] or [email protected].

The electronic mail will be delivered via whatever system the ship is using. Ifthere is a system failure, there will be an automatic re-route via an alternatesystem. These automated decisions are based on the contents of an extensivedatabase. Consequently, the electronic mail may be delivered via HF or analternate satellite-based system. If there is an overall system failure, addressingproblem or non-delivery for any reason, the system support operators will bealerted and take corrective action. This ensures that shore- based users neednot be concerned about what system or network the ship is using. They needonly address the electronic mail and click on “send”.

_______________



PART D

Extracts from the InternationalTelecommunication Regulations

(Melbourne, 1988)

Note by the Secretariat: In preparing the extracts from the InternationalTelecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988), the Secretariat made editorialchanges, where appropriate, to reflect the ITU structural changes (world administrativeradio conference to world radiocommunication conference, CCIR to ITU-R, CCITT toITU-T, IFRB to the Radiocommunication Bureau, Administrative Council to Council,etc.)

In addition, the term “Member(s)” has been replaced by the term “Member State(s)‡” tocorrespond with the terminology employed currently within the ITU. The symbol “‡”indicates that this replacement was made by the Secretariat.

Part D – ITR 475

INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION REGULATIONS

Article 1

Purpose and Scope of the Regulations

2 1.1 a) These Regulations establish general principles which relate to the provision andoperation of international telecommunication services offered to the public as well as tothe underlying international telecommunication transport means used to provide suchservices. They also set rules applicable to administrations*.

3 b) These Regulations recognize in Article 9 the right of Member States‡ to allowspecial arrangements.

4 1.2 In these Regulations, “the public” is used in the sense of the population, includinggovernmental and legal bodies.

5 1.3 These Regulations are established with a view to facilitating global interconnectionand interoperability of telecommunication facilities and to promoting the harmoniousdevelopment and efficient operation of technical facilities, as well as the efficiency,usefulness and availability to the public of international telecommunication services.

6 1.4 References to ITU-T Recommendations and Instructions in these Regulations arenot to be taken as giving to those Recommendations and Instructions the same legal statusas the Regulations.

7 1.5 Within the framework of the present Regulations, the provision and operation ofinternational telecommunication services in each relation is pursuant to mutual agreementbetween administrations*.

8 1.6 In implementing the principles of these Regulations, administrations* shouldcomply with, to the greatest extent practicable, the relevant ITU-T Recommendations,including any Instructions forming part of or derived from these Recommendations.

9 1.7 a) These Regulations recognize the right of any Member State‡, subject to nationallaw and should it decide to do so, to require that administrations* and privateoperating agencies, which operate in its territory and provide an internationaltelecommunication service to the public, be authorized by that Member State‡.

10 b) The Member State‡ concerned shall, as appropriate, encourage the applicationof relevant ITU-T Recommendations by such service providers.

11 c) The Member States‡, where appropriate, shall cooperate in implementing theInternational Telecommunication Regulations (for interpretation, also seeResolution No. 2).

_______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)

476 Maritime Manual

12 1.8 The Regulations shall apply, regardless of the means of transmission used, so far asthe Radio Regulations do not provide otherwise.

Article 2

Definitions

13 For the purpose of these Regulations, the following definitions shall apply. Theseterms and definitions do not, however, necessarily apply for other purposes.

21 2.6 International route: Technical facilities and installations located in differentcountries and used for telecommunication traffic between two internationaltelecommunication terminal exchanges or offices.

22 2.7 Relation: Exchange of traffic between two terminal countries, always referring to aspecific service if there is between their administrations*:

23 a) a means for the exchange of traffic in that specific service:

– over direct circuits (direct relation), or

– via a point of transit in a third country (indirect relation), and

24 b) normally, the settlement of accounts.

25 2.8 Accounting rate: The rate agreed between administrations* in a given relation thatis used for the establishment of international accounts.

26 2.9 Collection charge: The charge established and collected by an administration*

from its customers for the use of an international telecommunication service.

27 2.10 Instructions: A collection of provisions drawn from one or more ITU-TRecommendations dealing with practical operational procedures for the handling oftelecommunication traffic (e.g., acceptance, transmission, accounting).

Article 3

International Network

28 3.1 Member States‡ shall ensure that administrations* cooperate in the establishment,operation and maintenance of the international network to provide a satisfactory quality ofservice.

_______________* or recognized private operating agency(ies)

Part D – ITR 477

29 3.2 Administrations* shall endeavour to provide sufficient telecommunication facilitiesto meet the requirements of and demand for international telecommunication services.

30 3.3 Administrations* shall determine by mutual agreement which international routesare to be used. Pending agreement and provided that there is no direct route existingbetween the terminal administrations* concerned, the origin administration* has the choiceto determine the routing of its outgoing telecommunication traffic, taking into account theinterests of the relevant transit and destination administrations*.

31 3.4 Subject to national law, any user, by having access to the international networkestablished by an administration*, has the right to send traffic. A satisfactory quality ofservice should be maintained to the greatest extent practicable, corresponding to relevantITU-T Recommendations.

Article 4

International Telecommunication Services

32 4.1 Member States‡ shall promote the implementation of international tele-communication services and shall endeavour to make such services generally available tothe public in their national network(s).

33 4.2 Member States‡ shall ensure that administrations* cooperate within the frameworkof these Regulations to provide by mutual agreement, a wide range of internationaltelecommunication services which should conform, to the greatest extent practicable, tothe relevant ITU-T Recommendations.

34 4.3 Subject to national law, Member States‡ shall endeavour to ensure thatadministrations* provide and maintain, to the greatest extent practicable, a minimumquality of service corresponding to the relevant ITU-T Recommendations with respect to:

35 a) access to the international network by users using terminals which arepermitted to be connected to the network and which do not cause harm totechnical facilities and personnel;

36 b) international telecommunication facilities and services available to customersfor their dedicated use;

37 c) at least a form of telecommunication which is reasonably accessible to thepublic, including those who may not be subscribers to a specifictelecommunication service; and

38 d) a capability for interworking between different services, as appropriate, tofacilitate international communications.


478 Maritime Manual

Article 5

Safety of Life and Priority of Telecommunications

39 5.1 Safety of life telecommunications, such as distress telecommunications, shall beentitled to transmission as of right and shall, where technically practicable, have absolutepriority over all other telecommunications, in accordance with the relevant Articles of theConvention and taking due account of relevant ITU-T Recommendations.

40 5.2 Government telecommunications, including telecommunications relative to theapplication of certain provisions of the United Nations Charter, shall, where technicallypracticable, enjoy priority over telecommunications other than those referred to in No. 39,in accordance with the relevant provisions of the Convention and taking due account ofrelevant ITU-T Recommendations.

41 5.3 The provisions governing the priority enjoyed by all other telecommunications arecontained in the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.

Article 6

Charging and Accounting

42 6.1 Collection charges

43 6.1.1 Each administration* shall, subject to applicable national law, establish the chargesto be collected from its customers. The level of the charges is a national matter; however,in establishing these charges, administrations* should try to avoid too great a dissymmetrybetween the charges applicable in each direction of the same relation.

44 6.1.2 The charge levied by an administration* on customers for a particularcommunication should in principle be the same in a given relation, regardless of the routechosen by that administration*.

45 6.1.3 Where, in accordance with the national law of a country, a fiscal tax is levied oncollection charges for international telecommunication services, this tax shall normally becollected only in respect of international services billed to customers in that country,unless other arrangements are made to meet special circumstances.

46 6.2 Accounting rates

47 6.2.1 For each applicable service in a given relation, administrations* shall by mutualagreement establish and revise accounting rates to be applied between them, inaccordance with the provisions of Appendix 1 and taking into account relevant ITU-TRecommendations and relevant cost trends.


Part D – ITR 479

51 6.4 Establishment of accounts and settlement of balances of account

52 6.4.1 Unless otherwise agreed, administrations* shall follow the relevant provisions asset out in Appendices 1 and 2.

Article 7

Suspension of Services

55 7.1 If a Member State‡ exercises its right in accordance with the Convention tosuspend international telecommunication services partially or totally, that Member State‡

shall immediately notify the Secretary-General of the suspension and of the subsequentreturn to normal conditions by the most appropriate means of communication.

56 7.2 The Secretary-General shall immediately bring such information to the attention ofall other Member States‡, using the most appropriate means of communication.

Article 9

Special Arrangements

58 9.1 a) Pursuant to Article 31 of the International Telecommunication Convention(Nairobi, 1982), special arrangements may be entered into on telecommunication matterswhich do not concern Member States‡ in general. Subject to national laws, MemberStates‡ may allow administrations* or other organizations or persons to enter into suchspecial mutual arrangements with Member States‡, administrations* or other organizationsor persons that are so allowed in another country for the establishment, operation, and useof special telecommunication networks, systems and services, in order to meet specializedinternational telecommunication needs within and/or between the territories of theMember States‡ concerned, and including, as necessary, those financial, technical, oroperating conditions to be observed.

59 b) Any such special arrangements should avoid technical harm to the operation ofthe telecommunication facilities of third countries.

60 9.2 Member States‡ should, where appropriate, encourage the parties to any specialarrangements that are made pursuant to No. 58 to take into account relevant provisions ofITU-T Recommendations.


480 Maritime Manual

Article 10

Final Provisions

61 10.1 These Regulations, of which Appendices 1, 2 and 3 form integral parts, shall enterinto force on 1 July 1990 at 0001 hours UTC.

62 10.2 On the date specified in No. 61, the Telegraph Regulations (Geneva, 1973) and theTelephone Regulations (Geneva, 1973) shall be replaced by these InternationalTelecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988) pursuant to the InternationalTelecommunication Convention.

63 10.3 If a Member State‡ makes reservations with regard to the application of one ormore of the provisions of these Regulations, other Member States‡ and theiradministrations* shall be free to disregard the said provision or provisions in theirrelations with the Member State‡ which has made such reservations and itsadministrations*.


Part D – ITR 481

APPENDIX 1

General Provisions Concerning AccountingITR

1. Accounting rates

1.1 For each applicable service in a given relation, administrations* shall by mutualagreement establish and revise accounting rates to be applied between them, taking into accountthe Recommendations of the ITU-T and trends in the cost of providing the specifictelecommunication service, and shall divide such rates into terminal shares payable to theadministrations* of terminal countries, and where appropriate, into transit shares payable to theadministrations* of transit countries.

1.2 Alternatively, in traffic relations where ITU-T cost studies can be used as a basis, theaccounting rate may be determined in accordance with the following method:

a) administrations* shall establish and revise their terminal and transit shares taking intoaccount the Recommendations of the ITU-T;

b) the accounting rate shall be the sum of the terminal shares and any transit shares.

1.3 When one or more administrations* acquire, either by flat rate remuneration or otherarrangements, the right to utilize a part of the circuit and/or installations of anotheradministration*, the former have the right to establish their share as mentioned in 1.1 and 1.2above, for this part of the relation.

1.4 In cases where one or more routes have been established by agreement betweenadministrations* and where traffic is diverted unilaterally by the administration* of origin to aroute which has not been agreed with the administration* of destination, the terminal sharespayable to the administration* of destination shall be the same as would have been due to it hadthe traffic been routed over the agreed primary route and the transit costs are borne by theadministration* of origin, unless the administration* of destination is prepared to agree to adifferent share.

1.5 In cases where the traffic is routed via a transit point without authorization and/oragreement to the transit share, the transit administration* has the right to set the level of thetransit share to be included in the international accounts.

1.6 Where an administration* has a duty or fiscal tax levied on its accounting rate shares orother remunerations, it shall not in turn impose any such duty or fiscal tax on otheradministrations*.


482 Maritime Manual

2. Establishment of accounts

2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the administrations* responsible for collecting the charges shallestablish a monthly account showing all the amounts due and send it to the administrations*

concerned.

2.2 The accounts shall be sent as promptly as possible and, except in cases of force majeure,before the end of the third month following that to which they relate.

2.3 In principle an account shall be considered as accepted without the need for specificnotification of acceptance to the administration* which sent it.

2.4 However, any administration* has the right to question the contents of an account for aperiod of two calendar months after the receipt of the account, but only to the extent necessary tobring any differences within mutually agreed limits.

2.5 In relations where there are no special agreements, a quarterly settlement statementshowing the balances of the monthly accounts for the period to which it relates shall be preparedas soon as possible by the creditor administration* and shall be sent in duplicate to the debtoradministration*, which, after verification, shall return one of the copies endorsed with itsacceptance.

2.6 In indirect relations where a transit administration* acts as an accounting intermediarybetween two terminal points, it shall include accounting data for transit traffic in the relevantoutgoing traffic account to administrations* beyond it in the routing sequence as soon as possibleafter receiving that data from the originating administration*.

3. Settlement of balances of accounts

3.1 Choice of the currency of payment

3.1.1 The payment of balances of international telecommunication accounts shall be made inthe currency selected by the creditor after consultation with the debtor. In the event ofdisagreement, the choice of the creditor shall prevail in all cases subject to the provisions in3.1.2 below. If the creditor does not specify a currency, the choice shall rest with the debtor.

3.1.2 If a creditor selects a currency with a value fixed unilaterally or a currency the equivalentvalue of which is to be determined by its relationship to a currency with a value also fixedunilaterally, the use of the selected currency must be acceptable to the debtor.

3.2 Determination of the amount of payment

3.2.1 The amount of the payment in the selected currency, as determined below, shall beequivalent in value to the balance of the account.


Part D – ITR 483

3.2.2 If the balance of the account is expressed in the monetary unit of the IMF, the amount ofthe selected currency shall be determined by the relationship in effect on the day beforepayment, or by the latest relationship published by the IMF, between the monetary unit of theIMF and the selected currency.

3.2.3 However, if the relationship of the monetary unit of the IMF to the selected currency hasnot been published, the amount of the balance of account shall, at a first stage, be converted intoa currency for which a relationship has been published by the IMF, using the relationship ineffect on the day before payment or the latest published relationship. The amount thus obtainedshall, at a second stage, be converted into the equivalent value of the selected currency, using theclosing rate in effect on the day prior to payment or the most recent rate quoted on the official orgenerally accepted foreign exchange market of the main financial centre of the debtor country.

3.2.4 If the balance of the account is expressed in gold francs, the amount shall, in the absenceof special arrangements, be converted into the monetary unit of the IMF in accordance with theprovisions of section 6.3 of the Regulations. The amount of payment shall then be determined incompliance with the provisions of 3.2.2. above.

3.2.5 If, in accordance with a special arrangement, the balance of the account is expressedneither in the monetary unit of the IMF nor in gold francs, the payment shall also be the subjectof this special arrangement and:

a) if the selected currency is the same as the currency of the balance of account, theamount of the selected currency shall be the amount of the balance of account;

b) if the selected currency for payment is different from the currency in which thebalance is expressed, the amount shall be determined by converting the balance ofaccount to its equivalent value in the selected currency in accordance with theprovisions of 3.2.3 above.

3.3 Payment of balances

3.3.1 Payment of balances of account shall be effected as promptly as possible, but in no caselater than two calendar months after the day on which the settlement statement is despatched bythe creditor administration*. Beyond this period, the creditor administration* may, subject toprior notification in the form of a final demand for payment, and unless otherwise agreed, chargeinterest at a rate of up to 6% per annum, reckoned from the day following the date of expiry ofthe said period.

3.3.2 The payment due on a settlement statement shall not be delayed pending settlement of aquery on that account. Adjustments which are later agreed shall be included in a subsequentaccount.

3.3.3 On the date of payment, the debtor shall transmit the amount of the selected currency ascomputed above by a bank cheque, transfer or any other means acceptable to the debtor and thecreditor. If the creditor expresses no preference, the choice shall fall to the debtor.


484 Maritime Manual

3.3.4 The payment charges imposed in the debtor country (taxes, clearing charges,commissions, etc.) shall be borne by the debtor. Any such charges imposed in the creditorcountry, including payment charges imposed by intermediate banks in third countries, shall beborne by the creditor.

3.4 Additional provisions

3.4.1 Provided the periods of payment are observed, administrations* may by mutual agreementsettle their balances of various kinds by offsetting:

– credits and debits in their relations with other administrations*; and/or

– debts arising from postal services, if appropriate.

3.4.2 If, between the time the remittance (bank transfer, cheques, etc.) is effected and the timethe creditor is in receipt of that remittance (account credited, cheque encashed, etc.), a variationoccurs in the equivalent value of the selected currency calculated as indicated in paragraph 3.2,and if the difference resulting from such variations exceeds 5% of the amount due as calculatedfollowing such variations, the total difference shall be shared equally between debtor andcreditor.

3.4.3 If there should be a radical change in the international monetary system whichinvalidates or makes inappropriate one or more of the foregoing paragraphs, administrations* arefree to adopt, by mutual agreement, a different monetary basis and/or different procedures forthe settlement of balances of accounts, pending a revision of the above provisions.


Part D – ITR 485

APPENDIX 2

Additional Provisions Relating toMaritime Telecommunications

ITR

1. General

The provisions contained in Article 6 and Appendix 1, taking into account the relevantITU-T Recommendations, shall also apply to maritime telecommunications in so far as thefollowing provisions do not provide otherwise.

2. Accounting authority

2.1 Charges for maritime telecommunications in the maritime mobile service and themaritime mobile-satellite service shall in principle, and subject to national law and practice, becollected from the maritime mobile station licensee:

a) by the administration that has issued the licence; or

b) by a recognized private operating agency; or

c) by any other entity or entities designated for this purpose by the administrationreferred to in a) above.

2.2 The administration or the recognized private operating agency or the designated entity orentities listed in paragraph 2.1 are referred to in this Appendix as the “accounting authority”.

2.3 References to administration* contained in Article 6 and Appendix 1 shall be read as“accounting authority” when applying the provisions of Article 6 and Appendix 1 to maritimetelecommunications.

2.4 Member States‡ shall designate their accounting authority or authorities for the purposesof implementing this Appendix and notify their names, identification codes and addresses to theSecretary-General for inclusion in the List of Ship Stations; the number of such names andaddresses shall be limited taking into account the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.

3. Establishment of accounts

3.1 In principle, an account shall be considered as accepted without the need for specificnotification of acceptance to the accounting authority that sent it.

3.2 However, any accounting authority has the right to question the contents of an account fora period of six calendar months after dispatch of the account.


486 Maritime Manual

4. Settlement of balances of account

4.1 All international maritime telecommunication accounts shall be paid by the accountingauthority without delay and in any case within six calendar months after dispatch of the account,except where the settlement of accounts is undertaken in accordance with paragraph 4.3 below.

4.2 If international maritime telecommunication accounts remain unpaid after six calendarmonths, the administration that has licensed the mobile station shall, on request, take all possiblesteps, within the limits of applicable national law, to ensure settlement of the accounts from thelicensee.

4.3 If the period between the date of dispatch and receipt exceeds one month, the receivingaccounting authority should at once notify the originating accounting authority that queries andpayments may be delayed. The delay shall, however, not exceed three calendar months inrespect of payment, or five calendar months in respect of queries, both periods commencingfrom the date of receipt of the account.

4.4 The debtor accounting authority may refuse the settlement and adjustment of accountspresented more than eighteen calendar months after the date of the traffic to which the accountsrelate.

_______________

PART E

Extracts from the ITU-T Recommendations

_______________ See Note by the Secretariat, Part D.

Part E 489

Notes

1. In these Recommendations, the expression Administration is used forconciseness to indicate both a telecommunication administration and a recognizedoperating agency.

2. Should there be any conflict regarding the time scale in the ITU-T Recommen-dation D.90 and those stated in Appendix 2 of the International TelecommunicationRegulations then the latter would prevail.

4. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110, the referencescommencing with the letters J, K, L and M concern provisions in Divisions J, K, Land M respectively of ITU-T Recommendation D.90 entitled Charging, billing,international accounting and settlement in the Maritime Mobile Service.

5. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110 the term MaritimeMobile Service should be understood to embrace the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Serviceas well as the MF, HF, VHF and UHF radio media, unless specifically stated otherwise.

6. Throughout the ITU-T Recommendation F.110 the term Administration meansthat recognized private operating agency/agencies are included. However, where thisterm is used in respect of notification by Administrations to the General Secretariat ofthe ITU, this applies only to recognized private operating agencies that have beenauthorized by Administrations to carry out such notification.

7. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110, the terms mobile stationand land station should be considered as analogous to ship station and coast stationrespectively used in the Radio Regulations.

Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90 491

ITU-T Recommendation D.90

CHARGING, BILLING, INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING ANDSETTLEMENT IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE

(Revised in 1995)

1 Introduction

1.1 This Recommendation sets out the principles for charging, billing, internationalaccounting and settlement for the maritime mobile service. It covers:

– the procedures for the rendering of a bill by a service provider in respect of thecollection charges payable by a maritime mobile station;

– the payment procedures related to the bill;– the inter-Administration/ROA (service provider) international accounting

procedures when maritime mobile traffic involves a terrestrial international calland, where applicable, the use of a land station in a country other than the onewhere the call originates/terminates.

1.2 The following provides an explanation of terminology used in this Recommendation.

1.2.1 Maritime mobile service – The term is used in this Recommendation to cover theMaritime Mobile Satellite Service as well as the MF, HF and VHF radio media, unlessspecifically stated otherwise.

1.2.2 Service provider – The Administration/ROA who provides the communication serviceto/from maritime mobile stations.

1.2.3 Land Station (LS) – This term is used to cover both fixed Land Earth Station andCoast Station.

1.2.4 Land Station Operator (LSO) – An entity which operates a Land Station in theMaritime Mobile Service. This can be an Administration/ROA or other entity(ies) designated bythe Administration to operate the Land Station.

1.2.5 Maritime mobile station – This term is used to include a maritime mobile satellitestation, and in the context of billing refers to the Licensee, equating to the use of the termcustomer in the terrestrial service. It equates to Ship Station used in die Radio Regulations.

1.2.6 Maritime bill – The bill issued by the service provider in respect of collection chargesfor maritime mobile traffic originated by a maritime mobile station.

1.2.7 Land line charge – The charge relating to the transmission over the terrestrial publicswitched telecommunications network.

1.2.8 Land station charge – The charge relating to the use of facilities provided by the landstation, which will include the space segment costs in the maritime mobile satellite case andwhich may be presented by the LSO in its component parts.

1.2.9 Accounting Authority/Accounting Authority Identification Code – (See annex A.)

492 Maritime Manual

3 Collection charges

3.1 General principles

See also Annex E – Case studies

3.1.1 The charge structure and level is a national matter.

3.1.2 The collection charges may take account of the following elements:

a) the national/international (if applicable) link = the landline;

b) the land station;

c) the space segment (if applicable);

d) any special services or facilities.

3.1.3 For communication between a maritime mobile station and a country other than that ofthe land station (cases 3, 4):

3.1.3.1 The international land line charges shall normally be the collection charges applicablein the international relation concerned for the services used.

3.1.3.2 Service providers may choose to establish a combined collection charge covering boththe landline and the land station.

3.1.4 Communications between maritime mobile stations:

3.1.4.1 When a single land station is used as an intermediary between maritime mobilestations, two maritime land station charges are collected. If the land station charge applicable totraffic with the origin maritime mobile station is different from that applicable to traffic with thedestination maritime mobile station, the sum of these two charges is collected.

3.1.4.2 When it is necessary to use two land stations in different countries as intermediariesbetween two maritime mobile stations (case 6), the landline charge for the section between thetwo land stations (normally the collection charge applicable in the international relationconcerned for the service used) is collected in addition to the two land station charges.

3.1.4.3 When it is necessary to use two land stations in the same country as intermediarybetween two maritime mobile stations a national landline charge between the two land stations iscollected in addition to the two land station charges.

3.1.5 If authorised to do so by its licensing Administration, a maritime mobile station maycollect on board a fee from users, for the use of facilities provided, in addition to the serviceprovider's collection charges. Such a fee will be retained by the maritime mobile station. Thelicensing Administration may set an upper limit to these fees.

3.2 Publication of collection charges by the ITU

3.2.1 The landline and land station charges shall be notified by the service provider to theRadiocommunication Bureau in the unit of the IMF, currently the SDR (Special Drawing Right),or in Gold Francs which is the equivalent to 1/3.061 SDR (1 SDR = 3.061 GFcs).


3.2.2 The landline and land station charges notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau willbe published in the List of Coast Stations.

3.2.3 For countries that have not introduced banded collection charges for internationalservices, only a limited number of charges, for routes in frequent use, will be published. In suchcases, the Radiocommunication Bureau will need to be informed which charges should bepublished.

3.2.4 Maritime mobile stations must be aware of the collection charges. They areauthorized, where necessary, to obtain such information directly from land stations. Chargesfurnished by land stations should be expressed either in SDRs or in Gold Francs (see 3.2.1above).

3.3 Changes to collection charges

3.3.1 New or modified collection charges shall not come into effect for international trafficfor countries other than the one which establishes the charges until the first day of the monthfollowing expiry of the period specified below. The period will be counted from the day after thepublication date of the ITU Operational Bulletin which contains this notification. Serviceproviders providing information for publication in the Operational Bulletin should observe thedeadlines indicated in the Bulletin in forwarding this information to the RadiocommunicationBureau.

3.3.2 The period to be taken into account is as follows:a) for traffic from maritime mobile station to land: I month and 15 days;b) for traffic from land to maritime mobile station: 15 days, except for changes to

bring charges into line with those on competing routes where the period is10 days.

3.4 Special charging arrangements

3.4.1 Communications of immediate general interest ( including safety and distress)

No charge is raised, against the maritime mobile station, for transmission in the maritime mobileservice provided that the communications are :

a) distress calls/messages or replies to such calls/messages;b) messages originating in maritime mobile stations requiring shore rescue authority

support, e.g. man overboard, oil pollution or piracy attack;c) messages originating in maritime mobile stations notifying the presence of

dangers to navigation (e.g. icebergs, derelicts, mines) or announcing cyclones,storms or fog;

d) messages originating in maritime mobile stations notifying sudden changes in theposition of buoys, the working of lighthouses, devices connected with buoyageetc.; or

e) messages originating in martime mobile stations notifying unexpectedphenomena threatening air navigation or the sudden occurrence of obstacles atairports or special landing/berthing places at sea.

494 Maritime Manual

Any land station and landline charges for Safety and Distress communications will be billed tothe appropriate shore authority.

3.4.2 Communications relating to medical advice

No charge is raised against the originating maritime mobile station for communications usingthe maritime mobile service which relate to medical advice provided that:

a) they are exchanged directly between maritime mobile stations and either LandStations shown in the List of Radiodetermination and Special Service Stations asproviding such a service, or Land Earth Stations which offer the service; and

b) they are addressed in accordance with the conditions published in the above List,or as specificied by the satellite service operator.

Any land station and landline charges for medical advice communications will be billed to theappropriate shore authority.

3.4.3 Meteorological communications

Charges for meteorological communications are a national matter.

3.4.4 Communications relating to persons protected in time of war

Radio telegrams concerning persons protected in time of war by the Geneva Convention of12 August 1949 (RCT) will be accepted in accordance with Recommendation F.1, and will becharged in accordance with Recommendation D.40.

3.4.5 Service communications in the maritime mobile service

Service telegrams or service telexes relating to the maritime mobile service should be treated inaccordance with Recommendation D.192.

3.5 Service specific charging principles

3.5.1 Radiotelegrams (see Recommendation F.110)

3.5.1.1 The land station charge is established on the basis of a word charge – seeRecommendation F.1.

3.5.1.2 No additional charge shall be made when acknowledgment of receipt of aradiotelegram is made through another maritime mobile station or land station by service advice,or when an intermediate maritime mobile station assists in the forwarding of a radiotelegram.

3.5.2 Radiomaritime letters (see Recommendation F.110)

3.5.2.1 Except as otherwise provided below, radiomaritime letters may be accepted, takinginto account ITU-T Recommendations relating to letter telegrams, if the telegram service is usedto convey radiomaritime letters.

3.5.2.2 The total charge shall include the postal charge (by ordinary letter or airmail letter)due for delivery in the land station country.


3.5.2.3 An additional charge may be collected where delivery is to be made to a country otherthan that of the land station.

3.5.2.4 The following charges are added where applicable:a) charges due for special services;b) the landline charge when transmission on the land section is exceptionally by

telegraph.

3.5.3 Radiotelephone and radiotelex calls (see Recommendation F.110)

3.5.3.1 If no uniform charges apply in respect of the land stations of a country, different landstation charges shall be fixed for the MF, HF and VHF bands and for the maritime mobilesatellite service.

3.5.3.2 If, due to the lack of technical facilities, no extra charges apart from the normalinternational landline charges can be levied by the origin Service Providers, no land stationcharges will be collected for international automatic VHF radiotelephone calls in the to-maritimemobile station direction, if so decided by the land station Service Providers. The List of CoastStations [1] shall indicate which Service Providers accept such calls without levying land stationcharges.

3.5.3.3 When handled through a land station, the chargeable duration of a manual or single-operator call will be fixed at the end of the call by the land station; if two land stations areparticipating in the handling of the call, the record of the land station that accepted the call fromthe originating maritime mobile station will prevail.

3.5.4 Radiotelexograms (see Recommendation F.110)

3.5.4.1 The charge for the landline element shall be that applicable to a telex call.

3.5.4.2 The charge for the landstation element shall be that applicable to a radiotelegram orconverted into chargeable duration units.

4 Maritime billing

4.1 Billing responsibilities

4.1.1 Collection charges for calls from shore to maritime mobile stations (cases 2, 4) will bebilled by the service provider to the calling customer in the normal customer billing process andare not the subject of this subclause.

4.1.2 Collection charges for communications from maritime mobile stations to shore (cases1, 3, 5 & 6) shall in principle and subject to national law and practice, be billed by the serviceprovider to:

a) An accounting authority or other third party agreed between the service providerand the maritime mobile station;

b) the maritime mobile station; orc) a credit/charge card company designated by the service provider.

496 Maritime Manual

NOTE – In cases b) and c) above the accounting authority of the maritime mobile station is notresponsible for payment of the bills for communications originating from the maritime mobilestation.For cases b) and c) above, 4.2.2, 4.3.2., 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 do not apply, as the billingarrangements are the subject of agreement between the service provider and the maritimemobile station or the credit/charge card company.

4.1.3 The registration, responsibilities and identification of accounting authorities aredescribed in Annex A.

4.2 Billing processes and associated timescales

4.2.1 The processes involved in the billing of maritime mobile stations are described in 4.4,4.5, and 4.7 below. The timescales associated with the various processes are summarized inAnnex D and represent the recommended maximum timescales. Variations to the timescales andprocesses may be agreed between the service provider and the billed party (as defined in 4.1.2)as part of their commercial arrangements.

4.2.2 In some instances, the International Telecommunications Regulations (ITR -Appendix 2) provide for a longer maximum timescale than that recommended in thisRecommendation. The ITR timescales will be regarded as applicable in exceptional cases, forexample, where delays in rendering the bill to the correct accounting authority are encountered.The timescales contained in this Recommendation shall be regarded as the normal maximumtimescales to be followed.

4.3 Billing procedures

4.3.1 The bills for communications originating in martime mobile stations should be basedon the following data gathered at the Land Station:

a) the maritime mobile station name, the maritime mobile station identificationand/or call sign;

b) the accounting authority identification code when required by the serviceprovider;

c) the credit/charge card details if applicable;d) the number or identification of the addressee, including, for example, country

code and area codes;e) the chargeable units;f) date communication commenced, and time if appropriate;g) traffic category;h) type of call (automatic, operator assisted, collect, etc.);i) special services/facilities used.

4.3.2 In the case of communications originating in maritime mobile stations, the serviceprovider shall bill, in accordance with the collection charges notified to the ITU in SDRs orGold Francs (see 3.2):

a) the land station charges;


b) the landline charges;

c) any charges for special services or facilities;

d) where appropriate, postal charges on radiomaritime letters.

4.4 Preparation and despatch of bills

4.4.1 Bills are prepared monthly by the service provider and despatched to the accountingauthority responsible for the maritime mobile station, unless other arrangements have beenagreed between the service provider and the maritime mobile station.

4.4.2 Bills should be despatched as promptly as possible and by the most expeditious meanspracticable but in any case before the end of the second month following that to which theyrelate. (See Note 1.)

4.4.3 The bill will consist of two parts: a summary statement and a detailed communicationsstatement. This shall contain as a minimum the information identified in the specimen formatsshown in Annexes B and C. Both statements should be identified by the same unique billnumber and show the same date. In the communication statement, the calls shall be enteredindividually with all necessary particulars for a given month. A separate statement for eachmaritime mobile station should be established. The total charges for each maritime mobilestation should be included in the summary statement.

4.4.4 In the case of single-operator service, if bilaterally agreed between the serviceproviders concerned, the land station operator may despatch a bill directly to the booking caller(see case 4).

4.4.5 In the case of collect calls to a maritime mobile station in the international maritimemobile service, where permitted by the service provider, the total amount of the charges shall becollected from the maritime mobile station.

4.5 Acceptance/queries/rejection

4.5.1 In principle, a bill shall be considered as accepted without the need for specificnotification of acceptance to the service provider that sent it.

4.5.2 The accounting authority should notify the billing service provider of any preliminaryrejections immediately upon receipt of a bill, for example if maritime mobile stations included inthe bill are not or no longer their responsibility.

4.5.3 However, any accounting authority shall have the right to question the contents of abill for a period of four months after its dispatch even if the bill has been paid. Any adjustmentswhich are later agreed shall he included in a subsequent bill.

4.6 Payment of bills

4.6.1 All bills shall be paid by the accounting authority without delay and in any eventwithin three months of receipt by the accounting authority or within four months of dispatchwhichever is the shorter period. The unique bill numbers and the traffic period(s) covered by the

498 Maritime Manual

payment should be quoted at the time of payment. The exception is where the provisions of 4.6.3below apply. (See Note 1.)

4.6.2 If a bill remains unpaid after four months from dispatch, the Administration that haslicensed the maritime mobile station shall on request, take all possible steps within the limits ofapplicable national law to ensure payment of the bill, provided that notification of late receipthas not been advised as described in 4.6.3 below.

4.6.3 If the period between the date of dispatch of the bill and receipt exceeds twenty-onedays, the receiving accounting authority should at once notify the originating service providerthat queries and payment may be delayed. However, the delay shall not exceed three monthsfrom date of receipt of the bill in respect of payment and in respect of queries even if the bill hasbeen paid.

4.6.4 The debtor accounting authority may refuse to pay or adjust bills rendered more thanfifteen months after the date of the traffic to which the bills relate. (See Note 2.)

4.6.5 When a potential non payment has been identified and notified by the accountingauthority to the service providers, the accounting authority is responsible for the debt incurredonly up to the date of notification and provided that the service providers bill all outstandingcharges within 45 working days of receipt of such notification.

Notification shall be by telex, or other confirmable means of communication, to the officedesignated by the service providers.

4.8 Refunds

4.8.1 Radiotelegrams

4.8.1.1 The provisions of Recommendation D.43 shall apply with the following exceptions.

4.8.1.2 Where a radiotelegram remains undelivered after the required period of retention(Recommendation E.200/F.110), the Service Provider may determine the basis of the refund ofcharge either under the provisions of Recommendation D.43 or refund the land station charge infull. In the second case, the Service Provider may charge a compensatory flat rate handlingcharge per undelivered message.

4.8.1.3 In the case of a radiotelegram that has been forwarded by the land station to amaritime mobile station in port by means other than radio (see Recommendation F.110), onlythe land station charge shall be debited.

4.8.2 Radiomaritime letters

4.8.2.1 When a radiomaritime letter fails to reach its destination due to the failure of the postalservice, only the charges in respect to the services not carried out are refundable.

4.8.2.2 Refund of charges is applicable when, through the fault of the telegraph orradiotelegraph service, a radiomaritime letter has not reached its destination, taking into accountRecommendation D.43.


4.8.3 Radiotelephone and radiotelex calls

4.8.3.1 When, through any fault of the service, the booking of a call is not followed by thecalling and called maritime mobile stations being placed in communication, no charge shall bepayable. If the amount of the charge has been paid, it shall be refunded.

4.8.3.2 In order to simplify operating and accounting procedures, Service Providers maydecide that no charge shall be payable when a requested connection has not been set up,whatever the reason.

4.8.3.3 However, Service Providers may decide to collect charges in cases where there is nofault of service. In that case the basis of charging shall be notified to the RadiocommunicationBureau for inclusion in the List of Coast Stations [1].

4.8.3.4 When, through any fault of the service, difficulty is experienced in the course of a call,the chargeable duration of the call shall be reduced to the total time during which transmissionconditions have been satisfactory, taking account the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.

4.8.4 Radiotelexograms

4.8.4.1 The principles for refunds for radiotelegrams and telex calls shall apply as appropriate.

5 International accounting and settlement

5.1 International accounting for maritime mobile traffic to/from maritime mobile stationsarises when maritime mobile communications involve the use of a land station in a country otherthan the one in which either the called or calling party is located, or where two land stations indifferent countries are involved in the call (cases 3, 4, 6 ) and covers:

a) the landline charge / accounting rate;

b) the land station charge / accounting rate where applicable (cases 4, 6).

5.1.1 Landline – The international call from the land station in one country to the calledparty in another country, or between two land stations in different countries. This will beaccounted at the agreed international accounting rate applying in the international relationconcerned for the service used and shall be included in the relevant international traffic accountsin accordance with the provisions of the International Telecommunications Regulations andrelevant ITU-T Recommendations.

5.1.2 Land station – The amount is set by the LSO

5.2 A single accounting rate covering both the landline and the land station elements maybe bilaterally agreed where the origin Administration is able to record all the necessary data.

5.3 The land station administration in a country other than that where a call originates isconsidered for the purposes of the landline accounting to be the origin or destination country (asappropriate) of the call, and not as a transit point.

500 Maritime Manual

5.4 Manual or Single-Operator (LSO) Service (see Case 3 and Case 4 – VHF/HF/MF)

5.4.1 In single-operator service, subject to bilateral agreement a terrestrial customer in onecountry and an LSO in another country may call each other without the intermediary of anoperator in the first country (see Recommendation F.110).

5.4.2 For traffic to a maritime mobile station which originates in a country other than that ofthe land station (case 4), the land station Administration shall, unless otherwise bilaterallyagreed, debit the originating Administration with the land station charges based on data gatheredby the LSO.

5.4.3 Except where calls are made collect, the call details are forwarded by the LSO at leastmonthly to the originating Administration. The amounts due are included in the periodicstatement of accounts to the credit of the land station Administration.

5.4.4 When handled through a land station, the duration for international accounting of amanual or single-operator call will be fixed at the end of the call by the land station: if two landstations are participating in the handling of the call, the record of the land station that acceptedthe call from the originating maritime mobile station will prevail.

5.5 Automatic and semi-automatic service (see Case 4 – satellite)

5.5.1 Traffic to a maritime mobile station which has originated in a country other than thatof the land station (case 4), both the landline and the land station charges shall be included in therelevant traffic accounts by the origin Administration on the basis of its own record ofchargeable units.

5.5.2 Accounts for charges relating to the maritime mobile satellite services shall show thecountry of origin/ destination ocean area and chargeable duration/words and if possible thenumber of calls/messages. Such accounts shall include the total chargeable duration for anybroadcast calls sent over the international public switched network to a land (earth) station in themaritime mobile satellite service, separately listed.

5.6 Collect calls where permitted by the service provider are, for accounting purposes,regarded as originating in the destination country or destination maritime mobile station asapplicable. Collect calls will be identified separately in the international accounts.

5.7 Settlement of international accounts

5.7.1 Exchange and verification of international traffic accounts and payment of balances ofthose accounts shall be carried out in accordance with the International TelecommunicationRegulations and the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.


Annex A

Accounting authorities(This Annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation)

Background

Accounting authorities came into existence to reduce the number of bills, both issued by ServiceProviders and received by shipowners and which required extensive administrative effort toprogress, e.g. identify calls, convert call charges in various currencies and reconcile charges.

The accounting authority acts as a billing intermediary between the maritime mobile station andservice providers.

A.1 Role of an accounting authority

A.1.1 The role of an accounting authority may be undertaken by:a) an Administration;b) a Recognized Operating Agency (ROA);c) any other entity or entities designated for this purpose by the Administration

referred to in a) above.

A.1.2 When acting on behalf of a maritime mobile station for which it has acceptedresponsibility, an accounting authority shall be responsible for:

A.1.2.1 obtaining payment of the collection charges for maritime mobile communicationsfrom the maritime mobile station.

A.1.2.2 guaranteeing payment of the collection charges to the service providers for trafficoriginated by the maritime mobile station, ensuring that these payments are made in accordancewith the ITU Regulations and Recommendation D.90.

A.1.2.3 maintaining up-to-date and accurate records of the maritime mobile stations for whichit has responsibility. Any change in status, shipowner if known, termination/commencement ofcontract must be notified immediately to interested/regularly used service providers and to theAdministration that licensed the maritime mobile station. Where changes have occurred, a newand updated list of maritime mobile stations should be issued by the accounting authority at leastevery 90 days to interested/regularly used service providers and to the Administration wholicensed the maritime mobile station, with changes to the previously issued information clearlyindicated. Alternatively, a “no change” notification may be issued. The updated informationshould consist of:

– satellite identity number/ships call sign;– ship/mobile name;– commencement date;– termination date;– previous Agent or new Agent, if known;

502 Maritime Manual

– shipowner, if known.

A.1.2.4 ensuring that its Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) is known by allAdministrations recognizing it and all maritime mobile stations for which it is responsible.

A.1.3 An accounting authority should notify service providers and the Administration whichhas licensed the maritime mobile station concerned, as soon as it has been established that it isunable to collect payment from that maritime mobile station. This information will enable theservice providers to cease accepting calls from that maritime mobile station in order to preventthe uncollectable debt from further increasing.

A.1.4 The licensing Administration may authorize accounting authorities recognized by it tonotify the Radiocommunication Bureau directly of additions, modifications and deletions to bemade in the List of Ship Stations as regards maritime mobile stations for which they have billingresponsibility. Such additions, modifications and deletions should contain whenever possible,the full details required for the List (see A.1.2.3 above). When a licensing Administration givessuch authorization, it will notify the ITU that it has done so. Before an Accounting Authority(AA) accepts responsibility maritime mobile station which has previously been theresponsibility of another AA, the new AA jointly with the previous AA should check themaritime mobile station’s payment record.

A.2 Registration of an accounting authority

A.2.1 An accounting authority must be registered with their Administration. Registrationshould be subject to a periodic review (for example, annual) by the Administration or nationalRegulatory Body of the financial position and effectiveness of each accounting authority. Shouldthe registration be suspended or cancelled, the registering Administration shall inform theRadiocommunication Bureau by means of a notice for inclusion in the ITU Operational Bulletin,that the registration has been suspended or cancelled.

A.2.2 Each accounting authority will be allocated a discrete Accounting AuthorityIdentification Code (AAIC – see A.3.1 below) by the registering Administration.

A.2.3 The registering Administration shall notify the name(s) and address(es) of theaccounting authority(ies) with their respective identification codes to the RadiocommunicationBureau for inclusion in the List of Ship Stations.

A.2.4 The number of accounting authorities responsible for maritime mobile stationslicensed by an Administration shall be limited as far as possible and should not exceed 25(whether all are based in the licensing Administration’s country or based abroad – see A.3.2.3and A.3.4.3 below).

A.3 Identification of accounting authorities – AAICs

A.3.1 Code format

The discrete Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) consists of two parts:

a) the first part will be two letters denoting the country in which the accountingauthority is based, and must be in line with those given in the official service


document which is published in accordance with Recommendation F.96 (List ofIndicators for the Telegram Retransmission System). In case of doubt,information may be obtained from the Radiocommunication Bureau.

b) the second part will be numeric, denoting the particular accounting authority.

A.3.2 Code allocation

A.3.2.1 The AAIC will be allocated by the Administration of the country in which theaccounting authority is based, regardless of whether or not the accounting authority concerned isresponsible for maritime mobile stations licensed by that Administration.

A.3.2.2 An Administration may recognize an accounting authority based in another country tohave responsibility for maritime mobile stations which it has licensed. In such cases, therecognizing Administration shall notify this fact to the Administration of the country in whichthe accounting authority is based and ask for confirmation of its AAIC.

A.3.2.3 The limitation of accounting authorities to 25 refers only to the number of accountingauthorities which an Administration may recognize to act as an accounting authority formaritime mobile stations which it has licensed (List a). It does not necessarily apply to thenumber of accounting authorities based within that Administration’s country (List b), seeA.3.4.3 below. It is possible therefore that the number of AAICs for any one country will exceed25.

A.3.2.4 Exceptionally, an Administration may agree that an individual maritime mobile stationto be licensed by it may retain its existing accounting authority even if this is not one of those onthe licensing Administration’s List a, provided:

– that the accounting authority is one of those recognized by the Administration ofthe country in which it is based for its Lists a and b; and

– prior agreement is reached between the licensing Administration and theaccounting authority concerned.

A.3.3 Notification of AAICs

A.3.3.1 An accounting authority will notify its AAIC to the Administration of each countryrecognizing it as an accounting authority for maritime mobile stations which it has licensed. TheAdministration concerned must include the AAIC in any notification to the ITU concerning anaccounting authority, for example, notification of an accounting authority’s address for inclusionin the List of Ship Stations.

A.3.3.2 Each accounting authority is responsible for ensuring that all maritime mobile stationsfor which it is responsible are notified of its AAIC and that these maritime mobile stations areaware of their responsibilities as regards using the AAIC when originating maritime mobilecommunications.

A.3.3.3 When an accounting authority accepts responsibility for a maritime mobile stationwhich may previously have been the responsibility of another accounting authority, it mustensure that the maritime mobile station is advised immediately of the new AAIC to be used.

504 Maritime Manual

A.3.4 Publication of AAICs

A.3.4.1 The Administration of the country in which the accounting authority is based isresponsible for notifying the ITU of the AAIC allocated.

A.3.4.2 An Administration that accepts an accounting authority outside its own country formaritime mobile stations under its flag, is responsible for notifying the ITU of this fact and ofthe AAIC allocated to that accounting authority.

A.3.4.3 The information should be published in the ITU List of Ship Stations, List V, in aspecial section with the following sub-sections:

– Sub-section A – Alphabetical listing of all accounting authorities by order of theirAAICs, giving their names, addresses, telephone and telefax numbers.

– Sub-section B – Alphabetical listing of all accounting authorities by their names,giving their AAICs and addresses, telephone and telefax numbers.

– Sub-section C – Alphabetical listing of countries, with the following entries undereach country:

• List a: accounting authorities, by AAICs code, responsible for maritimemobile stations licensed by that country’s Administration (maximum of25 AAICs);

• List b: accounting authorities, by AAICs code, based in that country (listmay exceed 25).

A.3.4.4 From these three sub-sections, it will be possible to:

i) extract the name and address of an accounting authority when only the AAIC isknown;

ii) find the AAIC when only the name and address are known; and

iii) determine which accounting authorities are recognized as acting for maritimestations of a particular registry.

A.3.4.5 In the body of the ITU List of Ship Stations, the AAIC of the accounting authorityconcerned should be shown against each maritime mobile station’s entry.


A.3.4.6 Examples

Allocation of Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC)

BRM

List a* BE02 BM01 BM02 BM03 CY03 DP02 JP02 JP03

List b** BM01 BM02 BM03

* Indicates accounting authorities, by their discrete AAIC, authorized to account for ShipStations licensed by the Administration of the country and is limited to a maximum of 25.

** Indicates accounting authorities, by their discrete AAIC, based within the country and thereis no limit to the number of listing per country.

Country that licensedthe maritime mobile

station

Country where the accountingauthority is based and where theAAIC is allocated (see A.3.2.1)

Accounting authority is oneof the maximum of 25(A.2.4) designated by:

AAIC

Netherlands Netherlands Netherlands NL...Netherlands United Kingdom Netherlands GB...United Kingdom Netherlands United Kingdom NL...Belgium Netherlands Belgium NL...Belgium Belgium Belgium BE...etc.

506 Maritime Manual

Annex B

Specimen statement of maritime communication bill“Summary” Page – see 4.4.3

(This annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation)

(Preferably on paper size 210 × 297 mm)

____________1) “The Communications Information Statements” and the associated “Summary Statement” should be

identified by the same unique bill number.

2) This should be the actual date of dispatch and not the date when the bill is raised.

...............................: (Sender of bill) Date of dispatch2)

Accounting authority: (Recipient of bill)STATEMENT OF MARITIME COMMUNICATION – SUMMARY Page:Period (MMYY):Bill number1):Category:

Name of maritimemobile station Call sign Maritime mobile

station ID Amount due*

ALFA 511 1234 100.00

HOTEL 311 1234 200.00

MIKE 111 1234 500.00

ROMEO 211 1234 200.00

ZULU 411 1234 200.00

Total amount due 1200.00

* Expressed in Monetary Unit: SDR or GFR (1 SDR is equivalent to 3.061 GFRs).


Annex C

Specimen statement of maritime communication bill“Communication Information” Statement – see 4.4.3

(This annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation)

(Separate statement for each mobile station)3)

For a description of service and facility codes to be used, see Annex A/D.91, Appendices I/D.91and II/D.91.

____________3) Exceptionally, this statement may contain data on more than one maritime mobile station where the

volume of traffic for each maritime mobile station is low.4) This should be the actual date of dispatch and not the date when the statement was raised.

...............................: (Sender of bill) Date of dispatch4)

Accounting authority: (Recipient of bill)Bill number: Page:STATEMENT OF MARITIME STATION BILLS for Mobile Station: ALFACall sign: 5Bxxx

Maritime mobile station identification:

Date/time Land station Destination Chargeable unit(Duration/words)

Servicetype Amount due* Remarks*/

special services

30.00 5.00 10.00 15.00 40.00

Total amount due 100.00

* Expressed in Monetary Unit: SDR or GFR (1 SDR is equivalent to 3.061 GFRs).

508 MMaritime Mannual

Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.60 509

ITU-T Recommendation F.60

OPERATIONAL PROVISIONS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL TELEX SERVICE

(revised 1992)

3 Operation of the international telex service

TABLE 1/F.60

Expanded form of DER code expression

a) These characters may appear anywhere on the line preceding the DER signal and are anintegral part of the expanded service signal.

b) Or technical failure presenting the same condition at the exchange.

Note 1 – The implementation of these expanded forms of the service signal is a nationalmatter.

Note 2 – See also Recommendation U.45.

3.6 Subscribers’ operating procedure for telex calls

3.6.1 Administrations may wish to advise their customers on how to make best use of theinternational telex service. To that end, an example for such provisions is given in Annex A.Such instructions may also include information regarding the code expressions used in theinternational telex service, which are listed in § 4.1 and which could usefully be inserted withinnational telex directories.

4 Miscellaneous provisions

4.1 Code expressions used in the international telex service

4.1.1 The following code expressions may be used in operator-to-operator correspondence,generated by the network or used by the originating subscriber for special purposes. In certain

Codeexpression

Additional informationcharacters a) Meaning b)

EXM Out of order due to no text recording medium

DER NAB Out of order due to failure of answerback mechanism

PFL Out of order due to no power at the called terminal

510 Maritime Manual

cases, they may also be followed by the clear signal. Subscribers may also find it useful to usesome of these codes during a conversational call.

ABS Absent subscriber/office closedADD Please input your international telex numberANUL DeleteBCT Broadcast callBK I cut offBMC No end of message or end of transmission received, therefore message

cancelledCFM Please confirm/I confirmCI4) Conversation impossibleCOL5) Collation please/I collateCRV Do you receive well?/I receive wellDER Out of order (see Table 1/F.60)DF You are in communication with the called subscriberEXM Connection cleared due to exhaustion of text recording medium at

either the called or calling terminalFMT Format errorGA You may transmit/May I transmit?IAB Invalid answerback from destinationIMA Input message acknowledgementINF Subscriber temporarily unobtainable, call the information serviceITD Input transaction accepted for deliveryITL I transmit laterJFE Office closed because of holidayLDE Maximum acceptable message length or duration has been exceededMNS MinutesMOM Wait/waitingMUT MutilatedNA Correspondence with this subscriber is not admittedNC No circuitsNCH Subscriber’s number has been changed

_______________4) This code expression is intended to be generated only by automatic means and not normally used in

service correspondence between operators.5) Repetition of, for example, isolated figures, mixed figures or other sensitive information.


NDN Non-delivery notificationNI No line identification availableNP The called party is not, or is no longer, a subscriberNR Indicate your call number/My call number is . . .OCC Subscriber is engagedOK Agreed/Do you agree?PPR PaperR ReceivedRAP I shall call you backRDI Redirected callREF Reference of the message delivered to the telex side from a conversion

facility for telex/teletex interworkingREI Address validation failure/non-compliant answerback receivedRPT Repeat/I repeatRSBA Retransmission still being attemptedSSSS Change of alphabetSVP PleaseT6) Stop your transmission(or figure 5)6)

TAX What is the charge?/The charge is . . .TEST MSG Please send a test messageTHRU You are in communication with a telex positionTMA Maximum number of addresses exceededTPR TeleprinterTTX Designation of the conversion facility (CF) for telex-teletex

interworkingVAL Validation responseW WordsWRU Who is there?XXXXX Error

_______________6) To be repeated until the transmission is brought to a stop.

512 Maritime Manual

ANNEX A

(to Recommendation F.60)

Operating procedure for telex calls

A.1 Setting up a telex call

A.1.1 In the automatic service the subscriber selects the telex number required. Theestablishment of a connection is recognized by the reception of the answerback from the wantedsubscriber. The caller should check whether the answerback he has received is in fact that of theappropriate subscriber. If it is not, he should disconnect and reselect the number of thesubscriber required. When the caller has received the correct answerback he should release hisown answerback before starting the transmission of a message.

A.1.2 In the manual or semi-automatic service a connection is established through theintermediary of an international telex position. The establishment of a connection is indicated bythe reception of the answerback from the called subscriber, followed by that of the callingsubscriber. The subscribers must not intervene during this procedure. The caller checks whetherthe answerback he has received is in fact that of the wanted subscriber. If it is not, he shoulddisconnect and inform the international telex position accordingly.

A.1.3 If the called telex station is continuously unattended, e.g. automatic answeringequipment, store-and-forward equipment or other reception equipment, a dialogue with thecalled telex station is impossible.

A.1.4 If the telex machine of the called subscriber is attended, a dialogue betweensubscribers is possible, in which case the end of each transmission should be indicated by theplus sign and question mark ( ?) followed by a letter-shift, thus inviting the other party totransmit in his turn.

A.2 Setting out the message

A.2.1 Where the recipient may be in doubt about the identity of the caller, it is recommendedthat the calling subscriber indicate:

a) name and place of the sender, preceded by the word FROM;b) name and place of the addressee, preceded by the word TO;c) if required, name and place of information addressee(s), preceded by the word

COPY.

Practice has shown that the observation of this recommendation will often saveadditional work for the recipient especially when messages have to be distributed for action.

A.2.2 After the exchange of answerbacks as set out in § A.1 and following therecommendation in § A.2.1, the calling subscriber can transmit his message, for which thefollowing uniform procedure is recommended:

a) start a new line and mention own reference, if any, and the date of dispatch;b) start a new line and indicate the priority of the message, if desirable, such as

URGENT, VERY URGENT, etc.;


c) start a new line and indicate the subject if appropriate and/or the name of theperson or department for whose attention the message is intended;

d) start a new line and mention any references, such as REF YOUR TELEX 123OF 15.7, REF YOUR LETTER 456 OF 25.7, REF OUR TELECON, etc.;

e) start a new line and transmit the text of the message;

f) after having completed the message, start a new line and transmit a plus sign ( )indicating the end of the message or NNNN;

g) obtain the answerback of the called subscriber, check it in order to be sure that theconnection is still in good order and generate own answerback;

h) if there are more messages, they should be separated from each other by at least 8line-feeds, after the exchange of the answerbacks as mentioned in g);

i) after transmission of the last message and the exchange of the answerbacks sendat least 8 line-feeds and give the clearing signal.

A.3 Additional instructions

A.3.1 When a group, or part of a group, is composed of a whole number and an ordinaryfraction, the fraction should be separated from the number by means of a dash without space.

Example: for one and three quarters: 1-3/4

A.3.2 In order to avoid misunderstanding, a whole number, a fractional number, or a fractionfollowed by a % or %o should be transmitted by joining them up to the % or %o. sign by a dash,or transmitted in full as appropriate.

Examples: for 2% transmit 2-0/0 or 2 PER CENTExamples: for 4 ½ %o, transmit 4-1/2-0/00 or 4-1/2 PER MILLE

A.3.3 When important figures or words appear in the text it is desirable to repeat themimmediately after the group followed by a space either in brackets or preceded by the wordREPEAT.

Examples: 1500 (1500)Examples: 1500 REPEAT 1500Examples: NOT REPEAT NOT

A.3.4 To pass to the beginning of the next line, i.e. to start a new line, first press carriage-return and then line-feed. Some terminals may also provide a new line key which combinesthese functions.

A.3.5 An error is corrected in the following manner:a) In manual transmission, by the sequence XXXXX (letter X repeated five times

and followed by a space)7) joined to the erroneous word.

_______________7) It is to be noted that the sequence E E E (space and letter E repeated three times followed by a space

and repetition of the last correct word) is in use but is not preferred.

514 Maritime Manual

Example: PLEASE DISPATCH FITXXXXX FIVE PARCELS

b) In automatic transmission, when preparing perforated tape, by backspacing (ifnecessary by counting the number of characters to be erased, including spacesand shifts, and backspacing by that number) to the erroneous character and thenoperating the letter-shift key to erase all the characters up to and including the lastpunched character. Then start again with the character to be sent immediatelyafter the last correctly punched character.

c) If the procedure mentioned under b) for one reason or other cannot be followed,an error could be corrected as indicated under a).

d) If an error is detected after the transmission of a message but before the exchangeof the answerbacks it should be corrected by clearly indicating under the text ofthe message what change is required, e.g.:

CORRECT 4TH WORD 2ND LINE TO READ NOT REPEAT NOT

DELETE 4TH WORD 2ND LINE

INSERT THE WORD “WITH” BETWEEN THE 4TH AND 5TH WORDOF 2ND LINE

A.3.6 If, for some reason or other, a message has to be cancelled during transmission thisshould be clearly indicated on a new line by transmitting three times the word ANUL.

A.3.7 In preparing a perforated tape for automatic transmission, care should be taken that:

a) the signal Who are you? (figure case D) does not appear on the tape, in order toprevent the text from being garbled by the returned answerback of the other party;

b) the procedure mentioned in § A.3.4 above is followed;

c) the tape is perforated to the end with a series of letter-shifts.

A.3.8 Since figure case signs or letters coupled with the letters F, G and H are notuniversally standardized, they must not be used in international communications, but should betransmitted in full, e.g. DOLLARS, POUNDS STERLING, etc.

A.4 Ineffective call attempts when calling from a manual terminal

A.4.1 If an attempt to set up a call is unsuccessful (for example, if the wanted subscriber isengaged), the network will return a service code indicating the reason. It will also disconnectautomatically except in the particular cases of changed number interception and call redirectionas described in Recommendation U.41.

A.4.2 The commonly used service codes, their meaning and the appropriate action for thesubscriber to take are given in Table A-1/F.60.

A.5 Idle connections

A.5.1 To avoid incurring unnecessary charges, care should always be taken to clear theconnection once all messages have been sent (see § A.2.2).


A.5.2 In some national telex networks a prolonged idle condition may cause a warningmessage to appear followed, possibly after a short delay, by clearing. Normally, this action willnot commence until the idle condition has persisted for a period to be determined by theAdministration.

A.5.3 Should a subscriber wish to maintain an idle condition for a period in excess of thatstipulated by the Administration, it is advisable to make that intention clear by sending at leastone character periodically.

TABLE A-1/F.60

Procedure after ineffective call attempts when calling from a manual terminal

Note – Recommendation U.40 describes the procedure after ineffective call attempts when calling froman automatic telex terminal.

Servicecode

Meaning What to do

OCC The called subscriber is engaged

NC No circuits (or equipment) are available atthe moment

Wait for at least one minute, then callagain

DER Called subscriber’s terminal is out of order,or temporarily out of service whilst paper,ribbon or tape is replaced

Check the number and try again afterabout 5 minutes. If DER persists, referthe problem to the Telex EnquiriesService

ABSNANP

NCH

Called subscriber is absent. Office is closedAccess to called service not admittedThe called number is not, or is no longer, aworking lineCalled susbcriber’s number has beenchanged (NCH may be followed by the newnumber)

Check the number. If correct, try again.If the same service signal is returnedrefer the problem to the TelexEnquiries Service

516 Maritime Manual


OPERATIONAL PROVISION FORTHE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE

(revised in 1996)

DIVISION A – GENERAL

3 DefinitionsA4 3.1.1 controlling operator: The controlling operator is the first land-based

operator handling the radiotelegram, radiotelex call or radiotelephone call in thedirection from the mobile station.

A5 3.1.2 accounting authority identification code: An accounting authorityidentification code is assigned to each accounting authority (defined in theInternational Telecommunication Regulations [1]). In effect the accounting authorityacts as a billing intermediary between mobile stations and ROAs.

A6 3.1.3 recognized operating agency (ROA): The term is defined in theInternational Telecommunication Constitution (Geneva, 1992) [2]. For the purpose ofthis CCITT Recommendation an ROA is, in effect, any individual, company,corporation or governmental agency that operates an international telecommunicationservice to carry public correspondence (as defined in the Constitution). Each ROA isauthorized by an ITU Member, which imposes certain obligations on the ROA. (Forfurther details, see the Constitution.)

A12 3.1.9 ship station identity: Ship’s identification X1, X2 ... Xn identifying the shipuniquely. The ship station identity may be transmitted on the radio path.

A13 3.1.10 coast station identity: The coast station identification X1, X2 ... Xntransmitted on the radio path.

4 Order of priorityA15 4.1 The order of priority for communications in the maritime mobile service

shall be as follows, except where impracticable in a fully automated system in which,nevertheless, communications described in A16 shall receive priority:

A16 a) distress calls, distress messages and distress traffic;

A17 b) communications preceded by the urgency signal;

A18 c) communications preceded by the safety signal;


A19 d) communications relating to radio direction-finding;

A20 e) communications relating to the navigation and safe movement of aircraft engagedin search and rescue operations;

A21 f) communications relating to the navigation, movements and need of ships, aircraftand weather observations messages destined for an official meteorologicalservice;

A22 g) radiotelegrams relative to the application of the United Nations Charter(ETATPRIORITE);

A23 h) government radiotelegrams with priority (ETATPRIORITE) and governmentcalls for which priority has been expressly requested;

A24 i) ordinary private radiotelegrams and RCT radiotelegrams for which urgenttransmission and delivery has been requested;

A25 j) service communications relating to the operation2) of the telecommunicationservice or to communications previously exchanged;

A26 k) government communications other than those shown in A29 ordinary privatecommunications and RCT radiotelegrams;

A27 l) radiomaritime letters.

DIVISION B – RADIOTELEGRAMS

1 Preparation and handing-in of radiotelegrams

1.1 Indication of station of origin

B1 1.1.1 When, because of duplication of names, the name of a station is followed byits call sign/ship station identity, the latter shall be joined to the name of the station bya fraction bar.

Examples3): OREGON/OZOC (not OREGONOZOC);

ROSE/DDOR (not ROSEDDOR).

_______________2) For the operational aspects of service telecommunications, see Recommendation F.17, which describes

basic principles, acceptable content for service telecommunications and the principle of reciprocityregarding both service providers and services. More detailed provisions for specific telecommunicationservices may be found in Recommendations F.105, F.1 and F.60.

3) In the provision regarding the non-voice services, letters, figures and signs that are transmittedelectrically are shown in bold font.

518 Maritime Manual

B2 1.1.2 When a land station retransmits a radiotelegram received from a mobilestation, it shall transmit, as office of origin, the name of the mobile station in which theradiotelegram originated as this name appears in the List of Ship Stations [5], followedby its own name. Where appropriate, B1 shall also apply.

B3 1.1.3 In order to avoid any confusion with a telegraph office or a fixed station ofthe same name, the land station may, if desirable, complete the indication of the nameof the mobile station of origin by the word SHIP or AIRCRAFT, placed before thestation of origin.

1.2 Use of accounting authority identification codes by mobile stations

B4 1.2.1 The mobile station operator should, as a standard operating procedure, givethe Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) at the end of the preamble line.If the AAIC is missing, the land station operator should request QRC.

1.3 Time of handing-in

B5 1.3.1 In the transmission of radiotelegrams originating in a mobile station, the dateand time of handing-in at this station are given by two groups of figures in thepreamble line, the first indicating the day of the month (1 to 31) and the secondconsisting of a group of figures (0001 to 2400) indicating the hours and the minutes.

B6 1.3.2 The time of handing-in is indicated in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). NOTE – For practical operating purposes, UTC may be considered as equivalent toGreenwich Mean Time (GMT).

1.4 Address

B7 1.4.1 The address of radiotelegrams destined for mobile stations should be ascomplete as possible and must include:

B8 a) the name or the designation of the addressee, with supplementary particulars, ifnecessary;

B9 b) the name of the mobile station followed, when necessary, by its call sign/shipstation identity, the latter joined by a fraction bar to the name of the station asshown in the List of Ship Stations [5];

B10 c) the name of the land station through which the radiotelegram is to be forwarded,as it appears in the List of Coast Stations [4].

B11 1.4.2 If the mobile station does not appear in the List of Ship Stations [5], thesender should, if possible, indicate the nationality and route followed by the mobilestation.


B12 1.4.3 However, the name and call sign/ship station identity required under B10may be replaced, at the risk of the sender, by particulars of the passage made by such amobile station, indicated by the names of the ports or airports of departure and ofdestination, or by any equivalent indication.

B13 1.4.4 Mobile stations may add to the name of the office of destination:

– the name of the territorial subdivision; and/or

– the destination country,

if it is doubtful whether, without such addition, the radiotelegram could be correctlyrouted without difficulty.

B14 1.4.5 The controlling operator retains or deletes the particulars in B13 or furtheramends the name of the office of destination as is necessary or sufficient forforwarding the radiotelegram to its proper destination.

2 Counting of words

B15 2.1 The word count of the office of origin is decisive in the case ofradiotelegrams destined for mobile stations, and that of the controlling operator isdecisive in the case of radiotelegrams originating in mobile stations.

B16 2.2 If two land stations participate in the handling of a radiotelegram, thedecision of the controlling operator accepting the radiotelegram from the originatingmobile station will prevail and will be valid for international accounting.

3 Routing of radiotelegrams

B17 3.1 Radiotelegrams, originating in or destined to a mobile station should berouted via the land station that is considered most suitable in relation to the mobilestation concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land station and radio conditions.

B18 3.2 However, to expedite or to facilitate the routing of radiotelegrams to a landstation, a mobile station may transmit them to another mobile station. The latter shalldispose of such radiotelegrams in the same manner as if they originated with itself (seeB39 to B42).

B19 3.3 If the sender of a radiotelegram handed in at a mobile station has indicatedthe land station to which the radiotelegram be sent, the mobile station shall, in order toeffect this transmission to the land station indicated, wait, if necessary until theconditions specified in B17 and B18 are fulfilled.

B20 3.4 In order to facilitate disposal of traffic, and subject to such conditions asindividual ROAs may apply, land stations may, in exceptional circumstances and withdiscretion, without incurring additional charges, exchange radiotelegrams and servicetelegrams relating thereto.

520 Maritime Manual

4 Transmission of radiotelegrams

4.1 Routine repetition

B21A 4.1.1 Routine repetition means the repetition of isolated figures and mixed groupscontaining figures in the address and text parts. Any such repetition should be givenafter the text part and be preceded by the code COL.

B21B 4.1.2 In view of CCITT Recommendation F.1 (A103) routine repetition may beused between land station and mobile station at the discretion of the sending stationwhere the transmission conditions warrant it.

B21C 4.1.3 Where a mobile station gives a routine repetition, the land station shall usethe repeated groups to check the received address and text parts, but should notretransmit the routine repetition.

4.2 Doubtful reception

B22 4.2.1 In the mobile service, when communication becomes difficult, the twostations in communication should make every effort to complete the radiotelegram incourse of transmission. The receiving station may request not more than tworepetitions of a radiotelegram of which the reception is doubtful.

B23 4.2.2 If this triple transmission is ineffective, the radiotelegram is kept on hand incase a favourable opportunity for completing its transmission occurs.

B24 4.2.3 If the transmitting station considers that it will not be possible to re-establishcommunications with the receiving station within twenty-four hours, it proceeds asfollows:

B25 4.2.4 If the transmitting station is a mobile station, it immediately informs thesender of the reason for the non-transmission of his radiotelegram. The sender maythen request:

B26 a) that the radiotelegram be transmitted through another land station or throughother mobile stations; or

B27 b) that the radiotelegram be held until it can be transmitted without additionalcharge; or

B28 c) that the radiotelegram be cancelled.

B29 4.2.5 If the transmitting station is a land station, it applies the provision of B43 toB52 to the radiotelegram.

B30 4.2.6 When a mobile station subsequently transmits a radiotelegram thus held tothe land station that incompletely received it, this new transmission must bear theservice instruction AMPLIATION at the end of the preamble line of theradiotelegram.


B31 4.2.7 However, if the radiotelegram is transmitted to another land station operatedby the same ROA, the new transmission must bear, at the end of the preamble line, theservice instruction AMPLIATION VIA ... (insert here the call sign/coast stationidentity of the land station to which the radiotelegram was transmitted in the firstinstance) and the ROA in question may claim only the charges relating to a singletransmission.

B32 4.2.8 The other land station, which thus forwards the radiotelegram, may claimfrom the mobile station of origin any additional charges resulting from thetransmission of the radiotelegram between itself and the office of destination.

B33 4.2.9 When the land station designated in the address as the station by which theradiotelegram is to be forwarded cannot reach the destination mobile station and hasreason to believe that such mobile station is within the service area of another landstation of the ROA by which it is operated, it may, if no additional charge is incurredthereby, forward the radiotelegram to this other land station.

B34 4.2.10 A station of the mobile service that has received a radiotelegram and hasbeen unable to acknowledge its receipt in the usual way must take the first favourableopportunity to give such acknowledgement.

B35 4.2.11 When the acknowledgement of receipt of a radiotelegram transmittedbetween mobile station and land station cannot be given directly, it is forwardedthrough another mobile or land station by service advice (see Recommendation F.1,Division D) if the latter is able to communicate with the station that has transmitted theradiotelegram in question. In any case, no additional charge shall result.

4.3 Long distance radiocommunications

B36 4.3.1 An ROA may organize a long-distance radiocommunication service betweenland station and mobile stations, with deferred acknowledgement of receipt or withoutany acknowledgement of receipt.

B37 4.3.2 Each ROA designates the land station or stations participating in the long-distance radio service. An indication to this effect shall appear in the List of CoastStations [4].

B38 4.3.3 When there is doubt about the accuracy of any part of a radiotelegramtransmitted under either of the systems mentioned in B36, the indication doubtfulreception is entered on the copy delivered to the addressee, and the doubtful words orgroups of words are underlined. If words are missing, blanks are left in the placeswhere these words should be.

4.4 Routine retransmission by mobile stations

B39 4.4.1 When a land station cannot reach the mobile station for which aradiotelegram is destined, the land station may, in order to forward the radiotelegramto its destination, have recourse to the help of another mobile station provided that thelatter consents. The radiotelegram is then transmitted to this other mobile station. Thehelp of the latter is given free of charge.

522 Maritime Manual

B40 4.4.2 The same provision is also applicable to traffic from mobile stations to landstations, when necessary.

B41 4.4.3 The station assisting in the free retransmission in accordance with B39 andB40 must enter the service abbreviation QSP ... (name or call sign/ship station identityof the mobile station) at the end of the preamble line of the radiotelegram.

B42 4.4.4 In order that a radiotelegram thus forwarded may be considered as havingreached its destination, the station that has made use of this indirect route must haveobtained the regular acknowledgement of receipt, either direct or by an indirect route,from the mobile station for which the radiotelegram was destined or from the landstation to which it was to be forwarded, as the case may be.

4.5 Period of retention of radiotelegrams at land stations

B43 4.5.1 When it has not been possible for a land station to transmit a radiotelegramto a mobile station by the morning of the fifth day (not including the day of handing-in), the land station treats the radiotelegram as undelivered and notifies the office oforigin accordingly.

B44 4.5.2 The sender of a radiotelegram destined for a mobile station may specify thenumber of days during which the land station may hold the radiotelegram. In that case,the service indication Jx (x days), specifying the number of days (ten at the most)exclusive of the day of handing-in of the radiotelegram, shall be shown before theaddress. When it has not been possible for a land station to transmit a radiotelegrambearing the service indication Jx within the prescribed period, the land station treatsthe radiotelegram as undelivered and informs the office of origin accordingly.

B45 4.5.3 The periods mentioned in B43 and B44 shall be ignored if the land station issure that the mobile station will soon come within its service area.

B46 4.5.4 On the other hand, the lapse of those periods is not awaited when the landstation is sure that the mobile station, being in course of a voyage, either has definitelyleft its service area or will not enter it.

B47 4.5.5 If there is reason to believe that no other land station of the ROA by which itis operated is or will be in touch with it, the land station cancels the radiotelegram asfar as concerns the section between itself and the mobile station and informs the officeof origin, which notifies the sender.

B48 4.5.6 In the contrary case, the land station forwards the radiotelegram to the landstation believed to be in touch with the mobile station, provided, however, that noadditional charge results therefrom.

B49 4.5.7 The land station that carries out the redirection alters the address of theradiotelegram by placing after the name of the mobile station that of the new landstation charged with the transmission and adding at the end of the preamble line theservice instruction REDIRECTED FROM ... RADIO, which must be transmittedthroughout the course of the radiotelegram.


B50 4.5.8 If, within the limits of the requisite period of retention of radiotelegrams, theland station that has redirected a radiotelegram to another land station is subsequentlyin a position to transmit the radiotelegram direct to the destination mobile station, itdoes so by inserting the service instruction AMPLIATION at the end of the preambleline.

B51 4.5.9 It shall then transmit to the land station to which the radiotelegram had beenredirected a service advice informing the latter of the transmission of the saidradiotelegram.

B52 4.5.10 When a radiotelegram cannot be transmitted to a mobile station owing to thearrival of the latter in a port near the land station, the latter station may, according tocircumstances, forward the radiotelegram to the mobile station by other means ofcommunication, at the same time informing the office of origin by service advice ofthe delivery.

5 Advice of non-delivery

B53 5.1 When, for any reason, a radiotelegram originating in a mobile station anddestined for a place on land cannot be delivered to the addressee, a service advice ofnon-delivery is addressed to the land station or the telegraph office that received theradiotelegram.

B54 5.2 After checking the address, the land station forwards the service advice,when possible, to the mobile station, if necessary by way of another land station of thesame country or of a neighbouring country, as far as existing conditions or specialagreements permit.

B55 5.3 When a radiotelegram received at a mobile station cannot be delivered, thatstation so informs the office or mobile station of origin by a service advice.

B56 5.4 In the case of a radiotelegram originating on land, this service advice is sent,whenever possible, to the land station through which the radiotelegram passed, or, ifnecessary, to another land station of the same country or of a neighbouring country, asfar as existing conditions or special arrangements permit.

B57 5.5 In such cases the name or call sign/ship station identity of the station fromwhich the radiotelegram was received is quoted.

6 Radiomaritime letters

B58 6.1 An ROA may organize a service of radiomaritime letters between mobilestations and its land stations.

B59 6.2 Such correspondence is transmitted by radio between mobile and landstations.

B60 6.3 They may be forwarded on the land section:

524 Maritime Manual

B61 a) wholly or partly by post (ordinary or airmail);

B62 b) exceptionally by telefax or other electronic means, but with low priority.

B63 6.4 Routine retransmission by mobile stations of radiomaritime letters is notpermitted.

B64 6.5 Radiomaritime letters shall be addressed only to places in the country inwhich the land station is situated, unless the List of Coast Stations [4] indicates that thestation concerned will accept such traffic for onward transmission by post to places inother countries.

B65 6.6 Radiomaritime letters bear the service indication SLT. This indicationprecedes the address.

B66 6.7 Except as otherwise provided in B58 to B68, radiomaritime letters may beaccepted, taking into account ITU-T CCITT Recommendations relating to lettertelegrams if the telegram service is used to convey radiomaritime letters.

B67 6.8 The address must enable delivery to be effected without enquiry or requestsfor information. Registered or abbreviated code addresses may be accepted where B62above applies, exceptionally, radiomaritime letters are forwarded by means oftelegram on the land section.

B68 6.9 Radiomaritime letters rank, for radio transmission, after ordinaryradiotelegrams on hand. Those that have not been transmitted within 24 hours ofhanding-in are sent concurrently with ordinary radiotelegrams.

7 Special services

B69 7.1 Telegrams with special services of urgent transmission and de luxe form areadmitted, provided that the ROAs concerned accept them.

8 Special conditions relating to the maritime mobile-satellite service

B70 8.1 In the maritime mobile-satellite service radiotelegrams should normally betransmitted by radiotelex only.

B71 8.2 The radiotelegram service in B70 should be arranged in such a way thatautomatic retransmission is possible.


DIVISION C – RADIOTELEX

1 General

1.1 Routing of calls

C1 1.1.1 A radiotelex call, originating in or destined to a mobile station should be setup via the land station that is considered to be most suitable in relation to the mobilestation concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land stations and radioconditions.

C2 1.1.2 For radiotelex calls in the direction from land station to mobile station,originator should give, if possible, the approximate geographical position and shouldalso indicate the land station to be used unless the ROA has established a specificroute to be followed. Such requests should be respected as far as is practicable.

C3 1.1.3 For radiotelex calls in the direction from mobile station to land station, themobile station may call a particular land station it desires to use. This land stationshould either handle the call itself or advise the mobile station to use another landstation that is more suitable.

1.2 Information to be supplied, as necessary by the calling party

C4 1.2.1 Calls from a subscriber of the international telex service to a mobile station:

a) international telex number and/or answer-back code of the calling telexsubscriber;

b) telex number or mobile station number of the destination mobile station;

c) name or call sign/ship station identity of the destination mobile station;

d) international telex number and/or name of the land station to be used, or theapproximate geographical position of the destination mobile station;

e) priority when specifically requested.

C5 1.2.2 Calls from a mobile station to a subscriber of the international telex service:

a) telex number or mobile station number of the calling mobile station;

b) the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) in accordance with CCITTRecommendation D.90 in the single-operator or manual operation;

c) destination country and/or network;

d) telex number and/or answer-back code of the destination telex subscriber;


C5A 1.2.3 C4 and C5 above apply to mobile station-to-mobile stations calls asappropriate.

526 Maritime Manual

1.3 Call duration

C6 1.3.1 The chargeable duration of a call will be fixed at the end of the call:

a) by the controlling operator for a call originating from a mobile station;

b) for a call originating in the international telex service;

– by the land station operator in either manual or single-operator operation;

– by the operator of the international position of the originating country in thesemi-automatic operation.

C7 1.3.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and where two land stationsparticipate in the handling of the call, the decision of the controlling operator who hasaccepted the call from the originating mobile station shall prevail.

C8 1.3.3 Should service difficulties be experienced in the course of a call, thechargeable duration shall be reduced automatically or manually to the total time duringwhich transmission conditions were satisfactory, taking into account ITU-TRecommendations (F.60 and F.61).

1.4 Validity of requests

C9 1.4.1 For a call to a mobile station where it becomes obvious that the requiredmobile station cannot be reached by the land station, the originating telex subscribershould be informed as soon as possible in order to have the opportunity to have thecall cancelled if required. In any event, the caller should be informed no later than inthe morning of the second day following the day on which the call request was made.

C10 1.4.2 In the automatic service any information concerning unsuccessful callattempts shall be provided to the calling subscriber using the service signal formatdescribed in Recommendation F.60. The period of validity for store-and-forwardmessages in the automatic service shall be in accordance with Recommendation F.72.

1.5 Exchange of radiotelegrams by radiotelex

C11 1.5.1 Stations of the maritime mobile service that are equipped for radiotelex maytransmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelex.

C12 1.5.2 Stations of the maritime mobile-satellite service should normally transmitand receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelex only.

2 Traffic from mobile stations to subscribers of the international telexservice

2.1 Automatic operation

C13 2.1.1 Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used.


C14 2.1.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and after connection with thedesired land station is established, the mobile station should forward the internationaltelex number, including the telex destination code in accordance withRecommendation F.69. The selection procedures for calls from a mobile station in themaritime mobile-satellite service to a subscriber of the international telex service aredescribed in clause 6 of Division C.

2.2 Single-operator operation

C15 2.2.1 The land station operator should select the destination telex subscriberdirectly via the international telex network if fully automatic procedures (C13) are notpossible.

2.3 Semi-automatic operation

C16 2.3.1 The destination telex subscriber should be automatically selected if fullyautomatic procedures (C13) or single operator procedures (C15) cannot be applied.

2.4 Manual operation

C17 2.4.1 The land station operator should apply manual procedures if fully automatic(C13), single-operator (C15) or semi-automatic (C16) procedures are not possible.

2.5 Store-and-forward service

C17A 2.5.1 The mobile station should transmit the message to the land station usingautomatic procedures. The land station should forward the message via theinternational telex network to the destination telex subscriber.

C17B 2.5.2 The procedures for store-and-forward in the operation international telexnetwork, as laid down in Recommendations F.72, U.80 and U.81, should be taken intoaccount.

2.6 Operational procedures

C18 2.6.1 The manual, semi-automatic and fully automatic procedures for theinternational telex service, as laid down in Recommendations F.60 and F.61, should betaken into account.

3 Traffic from subscribers of the international telex service-to-mobilestations

3.1 Fully automatic operation

C19 3.1.1 Whenever possible fully automatic procedures should be used.

528 Maritime Manual

C20 3.1.2 A subscriber of the international telex service should forward theinternational telex number of the destination mobile station including the mobilestation number and if necessary the telex destination code of the ocean region in whichthe mobile station is thought to be located. The call will then be routed, through anappropriate land station to the destination mobile station. The selection procedures forcalls from a subscriber of the international telex service to mobile earth station aredescribed in clause 6 of Division C.

C21 3.1.3 If the originating telex subscriber, for some technical reason, cannot usefully automatic procedures to establish contact with the mobile station, semi-automatic(C35) or single-operator (C24) procedures should be used.

C22 3.1.4 On international telex links a destination code in accordance withRecommendation F.69 will be used unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.

C23 3.1.5 Normal telex procedure should be forwarded once the connection betweenthe subscriber of the international telex service and the mobile service and the mobilestation has been established.

3.2 Single-operator operation (direct access by a calling telex subscriber to aforeign land station)

3.2.1 Booking

C24 3.2.1.1 If automatic operation (C19) is not possible and where an ROA allows itssubscribers to book a call directly with a land station in another country, theoriginating telex subscriber should select the desired foreign land station, whenknown, using automatic procedures and submit the call details to the land stationoperator.

C25 3.2.1.2 The charges fixed by the land station operator should be levied on the callingsubscriber through international accounting.

C26 3.2.1.3 In addition to the information in C4, the calling subscriber should designatethe originating national telex network.

C27 3.2.1.4 As an alternative to C25 and C26, a land station may accept direct calls fromforeign subscribers in other countries provided that the calling telex subscribersupplies the name and address of a party in the country in which the land station islocated who will take responsibility for the payment of charges.

C28 3.2.1.5 The procedures described in C25 and C27 may only be applied when anappropriate bilateral agreement exists between the two ROAs concerned. If such anagreement does not exist, the land station should refuse such calls to avoid accountingdifficulties.

C29 3.2.1.6 In C24 and C27 above, the call to the foreign land station will be charged asan ordinary international telex call for its entire duration, regardless of whether itmerely serves the purpose of booking the radiotelex call or whether the land stationcan extend the connection to the mobile station without having to recall the originatingsubscriber.


3.2.2 Setting-up

C30 3.2.2.1 When the connection to the destination mobile station can be immediatelyestablished, the originating telex subscriber should be released by the land station.When appropriate, the land station operator should recall the originating telexsubscriber using automatic procedures. In this particular case, the country in which theland station is located is to be considered as the outgoing country for the call.

C31 3.2.2.2 In case C30, the land station should include in the maritime bill:a) the landline charge;b) the land station charge.

C32 3.2.2.3 When the connection to the destination mobile station can be immediatelyestablished, the maritime bill made out by the land station operator should includeonly the land station charge.

C33 3.2.2.4 All information regarding collection of charges for single-operator calls (seeC15) should be submitted by the land station ROA on a regular basis to be determinedby the ROAs involved.

C34 3.2.2.5 The methods to be used in collecting the charges are described inRecommendation D.90.

3.3 Semi-automatic operation (access by a calling subscriber to one’sinternational centre for the establishment of a direct connection)

C35 3.3.1 If fully automatic (C19) or single-operator (C24) procedures are notpossible, the telex operator of the outgoing international centre should receive thebooking and selects the mobile station directly. The procedures of RecommendationF.60 should be applied.


3.4.1 Booking

C36 3.4.1.1 If fully automatic (C19), single-operator (C24) or semi-automatic (C35)procedures are not available, the originating telex subscriber should make his bookingat the international telex centre of the outgoing country or network.

C37 3.4.1.2 Where conditions permit, the international telex position should selectdirectly the appropriate foreign land station. Alternatively, the international telexposition of the outgoing country or network should contact the international telexposition in the country or network in which the desired land station is located for thenecessary assistance to obtain contact with the land station.

3.4.2 Setting-up

C38 3.4.2.1 The land station operator will establish a connection with the originatingtelex subscriber either directly or with the assistance of the own international telexposition in the country of the land station.

530 Maritime Manual

C39 3.4.2.2 Within 24 hours of the call’s termination, the land station shall pass thefollowing information to the international telex position of the origin country, where itis recorded for charging and accounting purposes:

a) the calling subscriber’s telex number;

b) the mobile station’s call sign/ship station identity;

c) the chargeable duration of the call;

d) the land station charge to be collected.

3.5 Store-and-forward

C39A 3.5.1 The originating telex subscriber should select the appropriate land stationand deposit the message using the procedures desired in Recommendations F.72 andU.80.

4 Traffic exchanged between mobile stations

C39B 4.1 Provisions from C13 to C39A apply to traffic exchanged between mobile stations.

5 Radiomaritime telex letter

5.1 Definition

C40 5.1.1 Radiomaritime telex letter: A message sent by radiotelex direct from amobile station to a selected land station or to a selected public telegraph office fordelivery by mail or any other appropriate means.


C41 5.2.1 The mobile station should select the access code allocated for theradiomaritime telex letter service, or the access code allocated for the fully automatictelex service followed, if appropriate, by the telex number of the selected land stationtelegraph office.

C42 5.2.2 The mobile station should supply the following information:

a) international telex number of the mobile station or mobile station number (asprovided in Recommendation F.125);

b) the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC);

c) destination name and address;

d) the words “RADIOMARITIME TELEX LETTER”.


DIVISION D – RADIOTELEPHONE

1 General

1.1 Language to be used

D1 1.1.1 Where applicable and where language difficulties exist, the abbreviationsand signals in related provisions of Radio Regulations [3] should be used inradiotelephone communications between land stations and mobile stations.

1.2 Priority

D2 1.2.1 Apart from the general order of priority shown in A15 to A27,radiotelephone calls shall have precedence in the terrestrial network, so far as possible,over other telephone calls of the same class.

1.3 Routing of calls

D3 1.3.1 A radiotelephone call, originating in or destined to a mobile station, shouldbe set up via the land station that is considered to be the most suitable in relation to themobile station concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land station and radiocondition.

D4 1.3.2 For radiotelephone calls in the direction from land station to mobile station,the caller should give the one approximate geographical position if possible and mayalso indicate the land station to be used unless the ROA has established a specificroute to be followed. Such requests should be respected as far as is practicable.

D5 1.3.3 For radiotelephone calls in the direction from mobile station to land station,the mobile station may call a land station it desires to use. This land station shall eitherhandle the call itself or advise the mobile station to use another land station that ismore suitable.

1.4 Information to be supplied, as necessary, by the calling party

D6 1.4.1 Calls from a telephone subscriber to a mobile station:

a) complete telephone number of the calling subscriber;

b) appropriate identification of the mobile station;

c) name of the land station to be used or the approximate geographical position ofthe destination mobile station;

d) name of the called party, if applicable. All calls to mobile stations in the maritimemobile service are treated as personal calls, with the possible exception of themaritime mobile-satellite service;


532 Maritime Manual

D7 1.4.2 Call from a mobile station to a telephone subscriber:a) appropriate identification of the mobile station;b) the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) in accordance with

Recommendation D.90 in the single-operator or manual operation;c) the information specified in Article 63 of the Instructions for the International

Telephone Service;d) priority when specifically requested.

D7A 1.4.3 D6 and D7 above apply to mobile station-to-mobile station calls asappropriate.

1.5 Call duration

D8 1.5.1 The chargeable duration of a call shall be fixed at the end of the call:a) by the controlling operator for a call originating from a mobile station;b) for a call originating in the terrestrial telephone network;

– by the land station operator in manual or single-operator operation;– by the operator of the international position of the outgoing country in the

semi-automatic operation.

D9 1.5.2 For a call originating from a mobile station where two land stationsparticipate in the handling of the call, decision of the controlling operator that hasaccepted the call from the originating mobile station shall prevail.

D10 1.5.3 Should service difficulties be experienced in the course of a call, thechargeable duration shall be reduced automatically or manually to the total time duringwhich transmission conditions were satisfactory, taking into account ITU-TRecommendations.


D11 1.6.1 If not cancelled by the caller or refused by the called party, requests for callsfrom land to mobile stations:a) in the VHF and MF bands shall remain valid until 0800 local time on the day

following the day on which the request was made;b) in the HF band shall remain valid until 0800 local time on the second day

following the day on which the request was made.

D12 1.6.2 However, if it becomes obvious that the required mobile station is outsidethe coverage area of the land station, the caller shall be informed as soon as possible inorder to have the call cancelled.

D13 1.6.3 All requests for calls from mobile to land stations shall be cancelled wherethe call is not immediately attended to or on completion of the successive attemptsprovided for by the rules of each ROA, unless there has been an express request to the


contrary by the calling mobile station, which shall be able to determine the waitingperiod for listening in on the land station frequency with a view to making a furtherattempt to set up the call.

1.7 Exchange of radiotelegrams by radiotelephony

D14 1.7.1 Stations of the maritime mobile service that are equipped for radiotelephonymay transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelephony. Stations of themaritime mobile-satellite service should normally transmit and receive radiotelegramsby means of radiotelex only.

2 Traffic from mobile stations to telephone subscribers

2.1 Automatic operation

D15 2.1.1 Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used.

D16 2.1.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and after connection with thedesired land station has been established, the mobile station should forward theappropriate telephone country code (Recommendation E.164) and the number of thesubscriber of an ROA’s telephone network. The selection procedures for calls in themaritime mobile-satellite service, see clause 4 of Division D.

2.2 Single-operator operation

D17 2.2.1 The land station operator should select the called subscriber directly via theautomatic telephone networks if automatic procedures (D15) are not possible.

2.3 Semi-automatic operation

D18 2.3.1 The called telephone subscriber should be automatically selected by atelephone operator in the country in which land station is situated if fully automatic(D15) or single-operator (D17) procedures cannot be applied.


D19 2.4.1 The land station operator should apply manual procedures if fully automatic(D15), single-operator (D17) or semi-automatic (D18) procedures are not possible.


D20 2.5.1 The fully automatic, semi-automatic and manual procedures for theterrestrial telephone network, as laid down in Recommendations E.105 and E.140 andthe Instructions for the International Telephone Service [6] should be taken intoaccount.

534 Maritime Manual

3 Traffic from telephone subscribers to mobile stations

3.1 Fully automatic operation

D21 3.1.1 Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used.

D22 3.1.2 The subscriber of an ROA’s telephone network should select the appropriateinternational telephone number, which would include the mobile station number. Thecall routing will be determined by the appropriate country code which is chosen andwhich will form part of the international telephone number (see D41). The call willthen be routed through an appropriate land station to the destination mobile station.The selection procedures for calls from a subscriber of the international telephoneservice are described in clause 5 of Division D.

D23 3.1.3 If the calling subscriber, for some technical reason, cannot use fullyautomatic procedures to establish contact with mobile station, semi-automatic or singleoperator procedures should be used.

3.2 Single-operator operation (direct access by a calling subscriber to aforeign land station)

3.2.1 Booking

D24 3.2.1.1 If fully automatic operation is not possible and where an appropriatebilateral agreement between ROA’s allows its subscriber to book a call directly with aland station in another country, the calling telephone subscriber should select desiredforeign land station, where known, using automatic procedures and submit the calldetails to the land station operator. If such an agreement does not exist, the land stationshould refuse such calls to avoid accounting difficulties.

D25 3.2.1.2 The charges fixed by the land station operator should be levied on the callingsubscriber through international accounting.

D26 3.2.1.3 In addition to the information in D6, the calling subscriber must designatehis country and national telephone number.

D27 3.2.1.4 As an alternative to D25, land stations may accept direct calls fromtelephone subscribers in other countries provided that the calling telephone subscribersupplies the name and address of a party in the country, in which the land station islocated, who will take responsibility for the payment of charges.

D28 3.2.1.5 The procedures described in D25 and D27 may only be applied when anappropriate bilateral agreement exists between the two ROAs concerned.

D29 3.2.1.6 D24 and D27 above, the call to the foreign land station will be charged as anordinary international telephone call for its entire duration, regardless of whether itmerely serves the purpose of booking the radiotelephone call or whether the landstation can extend the connection to the mobile station without having to recall theoriginating subscriber.


3.2.2 Setting-up

D30 3.2.2.1 When demand operation cannot be used, the calling telephone subscriberwill be disconnected by the land station. When the land station operator then recallsthe caller using automatic direct selection, the land station country is considered as theoutgoing country for the call.

D31 3.2.2.2 In case D30, the land station includes in the maritime bill:

a) the land-line charge;

b) the land station charge.

D32 3.2.2.3 When demand operation has been used, the maritime bill made out by landstation operator includes only:

– the land station charge.

D33 3.2.2.4 All information regarding collection of charges for single-operator calls (seeD17) should be submitted by the land station ROA on a regular basis to be determinedby the ROAs involved.

D34 3.2.2.5 The methods to be used in collecting the charges are described inRecommendation D.90.

3.3 Semi-automatic procedure (access by a calling subscriber to one’sinternational centre for the establishment of a direct connection)

D35 3.3.1 If automatic (D21) or single-operator (D24) procedures are not possible, thetelephone operator of the international centre of the outgoing country receives thebooking and selects the mobile station directly. Normal international semi-automatictelephone procedures shall be applied.


3.4.1 Booking

D36 3.4.1.1 If automatic (D21), single-operator (D24) or semi-automatic (D35)procedures cannot be applied, the subscriber should make his booking at aninternational centre in the outgoing country.

D37 3.4.1.2 If conditions permit, an international position should select the foreign landstation in question directly. Otherwise an international position in the land stationcountry should be selected to give the necessary assistance to obtain contact with theland station in question. Alternatively, the international telephone position of theoutgoing country or network should contact the international telephone position in thecountry of network in which the desired land station is located for the necessaryassistance to obtain contact with the land station.

536 Maritime Manual

3.4.2 Setting-up

D38 3.4.2.1 The land station operator will establish a connection with the originatingtelephone subscriber either directly or with the assistance of his own internationaltelephone position.

D39 3.4.2.2 After the termination of the call, the land station shall pass the followinginformation to the international telephone position of the country of origin, where it isrecorded for charging and accounting purposes:a) the calling subscriber’s telephone number;b) the mobile station’s name and/or appropriate identification;c) the chargeable duration of the call;d) the land station charge to be collected.

D40 3.4.2.3 Alternatively all information regarding collection of charges should besubmitted to the caller’s ROA on a regular basis to be determined by the ROAsinvolved.

DIVISION E – RADIOTELEXOGRAM

1 General

1.1 Definition

E1 1.1.1 A radiotelexogram is a message sent by telex or telefax direct from anoriginator subscriber to a foreign land station for transmission to a mobile station or amessage sent from a mobile station to a land station for transmission directly to atelefax or telex subscriber (see Note in E5).

1.2 Provision of service

E2 1.2.1 Operating, charging and accounting procedures should be subject to abilateral agreement between the ROAs concerned. If such an agreement does not exist,the land station should refuse such radiotelexograms in the shore-to-ship direction.

E3 1.2.2 Alternatively, land stations may accept radiotelexograms from foreignoriginators provided that the calling subscriber supplies the name and address of aparty in the land station country that will take responsibility for the payment ofcharges.


E4 1.3.1 If it becomes obvious that the required mobile station is outside the coveragearea of the land station, the originator shall be informed as soon as possible in order tohave the radiotelexogram cancelled.


2 Operational proceduresE5 2.1 The transmission of radiotelexograms should be in accordance with

Divisions B and C or other ITU-T Recommendations as appropriate except asspecified below or where varied through bilateral agreement. NOTE – A radiotelexogram is different from a radiotelex or telefax call. Inparticular, a radiotelexogram is normally transmitted between the mobile station and the landstation as a radiotelegram by Morse telegraphy or by radiotelephony.

E6 2.2 Information to be supplied to the land station, as necessary, by theoriginator.

E7 2.2.1 Radiotelexogram to a mobile station:a) international telex number and/or answer-back code or the telefax number of the

calling subscriber;b) the date and time of origin;c) the word RADIOTELEXOGRAM;d) name or designation of the addressee with supplementary particulars if necessary;e) the name of the mobile station followed, when necessary, by its call sign/ship

station identity or where this is not known, the particulars of the passage made bythe mobile station;

f) any specific delivery instructions.

E8 2.2.2 Radiotelexogram from a mobile station:a) name and/or call sign/ship station identity of the mobile station;b) identification of the accounting authority;c) the date and time of origin;d) the word RADIOTELEXOGRAM;e) destination country and/or network;f) called subscriber’s telex number and answer-back code or telefax number.

Bibliography

[1] International Telecommunication Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1992.

[2] International Telecommunication Constitutions, ITU, Geneva, 1992.

[3] Radio Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1994.

[4] List of Coast Stations, ITU, Geneva, 1993.

[5] List of Ship Stations, ITU, Geneva, 1995.

[6] Instructions for the International telephone service, ITU, Geneva, 1993.

538 Maritime Manual


SHIP STATION IDENTIFICATION FOR VHF/UHF AND

MARITIME MOBILE-SATELLITE SERVICES

1 Introduction

1.1 The purpose of this Recommendation is to specify a method by which an internationallyunique ship station identification may be assigned to all the ships participating in the MaritimeMobile Services.

1.2 Terminology

The following terms are used in this Recommendation:

1.2.1 Maritime Mobile (Terrestrial) Service

F: service mobile maritime (de Terre)

S: servicio móvil marítimo (terrenal)

Conventional Maritime Mobile Services such as the HF Maritime Service, the MFMaritime Service and the VHF Maritime Service (as defined in the Radio Regulations [1]).

Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service

F: service mobile maritime par satellite

S: servicio móvil marítimo por satélite

As defined in the Radio Regulations [1].

1.2.2 coast station

F: station côtière

S: estación costera

A land station in the Maritime Mobile Service.


coast earth station

F: station terrienne côtière

S: estación terrena costera

An earth station in the Fixed-Satellite Service or, in some cases, in the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service, located at a specified fixed point on land to provide a feeder link for theMaritime Mobile-Satellite Service.

Note – In this Recommendation the term coast station is also intended to include, forsimplicity, coast earth station.

1.2.3 ship station identity

F: identité de la station de navire

S: identidad de estación de barco

The ship’s identification X1, X2 … Xk identifying the ship uniquely. The ship stationidentity may be transmitted on the radio path.

ship station number

F: numéro de station de navire

S: número de estación de barco

The number that identifies a ship for access from a public network and forms part of theinternational number to be dialled or keyed by a public network subscriber.

Note 1 – The formats of the ship station number are defined in other E and F SeriesRecommendations:

Recommendation E.215 for telephone and ISDN numbering in the MaritimeMobile-Satellite Service;

Recommendation F.125 for telex numbering in the Maritime Mobile-SatelliteService;

numbering plans for maritime mobile (terrestrial) systems are for further study.

Note 2 – In this Recommendation the term ship station is intended to also include, forsimplicity, ship earth station.

540 Maritime Manual

1.2.4 coast station identity

F: identité de la station côtière

S: identidad de estación costera

The coast station identification X1, X2 … Xk transmitted on the radio path.

Note – In this Recommendation the term coast station identity is intended to alsoinclude. for simplicity, coast earth station identity.

1.3 Basic considerations

The considerations that form the basis of this ship station identification system are:

a) that every ship shall have a unique ship station identity;

b) that the same unique ship station identity should be used in both VHF/UHF andMaritime Mobile-Satellite Systems;

c) that the same unique ship station identity should be used for all telecommunicationservices;

d) that it is desirable that the ship station number and the ship station identity arerelated in a simple and unambiguous manner;

e) that the capacity of the ship station identification system shall be sufficient to admitall ships wanting, or required, to participate in the various Maritime Mobile Servicesat present and in the foreseeable future;

f) that the ship identity system shall be a numerical system, and should use the fullrange of decimal digits;

g) that two or three of the digits, X1X2X3, of the ship station identity shall indicate theship's nationality.

2 Ship station identification

Ship station identity is established as nine digits.

X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9

The initial three digits define the nationality of the ship as indicated in the followingsections.

Since the whole or a part of the ship station identity is used in the ship station number,certain restrictions may be imposed on the allocation of ship station identities for the MaritimeMobile-Satellite Service. Such restrictions are identified in Recommendations E.215 and F.125.The use of the ship station identity in maritime mobile (terrestrial) systems is for further study.


3 Assignment of ship station identification

3.1 Assignment of blocks of numbers

Blocks of numbers should be assigned to countries so that individual Administrationsmay systematically assign ship station identities within those blocks.

3.2 Identification of ship’s geographical region

The first digit of each ship station identity is intended to identify the geographical regionto which the nationality (registry) of the ship relates. Only the digits 2 through 7 are used for thispurpose to identify easily the world's regions as follows:

2 – Europe

3 – North America

4 – Asia (except Southeast Asia)

5 – Oceania and Southeast Asia

6 – Africa

7 – South America.

Arrangements may therefore be made to systematically assign a ship station identity toeach ship as soon as national blocks are allocated. The digits zero (0), one (1), eight (8) and nine(9) are allocated for other purposes as indicated below.

The digits eight (8) and nine (9) are not used for identification of geographical regions.However, for maritime VHF/UHF systems, the digits 8 and 9 may be used to expand networkaccess as shown in § 8.2. The allocation of the first digit of the ship station identity issummarized in Table 1/F.120.

TABLE 1/F.120

Allocations of first digit (X1) in the ship station identity

First digit (X1) of ship station identity Use

0 Group call/coast station identity

1 Reserved for future expansion2 Europe3 North America4 Asia (except Southeast Asia)5 Oceania and Southeast Asia6 Africa7 South America8 See § 8.29 See § 8.2

542 Maritime Manual

3.3 Identification of ship’s nationality

Since blocks of the ship station identities would be systematically assigned by country, aship’s nationality can be determined by analysing the first three digits of its ship station identity.

The digits to be analysed are called Maritime Identification Digits (MID). Examples ofthe maritime identification digits for ships are given in Table 2/F.120.

TABLE 2/F.120

4 Assignment of maritime identification digits

Each MID represents a discrete capacity assigned according to a plan that relatesassigned capacity to ship population. A plan has been developed by the World AdministrativeRadio Conference for the Mobile Services (MOB-83) [2] and is contained in Appendix 43 to theRadio Regulations [1]. The Radio Regulations make provision for the allocation of additionalMIDs for a specific country when necessary.

5 Group calls

X1 = 0, X2 = 1 to 9 and X1 = 0, X2 = 0, X3 = 0, X4 = 0 to 9 are assigned to indicate agroup call to a group of ships having a community of interest. Such calls may be barred in thepublic switched network and/or at the coast stations. Control of group calls may also be achievedby the use of special group service access to the coast stations. The group call numberingscheme used in the INMARSAT system is given in Annex B to Recommendation E.215 and inAnnex B to Recommendation F.125.

Country Maritime identificationsdigits (MID)

Ship station identity

P 231from 231 000 000to 231 999 999

Q 233, 234from 233 000 000to 234 999 999

R 236, 237, 238from 236 000 000to 238 999 999

S 240 to 249from 240 000 000to 249 999 999


6 Coast station identity

X1 = 0, X2 = 0, X3 = 1 to 9 are assigned to indicate coast station identities in maritimemobile (terrestrial) systems.

7 Future expansion of the ship station identification system

X1 = 1 as in the format 1 XXXXXXXX has been reserved for future expansion.

Note – X1 = 1 is used in the INMARSAT standard A system for identification of shipearth stations (see Recommendations F.125 and E.215).

8 Considerations related to ship station identity assignment

8.1 The ship station identity, or part of it, will be included in the INMARSAT mobilenumber. The way in which this is done for INMARSAT mobile numbers is described inRecommendations E.215 and F.125.

The relationship between the nine-digit ship station identity and the part of it which isused in the ship station number is illustrated in Table 3/F.120. If the part of the identity used inthe number is shorter than nine digits, then the corresponding identity is obtained by addingtrailing zeros to form nine-digit ship station identities. This principle must be observed whenallocating ship station identities for ships in the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service (seeRecommendations E.215 and F.125).

TABLE 3/F.120

8.2 Numbering plans for the maritime mobile (terrestrial) services are for further study. Theprinciple of § 8.1 is likely to apply for these services also.

Part of ship station identityused in ship station number

Digits on theautomatic network

Ship stations identity Digits in the shipstation identity

MID X4X5X6 6 MID X4X5X6 000 9

MID X4X5X6X7 7 MID X4 X5X6X7 00 9

MID X4X5X6X7X8 8 MID X4X5X6X7X8 0 9

MID X4X5X6X7X8X9 9 MID X4X5X6X7X8X9 9

544 Maritime Manual

For maritime mobile (terrestrial) services, additional ship station numbering techniquesmay be used to expand network access to more ship stations on a regional and national basis asfollows:

Ship station number(or part thereof)

Ship station identity

8Y X4X5X6X7 MyIyDy X4X5X6X7 00

9 X4X5X6X7X8 MnInDn X4X5X6X7X8 0

In this arrangement, the digits 8Y may be 80 to 89 to define as many as ten foreignMIDs (shown as MyIyDy) to permit automatic calling of ships of particular nationalities. Thecoast station would be required to translate a given 8Y to a particular foreign MID. The digit 9may be used to indicate the maritime identification digits for ships of the same nationality as thenetwork and the coast station. The coast station would be required to translate 9 to one particularnational MID (shown as MnInDn).

References

[1] Radio Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1982, revised in 1985, 1986 and 1988.

[2] Final Acts of the World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services(MOB-83), ITU, Geneva, 1983.

_______________

Printed in SwitzerlandGeneva, 2011

ISBN 92-61-13701-6

Photo credits: Philip Plisson© ITU/K. Bogens

International Telecommunication UnionSales and Marketing Division

Place des NationsCH-1211 Geneva 20

Switzerland

[email protected] www.itu.int/publications


http://www.itu.int/publications

GMDSS manual VOLUME 2.pdf

Documents

Transcript of GMDSS manual VOLUME 2.pdf